Reform history

Regulation (EU) No 575/2013 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 June 2013 on prudential requirements for credit institutions and investment firms and amending Regulation (EU) No 648/2012 Text with EEA relevance

22 versions · 2013-06-26
2026-06-26
prudential requirements for credit institutions and investment firms an
2026-01-01
prudential requirements for credit institutions and investment firms an
2025-06-29
prudential requirements for credit institutions and investment firms an
2025-01-01
prudential requirements for credit institutions and investment firms an
2024-07-09
prudential requirements for credit institutions and investment firms an
2024-01-09
prudential requirements for credit institutions and investment firms an
2023-06-28
prudential requirements for credit institutions and investment firms an
2023-01-01
prudential requirements for credit institutions and investment firms an
2022-07-08
prudential requirements for credit institutions and investment firms an
2022-04-10
prudential requirements for credit institutions and investment firms an
2021-09-30
prudential requirements for credit institutions and investment firms an
2021-06-29
prudential requirements for credit institutions and investment firms an

Changes on 2021-06-29

@@ -4,9 +4,7 @@
of 26 June 2013
on prudential requirements for credit institutions and investment firms and amending Regulation (EU) No 648/2012
(Text with EEA relevance)
on prudential requirements for credit institutions and amending Regulation (EU) No 648/2012
## PART ONE
@@ -52,22 +50,23 @@
For the purposes of this Regulation, the following definitions shall apply:
(1) ‘credit institution’ means an undertaking the business of which is to take deposits or other repayable funds from the public and to grant credits for its own account;
(2) ‘investment firm’ means a person as defined in point (1) of Article 4(1) of Directive 2004/39/EC, which is subject to the requirements imposed by that Directive, excluding the following:
(a) credit institutions;
(b) local firms;
(c) firms which are not authorised to provide the ancillary service referred to in point (1) of Section B of Annex I to Directive 2004/39/EC, which provide only one or more of the investment services and activities listed in points 1, 2, 4 and 5 of Section A of Annex I to that Directive, and which are not permitted to hold money or securities belonging to their clients and which for that reason may not at any time place themselves in debt with those clients;
(3) ‘institution’ means a credit institution or an investment firm;
(4) ‘local firm’ means a firm dealing for its own account on markets in financial futures or options or other derivatives and on cash markets for the sole purpose of hedging positions on derivatives markets, or dealing for the accounts of other members of those markets and being guaranteed by clearing members of the same markets, where responsibility for ensuring the performance of contracts entered into by such a firm is assumed by clearing members of the same markets;
(5) ‘insurance undertaking’ means insurance undertaking as defined in point (1) of Article 13 of Directive 2009/138/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 25 November 2009 on the taking-up and pursuit of the business of Insurance and Reinsurance (Solvency II) (<sup>4</sup>);
(1) ‘credit institution’ means an undertaking the business of which consists of any of the following:
(a) to take deposits or other repayable funds from the public and to grant credits for its own account;
(b) to carry out any of the activities referred to in points (3) and (6) of Section A of Annex I to Directive 2014/65/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council (<sup>6</sup>), where one of the following applies, but the undertaking is not a commodity and emission allowance dealer, a collective investment undertaking or an insurance undertaking:
(i) the total value of the consolidated assets of the undertaking is equal to or exceeds EUR 30 billion;
(ii) the total value of the assets of the undertaking is less than EUR 30 billion, and the undertaking is part of a group in which the total value of the consolidated assets of all undertakings in that group that individually have total assets of less than EUR 30 billion and that carry out any of the activities referred to in points (3) and (6) of Section A of Annex I to Directive 2014/65/EU is equal to or exceeds EUR 30 billion; or
(iii) the total value of the assets of the undertaking is less than EUR 30 billion, and the undertaking is part of a group in which the total value of the consolidated assets of all undertakings in the group that carry out any of the activities referred to in points (3) and (6) of Section A of Annex I to Directive 2014/65/EU is equal to or exceeds EUR 30 billion, where the consolidating supervisor, in consultation with the supervisory college, so decides in order to address potential risks of circumvention and potential risks for the financial stability of the Union;
for the purposes of points (b)(ii) and (b)(iii), where the undertaking is part of a third‐country group, the total assets of each branch of the third‐country group authorised in the Union shall be included in the combined total value of the assets of all undertakings in the group;
(2) ‘investment firm’ means an investment firm as defined in point (1) of Article 4(1) of Directive 2014/65/EU which is authorised under that Directive but excludes credit institutions;
(3) ‘institution’ means a credit institution authorised under Article 8 of Directive 2013/36/EU or an undertaking as referred to in Article 8a(3) thereof;
(5) ‘insurance undertaking’ means insurance undertaking as defined in point (1) of Article 13 of Directive 2009/138/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 25 November 2009 on the taking-up and pursuit of the business of Insurance and Reinsurance (Solvency II) (<sup>7</sup>);
(6) ‘reinsurance undertaking’ means reinsurance undertaking as defined in point (4) of Article 13 of Directive 2009/138/EC;
(7) ‘collective investment undertaking’ or ‘CIU’ means a UCITS as defined in Article 1(2) of Directive 2009/65/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council (<sup>5</sup>) or an alternative investment fund (AIF) as defined in point (a) of Article 4(1) of Directive 2011/61/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council (<sup>6</sup>);
(7) ‘collective investment undertaking’ or ‘CIU’ means a UCITS as defined in Article 1(2) of Directive 2009/65/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council (<sup>8</sup>) or an alternative investment fund (AIF) as defined in point (a) of Article 4(1) of Directive 2011/61/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council (<sup>9</sup>);
(8) ‘public sector entity’ means a non-commercial administrative body responsible to central governments, regional governments or local authorities, or to authorities that exercise the same responsibilities as regional governments and local authorities, or a non-commercial undertaking that is owned by or set up and sponsored by central governments, regional governments or local authorities, and that has explicit guarantee arrangements, and may include self-administered bodies governed by law that are under public supervision;
@@ -79,7 +78,7 @@
(12) ‘model risk’ means model risk as defined in point (11) of Article 3(1) of Directive 2013/36/EU;
(13) ‘originator’ means an originator as defined in point (3) of Article 2 of Regulation (EU) 2017/2402 (<sup>7</sup>);
(13) ‘originator’ means an originator as defined in point (3) of Article 2 of Regulation (EU) 2017/2402 (<sup>10</sup>);
(14) ‘sponsor’ means a sponsor as defined in point (5) of Article 2 of Regulation (EU) 2017/2402;
@@ -115,7 +114,7 @@
(b) it is authorised in a third country;
(c) it is subject to and complies with prudential rules considered by the competent authorities at least as stringent as those laid down in this Regulation or in Directive 2013/36/EU;
(26) ‘financial institution’ means an undertaking other than an institution and other than a pure industrial holding company, the principal activity of which is to acquire holdings or to pursue one or more of the activities listed in points 2 to 12 and point 15 of Annex I to Directive 2013/36/EU, including a financial holding company, a mixed financial holding company, a payment institution as defined in point (4) of Article 4 of Directive (EU) 2015/2366 of the European Parliament and of the Council (<sup>8</sup>), and an asset management company, but excluding insurance holding companies and mixed-activity insurance holding companies as defined, respectively, in points (f) and (g) of Article 212(1) of Directive 2009/138/EC;
(26) ‘financial institution’ means an undertaking other than an institution and other than a pure industrial holding company, the principal activity of which is to acquire holdings or to pursue one or more of the activities listed in points 2 to 12 and point 15 of Annex I to Directive 2013/36/EU, including an investment firm, a financial holding company, a mixed financial holding company, an investment holding company, a payment institution within the meaning of Directive (EU) 2015/2366 of the European Parliament and of the Council (<sup>11</sup>), and an asset management company, but excluding insurance holding companies and mixed‐activity insurance holding companies as defined in points (f) and (g) of Article 212(1) of Directive 2009/138/EC;
(27) ‘financial sector entity’ means any of the following:
(a) an institution;
@@ -133,9 +132,9 @@
(29) ‘EU parent institution’ means a parent institution in a Member State which is not a subsidiary of another institution authorised in any Member State, or of a financial holding company or mixed financial holding company set up in any Member State;
(29a) ‘parent investment firm in a Member State’ means a parent institution in a Member State that is an investment firm;
(29b) ‘EU parent investment firm’ means an EU parent institution that is an investment firm;
(29a) ‘parent investment firm in a Member State’ means a parent undertaking in a Member State that is an investment firm;
(29b) ‘EU parent investment firm’ means an EU parent undertaking that is an investment firm;
(29c) ‘parent credit institution in a Member State’ means a parent institution in a Member State that is a credit institution;
@@ -151,7 +150,7 @@
(34) ‘central counterparty’ or ‘CCP’ means a CCP as defined in point (1) of Article 2 of Regulation (EU) No 648/2012;
(35) ‘participation’ means participation within the meaning of the first sentence of Article 17 of Fourth Council Directive 78/660/EEC of 25 July 1978 on the annual accounts of certain types of companies (<sup>9</sup>), or the ownership, direct or indirect, of 20 % or more of the voting rights or capital of an undertaking;
(35) ‘participation’ means participation within the meaning of the first sentence of Article 17 of Fourth Council Directive 78/660/EEC of 25 July 1978 on the annual accounts of certain types of companies (<sup>12</sup>), or the ownership, direct or indirect, of 20 % or more of the voting rights or capital of an undertaking;
(36) ‘qualifying holding’ means a direct or indirect holding in an undertaking which represents 10 % or more of the capital or of the voting rights or which makes it possible to exercise a significant influence over the management of that undertaking;
@@ -196,7 +195,7 @@
(e) a cash instrument.
The instruments referred to in points (a), (b) and (c) are only financial instruments if their value is derived from the price of an underlying financial instrument or another underlying item, a rate, or an index;
(51) ‘initial capital’ means the amount and types of own funds specified in Article 12 of Directive 2013/36/EU for credit institutions and in Title IV of that Directive for investment firms;
(51) ‘initial capital’ means the amounts and types of own funds specified in Article 12 of Directive 2013/36/EU;
(52) ‘operational risk’ means the risk of loss resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes, people and systems or from external events, and includes legal risk;
@@ -214,7 +213,7 @@
(59) ‘unfunded credit protection’ means a technique of credit risk mitigation where the reduction of the credit risk on the exposure of an institution derives from the obligation of a third party to pay an amount in the event of the default of the borrower or the occurrence of other specified credit events;
(60) ‘cash assimilated instrument’ means a certificate of deposit, a bond, including a covered bond, or any other non-subordinated instrument, which has been issued by an institution, for which the institution has already received full payment and which shall be unconditionally reimbursed by the institution at its nominal value;
(60) ‘cash assimilated instrument’ means a certificate of deposit, a bond, including a covered bond, or any other non‐subordinated instrument, which has been issued by an institution or an investment firm, for which the institution or investment firm has already received full payment and which is to be unconditionally reimbursed by the institution or investment firm at its nominal value;
(61) ‘securitisation’ means a securitisation as defined in point (1) of Article 2 of Regulation (EU) 2017/2402;
@@ -245,7 +244,7 @@
(ii) Tier 2 capital as referred to in Article 71 that is equal to or less than one third of Tier 1 capital;
(72) ‘recognised exchange’ means an exchange which meets all of the following conditions:
(a) it is a regulated market or a third-country market that is considered to be equivalent to a regulated market in accordance with the procedure set out in point (a) of Article 25(4) of Directive 2014/65/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council (<sup>10</sup>);
(a) it is a regulated market or a third‐country market that is considered to be equivalent to a regulated market in accordance with the procedure set out in point (a) of Article 25(4) of Directive 2014/65/EU;
(b) it has a clearing mechanism whereby contracts listed in Annex II are subject to daily margin requirements which, in the opinion of the competent authorities, provide appropriate protection;
(73) ‘discretionary pension benefits’ means enhanced pension benefits granted on a discretionary basis by an institution to an employee as part of that employee's variable remuneration package, which do not include accrued benefits granted to an employee under the terms of the company pension scheme;
@@ -301,7 +300,7 @@
(97) ‘reference obligation’ means an obligation used for the purposes of determining the cash settlement value of a credit derivative;
(98) ‘external credit assessment institution’ or ‘ECAI’ means a credit rating agency that is registered or certified in accordance with Regulation (EC) No 1060/2009 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 16 September 2009 on credit rating agencies (<sup>11</sup>) or a central bank issuing credit ratings which are exempt from the application of Regulation (EC) No 1060/2009;
(98) ‘external credit assessment institution’ or ‘ECAI’ means a credit rating agency that is registered or certified in accordance with Regulation (EC) No 1060/2009 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 16 September 2009 on credit rating agencies (<sup>13</sup>) or a central bank issuing credit ratings which are exempt from the application of Regulation (EC) No 1060/2009;
(99) ‘nominated ECAI’ means an ECAI nominated by an institution;
@@ -393,7 +392,7 @@
(137) ‘bail-in tool’ means a bail-in tool as defined in point (57) of Article 2(1) of Directive 2014/59/EU;
(138) ‘group’ means a group of undertakings of which at least one is an institution and which consists of a parent undertaking and its subsidiaries, or of undertakings that are related to each other as set out in Article 22 of Directive 2013/34/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council (<sup>12</sup>);
(138) ‘group’ means a group of undertakings of which at least one is an institution and which consists of a parent undertaking and its subsidiaries, or of undertakings that are related to each other as set out in Article 22 of Directive 2013/34/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council (<sup>14</sup>);
(139) ‘securities financing transaction’ means a repurchase transaction, a securities or commodities lending or borrowing transaction, or a margin lending transaction;
@@ -428,7 +427,9 @@
(148) ‘non-listed institution’ means an institution that has not issued securities that are admitted to trading on a regulated market of any Member State, within the meaning of point (21) of Article 4(1) of Directive 2014/65/EU;
(149) ‘financial report’ means, for the purposes of Part Eight, a financial report within the meaning of Articles 4 and 5 of Directive 2004/109/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council (<sup>13</sup>).
(149) ‘financial report’ means, for the purposes of Part Eight, a financial report within the meaning of Articles 4 and 5 of Directive 2004/109/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council (<sup>15</sup>);
(150) ‘commodity and emission allowance dealer’ means an undertaking the main business of which consists exclusively of the provision of investment services or activities in relation to commodity derivatives or commodity derivative contracts referred to in points (5), (6), (7), (9) and (10), derivatives of emission allowances referred to in point (4), or emission allowances referred to in point (11) of Section C of Annex I to Directive 2014/65/EU.
EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 28 June 2020.
@@ -466,6 +467,20 @@
(c) they are not the subsidiaries of an EU parent institution.
By way of derogation from the first subparagraph of this paragraph, the institutions referred to in paragraph 1a of this Article shall comply with Article 437a and point (h) of Article 447 on an individual basis.
Institutions shall comply with the obligations laid down in Part Six and in point (d) of Article 430(1) of this Regulation on an individual basis.
The following institutions shall not be required to comply with Article 413(1) and the associated liquidity reporting requirements laid down in Part Seven A of this Regulation:
(a) institutions which are also authorised in accordance with Article 14 of Regulation (EU) No 648/2012;
(b) institutions which are also authorised in accordance with Article 16 and point (a) of Article 54(2) of Regulation (EU) No 909/2014 of the European Parliament and of the Council (<sup>16</sup>), provided that they do not perform any significant maturity transformations; and
(c) institutions which are designated in accordance with point (b) of Article 54(2) of Regulation (EU) No 909/2014, provided that:
(i) their activities are limited to offering banking‐type services, as referred to in Section C of the Annex to that Regulation, to central securities depositories authorised in accordance with Article 16 of that Regulation; and
(ii) they do not perform any significant maturity transformations.
#### Article 7
##### Derogation from the application of prudential requirements on an individual basis
@@ -496,7 +511,7 @@
(a) the parent institution on a consolidated basis or a subsidiary institution on a sub-consolidated basis complies with the obligations laid down in Part Six;
(b) the parent institution on a consolidated basis or the subsidiary institution on a sub-consolidated basis monitors and has oversight at all times over the liquidity positions of all institutions within the group or sub-group, that are subject to the waiver and ensures a sufficient level of liquidity for all of these institutions;
(b) the parent institution on a consolidated basis or the subsidiary institution on a sub-consolidated basis monitors and has oversight at all times over the liquidity positions of all institutions within the group or sub-group, that are subject to the waiver, monitors and has oversight at all times over the funding positions of all institutions within the group or sub-group where the net stable funding ratio (NSFR) requirement set out in Title IV of Part Six is waived, and ensures a sufficient level of liquidity, and of stable funding where the NSFR requirement set out in Title IV of Part Six is waived, for all of those institutions;
(c) the institutions have entered into contracts that, to the satisfaction of the competent authorities, provide for the free movement of funds between them to enable them to meet their individual and joint obligations as they become due;
@@ -508,9 +523,9 @@
(a) their assessment of the compliance of the organisation and of the treatment of liquidity risk with the conditions set out in Article 86 of Directive 2013/36/EU across the single liquidity sub-group;
(b) the distribution of amounts, location and ownership of the required liquid assets to be held within the single liquidity sub-group;
(c) the determination of minimum amounts of liquid assets to be held by institutions for which the application of Part Six will be waived;
(b) the distribution of amounts, location and ownership of the required liquid assets to be held within the single liquidity sub-group, where the liquidity coverage ratio (LCR) requirement as laid down in the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1) is waived, and the distribution of amounts and location of available stable funding within the single liquidity sub-group, where the NSFR requirement set out in Title IV of Part Six is waived;
(c) the determination of minimum amounts of liquid assets to be held by institutions for which the application of the LCR requirement as laid down in the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1) is waived and the determination of minimum amounts of available stable funding to be held by institutions for which the application of the NSFR requirement set out in Title IV of Part Six is waived;
(d) the need for stricter parameters than those set out in Part Six;
@@ -526,7 +541,7 @@
##### Waiver for credit institutions permanently affiliated to a central body
Competent authorities may, in accordance with national law, partially or fully waive the application of the requirements set out in Parts Two to Eight to one or more credit institutions situated in the same Member State and which are permanently affiliated to a central body which supervises them and which is established in the same Member State, if the following conditions are met:
Competent authorities may, in accordance with national law, partially or fully waive the application of the requirements set out in Parts Two to Eight of this Regulation and Chapter 2 of Regulation (EU) 2017/2402 to one or more credit institutions situated in the same Member State and which are permanently affiliated to a central body which supervises them and which is established in the same Member State, if the following conditions are met:
(a) the commitments of the central body and affiliated institutions are joint and several liabilities or the commitments of its affiliated institutions are entirely guaranteed by the central body;
@@ -544,6 +559,12 @@
### Application of requirements on a consolidated basis
#### Article 10a
##### Application of prudential requirements on a consolidated basis where investment firms are parent undertakings
For the purposes of the application of this Chapter, investment firms shall be considered to be parent financial holding companies in a Member State or Union parent financial holding companies where such investment firms are parent undertakings of an institution or of an investment firm subject to this Regulation that is referred to in Article 1(2) or (5) of Regulation (EU) 2019/2033.
#### Article 11
##### General treatment
@@ -560,7 +581,9 @@
Only EU parent undertakings that are a material subsidiary of a non-EU G-SII and are not resolution entities shall comply with Article 92b of this Regulation on a consolidated basis to the extent and in the manner set out in Article 18 of this Regulation. Where Article 21b(2) of Directive 2013/36/EU applies, the two intermediate EU parent undertakings jointly identified as a material subsidiary shall each comply with Article 92b of this Regulation on the basis of their consolidated situation.
Where a waiver has been granted under Article 8(1) to (5), the institutions and, where applicable, the financial holding companies or mixed financial holding companies that are part of a liquidity sub-group shall comply with Part Six and point (d) of Article 430(1) on a consolidated basis or on the sub-consolidated basis of the liquidity sub-group.
EU parent institutions shall comply with Part Six and point (d) of Article 430(1) of this Regulation on the basis of their consolidated situation where the group comprises one or more credit institutions or investment firms that are authorised to provide the investment services and activities listed in points (3) and (6) of Section A of Annex I to Directive 2014/65/EU.
Where a waiver has been granted under Article 8(1) to (5), the institutions and, where applicable, the financial holding companies or mixed financial holding companies that are part of a liquidity sub‐group shall comply with Part Six and point (d) of Article 430(1) of this Regulation on a consolidated basis or on the sub‐consolidated basis of the liquidity sub‐group.
The application of the approach set out in the first subparagraph shall be without prejudice to effective supervision on a consolidated basis and shall neither entail disproportionate adverse effects on the whole or parts of the financial system in other Member States or in the Union as a whole nor form or create an obstacle to the functioning of the internal market.
@@ -586,36 +609,6 @@
##### Application of requirements of Article 5 of Regulation (EU) 2017/2402 on a consolidated basis
#### Article 15
##### Derogation from the application of own funds requirements on a consolidated basis for groups of investment firms
The consolidating supervisor may waive, on a case-by-case basis, the application of Part Three of this Regulation and Title VII, Chapter 4 of Directive 2013/36/EU on a consolidated basis provided that the following conditions exist:
(a) each EU investment firm in the group uses the alternative calculation of total risk exposure amount referred to in Article 95(2) or 96(2);
(b) all investment firms in the group fall within the categories in Article 95(1) or 96(1);
(c) each EU investment firm in the group meets the requirements imposed in Article 95 or 96 on an individual basis and at the same time deducts from its Common Equity Tier 1 items any contingent liability in favour of investment firms, financial institutions, asset management companies and ancillary services undertakings, which would otherwise be consolidated;
(d) any financial holding company which is the parent financial holding company in a Member State of any investment firm in the group holds at least enough capital, defined here as the sum of the items referred to in Articles 26(1), 51(1) and 62(1), to cover the sum of the following:
(i) the sum of the full book value of any holdings, subordinated claims and instruments referred to in Article 36(1)(h) and (i), Article 56(1)(c) and (d), and Article 66(1)(c) and (d) in investment firms, financial institutions, asset management companies and ancillary services undertakings which would otherwise be consolidated; and
(ii) the total amount of any contingent liability in favour of investment firms, financial institutions, asset management companies and ancillary services undertakings which would otherwise be consolidated;
(e) the group does not include credit institutions.
Where the criteria in the first subparagraph are met, each EU investment firm shall have in place systems to monitor and control the sources of capital and funding of all financial holding companies, investment firms, financial institutions, asset management companies and ancillary services undertakings within the group.
#### Article 16
##### Derogation from the application of the leverage ratio requirements on a consolidated basis for groups of investment firms
Where all entities in a group of investment firms, including the parent entity, are investment firms that are exempt from the application of the requirements laid down in Part Seven on an individual basis in accordance with Article 6(5), the parent investment firm may choose not to apply the requirements laid down in Part Seven on a consolidated basis.
#### Article 17
##### Supervision of investment firms waived from the application of own funds requirements on a consolidated basis
## Section 2
### Methods for prudential consolidation
@@ -732,11 +725,9 @@
The joint decision referred to in paragraph 1 and the decisions referred to in the second subparagraph of this paragraph shall be binding.
#### Article 22
##### Sub-consolidation in cases of entities in third countries
Subsidiary institutions shall apply the requirements laid down in Articles 89 to 91 and Parts Three and Four on the basis of their sub-consolidated situation if those institutions, or the parent undertaking where it is a financial holding company or mixed financial holding company, have an institution or a financial institution as a subsidiary in a third country, or hold a participation in such an undertaking.
#### Article 22
##### Sub-consolidation in case of entities in third countries
#### Article 23
@@ -1051,7 +1042,7 @@
(a) losses for the current financial year;
(b) intangible assets;
(b) intangible assets with the exception of prudently valued software assets the value of which is not negatively affected by resolution, insolvency or liquidation of the institution;
(c) deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability;
@@ -1078,13 +1069,15 @@
(l) any tax charge relating to Common Equity Tier 1 items foreseeable at the moment of its calculation, except where the institution suitably adjusts the amount of Common Equity Tier 1 items insofar as such tax charges reduce the amount up to which those items may be used to cover risks or losses;
(m) the applicable amount of insufficient coverage for non-performing exposures.
(m) the applicable amount of insufficient coverage for non-performing exposures;
(n) for a minimum value commitment referred to in Article 132c(2), any amount by which the current market value of the units or shares in CIUs underlying the minimum value commitment falls short of the present value of the minimum value commitment and for which the institution has not already recognised a reduction of Common Equity Tier 1 items.
EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 28 July 2013.
Power is delegated to the Commission to adopt the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
EBA shall develop draft regulatory technical standards to specify the types of capital instruments of financial institutions and, in consultation with the European Supervisory Authority (European Insurance and Occupational Pensions Authority) (EIOPA) established by Regulation (EU) No 1094/2010 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 24 November 2010 (<sup>14</sup>), of third country insurance and reinsurance undertakings, and of undertakings excluded from the scope of Directive 2009/138/EC in accordance with Article 4 of that Directive that shall be deducted from the following elements of own funds:
EBA shall develop draft regulatory technical standards to specify the types of capital instruments of financial institutions and, in consultation with the European Supervisory Authority (European Insurance and Occupational Pensions Authority) (EIOPA) established by Regulation (EU) No 1094/2010 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 24 November 2010 (<sup>17</sup>), of third country insurance and reinsurance undertakings, and of undertakings excluded from the scope of Directive 2009/138/EC in accordance with Article 4 of that Directive that shall be deducted from the following elements of own funds:
(a) Common Equity Tier 1 items;
@@ -1965,7 +1958,7 @@
(b) sight deposits and short term deposits with an original maturity of less than one year;
(c) the part of eligible deposits from natural persons and micro, small and medium-sized enterprises which exceeds the coverage level referred to in Article 6 of Directive 2014/49/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council (<sup>16</sup>);
(c) the part of eligible deposits from natural persons and micro, small and medium-sized enterprises which exceeds the coverage level referred to in Article 6 of Directive 2014/49/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council (<sup>19</sup>);
(d) deposits that would be eligible deposits from natural persons, micro, small and medium–sized enterprises if they were not made through branches located outside the Union of institutions established in the Union;
@@ -1978,7 +1971,7 @@
(h) liabilities to institutions, excluding liabilities to entities that are part of the same group, with an original maturity of less than seven days;
(i) liabilities with a remaining maturity of less than seven days, owed to:
(i) systems or system operators designated in accordance with Directive 98/26/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council (<sup>17</sup>);
(i) systems or system operators designated in accordance with Directive 98/26/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council (<sup>20</sup>);
(ii) participants in a system designated in accordance with Directive 98/26/EC and arising from the participation in such a system; or
(iii) third-country CCPs recognised in accordance with Article 25 of Regulation (EU) No 648/2012;
@@ -2399,8 +2392,10 @@
(a) the subsidiary is one of the following:
(i) an institution;
(ii) an undertaking that is subject by virtue of applicable national law to the requirements of this Regulation and Directive 2013/36/EU;
(iii) an intermediate financial holding company in a third country that is subject to prudential requirements as stringent as those applied to credit institutions of that third country and where the Commission has decided in accordance with Article 107(4) that those prudential requirements are at least equivalent to those of this Regulation;
(ii) an undertaking that is subject by virtue of applicable national law to the requirements of this Regulation and of Directive 2013/36/EU;
(iii) an intermediate financial holding company or intermediate mixed financial holding company that is subject to the requirements of this Regulation on a sub‐consolidated basis, or an intermediate investment holding company that is subject to the requirements of Regulation (EU) 2019/2033 on a consolidated basis;
(iv) an investment firm;
(v) an intermediate financial holding company in a third country, provided that that intermediate financial holding company is subject to prudential requirements as stringent as those applied to credit institutions of that third country and provided that the Commission has adopted a decision in accordance with Article 107(4) determining that those prudential requirements are at least equivalent to those of this Regulation;
(b) the subsidiary is included fully in the consolidation pursuant to Chapter 2 of Title II of Part One;
@@ -2412,10 +2407,12 @@
Qualifying Additional Tier 1, Tier 1, Tier 2 capital and qualifying own funds shall comprise the minority interest, Additional Tier 1 or Tier 2 instruments, as applicable, plus the related retained earnings and share premium accounts, of a subsidiary where the following conditions are met:
(a) the subsidiary is either of the following:
(a) the subsidiary is one of the following:
(i) an institution;
(ii) an undertaking that is subject by virtue of the applicable national law to the requirements of this Regulation and Directive 2013/36/EU;
(iii) an intermediate financial holding company in a third country that is subject to prudential requirements as stringent as those applied to credit institutions of that third country and where the Commission has decided in accordance with Article 107(4) that those prudential requirements are at least equivalent to those of this Regulation;
(ii) an undertaking that is subject by virtue of applicable national law to the requirements of this Regulation and of Directive 2013/36/EU;
(iii) an intermediate financial holding company or intermediate mixed financial holding company that is subject to the requirements of this Regulation on a sub‐consolidated basis, or an intermediate investment holding company that is subject to the requirements of Regulation (EU) 2019/2033 on a consolidated basis;
(iv) an investment firm;
(v) an intermediate financial holding company in a third country, provided that that intermediate financial holding company is subject to prudential requirements as stringent as those applied to credit institutions of that third country and provided that the Commission has adopted a decision in accordance with Article 107(4) determining that those prudential requirements are at least equivalent to those of this Regulation;
(b) the subsidiary is included fully in the scope of consolidation pursuant to Chapter 2 of Title II of Part One;
@@ -2445,13 +2442,15 @@
##### Minority interests included in consolidated Common Equity Tier 1 capital
Institutions shall determine the amount of minority interests of a subsidiary that is included in consolidated Common Equity Tier 1 capital by subtracting from the minority interests of that undertaking the result of multiplying the amount referred to in point (a) by the percentage referred to in point (b):
Institutions shall determine the amount of minority interests of a subsidiary that is included in consolidated Common Equity Tier 1 capital by subtracting from the minority interests of that undertaking the result of multiplying the amount referred to in point (a) by the percentage referred to in point (b) as follows:
(a) the Common Equity Tier 1 capital of the subsidiary minus the lower of the following:
(i) the amount of Common Equity Tier 1 capital of that subsidiary required to meet the sum of the requirement laid down in point (a) of Article 92(1), the requirements referred to in Articles 458 and 459, the specific own funds requirements referred to in Article 104 of Directive 2013/36/EU the combined buffer requirement defined in point (6) of Article 128 of Directive 2013/36/EU, the requirements referred to in Article 500 and any additional local supervisory regulations in third countries insofar as those requirements are to be met by Common Equity Tier 1 capital;
(ii) the amount of consolidated Common Equity Tier 1 capital that relates to that subsidiary that is required on a consolidated basis to meet the sum of the requirement laid down in point (a) of Article 92(1), the requirements referred to in Articles 458 and 459, the specific own funds requirements referred to in Article 104 of Directive 2013/36/EU, the combined buffer requirement defined in point (6) of Article 128 of Directive 2013/36/EU, the requirements referred to in Article 500 and any additional local supervisory regulations in third countries insofar as those requirements are to be met by Common Equity Tier 1 capital.
(b) the minority interests of the subsidiary expressed as a percentage of all Common Equity Tier 1 instruments of that undertaking plus the related share premium accounts, retained earnings and other reserves.
(i) the amount of Common Equity Tier 1 capital of that subsidiary required to meet the following:
— the sum of the requirement laid down in point (a) of Article 92(1) of this Regulation, the requirements referred to in Articles 458 and 459 of this Regulation, the specific own funds requirements referred to in Article 104 of Directive 2013/36/EU, the combined buffer requirement defined in point (6) of Article 128 of that Directive, and any additional local supervisory regulations in third countries insofar as those requirements are to be met by Common Equity Tier 1 capital,
— where the subsidiary is an investment firm, the sum of the requirement laid down in Article 11 of Regulation (EU) 2019/2033, the specific own funds requirements referred to in point (a) of Article 39(2) of Directive (EU) 2019/2034 and any additional local supervisory regulations in third countries, insofar as those requirements are to be met by Common Equity Tier 1 capital;
(ii) the amount of consolidated Common Equity Tier 1 capital that relates to that subsidiary that is required on a consolidated basis to meet the sum of the requirement laid down in point (a) of Article 92(1) of this Regulation, the requirements referred to in Articles 458 and 459 of this Regulation, the specific own funds requirements referred to in Article 104 of Directive 2013/36/EU, the combined buffer requirement defined in point (6) of Article 128 of that Directive, and any additional local supervisory regulations in third countries insofar as those requirements are to be met by Common Equity Tier 1 capital;
(b) the minority interests of the subsidiary expressed as a percentage of all Common Equity Tier 1 items of that undertaking.
An institution may choose not to undertake this calculation for a subsidiary referred to in Article 81(1). Where an institution takes such a decision, the minority interest of that subsidiary may not be included in consolidated Common Equity Tier 1 capital.
@@ -2475,13 +2474,15 @@
##### Qualifying Tier 1 instruments included in consolidated Tier 1 capital
Institutions shall determine the amount of qualifying Tier 1 capital of a subsidiary that is included in consolidated own funds by subtracting from the qualifying Tier 1 capital of that undertaking the result of multiplying the amount referred to in point (a) by the percentage referred to in point (b):
Institutions shall determine the amount of qualifying Tier 1 capital of a subsidiary that is included in consolidated own funds by subtracting from the qualifying Tier 1 capital of that undertaking the result of multiplying the amount referred to in point (a) by the percentage referred to in point (b) as follows:
(a) the Tier 1 capital of the subsidiary minus the lower of the following:
(i) the amount of Tier 1 capital of the subsidiary required to meet the sum of the requirement laid down in point (b) of Article 92(1), the requirements referred to in Articles 458 and 459, the specific own funds requirements referred to in Article 104 of Directive 2013/36/EU, the combined buffer requirement defined in point (6) of Article 128 of Directive 2013/36/EU, the requirements referred to in Article 500 and any additional local supervisory regulations in third countries insofar as those requirements are to be met by Tier 1 Capital;
(ii) the amount of consolidated Tier 1 capital that relates to the subsidiary that is required on a consolidated basis to meet the sum of the requirement laid down in point (b) of Article 92(1), the requirements referred to in Articles 458 and 459, the specific own funds requirements referred to in Article 104 of Directive 2013/36/EU, the combined buffer requirement defined in point (6) of Article 128 of Directive 2013/36/EU, the requirements referred to in Article 500 and any additional local supervisory regulations in third countries insofar as those requirements are to be met by Tier 1 Capital;
(b) the qualifying Tier 1 capital of the subsidiary expressed as a percentage of all Tier 1 instruments of that undertaking plus the related share premium accounts, retained earnings and other reserves.
(i) the amount of Tier 1 capital of the subsidiary required to meet the following:
— the sum of the requirement laid down in point (b) of Article 92(1) of this Regulation, the requirements referred to in Articles 458 and 459 of this Regulation, the specific own funds requirements referred to in Article 104 of Directive 2013/36/EU, the combined buffer requirement defined in point (6) of Article 128 of that Directive, and any additional local supervisory regulations in third countries insofar as those requirements are to be met by Tier 1 Capital,
— where the subsidiary is an investment firm, the sum of the requirement laid down in Article 11 of Regulation (EU) 2019/2033, the specific own funds requirements referred to in point (a) of Article 39(2) of Directive (EU) 2019/2034, and any additional local supervisory regulations in third countries insofar as those requirements are to be met by Tier 1 capital;
(ii) the amount of consolidated Tier 1 capital that relates to the subsidiary that is required on a consolidated basis to meet the sum of the requirement laid down in point (b) of Article 92(1) of this Regulation, the requirements referred to in Articles 458 and 459 of this Regulation, the specific own funds requirements referred to in Article 104 of Directive 2013/36/EU, the combined buffer requirement defined in point (6) of Article 128 of that Directive, and any additional local supervisory regulations in third countries insofar as those requirements are to be met by Tier 1 Capital;
(b) the qualifying Tier 1 capital of the subsidiary expressed as a percentage of all Common Equity Tier 1 and Additional Tier 1 items of that undertaking.
An institution may choose not to undertake this calculation for a subsidiary referred to in Article 81(1). Where an institution takes such a decision, the qualifying Tier 1 capital of that subsidiary may not be included in consolidated Tier 1 capital.
@@ -2495,13 +2496,15 @@
##### Qualifying own funds included in consolidated own funds
Institutions shall determine the amount of qualifying own funds of a subsidiary that is included in consolidated own funds by subtracting from the qualifying own funds of that undertaking the result of multiplying the amount referred to in point (a) by the percentage referred to in point (b):
Institutions shall determine the amount of qualifying own funds of a subsidiary that is included in consolidated own funds by subtracting from the qualifying own funds of that undertaking the result of multiplying the amount referred to in point (a) by the percentage referred to in point (b) as follows:
(a) the own funds of the subsidiary minus the lower of the following:
(i) the amount of own funds of the subsidiary required to meet the sum of the requirement laid down in point (c) of Article 92(1), the requirements referred to in Articles 458 and 459, the specific own funds requirements referred to in Article 104 of Directive 2013/36/EU, the combined buffer requirement defined in point (6) of Article 128 of Directive 2013/36/EU, the requirements referred to in Article 500 and any additional local supervisory regulations in third countries;
(ii) the amount of own funds that relates to the subsidiary that is required on a consolidated basis to meet the sum of the requirement laid down in point (c) of Article 92(1), the requirements referred to in Articles 458 and 459, the specific own funds requirements referred to in Article 104 of Directive 2013/36/EU, the combined buffer requirement defined in point (6) of Article 128 of Directive 2013/36/EU, the requirements referred to in Article 500 and any additional local supervisory own funds requirement in third countries;
(b) the qualifying own funds of the undertaking, expressed as a percentage of all own funds instruments of the subsidiary that are included in Common Equity Tier 1, Additional Tier 1 and Tier 2 items and the related share premium accounts, the retained earnings and other reserves.
(i) the amount of own funds of the subsidiary required to meet the following:
— the sum of the requirement laid down in point (c) of Article 92(1) of this Regulation, the requirements referred to in Articles 458 and 459 of this Regulation, the specific own funds requirements referred to in Article 104 of Directive 2013/36/EU, the combined buffer requirement defined in point (6) of Article 128 of that Directive, and any additional local supervisory regulations in third countries,
— where the subsidiary is an investment firm, the sum of the requirement laid down in Article 11 of Regulation (EU) 2019/2033, the specific own funds requirements referred to in point (a) of Article 39(2) of Directive (EU) 2019/2034, and any additional local supervisory regulations in third countries;
(ii) the amount of own funds that relates to the subsidiary that is required on a consolidated basis to meet the sum of the requirement laid down in point (c) of Article 92(1) of this Regulation, the requirements referred to in Articles 458 and 459 of this Regulation, the specific own funds requirements referred to in Article 104 of Directive 2013/36/EU, the combined buffer requirement defined in point (6) of Article 128 of that Directive, and any additional local supervisory own funds requirement in third countries;
(b) the qualifying own funds of the undertaking, expressed as a percentage of the sum of all the Common Equity Tier 1 items, Additional Tier 1 items and Tier 2 items, excluding the amounts referred to in points (c) and (d) of Article 62, of that undertaking.
An institution may choose not to undertake this calculation for a subsidiary referred to in Article 81(1). Where an institution takes such a decision, the qualifying own funds of that subsidiary may not be included in consolidated own funds.
@@ -2510,6 +2513,20 @@
##### Qualifying own funds instruments included in consolidated Tier 2 capital
Without prejudice to Article 84(5) or (6), institutions shall determine the amount of qualifying own funds of a subsidiary that is included in consolidated Tier 2 capital by subtracting from the qualifying own funds of that undertaking that are included in consolidated own funds the qualifying Tier 1 capital of that undertaking that is included in consolidated Tier 1 capital.
#### Article 88a
##### Qualifying eligible liabilities instruments
Liabilities issued by a subsidiary established in the Union that belongs to the same resolution group as the resolution entity shall qualify for inclusion in the consolidated eligible liabilities instruments of an institution subject to Article 92a, provided that all the following conditions are met:
(a) they are issued in accordance with point (a) of Article 45f(2) of Directive 2014/59/EU;
(b) they are bought by an existing shareholder that is not part of the same resolution group as long as the exercise of the write-down or conversion powers in accordance with Articles 59 to 62 of Directive 2014/59/EU does not affect the control of the subsidiary by the resolution entity;
(c) they do not exceed the amount determined by subtracting the amount referred to in point (i) from the amount referred to in point (ii):
(i) the sum of the liabilities issued to and bought by the resolution entity either directly or indirectly through other entities in the same resolution group and the amount of own funds instruments issued in accordance with point (b) of Article 45f(2) of Directive 2014/59/EU;
(ii) the amount required in accordance with Article 45f(1) of Directive 2014/59/EU.
## TITLE III
@@ -2592,7 +2609,9 @@
(b) a Tier 1 capital ratio of 6 %;
(c) a total capital ratio of 8 %.
(c) a total capital ratio of 8 %;
(d) a leverage ratio of 3 %.
Institutions shall calculate their capital ratios as follows:
@@ -2606,14 +2625,13 @@
(a) the risk-weighted exposure amounts for credit risk and dilution risk, calculated in accordance with Title II and Article 379, in respect of all the business activities of an institution, excluding risk-weighted exposure amounts from the trading book business of the institution;
(b) the own funds requirements, determined in accordance with Title IV of this Part or Part Four, as applicable, for the trading-book business of an institution, for the following:
(i) position risk;
(ii) large exposures exceeding the limits specified in Articles 395 to 401, to the extent an institution is permitted to exceed those limits;
(c) the own funds requirements determined in accordance with Title IV or Title V with the exception of Article 379, as applicable, for the following:
(i) foreign-exchange risk;
(ii) settlement risk;
(iii) commodities risk;
(b) the own funds requirements for the trading-book business of an institution for the following:
(i) market risk as determined in accordance with Title IV of this Part, excluding the approaches set out in Chapters 1a and 1b of that Title;
(ii) large exposures exceeding the limits specified in Articles 395 to 401, to the extent that an institution is permitted to exceed those limits, as determined in accordance with Part Four;
(c) the own funds requirements for market risk as determined in Title IV of this Part, excluding the approaches set out in Chapters 1a and 1b of that Title, for all business activities that are subject to foreign exchange risk or commodity risk;
(ca) the own funds requirements calculated in accordance with Title V of this Part, with the exception of Article 379 for settlement risk;
(d) the own funds requirements calculated in accordance with Title VI for credit valuation adjustment risk of OTC derivative instruments other than credit derivatives recognised to reduce risk-weighted exposure amounts for credit risk;
@@ -2663,21 +2681,37 @@
##### Initial capital requirement on going concern
#### Article 94
#### Article 94
##### Derogation for small trading book business
Institutions may replace the capital requirement referred to in point (b) of Article 92(3) by a capital requirement calculated in accordance with point (a) of that paragraph in respect of their trading-book business, provided that the size of their on- and off-balance sheet trading-book business meets both the following conditions:
(a) it is normally less than 5 % of the total assets and EUR 15 million;
(b) it never exceeds 6 % of total assets and EUR 20 million.
In calculating the size of on- and off-balance sheet business, institutions shall apply the following:
(a) debt instruments shall be valued at their market prices or their nominal values, equities at their market prices and derivatives according to the nominal or market values of the instruments underlying them;
(b) the absolute value of long positions shall be summed with the absolute value of short positions.
By way of derogation from point (b) of Article 92(3), institutions may calculate the own funds requirement for their trading-book business in accordance with paragraph 2 of this Article, provided that the size of the institutions' on- and off-balance-sheet trading-book business is equal to or less than both of the following thresholds on the basis of an assessment carried out on a monthly basis using the data as of the last day of the month:
(a) 5 % of the institution's total assets;
(b) EUR 50 million.
Where both conditions set out in points (a) and (b) of paragraph 1 are met, institutions may calculate the own funds requirement for their trading-book business as follows:
(a) for the contracts listed in point 1 of Annex II, contracts relating to equities which are referred to in point 3 of that Annex and credit derivatives, institutions may exempt those positions from the own funds requirement referred to in point (b) of Article 92(3);
(b) for trading book positions other than those referred to in point (a) of this paragraph, institutions may replace the own funds requirement referred to in point (b) of Article 92(3) with the requirement calculated in accordance with point (a) of Article 92(3).
Institutions shall calculate the size of their on- and off-balance-sheet trading book business on the basis of data as of the last day of each month for the purposes of paragraph 1 in accordance with the following requirements:
(a) all the positions assigned to the trading book in accordance with Article 104 shall be included in the calculation except for the following:
(i) positions concerning foreign exchange and commodities;
(ii) positions in credit derivatives that are recognised as internal hedges against non-trading book credit risk exposures or counterparty risk exposures and the credit derivate transactions that perfectly offset the market risk of those internal hedges as referred to in Article 106(3);
(b) all positions included in the calculation in accordance with point (a) shall be valued at their market value on that given date; where the market value of a position is not available on a given date, institutions shall take a fair value for the position on that date; where the market value and fair value of a position are not available on a given date, institutions shall take the most recent of the market value or fair value for that position;
(c) the absolute value of long positions shall be summed with the absolute value of short positions.
An institution shall cease to calculate the own funds requirements of its trading-book business in accordance with paragraph 2 within three months of one of the following occurring:
(a) the institution does not meet the conditions set out in point (a) or (b) of paragraph 1 for three consecutive months;
(b) the institution does not meet the conditions set out in point (a) or (b) of paragraph 1 during more than 6 out of the last 12 months.
## Section 2
@@ -2749,62 +2783,6 @@
(b) it shall use own funds calculated on the basis of the consolidated situation of the parent investment firm or that of the financial holding company or mixed financial holding company, as applicable, and in compliance with Chapter 2 of Title II of Part One.
## CHAPTER 2
### Calculation and reporting requirements
#### Article 99
##### Reporting on own funds requirements and financial information
The reporting requirements shall be proportionate to the nature, scale and complexity of the activities of the institutions.
EBA shall submit those draft implementing technical standards to the Commission by 28 July 2013.
Power is conferred on the Commission to adopt the implementing technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Article 15 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
EBA shall develop draft implementing technical standards to specify the formats to be used by institutions to which the competent authorities may extend the reporting requirements in accordance with the first subparagraph.
EBA shall submit those draft implementing technical standards to the Commission by 28 July 2013.
Power is conferred on the Commission to adopt the implementing technical standards referred to in the second subparagraph in accordance with Article 15 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
#### Article 100
##### Additional reporting requirements
Institutions shall report to the competent authorities the level, at least in aggregate terms, of their repurchase agreements, securities lending and all forms of encumbrance of assets.
EBA shall include this information in the implementing technical standards on reporting referred to in Article 99(5).
#### Article 101
##### Specific reporting obligations
Institutions shall report on a semi-annual basis the following data to the competent authorities for each national immovable property market to which they are exposed:
(a) losses stemming from exposures for which an institution has recognised residential property as collateral, up to the lower of the pledged amount and 80 % of the market value or 80 % of the mortgage lending value unless otherwise decided under Article 124(2);
(b) overall losses stemming from exposures for which an institution has recognised residential property as collateral, up to the part of the exposure treated as fully secured by residential property in accordance with Article 124(1);
(c) the exposure value of all outstanding exposures for which an institution has recognised residential property as collateral limited to the part treated as fully secured by residential property in accordance with Article 124(1);
(d) losses stemming from exposures for which an institution has recognised immovable commercial property as collateral, up to the lower of the pledged amount and 50 % of the market value or 60 % of the mortgage lending value unless otherwise decided under Article 124(2);
(e) overall losses stemming from exposures for which an institution has recognised immovable commercial property as collateral, up to the part of the exposure treated as fully secured by immovable commercial property in accordance with Article 124(1).
(f) the exposure value of all outstanding exposures for which an institution has recognised immovable commercial property as collateral limited to the part treated as fully secured by immovable commercial property in accordance with Article 124(1).
EBA shall develop draft implementing technical standards to specify the following:
(a) uniform formats, definitions, frequencies and dates of reporting, as well as the IT solutions, of the items referred to in paragraph 1;
(b) uniform formats, definitions, frequencies and dates of reporting, as well as IT solutions, of the aggregate data referred to in paragraph 2.
EBA shall submit those draft implementing technical standards to the Commission by 28 July 2013.
Power is conferred on the Commission to adopt the implementing technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Article 15 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
## CHAPTER 3
### Trading book
@@ -2813,31 +2791,13 @@
##### Requirements for the trading book
#### Article 103
#### Article 103
##### Management of the trading book
In managing its positions or sets of positions in the trading book the institution shall comply with all of the following requirements:
(a) the institution shall have in place a clearly documented trading strategy for the position/instrument or portfolios, approved by senior management, which shall include the expected holding period;
(b) the institution shall have in place clearly defined policies and procedures for the active management of positions entered into on a trading desk. Those policies and procedures shall include the following:
(i) which positions may be entered into by which trading desk;
(ii) position limits are set and monitored for appropriateness;
(iii) dealers have the autonomy to enter into and manage the position within agreed limits and according to the approved strategy;
(iv) positions are reported to senior management as an integral part of the institution's risk management process;
(v) positions are actively monitored with reference to market information sources and an assessment made of the marketability or hedgeability of the position or its component risks, including the assessment, the quality and availability of market inputs to the valuation process, level of market turnover, sizes of positions traded in the market;
(vi) active anti-fraud procedures and controls.
(c) the institution shall have in place clearly defined policies and procedures to monitor the positions against the institution's trading strategy including the monitoring of turnover and positions for which the originally intended holding period has been exceeded.
#### Article 104
##### Inclusion in the trading book
Institutions shall have in place clearly defined policies and procedures for the overall management of the trading book. These policies and procedures shall at least address:
(a) the activities the institution considers to be trading and as constituting part of the trading book for own funds requirement purposes;
Institutions shall have in place clearly defined policies and procedures for the overall management of the trading book. Those policies and procedures shall at least address:
(a) the activities which the institution considers to be trading business and as constituting part of the trading book for own funds requirement purposes;
(b) the extent to which a position can be marked-to-market daily by reference to an active, liquid two-way market;
@@ -2852,7 +2812,25 @@
(f) the extent to which the institution can, and is required to, actively manage the risks of positions within its trading operation;
(g) the extent to which the institution may transfer risk or positions between the non-trading and trading books and the criteria for such transfers.
(g) the extent to which the institution may reclassify risk or positions between the non-trading and trading books and the requirements for such reclassifications as referred to in Article 104a.
In managing its positions or portfolios of positions in the trading book, the institution shall comply with all the following requirements:
(a) the institution shall have in place a clearly documented trading strategy for the position or portfolios in the trading book, which shall be approved by senior management and include the expected holding period;
(b) the institution shall have in place clearly defined policies and procedures for the active management of positions or portfolios in the trading book; those policies and procedures shall include the following:
(i) which positions or portfolios of positions may be entered into by each trading desk or, as the case may be, by designated dealers;
(ii) the setting of position limits and monitoring them for appropriateness;
(iii) ensuring that dealers have the autonomy to enter into and manage the position within agreed limits and according to the approved strategy;
(iv) ensuring that positions are reported to senior management as an integral part of the institution's risk management process;
(v) ensuring that positions are actively monitored with reference to market information sources and an assessment is made of the marketability or hedgeability of the position or its component risks, including the assessment, the quality and availability of market inputs to the valuation process, level of market turnover, sizes of positions traded in the market;
(vi) active anti-fraud procedures and controls;
(c) the institution shall have in place clearly defined policies and procedures to monitor the positions against the institution's trading strategy, including the monitoring of turnover and positions for which the originally intended holding period has been exceeded.
#### Article 104
##### Inclusion in the trading book
#### Article 104b
@@ -2898,11 +2876,11 @@
(g) institutions' models shall be subject to periodic review to determine the accuracy of their performance, which shall include assessing the continued appropriateness of assumptions, analysis of profit and loss versus risk factors, and comparison of actual close out values to model outputs.
For the purposes of point (d), the model shall be developed or approved independently of the trading desk and shall be independently tested, including validation of the mathematics, assumptions and software implementation.
For the purposes of point (d) of the first subparagraph, the model shall be developed or approved independently of the trading desks and shall be independently tested, including validation of the mathematics, assumptions and software implementation.
Institutions shall establish and maintain procedures for calculating an adjustment to the current valuation of any less liquid positions, which can in particular arise from market events or institution-related situations such as concentrated positions and/or positions for which the originally intended holding period has been exceeded. Institutions shall, where necessary, make such adjustments in addition to any changes to the value of the position required for financial reporting purposes and shall design such adjustments to reflect the illiquidity of the position. Under those procedures, institutions shall consider several factors when determining whether a valuation adjustment is necessary for less liquid positions. Those factors include the following:
(a) the amount of time it would take to hedge out the position or the risks within the position;
(a) the additional amount of time it would take to hedge out the position or the risks within the position beyond the liquidity horizons that have been assigned to the risk factors of the position in accordance with Article 325bd;
(b) the volatility and average of bid/offer spreads;
@@ -3204,9 +3182,13 @@
Exposure to an institution in the form of minimum reserves required by the ECB or by the central bank of a Member State to be held by an institution may be risk-weighted as exposures to the central bank of the Member State in question provided:
(a) the reserves are held in accordance with Regulation (EC) No 1745/2003 of the European Central Bank of 12 September 2003 on the application of minimum reserves (<sup>19</sup>) or in accordance with national requirements in all material respects equivalent to that Regulation;
(a) the reserves are held in accordance with Regulation (EC) No 1745/2003 of the European Central Bank of 12 September 2003 on the application of minimum reserves (<sup>21</sup>) or in accordance with national requirements in all material respects equivalent to that Regulation;
(b) in the event of the bankruptcy or insolvency of the institution where the reserves are held, the reserves are fully repaid to the institution in a timely manner and are not made available to meet other liabilities of the institution.
Exposures to financial institutions authorised and supervised by the competent authorities and subject to prudential requirements comparable to those applied to institutions in terms of robustness shall be treated as exposures to institutions.
For the purposes of this paragraph, the prudential requirements laid down in Regulation (EU) 2019/2033 shall be considered to be comparable to those applied to institutions in terms of robustness.
#### Article 120
@@ -3382,15 +3364,13 @@
##### Items associated with particular high risk
Exposures with particularly high risks shall include any of the following exposures:
(a) investments in venture capital firms;
(b) investments in AIFs as defined in Article 4(1)(a) of Directive 2011/61/EU except where the mandate of the fund does not allow a leverage higher than that required under Article 51(3) of Directive 2009/65/EC;
(c) investments in private equity;
(d) speculative immovable property financing.
For the purposes of this Article, institutions shall treat any of the following exposures as exposures associated with particularly high risks:
(a) investments in venture capital firms, except where those investments are treated in accordance with Article 132;
(b) investments in private equity, except where those investments are treated in accordance with Article 132;
(c) speculative immovable property financing.
When assessing whether an exposure other than exposures referred to in paragraph 2 is associated with particularly high risks, institutions shall take into account the following risk characteristics:
@@ -3473,45 +3453,114 @@
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| Risk weight | 20 % | 50 % | 100 % | 150 % | 150 % | 150 % |
#### Article 132
##### Exposures in the form of units or shares in CIUs
Exposures in the form of units or shares in CIUs for which a credit assessment by a nominated ECAI is available shall be assigned a risk weight in accordance with Table 8 which corresponds to the credit assessment of the ECAI in accordance with Article 136.
| Credit quality step | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| Risk weight | 20 % | 50 % | 100 % | 100 % | 150 % | 150 % |
Institutions may determine the risk weight for a CIU in accordance with paragraphs 4 and 5, if the following eligibility criteria are met:
(a) the CIU is managed by a company that is subject to supervision in a Member State or, in the case of third country CIU, where the following conditions are met:
(i) the CIU is managed by a company which is subject to supervision that is considered equivalent to that laid down in Union law;
(ii) cooperation between competent authorities is sufficiently ensured;
#### Article 132
##### Own funds requirements for exposures in the form of units or shares in CIUs
Subject to Article 132b(2), institutions that do not apply the look-through approach or the mandate-based approach shall assign a risk weight of 1 250  % (‘fall-back approach’) to their exposures in the form of units or shares in a CIU.
Institutions may calculate the risk-weighted exposure amount for their exposures in the form of units or shares in a CIU by using a combination of the approaches referred to in this paragraph, provided that the conditions for using those approaches are met.
Institutions may determine the risk-weighted exposure amount of a CIU's exposures in accordance with the approaches set out in Article 132a where all the following conditions are met:
(a) the CIU is one of the following:
(i) an undertaking for collective investment in transferable securities (UCITS), governed by Directive 2009/65/EC;
(ii) an AIF managed by an EU AIFM registered under Article 3(3) of Directive 2011/61/EU;
(iii) an AIF managed by an EU AIFM authorised under Article 6 of Directive 2011/61/EU;
(iv) an AIF managed by a non-EU AIFM authorised under Article 37 of Directive 2011/61/EU;
(v) a non-EU AIF managed by a non-EU AIFM and marketed in accordance with Article 42 of Directive 2011/61/EU;
(vi) a non-EU AIF not marketed in the Union and managed by a non-EU AIFM established in a third country that is covered by a delegated act referred to in Article 67(6) of Directive 2011/61/EU;
(b) the CIU's prospectus or equivalent document includes the following:
(i) the categories of assets in which the CIU is authorised to invest;
(ii) if investment limits apply, the relative limits and the methodologies to calculate them;
(c) the business of the CIU is reported on at least an annual basis to enable an assessment to be made of the assets and liabilities, income and operations over the reporting period.
For the purposes of point (a), the Commission may adopt, by way of implementing acts, and subject to the examination procedure referred to in Article 464(2), a decision as to whether a third country applies supervisory and regulatory arrangements at least equivalent to those applied in the Union. In the absence of such a decision, until 1 January 2015, institutions may continue to apply the treatment set out in this paragraph to exposures in the form of units or shares of CIUs from third countries where the relevant competent authorities had approved the third country as eligible for that treatment before 1 January 2014.
Institutions may rely on the following third parties to calculate and report, in accordance with the methods set out in paragraphs 4 and 5, a risk weight for the CIU:
(a) the depository institution or the depository financial institution of the CIU provided that the CIU exclusively invests in securities and deposits all securities at that depository institution or the financial institution;
(b) for CIUs not covered by point (a), the CIU management company, provided that the CIU management company meets the criteria set out in paragraph 3(a).
The correctness of the calculation referred to in the first subparagraph shall be confirmed by an external auditor.
(ii) where investment limits apply, the relative limits and the methodologies to calculate them;
(c) reporting by the CIU or the CIU management company to the institution complies with the following requirements:
(i) the exposures of the CIU are reported at least as frequently as those of the institution;
(ii) the granularity of the financial information is sufficient to allow the institution to calculate the CIU's risk -weighted exposure amount in accordance with the approach chosen by the institution;
(iii) where the institution applies the look-through approach, information about the underlying exposures is verified by an independent third party.
By way of derogation from point (a) of the first subparagraph of this paragraph, multilateral and bilateral development banks and other institutions that co-invest in a CIU with multilateral or bilateral development banks may determine the risk-weighted exposure amount of that CIU's exposures in accordance with the approaches set out in Article 132a, provided that the conditions set out in points (b) and (c) of the first subparagraph of this paragraph are met and that the CIU's investment mandate limits the types of assets that the CIU can invest in to assets that promote sustainable development in developing countries.
Institutions shall notify their competent authority of the CIUs to which they apply the treatment referred to in the second subparagraph.
By way of derogation from point (c)(i) of the first subparagraph, where the institution determines the risk-weighted exposure amount of a CIU's exposures in accordance with the mandate-based approach, the reporting by the CIU or the CIU management company to the institution may be limited to the investment mandate of the CIU and any changes thereof and may be done only when the institution incurs the exposure to the CIU for the first time and when there is a change in the investment mandate of the CIU.
Institutions that do not have adequate data or information to calculate the risk-weighted exposure amount of a CIU's exposures in accordance with the approaches set out in Article 132a may rely on the calculations of a third party, provided that all the following conditions are met:
(a) the third party is one of the following:
(i) the depository institution or the depository financial institution of the CIU, provided that the CIU exclusively invests in securities and deposits all securities at that depository institution or depository financial institution;
(ii) for CIUs not covered by point (i) of this point, the CIU management company, provided that the company meets the condition set out in point (a) of paragraph 3;
(b) the third party carries out the calculation in accordance with the approaches set out in Article 132a(1), (2) or (3), as applicable;
(c) an external auditor has confirmed the correctness of the third party's calculation.
Institutions that rely on third-party calculations shall multiply the risk-weighted exposure amount of a CIU's exposures resulting from those calculations by a factor of 1,2.
By way of derogation from the second subparagraph, where the institution has unrestricted access to the detailed calculations carried out by the third party, the factor of 1,2 shall not apply. The institution shall provide those calculations to its competent authority upon request.
(a) the institutions measure the value of their holdings of units or shares in a CIU at historical cost but measure the value of the underlying assets of the CIU at fair value if they apply the look-through approach;
(b) a change in the market value of the units or shares for which institutions measure the value at historical cost changes neither the amount of own funds of those institutions nor the exposure value associated with those holdings.
#### Article 132a
##### Approaches for calculating risk-weighted exposure amounts of CIUs
Institutions shall carry out the calculations referred to in the first subparagraph under the assumption that the CIU first incurs exposures to the maximum extent allowed under its mandate or relevant law in the exposures attracting the highest own funds requirement and then continues incurring exposures in descending order until the maximum total exposure limit is reached, and that the CIU applies leverage to the maximum extent allowed under its mandate or relevant law, where applicable.
Institutions shall carry out the calculations referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with the methods set out in this Chapter, in Chapter 5, and in Section 3, 4 or 5 of Chapter 6 of this Title.
By way of derogation from the first subparagraph, an institution may exclude from the calculation of the own funds requirement for credit valuation adjustment risk derivative exposures which would not be subject to that requirement if they were incurred directly by the institution.
EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 28 March 2020.
Power is delegated to the Commission to supplement this Regulation by adopting the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
#### Article 132b
##### Exclusions from the approaches for calculating risk-weighted exposure amounts of CIUs
#### Article 132c
##### Treatment of off-balance-sheet exposures to CIUs
Institutions shall calculate the risk-weighted exposure amount for their off-balance-sheet items with the potential to be converted into exposures in the form of units or shares in a CIU by multiplying the exposure values of those exposures calculated in accordance with Article 111, with the following risk weight:
(a) for all exposures for which institutions use one of the approaches set out in Article 132a:
where:
=
the risk weight;
i =
the index denoting the CIU:
RWAEi
=
the amount calculated in accordance with Article 132a for a CIUi;
=
the exposure value of the exposures of CIUi;
Ai
=
the accounting value of assets of CIUi; and
EQi
=
the accounting value of the equity of CIUi.
Institutions shall calculate the risk-weighted exposure amount for off-balance-sheet exposures arising from minimum value commitments that meet all the conditions set out in paragraph 3 of this Article by multiplying the exposure value of those exposures by a conversion factor of 20 % and the risk weight derived under Article 132 or 152.
Institutions shall determine the risk-weighted exposure amount for off-balance-sheet exposures arising from minimum value commitments in accordance with paragraph 2 where all the following conditions are met:
(a) the off-balance-sheet exposure of the institution is a minimum value commitment for an investment into units or shares of one or more CIUs under which the institution is only obliged to pay out under the minimum value commitment where the market value of the underlying exposures of the CIU or CIUs is below a predetermined threshold at one or more points in time, as specified in the contract;
(b) the CIU is any of the following:
(i) a UCITS as defined in Directive 2009/65/EC; or
(ii) an AIF as defined in point (a) of Article 4(1) of Directive 2011/61/EU which solely invests in transferable securities or in other liquid financial assets referred to in Article 50(1) of Directive 2009/65/EC, where the mandate of the AIF does not allow a leverage higher than that allowed under Article 51(3) of Directive 2009/65/EC;
(c) the current market value of the underlying exposures of the CIU underlying the minimum value commitment without considering the effect of the off-balance-sheet minimum value commitments covers or exceeds the present value of the threshold specified in the minimum value commitment;
(d) when the excess of the market value of the underlying exposures of the CIU or CIUs over the present value of the minimum value commitment declines, the institution, or another undertaking in so far as it is covered by the supervision on a consolidated basis to which the institution itself is subject in accordance with this Regulation and Directive 2013/36/EU or Directive 2002/87/EC, can influence the composition of the underlying exposures of the CIU or CIUs or limit the potential for a further reduction of the excess in other ways;
(e) the ultimate direct or indirect beneficiary of the minimum value commitment is typically a retail client as defined in point (11) of Article 4(1) of Directive 2014/65/EU.;
#### Article 133
@@ -3703,7 +3752,7 @@
(f) the institution has validated each rating system and each internal models approach for equity exposures during an appropriate time period prior to the permission to use this rating system or internal models approach to equity exposures, has assessed during this time period whether the rating system or internal models approaches for equity exposures are suited to the range of application of the rating system or internal models approach for equity exposures, and has made necessary changes to these rating systems or internal models approaches for equity exposures following from its assessment;
(g) the institution has calculated under the IRB Approach the own funds requirements resulting from its risk parameters estimates and is able to submit the reporting as required by Article 99;
(g) the institution has calculated under the IRB Approach the own funds requirements resulting from its risk parameters estimates and is able to submit the reporting as required by Article 430;
(h) the institution has assigned and continues with assigning each exposure in the range of application of a rating system to a rating grade or pool of this rating system; the institution has assigned and continues with assigning each exposure in the range of application of an approach for equity exposures to this internal models approach.
@@ -3869,35 +3918,37 @@
##### Treatment by exposure class
#### Article 152
#### Article 152
##### Treatment of exposures in the form of units or shares in CIUs
Where an underlying exposure of the CIU is itself another exposure in the form of units or shares in another CIU, the first institution shall also look through to the underlying exposures of the other CIU.
Where the institution does not meet the conditions for using the methods set out in this Chapter for all or parts of the underlying exposures of the CIU, risk-weighted exposure amounts and expected loss amounts shall be calculated in accordance with the following approaches:
(a) for exposures belonging to the ‘equity’ exposure class referred to in Article 147(2)(e), institutions shall apply the simple risk-weight approach set out in Article 155(2);
(b) for all other underlying exposures referred to in paragraph 1, institutions shall apply the Standardised Approach laid down in Chapter 2, subject to the following:
(i) for exposures subject to a specific risk weight for unrated exposures or subject to the credit quality step yielding the highest risk weight for a given exposure class, the risk weight shall be multiplied by a factor of two but shall not be higher than 1 250  %;
(ii) for all other exposures, the risk weight shall be multiplied by a factor of 1,1 and shall be subject to a minimum of 5 %.
Where, for the purposes of point (a), the institution is unable to differentiate between private equity, exchange-traded and other equity exposures, it shall treat the exposures concerned as other equity exposures. Where those exposures, taken together with the institution's direct exposures in that exposure class, are not material within the meaning of Article 150(2), Article 150(1) may be applied subject to the permission of the competent authorities.
Where the institution is unable to differentiate between private equity, exchange-traded and other equity exposures, it shall treat the exposures concerned as other equity exposures. It shall assign non equity exposures to the other equity class.
Alternatively to the method described in paragraph 3, institutions may calculate themselves or may rely on the following third parties to calculate and report the average risk-weighted exposure amounts based on the CIU's underlying exposures in accordance with the approaches referred to in points (a) and (b) of paragraph 2 for the following:
(a) the depository institution or financial institution of the CIU provided that the CIU exclusively invests in securities and deposits all securities at this depository institution or financial institution;
(b) for other CIUs, the CIU management company, provided that the CIU management company meets the criteria set out in Article 132(3)(a).
The correctness of the calculation shall be confirmed by an external auditor.
EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 30 June 2014.
Power is delegated to the Commission to adopt the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
By way of derogation from the first subparagraph, an institution may exclude from the calculation of the own funds requirement for credit valuation adjustment risk derivative exposures which would not be subject to that requirement if they were incurred directly by the institution.
Institutions that apply the look-through approach in accordance with paragraphs 2 and 3 of this Article and that meet the conditions for permanent partial use in accordance with Article 150, or that do not meet the conditions for using the methods set out in this Chapter or one or more of the methods set out in Chapter 5 for all or parts of the underlying exposures of the CIU, shall calculate risk-weighted exposure amounts and expected loss amounts in accordance with the following principles:
(a) for exposures assigned to the equity exposure class referred to in point (e) of Article 147(2), institutions shall apply the simple risk-weight approach set out in Article 155(2);
(b) for exposures assigned to the items representing securitisation positions referred to in point (f) of Article 147(2), institutions shall apply the treatment set out in Article 254 as if those exposures were directly held by those institutions;
(c) for all other underlying exposures, institutions shall apply the Standardised Approach laid down in Chapter 2 of this Title.
For the purposes of point (a) of the first subparagraph, where the institution is unable to differentiate between private equity exposures, exchange-traded exposures and other equity exposures, it shall treat the exposures concerned as other equity exposures.
Institutions that do not have adequate data or information to calculate the risk-weighted amount of a CIU in accordance with the approaches set out in paragraphs 2, 3, 4 and 5 may rely on the calculations of a third party, provided that all the following conditions are met:
(a) the third party is one of the following:
(i) the depository institution or the depository financial institution of the CIU, provided that the CIU exclusively invests in securities and deposits all securities at that depository institution or depository financial institution;
(ii) for CIUs not covered by point (i) of this point, the CIU management company, provided that the CIU management company meets the criteria set out in point (a) of Article 132(3);
(b) for exposures other than those listed in points (a), (b) and (c) of paragraph 4 of this Article, the third party carries out the calculation in accordance with the look-through approach set out in Article 132a(1);
(c) for exposures listed in points (a), (b) and (c) of paragraph 4, the third party carries out the calculation in accordance with the approaches set out therein;
(d) an external auditor has confirmed the correctness of the third party's calculation.
Institutions that rely on third-party calculations shall multiply the risk weighted exposure amounts of a CIU's exposures resulting from those calculations by a factor of 1,2.
By way of derogation from the second subparagraph, where the institution has unrestricted access to the detailed calculations carried out by the third party, the 1,2 factor shall not apply. The institution shall provide those calculations to its competent authority upon request.
## Sub-Section 2
@@ -4218,7 +4269,7 @@
In addition, for qualifying short-term exposures which are not part of the institution's ongoing financing of the obligor, M shall be at least one-day. Qualifying short term exposures shall include the following:
(a) exposures to institutions arising from settlement of foreign exchange obligations;
(a) exposures to institutions or investment firms arising from the settlement of foreign exchange obligations;
(b) self-liquidating short-term trade finance transactions connected to the exchange of goods or services with a residual maturity of up to one year as referred to in point (80) of Article 4(1);
@@ -4967,7 +5018,7 @@
(b) debt securities issued by central governments or central banks, which securities have a credit assessment by an ECAI or export credit agency recognised as eligible for the purposes of Chapter 2 which has been determined by EBA to be associated with credit quality step 4 or above under the rules for the risk weighting of exposures to central governments and central banks under Chapter 2;
(c) debt securities issued by institutions, which securities have a credit assessment by an ECAI which has been determined by EBA to be associated with credit quality step 3 or above under the rules for the risk weighting of exposures to institutions under Chapter 2;
(c) debt securities issued by institutions or investment firms, which securities have a credit assessment by an ECAI which has been determined by EBA to be associated with credit quality step 3 or above under the rules for the risk weighting of exposures to institutions under Chapter 2;
(d) debt securities issued by other entities which securities have a credit assessment by an ECAI which has been determined by EBA to be associated with credit quality step 3 or above under the rules for the risk weighting of exposures to corporates under Chapter 2;
@@ -4997,7 +5048,7 @@
(c) debt securities issued by multilateral development banks other than those to which a 0 % risk weight is assigned under Article 117(2).
An institution may use debt securities that are issued by other institutions and that do not have a credit assessment by an ECAI as eligible collateral where those debt securities fulfil all the following criteria:
An institution may use debt securities that are issued by other institutions or investment firms and that do not have a credit assessment by an ECAI as eligible collateral where those debt securities fulfil all the following criteria:
(a) they are listed on a recognised exchange;
@@ -5119,7 +5170,7 @@
(b) life insurance policies pledged to the lending institution;
(c) instruments issued by third party institutions which will be repurchased by that institution on request.
(c) instruments issued by a third‐party institution or by an investment firm which are to be repurchased by that institution or by that investment firm on request.
## Sub-Section 2
@@ -5147,7 +5198,7 @@
(i) those other corporate entities have a credit assessment by an ECAI;
(ii) in the case of institutions calculating risk-weighted exposure amounts and expected loss amounts under the IRB Approach, those other corporate entities do not have a credit assessment by a recognised ECAI and are internally rated by the institution;
(h) central counterparties.
(h) qualifying central counterparties.
Competent authorities shall publish and maintain the list of those financial institutions that are eligible providers of unfunded credit protection under point (f) of paragraph 1, or the guiding criteria for identifying such eligible providers of unfunded credit protection, together with a description of the applicable prudential requirements, and share their list with other competent authorities in accordance with Article 117 of Directive 2013/36/EU.
@@ -5155,7 +5206,7 @@
##### Eligibility of protection providers under the IRB Approach which qualify for the treatment set out in Article 153(3)
An institution may use institutions, insurance and reinsurance undertakings and export credit agencies as eligible providers of unfunded credit protection which qualify for the treatment set out in Article 153(3) where they meet all the following conditions:
An institution may use institutions, investment firms, insurance and reinsurance undertakings and export credit agencies as eligible providers of unfunded credit protection which qualify for the treatment set out in Article 153(3) where they meet all the following conditions:
(a) they have sufficient expertise in providing unfunded credit protection;
@@ -5669,9 +5720,7 @@
where:
In the case of OTC derivative transactions institutions shall calculate EVA as follows:
.
In the case of OTC derivative transactions, institutions using the method laid down in Section 6 of Chapter 6 shall calculate EVA as follows:
For the purpose of calculating E in paragraph 3, the following shall apply:
@@ -5682,6 +5731,8 @@
Institutions shall calculate the fully adjusted value of the exposure (E*), taking into account both volatility and the risk-mitigating effects of collateral as follows:
where:
In the case of OTC derivative transactions, institutions using the methods laid down in Sections 3, 4 and 5 of Chapter 6 shall take into account the risk-mitigating effects of collateral in accordance with the provisions laid down in Sections 3, 4 and 5 of Chapter 6, as applicable.
An institution may choose to use the Supervisory Volatility Adjustments Approach or the Own Estimates Approach independently of the choice it has made between the Standardised Approach and the IRB Approach for the calculation of risk-weighted exposure amounts.
@@ -5832,6 +5883,8 @@
(b) institutions;
(ba) investment firms;
(c) other financial undertakings within the meaning of points (25)(b) and (d) of Article 13 of Directive 2009/138/EC exposures to which are assigned a 20 % risk weight under the Standardised Approach or which, in the case of institutions calculating risk-weighted exposure amounts and expected loss amounts under the IRB Approach, do not have a credit assessment by a recognised ECAI and are internally rated by the institution;
(d) regulated CIUs that are subject to capital or leverage requirements;
@@ -6060,7 +6113,9 @@
(18) ‘mezzanine securitisation position’ means a position in the securitisation which is subordinated to the senior securitisation position and more senior than the first loss tranche, and which is subject to a risk weight lower than 1 250  % and higher than 25 % in accordance with Subsections 2 and 3 of Section 3;
(19) ‘promotional entity’ means any undertaking or entity established by a Member State’s central, regional or local government, which grants promotional loans or grants promotional guarantees, whose primary goal is not to make profit or maximise market share but to promote that government’s public policy objectives, provided that, subject to State aid rules, that government has an obligation to protect the economic basis of the undertaking or entity and maintain its viability throughout its lifetime, or that at least 90 % of its original capital or funding or the promotional loan it grants is directly or indirectly guaranteed by the Member State’s central, regional or local government.
(19) ‘promotional entity’ means any undertaking or entity established by a Member State’s central, regional or local government, which grants promotional loans or grants promotional guarantees, whose primary goal is not to make profit or maximise market share but to promote that government’s public policy objectives, provided that, subject to State aid rules, that government has an obligation to protect the economic basis of the undertaking or entity and maintain its viability throughout its lifetime, or that at least 90 % of its original capital or funding or the promotional loan it grants is directly or indirectly guaranteed by the Member State’s central, regional or local government;
(20) ‘synthetic excess spread’ means a synthetic excess spread as defined in point (29) of Article 2 of Regulation (EU) 2017/2402.
#### Article 243
@@ -6072,7 +6127,7 @@
(b) the aggregate exposure value of all exposures to a single obligor at ABCP programme level does not exceed 2 % of the aggregate exposure value of all exposures within the ABCP programme at the time the exposures were added to the ABCP programme. For the purposes of this calculation, loans or leases to a group of connected clients, to the best knowledge of the sponsor, shall be considered as exposures to a single obligor.
In the case of trade receivables, point (b) of the first subparagraph shall not apply where the credit risk of those trade receivables is fully covered by eligible credit protection in accordance with Chapter 4, provided that in that case the protection provider is an institution, an insurance undertaking or a reinsurance undertaking. For the purposes of this subparagraph, only the portion of the trade receivables remaining after taking into account the effect of any purchase price discount and overcollateralisation shall be used to determine whether they are fully covered and whether the concentration limit is met.
In the case of trade receivables, point (b) of the first subparagraph shall not apply where the credit risk of those trade receivables is fully covered by eligible credit protection in accordance with Chapter 4, provided that in that case the protection provider is an institution, an investment firm, an insurance undertaking or a reinsurance undertaking.
In the case of securitised residual leasing values, point (b) of the first subparagraph shall not apply where those values are not exposed to refinancing or resell risk due to a legally enforceable commitment to repurchase or refinance the exposure at a pre-determined amount by a third party eligible under Article 201(1).
@@ -6804,23 +6859,55 @@
(c) the resulting risk weight shall be subject to a risk-weight floor of 100 %.
#### Article 270
##### Senior positions in SME securitisations
An originator institution may calculate the risk-weighted exposure amounts in respect of a securitisation position in accordance with Articles 260, 262 or 264, as applicable, where the following conditions are met:
(a) the securitisation meets the requirements for STS securitisation set out in Chapter 4 of Regulation (EU) 2017/2402 as applicable, other than Article 20(1) to (6) of that Regulation;
(b) the position qualifies as the senior securitisation position;
(c) the securitisation is backed by a pool of exposures to undertakings, provided that at least 70 % of those in terms of portfolio balance qualify as SMEs within the meaning of Article 501 at the time of issuance of the securitisation or in the case of revolving securitisations at the time an exposure is added to the securitisation;
(d) the credit risk associated with the positions not retained by the originator institution is transferred through a guarantee or a counter-guarantee meeting the requirements for unfunded credit protection set out in Chapter 4 for the Standardised Approach to credit risk;
(e) the third party to which the credit risk is transferred is one or more of the following:
(i) the central government or the central bank of a Member State, a multilateral development bank, an international organisation or a promotional entity, provided that the exposures to the guarantor or counter-guarantor qualify for a 0 % risk weight under Chapter 2;
(ii) an institutional investor as defined in point (12) of Article 2 of Regulation (EU) 2017/2402 provided that the guarantee or counter-guarantee is fully collateralised by cash on deposit with the originator institution.
#### Article 269a
##### Treatment of non-performing exposures (NPE) securitisations
For the purposes of this Article:
(a) ‘NPE securitisation’ means an NPE securitisation as defined in point (25) of Article 2 of Regulation (EU) 2017/2402;
(b) ‘qualifying traditional NPE securitisation’ means a traditional NPE securitisation where the non-refundable purchase price discount is at least 50 % of the outstanding amount of the underlying exposures at the time they were transferred to the SSPE.
Institutions shall perform the calculation in accordance with the following formula:
where:
For the purposes of the first subparagraph, originator institutions that apply the SEC-IRBA to a position and that are permitted to use own estimates of LGD and conversion factors for all underlying exposures subject to the IRB Approach in accordance with Chapter 3, shall deduct the non-refundable purchase price discount and, where applicable, any additional specific credit risk adjustments from the expected losses and exposure values of the underlying exposures associated with a senior position in a qualifying traditional NPE securitisation, in accordance with the following formula:
where:
For the purposes of this Article, the non-refundable purchase price discount shall be calculated by subtracting the amount referred to in point (b) from the amount referred to in point (a):
(a) the outstanding amount of the underlying exposures of the NPE securitisation at the time those exposures were transferred to the SSPE;
(b) the sum of the following:
(i) the initial sale price of the tranches or, where applicable, parts of the tranches of the NPE securitisation sold to third party investors; and
(ii) the outstanding amount, at the time the underlying exposures were transferred to the SSPE, of the tranches or, where applicable, parts of tranches of that securitisation held by the originator.
For the purposes of paragraphs 5 and 6, throughout the life of the transaction, the calculation of the non-refundable purchase price discount shall be adjusted downwards taking into account the realised losses. Any reduction in the outstanding amount of the underlying exposures resulting from realised losses shall reduce the non-refundable purchase price discount, subject to a floor of zero.
Where a discount is structured in such a way that it can be refunded in whole or in part to the originator, such discount shall not count as a non-refundable purchase price discount for the purposes of this Article.
#### Article 270
##### Senior positions in STS on-balance sheet securitisations
An originator institution may calculate the risk-weighted exposure amounts of a securitisation position in an STS on-balance sheet securitisation as referred to in Article 26a(1) of Regulation (EU) 2017/2402 in accordance with Article 260, 262 or 264 of this Regulation, as applicable, where that position meets both of the following conditions:
(a) the securitisation meets the requirements set out in Article 243(2);
(b) the position qualifies as the senior securitisation position.
EBA shall monitor the application of paragraph 1 in particular with regard to:
(a) the market volume and market share of STS on-balance sheet securitisations in respect of which the originator institution applies paragraph 1, across different asset classes;
(b) the observed allocation of losses to the senior tranche and to other tranches of STS on-balance sheet securitisations, where the originator institution applies paragraph 1 in respect of the senior position held in such securitisations;
(c) the impact of the application of paragraph 1 on the leverage of institutions;
(d) the impact of the use of STS on-balance sheet securitisations in respect of which the originator institution applies paragraph 1 on the issuance of capital instruments by the respective originator institutions.
#### Article 270a
@@ -6916,9 +7003,11 @@
(5) ‘risk position’ means a risk number that is assigned to a transaction under the Standardised Method set out in Section5 following a predetermined algorithm;
(6) ‘hedging set’ means a group of risk positions arising from the transactions within a single netting set, where only the balance of those risk positions is used for determining the exposure value under the Standardised Method set out in Section 5;
(6) ‘hedging set’ means a group of transactions within a single netting set for which full or partial offsetting is allowed for determining the potential future exposure under the methods set out in Section 3 or 4 of this Chapter;
(7) ‘margin agreement’ means an agreement or provisions of an agreement under which one counterparty must supply collateral to a second counterparty when an exposure of that second counterparty to the first counterparty exceeds a specified level;
(7a) ‘one way margin agreement’ means a margin agreement under which an institution is required to post variation margin to a counterparty but is not entitled to receive variation margin from that counterparty or vice-versa;
(8) ‘margin threshold’ means the largest amount of an exposure that remains outstanding before one party has the right to call for collateral;
@@ -6929,7 +7018,9 @@
(11) ‘cross-product netting’ means the inclusion of transactions of different product categories within the same netting set pursuant to the cross-product netting rules set out in this Chapter;
(12) ‘Current Market Value’ (hereinafter referred to as ‘CMV’) for the purposes of Section 5 refers to the net market value of the portfolio of transactions within a netting set, where both positive and negative market values are used in computing the CMV;
(12) ‘current market value’ or ‘CMV’ means the net market value of all the transactions within a netting set gross of any collateral held or posted where positive and negative market values are netted in computing the CMV;
(12a) ‘net independent collateral amount’ or ‘NICA’ means the sum of the volatility-adjusted value of net collateral received or posted, as applicable, to the netting set other than variation margin;
(13) ‘distribution of market values’ means the forecast of the probability distribution of net market values of transactions within a netting set for a future date (the forecasting horizon), given the realised market value of those transactions at the date of the forecast;
@@ -6974,7 +7065,9 @@
##### Methods for calculating the exposure value
An institution which is not eligible for the treatment set out in Article 94 shall not use the method set out in Section 4. To determine the exposure value for the contracts listed in point 3 of Annex II an institution shall not use the method set out in Section 4. Institutions may use in combination the methods set out in Sections 3 to 6 on a permanent basis within a group. A single institution shall not use in combination the methods set out in Sections 3 to 6 on a permanent basis but shall be permitted to use in combination methods set out in Sections 3 and 5 when one of the methods is used for the cases set out in Article 282(6).
An institution which does not meet the conditions set out in Article 273a(1) shall not use the method set out in Section 4. An institution which does not meet the conditions set out in Article 273a(2) shall not use the method set out in Section 5.
Institutions may use in combination the methods set out in Sections 3 to 6 on a permanent basis within a group. A single institution shall not use in combination the methods set out in Sections 3 to 6 on a permanent basis.
Where permitted by the competent authorities in accordance with Article 283(1) and (2), an institution may determine the exposure value for the following items using the Internal Model Method set out in Section 6:
@@ -6996,241 +7089,695 @@
The exposure value for CCR for those credit derivatives shall be zero, unless an institution applies the approach in point (h)(ii) of Article 299(2).
For a given counterparty, the exposure value for a given netting set of OTC derivative instruments listed in Annex II calculated in accordance with this Chapter shall be the greater of zero and the difference between the sum of exposure values across all netting sets with the counterparty and the sum of CVA for that counterparty being recognised by the institution as an incurred write-down. The credit valuation adjustments shall be calculated without taking into account any offsetting debit value adjustment attributed to the own credit risk of the firm that has been already excluded from own funds under Article 33(1)(c).
For the methods set out in Sections 3 to 6, institutions shall treat transactions where specific wrong way risk has been identified in accordance with Article 291(2), (4), (5) and (6) as appropriate.
## Section 3
### Mark-to-Market Method
#### Article 274
##### Mark-to-Market Method
In order to determine the potential future credit exposure, institutions shall multiply the notional amounts or underlying values, as applicable, by the percentages in Table 1 and in accordance with the following principles:
(a) contracts which do not fall within one of the five categories indicated in Table 1 shall be treated as contracts concerning commodities other than precious metals;
(b) for contracts with multiple exchanges of principal, the percentages shall be multiplied by the number of remaining payments still to be made in accordance with the contract;
(c) for contracts that are structured to settle outstanding exposure following specified payment dates and where the terms are reset so that the market value of the contract is zero on those specified dates, the residual maturity shall be equal to the time until the next reset date. In the case of interest-rate contracts that meet those criteria and have a remaining maturity of over one year, the percentage shall be no lower than 0,5 %.
| Residual maturity | Interest-rate contracts | Contracts concerning foreign-exchange rates and gold | Contracts concerning equities | Contracts concerning precious metals except gold | Contracts concerning commodities other than precious metals |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| One year or less | 0 % | 1 % | 6 % | 7 % | 10 % |
| Over one year, not exceeding five years | 0,5 % | 5 % | 8 % | 7 % | 12 % |
| Over five years | 1,5 % | 7,5 % | 10 % | 8 % | 15 % |
For contracts relating to commodities other than gold, which are referred to in point 3 of Annex II, an institution may, as an alternative to applying the percentages in Table 1, apply the percentages in Table 2 provided that that institution follows the extended maturity ladder approach set out in Article 361 for those contracts.
| Residual maturity | Precious metals (except gold) | Base metals | Agricultural products (softs) | Other, including energy products |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| One year or less | 2 % | 2,5 % | 3 % | 4 % |
| Over one year, not exceeding five years | 5 % | 4 % | 5 % | 6 % |
| Over five years | 7,5 % | 8 % | 9 % | 10 % |
## Section 4
### Original Exposure Method
#### Article 275
##### Original Exposure Method
The exposure value is the notional amount of each instrument multiplied by the percentages set out in Table 3.
| Original maturity | Interest-rate contracts | Contracts concerning foreign-exchange rates and gold |
By way of derogation from the first subparagraph, where one margin agreement applies to multiple netting sets with that counterparty and the institution is using one of the methods set out in Sections 3 to 6 to calculate the exposure value of those netting sets, the exposure value shall be calculated in accordance with the relevant Section.
For a given counterparty, the exposure value for a given netting set of OTC derivative instruments listed in Annex II calculated in accordance with this Chapter shall be the greater of zero and the difference between the sum of exposure values across all netting sets with the counterparty and the sum of credit valuation adjustments for that counterparty being recognised by the institution as an incurred write-down. The credit valuation adjustments shall be calculated without taking into account any offsetting debit value adjustment attributed to the own credit risk of the firm that has been already excluded from own funds in accordance with point (c) of Article 33(1).
For the purposes of the first subparagraph, two OTC derivative contracts are perfectly matching when they meet all the following conditions:
(a) their risk positions are opposite;
(b) their features, with the exception of the trade date, are identical;
(c) their cash flows fully offset each other.
#### Article 273a
##### Conditions for using simplified methods for calculating the exposure value
An institution may calculate the exposure value of its derivative positions in accordance with the method set out in Section 4, provided that the size of its on- and off-balance-sheet derivative business is equal to or less than both of the following thresholds on the basis of an assessment carried out on a monthly basis using the data as of the last day of the month:
(a) 10 % of the institution's total assets;
(b) EUR 300 million.
An institution may calculate the exposure value of its derivative positions in accordance with the method set out in Section 5, provided that the size of its on- and off-balance-sheet derivative business is equal to or less than both of the following thresholds on the basis of an assessment carried out on a monthly basis using the data as of the last day of the month:
(a) 5 % of the institution's total assets;
(b) EUR 100 million.
For the purposes of paragraphs 1 and 2, institutions shall calculate the size of their on- and off-balance-sheet derivative business on the basis of data as of the last day of each month in accordance with the following requirements:
(a) derivative positions shall be valued at their market values on that given date; where the market value of a position is not available on a given date, institutions shall take a fair value for the position on that date; where the market value and fair value of a position are not available on a given date, institutions shall take the most recent of the market value or fair value for that position;
(b) the absolute value of long derivative positions shall be summed with the absolute value of short derivative positions;
(c) all derivative positions shall be included, except credit derivatives that are recognised as internal hedges against non-trading book credit risk exposures.
#### Article 273b
##### Non-compliance with the conditions for using simplified methods for calculating the exposure value of derivatives
An institution shall cease to calculate the exposure values of its derivative positions in accordance with Section 4 or 5, as applicable, within three months of one of the following occurring:
(a) the institution does not meet the conditions set out in point (a) of Article 273a(1) or (2), as applicable, or the conditions set out in point (b) of Article 273a(1) or (2), as applicable, for three consecutive months;
(b) the institution does not meet the conditions set out in point (a) of Article 273a(1) or (2), as applicable, or the conditions set out in point (b) of Article 273a(1) or (2), as applicable, for more than six of the preceding 12 months.
## Section 3
### **Standardised approach for counterparty credit risk**
#### Article 274
##### Exposure value
An institution may calculate a single exposure value at netting set level for all the transactions covered by a contractual netting agreement where all the following conditions are met:
(a) the netting agreement belongs to one of the types of contractual netting agreements referred to in Article 295;
(b) the netting agreement has been recognised by competent authorities in accordance with Article 296;
(c) the institution has fulfilled the obligations laid down in Article 297 in respect of the netting agreement.
Where any of the conditions set out in the first subparagraph are not met, the institution shall treat each transaction as if it was its own netting set.
Institutions shall calculate the exposure value of a netting set under the standardised approach for counterparty credit risk as follows:
Institutions may set to zero the exposure value of a netting set that satisfies all the following conditions:
(a) the netting set is solely composed of sold options;
(b) the current market value of the netting set is at all times negative;
(c) the premium of all the options included in the netting set has been received upfront by the institution to guarantee the performance of the contracts;
(d) the netting set is not subject to any margin agreement.
#### Article 275
##### Replacement cost
Institutions shall calculate the replacement cost RC for netting sets that are not subject to a margin agreement, in accordance with the following formula:
Institutions shall calculate the replacement cost for single netting sets that are subject to a margin agreement in accordance with the following formula:
Institutions shall calculate the replacement cost for multiple netting sets that are subject to the same margin agreement in accordance with the following formula:
where:
For the purposes of the first subparagraph, NICAMA may be calculated at trade level, at netting set level or at the level of all the netting sets to which the margin agreement applies depending on the level at which the margin agreement applies.
#### Article 276
##### Recognition and treatment of collateral
For the purposes of this Section, institutions shall calculate the collateral amounts of VM, VMMA, NICA and NICAMA, by applying all the following requirements:
(a) where all the transactions included in a netting set belong to the trading book, only collateral that is eligible under Articles 197 and 299 shall be recognised;
(b) where a netting set contains at least one transaction that belongs to the non-trading book, only collateral that is eligible under Article 197 shall be recognised;
(c) collateral received from a counterparty shall be recognised with a positive sign and collateral posted to a counterparty shall be recognised with a negative sign;
(d) the volatility-adjusted value of any type of collateral received or posted shall be calculated in accordance with Article 223; for the purposes of that calculation, institutions shall not use the method set out in Article 225;
(e) the same collateral item shall not be included in both VM and NICA at the same time;
(f) the same collateral item shall not be included in both VMMA and NICAMA at the same time;
(g) any collateral posted to the counterparty that is segregated from the assets of that counterparty and, as a result of that segregation, is bankruptcy remote in the event of the default or insolvency of that counterparty shall not be recognised in the calculation of NICA and NICAMA.
For the calculation of the volatility-adjusted value of collateral posted referred to in point (d) of paragraph 1 of this Article, institutions shall replace the formula set out in Article 223(2) with the following formula:
For the purposes of point (d) of paragraph 1, institutions shall set the liquidation period relevant for the calculation of the volatility-adjusted value of any collateral received or posted in accordance with one of the following time horizons:
(a) one year for the netting sets referred to in Article 275(1);
(b) the margin period of risk determined in accordance with point (b) of Article 279c(1) for the netting sets referred to in Article 275(2) and (3).
#### Article 277
##### Mapping of transactions to risk categories
Institutions shall map each transaction of a netting set to one of the following risk categories to determine the potential future exposure of the netting set referred to in Article 278:
(a) interest rate risk;
(b) foreign exchange risk;
(c) credit risk;
(d) equity risk;
(e) commodity risk;
(f) other risks.
Notwithstanding paragraphs 1, 2 and 3, when mapping transactions to the risk categories listed in paragraph 1, institutions shall apply the following requirements:
(a) where the primary risk driver of a transaction, or the most material risk driver in a given risk category for transactions referred to in paragraph 3, is an inflation variable, institutions shall map the transaction to the interest rate risk category;
(b) where the primary risk driver of a transaction, or the most material risk driver in a given risk category for transactions referred to in paragraph 3, is a climatic conditions variable, institutions shall map the transaction to the commodity risk category.
EBA shall develop draft regulatory technical standards to specify:
(a) the method for identifying transactions with only one material risk driver;
(b) the method for identifying transactions with more than one material risk driver and for identifying the most material of those risk drivers for the purposes of paragraph 3.
EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 28 December 2019.
Power is delegated to the Commission to supplement this Regulation by adopting the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
#### Article 277a
##### Hedging sets
Institutions shall establish the relevant hedging sets for each risk category of a netting set and assign each transaction to those hedging sets as follows:
(a) transactions mapped to the interest rate risk category shall be assigned to the same hedging set only where their primary risk driver, or the most material risk driver in the given risk category for transactions referred to in Article 277(3), is denominated in the same currency;
(b) transactions mapped to the foreign exchange risk category shall be assigned to the same hedging set only where their primary risk driver, or the most material risk driver in the given risk category for transactions referred to in Article 277(3), is based on the same currency pair;
(c) all the transactions mapped to the credit risk category shall be assigned to the same hedging set;
(d) all the transactions mapped to the equity risk category shall be assigned to the same hedging set;
(e) transactions mapped to the commodity risk category shall be assigned to one of the following hedging sets on the basis of the nature of their primary risk driver or the most material risk driver in the given risk category for transactions referred to in Article 277(3):
(i) energy;
(ii) metals;
(iii) agricultural goods;
(iv) other commodities;
(v) climatic conditions;
(f) transactions mapped to the other risks category shall be assigned to the same hedging set only where their primary risk driver, or the most material risk driver in the given risk category for transactions referred to in Article 277(3), is identical.
For the purposes of point (a) of the first subparagraph of this paragraph, transactions mapped to the interest rate risk category that have an inflation variable as the primary risk driver shall be assigned to separate hedging sets, other than the hedging sets established for transactions mapped to the interest rate risk category that do not have an inflation variable as the primary risk driver. Those transactions shall be assigned to the same hedging set only where their primary risk driver, or the most material risk driver in the given risk category for transactions referred to in Article 277(3), is denominated in the same currency.
By way of derogation from paragraph 1 of this Article, institutions shall establish separate individual hedging sets in each risk category for the following transactions:
(a) transactions for which the primary risk driver, or the most material risk driver in the given risk category for transactions referred to in Article 277(3), is either the market implied volatility or the realised volatility of a risk driver or the correlation between two risk drivers;
(b) transactions for which the primary risk driver, or the most material risk driver in the given risk category for transactions referred to in Article 277(3), is the difference between two risk drivers mapped to the same risk category or transactions that consist of two payment legs denominated in the same currency and for which a risk driver from the same risk category of the primary risk driver is contained in the other payment leg than the one containing the primary risk driver.
For the purposes of point (a) of the first subparagraph of this paragraph, institutions shall assign transactions to the same hedging set of the relevant risk category only where their primary risk driver, or the most material risk driver in the given risk category for transactions referred to in Article 277(3), is identical.
For the purposes of point (b) of the first subparagraph, institutions shall assign transactions to the same hedging set of the relevant risk category only where the pair of risk drivers in those transactions as referred to therein is identical and the two risk drivers contained in this pair are positively correlated. Otherwise, institutions shall assign transactions referred to in point (b) of the first subparagraph to one of the hedging sets established in accordance with paragraph 1, on the basis of only one of the two risk drivers referred to in point (b) of the first subparagraph.
#### Article 278
##### Potential future exposure
Institutions shall calculate the potential future exposure of a netting set as follows:
where:
For the purpose of this calculation, institutions shall include the add-on of a given risk category in the calculation of the potential future exposure of a netting set where at least one transaction of the netting set has been mapped to that risk category.
For the purposes of paragraph 1, the multiplier shall be calculated as follows:
| multiplier = | | 1 if z ≥ 0 |
| --- | --- | --- |
| One year or less | 0,5 % | 2 % |
| Over one year, not exceeding two years | 1 % | 5 % |
| Additional allowance for each additional year | 1 % | 3 % |
## Section 5
### Standardised Method
#### Article 276
##### Standardised Method
When applying the SM, institutions shall calculate the exposure value separately for each netting set, net of collateral, as follows:
| | | |
| if | | |
where:
The hedging sets for this purpose correspond to risk factors for which risk positions of opposite sign can be offset to yield a net risk position on which the exposure measure is then based.
For the purposes of the calculation under paragraph 2:
(a) eligible collateral received from a counterparty shall have a positive sign and collateral posted to a counterparty shall have a negative sign;
(b) only collateral that is eligible under Article 197, Article 198 and Article 299(2)(d) shall be used for the SM;
(c) an institution may disregard the interest rate risk from payment legs with a remaining maturity of less than one year;
(d) an institution may treat transactions that consist of two payment legs that are denominated in the same currency as a single aggregate transaction. The treatment for payment legs applies to the aggregate transaction.
#### Article 277
##### Transactions with a linear risk profile
Institutions shall map transactions with a linear risk profile to risk positions in accordance with the following provisions:
(a) transactions with a linear risk profile with equities (including equity indices), gold, other precious metals or other commodities as the underlying shall be mapped to a risk position in the respective equity (or equity index) or commodity and an interest rate risk position for the payment leg;
(b) transactions with a linear risk profile with a debt instrument as the underlying instrument shall be mapped to an interest rate risk position for the debt instrument and another interest rate risk position for the payment leg;
(c) transactions with a linear risk profile that stipulate the exchange of payment against payment, including foreign exchange forwards, shall be mapped to an interest rate risk position for each of the payment legs.
Where, under a transaction mentioned in point (a), (b) or (c), a payment leg or the underlying debt instrument is denominated in foreign currency, that payment leg or underlying instrument shall also be mapped to a risk position in that currency.
| z = | | CMV – NICA for the netting sets referred to in Article 275(1) |
| --- | --- | --- |
| | | |
| CMV – VM – NICA for the netting sets referred to in Article 275(2) | | |
| CMVi – NICAi for the netting sets referred to in Article 275(3) | | |
#### Article 279
##### Calculation of the risk position
For the purpose of calculating the risk category add-ons referred to in Articles 280a to 280f, institutions shall calculate the risk position of each transaction of a netting set as follows:
#### Article 279a
##### Supervisory delta
Institutions shall calculate the supervisory delta as follows:
(a) for call and put options that entitle the option buyer to purchase or sell an underlying instrument at a positive price on a single or multiple dates in the future, except where those options are mapped to the interest rate risk category, institutions shall use the following formula:
where:
δ
=
the supervisory delta;
sign =
– 1 where the transaction is a sold call option or a bought put option;
sign =
+ 1 where the transaction is a bought call option or sold put option;
type =
– 1 where the transaction is a put option;
type =
+ 1 where the transaction is a call option;
N(x)
=
the cumulative distribution function for a standard normal random variable meaning the probability that a normal random variable with mean zero and variance of one is less than or equal to x;
P =
the spot or forward price of the underlying instrument of the option; for options the cash flows of which depend on an average value of the price of the underlying instrument, P shall be equal to the average value at the calculation date;
K =
the strike price of the option;
T =
the expiry date of the option; for options which can be exercised at one future date only, the expiry date is equal to that date; for options which can be exercised at multiple future dates, the expiry date is equal to the latest of those dates; the expiry date shall be expressed in years using the relevant business day convention; and
σ
=
the supervisory volatility of the option determined in accordance with Table 1 on the basis of the risk category of the transaction and the nature of the underlying instrument of the option.
*Table 1*
Risk category
Underlying instrument
Supervisory volatility
Foreign exchange
All
15 %
Credit
Single-name instrument
100 %
Multiple-names instrument
80 %
Equity
Single-name instrument
120 %
Multiple-names instrument
75 %
Commodity
Electricity
150 %
Other commodities (excluding electricity)
70 %
Others
All
150 %
Institutions using the forward price of the underlying instrument of an option shall ensure that:
(i) the forward price is consistent with the characteristics of the option;
(ii) the forward price is calculated using a relevant interest rate prevailing at the reporting date;
(iii) the forward price integrates the expected cash flows of the underlying instrument before the expiry of the option;
(b) for tranches of a synthetic securitisation and a nth-to-default credit derivative, institutions shall use the following formula:
where:
sign =
+ 1 where credit protection has been obtained through the transaction
– 1 where credit protection has been provided through the transaction
A =
the attachment point of the tranche; for a nth-to-default credit derivative transaction based on reference entities k, A = (n – 1)/k; and
D =
the detachment point of the tranche; for a nth-to-default credit derivative transaction based on reference entities k, D = n/k;
(c) for transactions not referred to in point (a) or (b), institutions shall use the following supervisory delta:
δ =
+ 1 if the transaction is a long position in the primary risk driver or in the most material risk driver in the given risk category
– 1 if the transaction is a short position in the primary risk driver or in the most material risk driver in the given risk category
EBA shall develop draft regulatory technical standards to specify:
(a) the method for identifying transactions with only one material risk driver;
(b) the method for identifying transactions with more than one material risk driver and for identifying the most material of those risk drivers for the purposes of paragraph 3.
EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 28 December 2019.
Power is delegated to the Commission to supplement this Regulation by adopting the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
#### Article 278
##### Transactions with a non-linear risk profile
#### Article 279
##### Treatment of collateral
For the determination of risk positions, institutions shall treat collateral as follows:
(a) collateral received from a counterparty shall be treated as an obligation to the counterparty under a derivative contract (short position) that is due on the day the determination is made;
(b) collateral posted with the counterparty shall be treated as a claim on the counterparty (long position) that is due on the day the determination is made.
#### Article 279a
##### Supervisory delta
EBA shall develop draft regulatory technical standards to specify:
(a) in accordance with international regulatory developments, the formula that institutions shall use to calculate the supervisory delta of call and put options mapped to the interest rate risk category compatible with market conditions in which interest rates may be negative as well as the supervisory volatility that is suitable for that formula;
(b) the method for determining whether a transaction is a long or short position in the primary risk driver or in the most material risk driver in the given risk category for transactions referred to in Article 277(3).
EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 28 December 2019.
Power is delegated to the Commission to supplement this Regulation by adopting the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
#### Article 280
##### Calculation of risk positions
An institution shall determine the size and sign of a risk position as follows:
(a) for all instruments other than debt instruments:
(i) as the effective notional value in the case of a transaction with a linear risk profile;
(ii) where:
Pref
=
price of the underlying instrument, expressed in the reference currency;
V =
value of the financial instrument (in the case of an option, the value is the option price);
p =
price of the underlying instrument, expressed in the same currency as V;
(b) for debt instruments and the payment legs of all transactions:
(i) as the effective notional value multiplied by the modified duration in the case of a transaction with a linear risk profile;
(ii) where:
V =
value of the financial instrument (in the case of an option this is the option price);
r =
interest rate level.
If V is denominated in a currency other than the reference currency, the derivative shall be converted into the reference currency by multiplication with the relevant exchange rate.
Institutions shall group the risk positions into hedging sets. The absolute value amount of the sum of the resulting risk positions shall be calculated for each hedging set. The net risk position shall be the result of that calculation and shall be calculated for the purposes of Article 276(2) as follows:
#### Article 281
##### Interest rate risk positions
For interest rate risk positions from the following:
(a) money deposits received from the counterparty as collateral;
(b) a payment legs;
(c) underlying debt instruments,
to which in each case a capital charge of 1,60 % or less applies in accordance with Table 1 of Article 336, institutions shall assign those positions to one of the six hedging sets for each currency set out in Table 4.
| | Government referenced interest rates | Non-government referenced interest rates |
#### EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 28 December 2019.
##### Power is delegated to the Commission to supplement this Regulation by adopting the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
Article 279b
Adjusted notional amount
Institutions shall calculate the adjusted notional amount as follows:
(a) for transactions mapped to the interest rate risk category or the credit risk category, institutions shall calculate the adjusted notional amount as the product of the notional amount of the derivative contract and the supervisory duration factor, which shall be calculated as follows:
where:
R =
the supervisory discount rate; R = 5 %;
S =
the period between the start date of a transaction and the reporting date, which shall be expressed in years using the relevant business day convention; and
E =
the period between the end date of a transaction and the reporting date, which shall be expressed in years using the relevant business day convention.
The start date of a transaction is the earliest date at which at least a contractual payment under the transaction, to or from the institution, is either fixed or exchanged, other than payments related to the exchange of collateral in a margin agreement. Where the transaction has already been fixing or making payments at the reporting date, the start date of a transaction shall be equal to 0.
Where a transaction involves one or more contractual future dates on which the institution or the counterparty may decide to terminate the transaction prior to its contractual maturity, the start date of a transaction shall be equal to the earliest of the following:
(i) the date or the earliest of the multiple future dates at which the institution or the counterparty may decide to terminate the transaction earlier than its contractual maturity;
(ii) the date at which a transaction starts fixing or making payments, other than payments related to the exchange of collateral in a margin agreement.
Where a transaction has a financial instrument as the underlying instrument that may give rise to contractual obligations additional to those of the transaction, the start date of a transaction shall be determined on the basis of the earliest date at which the underlying instrument starts fixing or making payments.
The end date of a transaction is the latest date at which a contractual payment under the transaction, to or from the institution, is or may be exchanged.
Where a transaction has a financial instrument as an underlying instrument that may give rise to contractual obligations additional to those of the transaction, the end date of a transaction shall be determined on the basis of the last contractual payment of the underlying instrument of the transaction.
Where a transaction is structured to settle an outstanding exposure following specified payment dates and where the terms are reset so that the market value of the transaction is zero on those specified dates, the settlement of the outstanding exposure at those specified dates is considered a contractual payment under the same transaction;
(b) for transactions mapped to the foreign exchange risk category, institutions shall calculate the adjusted notional amount as follows:
(i) where the transaction consists of one payment leg, the adjusted notional amount shall be the notional amount of the derivative contract;
(ii) where the transaction consists of two payment legs and the notional amount of one payment leg is denominated in the institution's reporting currency, the adjusted notional amount shall be the notional amount of the other payment leg;
(iii) where the transaction consists of two payment legs and the notional amount of each payment leg is denominated in a currency other than the institution's reporting currency, the adjusted notional amount shall be the largest of the notional amounts of the two payment legs after those amounts have been converted into the institution's reporting currency at the prevailing spot exchange rate;
(c) for transactions mapped to the equity risk category or commodity risk category, institutions shall calculate the adjusted notional amount as the product of the market price of one unit of the underlying instrument of the transaction and the number of units in the underlying instrument referenced by the transaction;
where a transaction mapped to the equity risk category or commodity risk category is contractually expressed as a notional amount, institutions shall use the notional amount of the transaction rather than the number of units in the underlying instrument as the adjusted notional amount;
(d) for transactions mapped to the other risks category, institutions shall calculate the adjusted notional amount on the basis of the most appropriate method among the methods set out in points (a), (b) and (c), depending on the nature and characteristics of the underlying instrument of the transaction.
Institutions shall determine the notional amount or number of units of the underlying instrument for the purpose of calculating the adjusted notional amount of a transaction referred to in paragraph 1 as follows:
(a) where the notional amount or the number of units of the underlying instrument of a transaction is not fixed until its contractual maturity:
(i) for deterministic notional amounts and numbers of units of the underlying instrument, the notional amount shall be the weighted average of all the deterministic values of notional amounts or number of units of the underlying instrument, as applicable, until the contractual maturity of the transaction, where the weights are the proportion of the time period during which each value of notional amount applies;
(ii) for stochastic notional amounts and numbers of units of the underlying instrument, the notional amount shall be the amount determined by fixing current market values within the formula for calculating the future market values;
#### (b) for contracts with multiple exchanges of the notional amount, the notional amount shall be multiplied by the number of remaining payments still to be made in accordance with the contracts;
##### (c) for contracts that provide for a multiplication of the cash-flow payments or a multiplication of the underlying of the derivative contract, the notional amount shall be adjusted by an institution to take into account the effects of the multiplication on the risk structure of those contracts.
Article 279c
Maturity Factor
Institutions shall calculate the maturity factor as follows:
#### (a) for transactions included in the netting sets referred to in Article 275(1), institutions shall use the following formula:
where:
MF
=
the maturity factor;
M =
the remaining maturity of the transaction which is equal to the period of time needed for the termination of all contractual obligations of the transaction; for that purpose, any optionality of a derivative contract shall be considered to be a contractual obligation; the remaining maturity shall be expressed in years using the relevant business day convention;
where a transaction has another derivative contract as underlying instrument that may give rise to additional contractual obligations beyond the contractual obligations of the transaction, the remaining maturity of the transaction shall be equal to the period of time needed for the termination of all contractual obligations of the underlying instrument;
where a transaction is structured to settle outstanding exposure following specified payment dates and where the terms are reset so that the market value of the transaction is zero on those specified dates, the remaining maturity of the transaction shall be equal to the time until the next reset date; and
OneBusinessYear
=
one year expressed in business days using the relevant business day convention;
##### (b) for transactions included in the netting sets referred to in Article 275(2) and (3), the maturity factor is defined as:
where:
MF
=
the maturity factor;
MPOR
=
the margin period of risk of the netting set determined in accordance with Article 285(2) to (5); and
OneBusinessYear
=
one year expressed in business days using the relevant business day convention.
When determining the margin period of risk for transactions between a client and a clearing member, an institution acting either as the client or as the clearing member shall replace the minimum period set out in point (b) of Article 285(2) with five business days.
Article 280
Hedging set supervisory factor coefficient
#### For the purpose of calculating the add-on of a hedging set as referred to in Articles 280a to 280f, the hedging set supervisory factor coefficient ‘є’ shall be the following:
##### | є = | | 1 for the hedging sets established in accordance with Article 277a(1) |
| --- | --- | --- |
| Maturity | < 1 year | < 1 year |
| >1 ≤ 5 years | > 5 years | |
| >1 ≤ 5 years | > 5 years | |
#### Article 282
##### Hedging sets
N-th to default basket credit default swaps shall be treated as follows:
(a) the size of a risk position in a reference debt instrument in a basket underlying an n-th to default credit default swap shall be the effective notional value of the reference debt instrument, multiplied by the modified duration of the n-th to default derivative with respect to a change in the credit spread of the reference debt instrument;
(b) there shall be one hedging set for each reference debt instrument in a basket underlying a given ‘nth to default’ credit default swap. Risk positions from different n-th to default credit default swaps shall not be included in the same hedging set;
(c) the CCR multiplier applicable to each hedging set created for one of the reference debt instruments of an n-th to default derivative shall be as follows:
(i) 0,3 % for reference debt instruments that have a credit assessment from a recognised ECAI equivalent to credit quality step 1 to 3;
(ii) 0,6 % for other debt instruments.
For interest rate risk positions from:
(a) money deposits that are posted with a counterparty as collateral when that counterparty does not have debt obligations of low specific risk outstanding;
(b) underlying debt instruments, to which according to Table 1 of Article 336 a capital charge of more than 1,60 % applies.
There shall be one hedging set for each issuer.
When a payment leg emulates such a debt instrument, there shall also be one hedging set for each issuer of the reference debt instrument.
An institution may assign risk positions that arise from debt instruments of a particular issuer, or from reference debt instruments of the same issuer that are emulated by payment legs, or that underlie a credit default swap, to the same hedging set.
For the purposes of this paragraph institutions shall determine whether underlying instruments are similar in accordance with the following principles:
(a) for equities, the underlying is similar if it is issued by the same issuer. An equity index shall be treated as a separate issuer;
(b) for precious metals, the underlying is similar if it is the same metal. A precious metal index shall be treated as a separate precious metal;
(c) for electric power, the underlying is similar if the delivery rights and obligations refer to the same peak or off-peak load time interval within any 24-hour interval;
(d) for commodities, the underlying is similar if it is the same commodity. A commodity index shall be treated as a separate commodity.
The CCR multipliers (hereinafter referred to as ‘CCRM’) for the different hedging set categories are set out in the following table:
| | Hedging set categories | CCRM |
| --- | --- | --- |
| 1. | Interest Rates | 0,2 % |
| 2. | Interest Rates for risk positions from a reference debt instrument that underlies a credit default swap and to which a capital charge of 1,60 %, or less, applies under Table 1 of Chapter 2 of Title IV. | 0,3 % |
| 3. | Interest Rates for risk positions from a debt instrument or reference debt instrument to which a capital charge of more than 1,60 % applies under Table 1 of Chapter 2 of Title IV. | 0,6 % |
| 4. | Exchange Rates | 2,5 % |
| 5. | Electric Power | 4 % |
| 6. | Gold | 5 % |
| 7. | Equity | 7 % |
| 8. | Precious Metals (other than gold) | 8,5 % |
| 9. | Other Commodities (excluding precious metals and electricity power) | 10 % |
| 10. | Underlying instruments of OTC derivatives that are not in any of the above categories | 10 % |
Underlying instruments of OTC derivatives, as referred to in point 10 of Table 5, shall be assigned to separate individual hedging sets for each category of underlying instrument.
## Section 6
### Internal Model Method
#### Article 283
##### Permission to use the Internal Model Method
| | | |
| 5 for the hedging sets established in accordance with point (a) of Article 277a(2) | | |
| 0,5 for the hedging sets established in accordance with point (b) of Article 277a(2) | | |
Article 280a
Interest rate risk category add-on
For the purposes of Article 278, institutions shall calculate the interest rate risk category add-on for a given netting set as follows:
where:
Institutions shall calculate the interest rate risk category add-on for hedging set j as follows:
where:
For the purpose of calculating the effective notional amount of hedging set j, institutions shall first map each transaction of the hedging set to the appropriate bucket in Table 2. They shall do so on the basis of the end date of each transaction as determined under point (a) of Article 279b(1):
| Bucket | End date (in years) |
| --- | --- |
| 1 | > 0 and <= 1 |
| 2 | > 1 and <= 5 |
| 3 | > 5 |
Institutions shall then calculate the effective notional amount of hedging set j in accordance with the following formula:
#### where:
##### where:
Article 280b
Foreign exchange risk category add-on
For the purposes of Article 278, institutions shall calculate the foreign exchange risk category add-on for a given netting set as follows:
where:
Institutions shall calculate the foreign exchange risk category add-on for hedging set j as follows:
#### where:
##### where:
Article 280c
Credit risk category add-on
For the purposes of paragraph 2, institutions shall establish the relevant credit reference entities of the netting set in accordance with the following:
(a) there shall be one credit reference entity for each issuer of a reference debt instrument that underlies a single-name transaction allocated to the credit risk category; single-name transactions shall be assigned to the same credit reference entity only where the underlying reference debt instrument of those transactions is issued by the same issuer;
(b) there shall be one credit reference entity for each group of reference debt instruments or single-name credit derivatives that underlie a multi-name transaction allocated to the credit risk category; multi-names transactions shall be assigned to the same credit reference entity only where the group of underlying reference debt instruments or single-name credit derivatives of those transactions have the same constituents.
For the purposes of Article 278, institution shall calculate the credit risk category add-on for a given netting set as follows:
where:
Institutions shall calculate the credit risk category add-on for hedging set j as follows:
where:
Institutions shall calculate the add-on for the credit reference entity k as follows:
where:
Institutions shall calculate the supervisory factor applicable to the credit reference entity k as follows:
#### (a) (i) an institution using the approach referred to in Chapter 3 shall map the internal rating of the individual issuer to one of the external credit assessments;
##### (b) for the credit reference entity k established in accordance with point (b) of paragraph 1:
(ii) *Table 3*
Credit quality step
Supervisory factor for single-name transactions
1 0,38 %
2 0,42 %
3 0,54 %
4 1,06 %
5 1,6 %
6 6,0 %
*Table 4*
Dominant credit quality
Supervisory factor for quoted indices
Investment grade
0,38 %
Non-investment grade
1,06 %
Article 280d
Equity risk category add-on
For the purposes of paragraph 2, institutions shall establish the relevant equity reference entities of the netting set in accordance with the following:
(a) there shall be one equity reference entity for each issuer of a reference equity instrument that underlies a single-name transaction allocated to the equity risk category; single-name transactions shall be assigned to the same equity reference entity only where the underlying reference equity instrument of those transactions is issued by the same issuer;
(b) there shall be one equity reference entity for each group of reference equity instruments or single-name equity derivatives that underlie a multi-name transaction allocated to the equity risk category; multi-names transactions shall be assigned to the same equity reference entity only where the group of underlying reference equity instruments or single-name equity derivatives of those transactions, as applicable, has the same constituents.
For the purposes of Article 278, institutions shall calculate the equity risk category add-on for a given netting set as follows:
where:
Institutions shall calculate the equity risk category add-on for hedging set j as follows:
#### where:
##### Institutions shall calculate the add-on for the equity reference entity k as follows:
where:
Article 280e
Commodity risk category add-on
For the purposes of Article 278, institutions shall calculate the commodity risk category add-on for a given netting set as follows:
where:
Institutions shall calculate the commodity risk category add-on for hedging set j as follows:
#### where:
##### Institutions shall calculate the add-on for the commodity reference type k as follows:
where:
Article 280f
Other risks category add-on
For the purposes of Article 278, institutions shall calculate the other risks category add-on for a given netting set as follows:
## where:
### Institutions shall calculate the other risks category add-on for hedging set j as follows:
#### where:
##### Section 4
**Simplified standardised approach for counterparty credit risk**
Article 281
Calculation of the exposure value
The exposure value of a netting set shall be calculated in accordance with the following requirements:
(a) institutions shall not apply the treatment referred to in Article 274(6);
(b) by way of derogation from Article 275(1), for netting sets that are not referred to in Article 275(2), institutions shall calculate the replacement cost in accordance with the following formula:
RC = max{CMV, 0}
where:
RC
=
the replacement cost; and
CMV
=
the current market value.
(c) by way of derogation from Article 275(2) of this Regulation, for netting sets of transactions: that are traded on a recognised exchange; that are centrally cleared by a central counterparty authorised in accordance with Article 14 of Regulation (EU) No 648/2012 or recognised in accordance with Article 25 of that Regulation; or for which collateral is exchanged bilaterally with the counterparty in accordance with Article 11 of Regulation (EU) No 648/2012, institutions shall calculate the replacement cost in accordance with the following formula:
RC = TH + MTA
where:
RC
=
the replacement cost;
TH
=
the margin threshold applicable to the netting set under the margin agreement below which the institution cannot call for collateral; and
MTA
=
the minimum transfer amount applicable to the netting set under the margin agreement;
(d) by way of derogation from Article 275(3), for multiple netting sets that are subject to a margin agreement, institutions shall calculate the replacement cost as the sum of the replacement cost of each individual netting set, calculated in accordance with paragraph 1 as if they were not margined;
(e) all hedging sets shall be established in accordance with Article 277a(1);
(f) institutions shall set to 1 the multiplier in the formula that is used to calculate the potential future exposure in Article 278(1), as follows:
where:
PFE
=
the potential future exposure; and
AddOn<sup>(a)</sup>
=
the add-on for risk category a;
(g) by way of derogation from Article 279a(1), for all transactions, institutions shall calculate the supervisory delta as follows:
δ =
+ 1 where the transaction is a long position in the primary risk driver
– 1 where the transaction is a short position in the primary risk driver
where:
δ
=
the supervisory delta;
(h) the formula referred to in point (a) of Article 279b(1) that is used to compute the supervisory duration factor shall read as follows:
supervisory duration factor = E – S
where:
E =
the period between the end date of a transaction and the reporting date; and
S =
the period between the start date of a transaction and the reporting date;
(i) the maturity factor referred to in Article 279c(1) shall be calculated as follows:
(i) for transactions included in netting sets referred to in Article 275(1), MF = 1;
(ii) for transactions included in netting sets referred to in Article 275(2) and (3), MF = 0,42;
## (j) the formula referred to in Article 280a(3) that is used to calculate the effective notional amount of hedging set j shall read as follows:
where:
=
the effective notional amount of hedging set j; and
Dj,k
=
the effective notional amount of bucket k of hedging set j;
### (k) the formula referred to in Article 280c(3) that is used to calculate the credit risk category add-on for hedging set j shall read as follows:
where:
=
the credit risk category add-on for hedging set j; and
AddOn(Entityk)
=
the add-on for the credit reference entity k;
#### (l) the formula referred to in Article 280d(3) that is used to calculate the equity risk category add-on for hedging set j shall read as follows:
where:
=
the equity risk category add-on for hedging set j; and
AddOn(Entityk)
=
the add-on for the credit reference entity k;
##### (m) the formula referred to in Article 280e(4) that is used to calculate the commodity risk category add-on for hedging set j shall read as follows:
where:
=
the commodity risk category add-on for hedging set j; and
=
the add-on for the commodity reference type k.
Section 5
**Original exposure method**
Article 282
Calculation of the exposure value
The current replacement cost referred to in paragraph 2 shall be calculated as follows:
(a) for netting sets of transactions: that are traded on a recognised exchange; centrally cleared by a central counterparty authorised in accordance with Article 14 of Regulation (EU) No 648/2012 or recognised in accordance with Article 25 of that Regulation; or for which collateral is exchanged bilaterally with the counterparty in accordance with Article 11 of Regulation (EU) No 648/2012, institutions shall use the following formula:
RC = TH + MTA
where:
RC
=
the replacement cost;
TH
=
the margin threshold applicable to the netting set under the margin agreement below which the institution cannot call for collateral; and
MTA
=
the minimum transfer amount applicable to the netting set under the margin agreement;
(b) for all other netting sets or individual transactions, institutions shall use the following formula:
RC = max{CMV, 0}
where:
RC
=
the replacement cost; and
CMV
=
the current market value.
In order to calculate the current replacement cost, institutions shall update current market values at least monthly.
Institutions shall calculate the potential future exposure referred to in paragraph 2 as follows:
(a) the potential future exposure of a netting set is the sum of the potential future exposure of all the transactions included in the netting set, calculated in accordance with point (b);
## (b) the potential future exposure of a single transaction is its notional amount multiplied by:
(i) the product of 0,5 % and the residual maturity of the transaction expressed in years for interest-rate derivative contracts;
(ii) the product of 6 % and the residual maturity of the transaction expressed in years for credit derivative contracts;
(iii) 4 % for foreign-exchange derivatives;
(iv) 18 % for gold and commodity derivatives other than electricity derivatives;
(v) 40 % for electricity derivatives;
(vi) 32 % for equity derivatives;
### (c) the notional amount referred to in point (b) of this paragraph shall be determined in accordance with Article 279b(2) and (3) for all derivatives listed in that point; in addition, the notional amount of the derivatives referred to in points (b)(iii) to (b)(vi) of this paragraph shall be determined in accordance with points (b) and (c) of Article 279b(1);
#### (d) the potential future exposure of netting sets referred to in point (a) of paragraph 3 shall be multiplied by 0,42.
##### For calculating the potential exposure of interest-rate derivatives and credit derivatives in accordance with points b(i) and (b)(ii), an institution may choose to use the original maturity instead of the residual maturity of the contracts.
Section 6
Internal Model Method
Article 283
Permission to use the Internal Model Method
Provided that the competent authorities are satisfied that the requirement in paragraph 2 have been met by an institution, they shall permit that institution to use the Internal Model Method (IMM) to calculate the exposure value for any of the following transactions:
@@ -7242,19 +7789,17 @@
Where an institution is permitted to use the IMM to calculate exposure value for any of the transactions mentioned in points (a) to (c) of the first subparagraph, it may also use the IMM for the transactions in Article 273(2)(e).
Notwithstanding the third subparagraph of Article 273(1), an institution may choose not to apply this method to exposures that are immaterial in size and risk. In such case, an institution shall apply one of the methods set out in Sections 3 to 5 to these exposures where the relevant requirements for each approach are met.
Those methods may be used in combination on a permanent basis within a group. Within an institution those methods may be used in combination only where one of the methods is used for the cases set out in Article 282(6)
If an institution ceases to comply with the requirements laid down in this Section, it shall notify the competent authority and do one of the following:
#### Notwithstanding the third subparagraph of Article 273(1), an institution may choose not to apply this method to exposures that are immaterial in size and risk. In such case, an institution shall apply one of the methods set out in Sections 3 to 5 to these exposures where the relevant requirements for each approach are met.
##### If an institution ceases to comply with the requirements laid down in this Section, it shall notify the competent authority and do one of the following:
(a) present to the competent authority a plan for a timely return to compliance;
(b) demonstrate to the satisfaction of the competent authority that the effect of non-compliance is immaterial.
#### Article 284
##### Exposure value
Article 284
Exposure value
The model used by the institution for that purpose shall:
@@ -7284,17 +7829,17 @@
Effective EPE is the average Effective EE during the first year of future exposure. If all contracts in the netting set mature within less than one year, EPE shall be the average of EE until all contracts in the netting set mature. Effective EPE shall be calculated as a weighted average of Effective EE:
Notwithstanding paragraph 4, competent authorities may permit institutions to use their own estimates of alpha, where:
(a) alpha shall equal the ratio of internal capital from a full simulation of CCR exposure across counterparties (numerator) and internal capital based on EPE (denominator);
#### Notwithstanding paragraph 4, competent authorities may permit institutions to use their own estimates of alpha, where:
##### (a) alpha shall equal the ratio of internal capital from a full simulation of CCR exposure across counterparties (numerator) and internal capital based on EPE (denominator);
(b) in the denominator, EPE shall be used as if it were a fixed outstanding amount.
When estimated in accordance with this paragraph, alpha shall be no lower than 1,2.
#### Article 285
##### Exposure value for netting sets subject to a margin agreement
Article 285
Exposure value for netting sets subject to a margin agreement
If the netting set is subject to a margin agreement and daily mark-to-market valuation, the institution shall calculate Effective EPE as set out in this paragraph. If the model captures the effects of margining when estimating EE, the institution may, subject to the permission of the competent authority, use the model's EE measure directly in the equation in Article 284(5). Competent authorities shall grant such permission only if they verify that the model properly captures the effects of margining when estimating EE. An institution that has not received such permission shall use one of the following Effective EPE measures:
@@ -7318,17 +7863,17 @@
(b) for netting sets containing one or more trades involving either illiquid collateral, or an OTC derivative that cannot be easily replaced, the margin period of risk shall not be less than 20 business days.
An institution shall determine whether collateral is illiquid or whether OTC derivatives cannot be easily replaced in the context of stressed market conditions, characterised by the absence of continuously active markets where a counterparty would, within two days or fewer, obtain multiple price quotations that would not move the market or represent a price reflecting a market discount (in the case of collateral) or premium (in the case of an OTC derivative).
An institution shall consider whether trades or securities it holds as collateral are concentrated in a particular counterparty and if that counterparty exited the market precipitously whether the institution would be able to replace those trades or securities.
#### An institution shall determine whether collateral is illiquid or whether OTC derivatives cannot be easily replaced in the context of stressed market conditions, characterised by the absence of continuously active markets where a counterparty would, within two days or fewer, obtain multiple price quotations that would not move the market or represent a price reflecting a market discount (in the case of collateral) or premium (in the case of an OTC derivative).
##### An institution shall consider whether trades or securities it holds as collateral are concentrated in a particular counterparty and if that counterparty exited the market precipitously whether the institution would be able to replace those trades or securities.
For re-margining with a periodicity of N days, the margin period of risk shall be at least equal to the period specified in paragraphs 2 and 3, F, plus N days minus one day. That is:
*Margin Period of Risk* = *F + N* – 1
#### Article 286
##### Management of CCR — Policies, processes and systems
Article 286
Management of CCR — Policies, processes and systems
An institution shall establish and maintain a CCR management framework, consisting of:
@@ -7348,17 +7893,17 @@
An institution using the IMM shall ensure that its CCR management framework accounts to the satisfaction of the competent authority for the liquidity risks of all of the following:
(a) potential incoming margin calls in the context of exchanges of variation margin or other margin types, such as initial or independent margin, under adverse market shocks;
(b) potential incoming calls for the return of excess collateral posted by counterparties;
#### (a) potential incoming margin calls in the context of exchanges of variation margin or other margin types, such as initial or independent margin, under adverse market shocks;
##### (b) potential incoming calls for the return of excess collateral posted by counterparties;
(c) calls resulting from a potential downgrade of its own external credit quality assessment.
An institution shall ensure that the nature and horizon of collateral re-use is consistent with its liquidity needs and does not jeopardise its ability to post or return collateral in a timely manner.
#### Article 287
##### Organisation structures for CCR management
Article 287
Organisation structures for CCR management
An institution using the IMM shall establish and maintain:
@@ -7390,17 +7935,17 @@
(b) controlling the integrity of the data used to make margin calls, and ensuring that it is consistent and reconciled regularly with all relevant sources of data within the institution;
(c) tracking the extent of re-use of collateral and any amendment of the rights of the institution to or in connection with the collateral that it posts;
(d) reporting to the appropriate level of management the types of collateral assets that are reused, and the terms of such reuse including instrument, credit quality and maturity;
#### (c) tracking the extent of re-use of collateral and any amendment of the rights of the institution to or in connection with the collateral that it posts;
##### (d) reporting to the appropriate level of management the types of collateral assets that are reused, and the terms of such reuse including instrument, credit quality and maturity;
(e) tracking concentration to individual types of collateral assets accepted by the institution;
(f) reporting collateral management information on a regular basis, but at least quarterly, to senior management, including information on the type of collateral received and posted, the size, aging and cause for margin call disputes. That internal reporting shall also reflect trends in these figures.
#### Article 288
##### Review of CCR management system
Article 288
Review of CCR management system
An institution shall regularly conduct an independent review of its CCR management system through its internal auditing process. That review shall include both the activities of the control and collateral management units required by Article 287 and shall specifically address, as a minimum:
@@ -7426,33 +7971,33 @@
(k) the verification of the consistency, timeliness and reliability of data sources used to run models, including the independence of such data sources;
(l) the accuracy and appropriateness of volatility and correlation assumptions;
(m) the accuracy of valuation and risk transformation calculations;
(n) the verification of the model's accuracy through frequent back-testing as set out in points (b) to (e) of Article 293(1);
(o) the compliance of the CCR control unit and collateral management unit with the relevant regulatory requirements.
#### Article 289
##### Use test
#### Article 290
##### Stress testing
It shall apply at least quarterly multifactor stress testing scenarios and assess material non-directional risks including yield curve exposure and basis risks. Multiple-factor stress tests shall, at a minimum, address the following scenarios in which the following occurs:
(a) severe economic or market events have occurred;
#### (l) the accuracy and appropriateness of volatility and correlation assumptions;
##### (m) the accuracy of valuation and risk transformation calculations;
#### (n) the verification of the model's accuracy through frequent back-testing as set out in points (b) to (e) of Article 293(1);
##### (o) the compliance of the CCR control unit and collateral management unit with the relevant regulatory requirements.
Article 289
Use test
Article 290
Stress testing
#### It shall apply at least quarterly multifactor stress testing scenarios and assess material non-directional risks including yield curve exposure and basis risks. Multiple-factor stress tests shall, at a minimum, address the following scenarios in which the following occurs:
##### (a) severe economic or market events have occurred;
(b) broad market liquidity has decreased significantly;
(c) a large financial intermediary is liquidating positions.
#### Article 291
##### Wrong-Way Risk
Article 291
Wrong-Way Risk
For the purposes of this Article:
@@ -7466,17 +8011,17 @@
(b) within any such separate netting set, for single-name credit default swaps the exposure value equals the full expected loss in the value of the remaining fair value of the underlying instruments based on the assumption that the underlying issuer is in liquidation;
(c) LGD for an institution using the approach set out in Chapter 3 shall be 100 % for such swap transactions;
(d) for an institution using the approach set out in Chapter 2, the applicable risk weight shall be that of an unsecured transaction;
#### (c) LGD for an institution using the approach set out in Chapter 3 shall be 100 % for such swap transactions;
##### (d) for an institution using the approach set out in Chapter 2, the applicable risk weight shall be that of an unsecured transaction;
(e) for all other transactions referencing a single name in any such separate netting set, the calculation of the exposure value shall be consistent with the assumption of a jump-to-default of those underlying obligations where the issuer is legally connected with the counterparty. For transactions referencing a basket of names or index, the jump-to-default of the respective underlying obligations where the issuer is legally connected with the counterparty, shall be applied, if material;
(f) to the extent that this uses existing market risk calculations for own funds requirements for incremental default and migration risk as set out in Title IV, Chapter 5, Section 4 that already contain an LGD assumption, the LGD in the formula used shall be 100 %.
#### Article 292
##### Integrity of the modelling process
Article 292
Integrity of the modelling process
An institution shall ensure the integrity of modelling process as set out in Article 284 by adopting at least the following measures:
@@ -7506,17 +8051,17 @@
(b) include a review of the comprehensiveness of the model.
An institution shall monitor the relevant risks and have processes in place to adjust its estimation of Effective EPE when those risks become significant. In complying with this paragraph, the institution shall:
(a) identify and manage its exposures to Specific Wrong-Way risk arising as specified in Article 291(1)(b) and exposures to General Wrong-Way risk arising as specified in Article 291(1)(a);
#### An institution shall monitor the relevant risks and have processes in place to adjust its estimation of Effective EPE when those risks become significant. In complying with this paragraph, the institution shall:
##### (a) identify and manage its exposures to Specific Wrong-Way risk arising as specified in Article 291(1)(b) and exposures to General Wrong-Way risk arising as specified in Article 291(1)(a);
(b) for exposures with a rising risk profile after one year, compare on a regular basis the estimate of a relevant measure of exposure over one year with the same exposure measure over the life of the exposure;
(c) for exposures with a residual maturity below one year, compare on a regular basis the replacement cost (current exposure) and the realised exposure profile, and store data that would allow such a comparison.
#### Article 293
##### Requirements for the risk management system
Article 293
Requirements for the risk management system
An institution shall comply with the following requirements:
@@ -7530,17 +8075,17 @@
(e) the internal risk measurement exposure model shall be integrated into the day-to-day risk management process of the institution;
(f) the risk measurement system shall be used in conjunction with internal trading and exposure limits. In this regard, exposure limits shall be related to the institution's risk measurement model in a manner that is consistent over time and that is well understood by traders, the credit function and senior management;
(g) an institution shall ensure that its risk management system is well documented. In particular, it shall maintain a documented set of internal policies, controls and procedures concerning the operation of the risk measurement system, and arrangements to ensure that those policies are complied with;
#### (f) the risk measurement system shall be used in conjunction with internal trading and exposure limits. In this regard, exposure limits shall be related to the institution's risk measurement model in a manner that is consistent over time and that is well understood by traders, the credit function and senior management;
##### (g) an institution shall ensure that its risk management system is well documented. In particular, it shall maintain a documented set of internal policies, controls and procedures concerning the operation of the risk measurement system, and arrangements to ensure that those policies are complied with;
(h) an independent review of the risk measurement system shall be carried out regularly in the institution's own internal auditing process. This review shall include both the activities of the business trading units and of the independent risk control unit. A review of the overall risk management process shall take place at regular intervals (and no less than once a year) and shall specifically address, as a minimum, all items referred to in Article 288;
(i) the on-going validation of counterparty credit risk models, including back-testing, shall be reviewed periodically by a level of management with sufficient authority to decide the action that will be taken to address weaknesses in the models.
#### Article 294
##### Validation requirements
Article 294
Validation requirements
As part of the initial and on-going validation of its CCR exposure model and its risk measures, an institution shall ensure that the following requirements are met:
@@ -7566,35 +8111,35 @@
(k) an institution shall validate its CCR exposure models and all risk measures out to time horizons commensurate with the maturity of trades for which exposure is calculated using IMM in accordance to the Article 283;
(l) an institution shall regularly test the pricing models used to calculate counterparty exposure against appropriate independent benchmarks as part of the on-going model validation process;
(m) the on-going validation of an institution's CCR exposure model and the relevant risk measures shall include an assessment of the adequacy of the recent performance;
(n) the frequency with which the parameters of an CCR exposure model are updated shall be assessed by an institution as part of the initial and on-going validation process;
(o) the initial and on-going validation of CCR exposure models shall assess whether or not the counterparty level and netting set exposure calculations of exposure are appropriate.
## Section 7
### Contractual netting
#### Article 295
##### Recognition of contractual netting as risk-reducing
## (l) an institution shall regularly test the pricing models used to calculate counterparty exposure against appropriate independent benchmarks as part of the on-going model validation process;
### (m) the on-going validation of an institution's CCR exposure model and the relevant risk measures shall include an assessment of the adequacy of the recent performance;
#### (n) the frequency with which the parameters of an CCR exposure model are updated shall be assessed by an institution as part of the initial and on-going validation process;
##### (o) the initial and on-going validation of CCR exposure models shall assess whether or not the counterparty level and netting set exposure calculations of exposure are appropriate.
Section 7
Contractual netting
Article 295
Recognition of contractual netting as risk-reducing
Institutions may treat as risk reducing in accordance with Article 298 only the following types of contractual netting agreements where the netting agreement has been recognised by competent authorities in accordance with Article 296 and where the institution meets the requirements set out in Article 297:
(a) bilateral contracts for novation between an institution and its counterparty under which mutual claims and obligations are automatically amalgamated in such a way that the novation fixes one single net amount each time it applies so as to create a single new contract that replaces all former contracts and all obligations between parties pursuant to those contracts and is binding on the parties;
(b) other bilateral agreements between an institution and its counterparty;
#### (a) bilateral contracts for novation between an institution and its counterparty under which mutual claims and obligations are automatically amalgamated in such a way that the novation fixes one single net amount each time it applies so as to create a single new contract that replaces all former contracts and all obligations between parties pursuant to those contracts and is binding on the parties;
##### (b) other bilateral agreements between an institution and its counterparty;
(c) contractual cross-product netting agreements for institutions that have received the approval to use the method set out in Section 6 for transactions falling under the scope of that method. Competent authorities shall report to EBA a list of the contractual cross-product netting agreements approved.
Netting across transactions entered into by different legal entities of a group shall not be recognised for the purposes of calculating the own funds requirements.
#### Article 296
##### Recognition of contractual netting agreements
Article 296
Recognition of contractual netting agreements
The following conditions shall be fulfilled by all contractual netting agreements used by an institution for the purposes of determining exposure value in this Part:
@@ -7610,103 +8155,63 @@
(d) the contract shall not contain any clause which, in the event of default of a counterparty, permits a non-defaulting counterparty to make limited payments only, or no payments at all, to the estate of the defaulting party, even if the defaulting party is a net creditor (i.e. walk-away clause).
If any of the competent authorities are not satisfied that the contractual netting is legally valid and enforceable under the law of each of the jurisdictions referred to in point (b) the contractual netting agreement shall not be recognised as risk-reducing for either of the counterparties. Competent authorities shall inform each other accordingly.
The legal opinions referred to in point (b) may be drawn up by reference to types of contractual netting. The following additional conditions shall be fulfilled by contractual cross-product netting agreements:
#### If any of the competent authorities are not satisfied that the contractual netting is legally valid and enforceable under the law of each of the jurisdictions referred to in point (b) the contractual netting agreement shall not be recognised as risk-reducing for either of the counterparties. Competent authorities shall inform each other accordingly.
##### The legal opinions referred to in point (b) may be drawn up by reference to types of contractual netting. The following additional conditions shall be fulfilled by contractual cross-product netting agreements:
(a) the net sum referred to in point (a) of paragraph 2 is the net sum of the positive and negative close out values of any included individual bilateral master agreement and of the positive and negative mark-to-market value of the individual transactions (the ‘cross-product net amount’);
(b) the legal opinions referred to in point (b) of paragraph 2 shall address the validity and enforceability of the entire contractual cross-product netting agreement under its terms and the impact of the netting arrangement on the material provisions of any included individual bilateral master agreement.
#### Article 297
##### Obligations of institutions
Taking into account the contractual cross-product netting agreement, the institution shall continue to comply with the requirements for the recognition of bilateral netting and the requirements of Chapter 4 for the recognition of credit risk mitigation, as applicable, with respect to each included individual bilateral master agreement and transaction.
#### Article 298
##### Effects of recognition of netting as risk-reducing
The following treatment applies to contractual netting agreements:
(a) netting for the purposes of Sections 5 and 6 shall be recognised as set out in those Sections;
(b) in the case of contracts for novation, the single net amounts fixed by such contracts rather than the gross amounts involved, may be weighted.
In the application of Section 3, institutions may take the contract for novation into account when determining:
(i) the current replacement cost referred to in Article 274(1);
(ii) the notional principal amounts or underlying values referred to in Article 274(2).
In the application of Section 4, in determining the notional amount referred to in Article 275(1) institutions may take into account the contract for novation for the purposes of calculating the notional principal amount In such cases, institutions shall apply the percentages of Table 3.
(c) In the case of other netting agreements, institutions shall apply Section 3 as follows:
(i) the current replacement cost referred to in Article 274(1) for the contracts included in a netting agreement shall be obtained by taking account of the actual hypothetical net replacement cost which results from the agreement; in the case where netting leads to a net obligation for the institution calculating the net replacement cost, the current replacement cost is calculated as ‘0’;
(ii) the figure for potential future credit exposure referred to in Article 274(2) for all contracts included in a netting agreement shall be reduced in accordance with the following formula:
where:
PCEred
=
the reduced figure for potential future credit exposure for all contracts with a given counterparty included in a legally valid bilateral netting agreement;
PCEgross
=
the sum of the figures for potential future credit exposure for all contracts with a given counterparty which are included in a legally valid bilateral netting agreement and are calculated by multiplying their notional principal amounts by the percentages set out in Table 1;
NGR
=
the net-to-gross ratio calculated as the quotient of the net replacement cost for all contracts included in a legally valid bilateral netting agreement with a given counterparty (numerator) and the gross replacement cost for all contracts included in a legally valid bilateral netting agreement with that counterparty (denominator).
In the application of Article 275(1) institutions may treat perfectly matching contracts included in the netting agreement as if they were a single contract with a notional principal equivalent to the net receipts, and the notional principal amounts shall be multiplied by the percentages given in Table 3.
For the purposes of this paragraph, perfectly matching contracts are forward foreign-exchange contracts or similar contracts in which a notional principal is equivalent to cash flows if the cash flows fall due on the same value date and fully in the same currency.
For all other contracts included in a netting agreement, the percentages applicable may be reduced as indicated in Table 6:
| Original maturity | Interest-rate contracts | Foreign-exchange contracts |
| --- | --- | --- |
| One year or less | 0,35 % | 1,50 % |
| More than one year but not more than two years | 0,75 % | 3,75 % |
| Additional allowance for each additional year | 0,75 % | 2,25 % |
## Section 8
### Items in the trading book
#### Article 299
##### Items in the trading book
#### (b) the legal opinions referred to in point (b) of paragraph 2 shall address the validity and enforceability of the entire contractual cross-product netting agreement under its terms and the impact of the netting arrangement on the material provisions of any included individual bilateral master agreement.
##### Article 297
Obligations of institutions
## Taking into account the contractual cross-product netting agreement, the institution shall continue to comply with the requirements for the recognition of bilateral netting and the requirements of Chapter 4 for the recognition of credit risk mitigation, as applicable, with respect to each included individual bilateral master agreement and transaction.
### Article 298
#### Effects of recognition of netting as risk-reducing
##### Netting for the purposes of Sections 3 to 6 shall be recognised as set out in those Sections.
Section 8
Items in the trading book
Article 299
Items in the trading book
When calculating risk-weighted exposure amounts for counterparty risk of items in the trading book, institutions shall comply with the following principles:
(a) in the case of total return swap credit derivatives and credit default swap credit derivatives, to obtain a figure for potential future credit exposure under the method set out in Section 3, the nominal amount of the instrument shall be multiplied by the following percentages:
(i) 5 %, where the reference obligation is one that, if it gave rise to a direct exposure of the institution, would be a qualifying item for the purposes of Part Three, Title IV, Chapter 2;
(ii) 10 %, where the reference obligation is one that, if it gave rise to a direct exposure of the institution, would not be a qualifying item for the purposes of Part Three, Title IV, Chapter 2.
In the case of an institution whose exposure arising from a credit default swap represents a long position in the underlying, the percentage for potential future credit exposure may be 0 %, unless the credit default swap is subject to close-out upon the insolvency of the entity whose exposure arising from the swap represents a short position in the underlying, even though the underlying has not defaulted.
Where the credit derivative provides protection in relation to ‘nth to default’ amongst a number of underlying obligations, an institution shall determine which of the percentage figures set out in the first subparagraph applies by reference to the obligation with the nth lowest credit quality which, if incurred by the institution, would be a qualifying item for the purposes of Part Three, Title IV, Chapter 2;
(b) institutions shall not use the Financial Collateral Simple Method set out in Article 222 for the recognition of the effects of financial collateral;
(c) in the case of repurchase transactions and securities or commodities lending or borrowing transactions booked in the trading book, institutions may recognise as eligible collateral all financial instruments and commodities that are eligible to be included in the trading book;
(d) for exposures arising from OTC derivative instruments booked in the trading book, institutions may recognise commodities that are eligible to be included in the trading book as eligible collateral;
(e) for the purposes of calculating volatility adjustments where such financial instruments or commodities which are not eligible under Chapter 4 are lent, sold or provided, or borrowed, purchased or received by way of collateral or otherwise under such a transaction, and an institution is using the Supervisory Volatility Adjustments Approach under Section 3 of Chapter 4, institutions shall treat such instruments and commodities in the same way as non-main index equities listed on a recognised exchange;
(f) where an institution is using the Own Estimates of Volatility adjustments Approach under Section 3 of Chapter 4 in respect of financial instruments or commodities which are not eligible under Chapter 4, it shall calculate volatility adjustments for each individual item. Where an institution has obtained the approval to use the internal models approach defined in Chapter 4, it may also apply that approach in the trading book;
(g) in relation to the recognition of master netting agreements covering repurchase transactions, securities or commodities lending or borrowing transactions, or other capital market-driven transactions, institutions shall only recognise netting across positions in the trading book and the non-trading book when the netted transactions fulfil the following conditions:
## (e) for the purposes of calculating volatility adjustments where such financial instruments or commodities which are not eligible under Chapter 4 are lent, sold or provided, or borrowed, purchased or received by way of collateral or otherwise under such a transaction, and an institution is using the Supervisory Volatility Adjustments Approach under Section 3 of Chapter 4, institutions shall treat such instruments and commodities in the same way as non-main index equities listed on a recognised exchange;
### (f) where an institution is using the Own Estimates of Volatility adjustments Approach under Section 3 of Chapter 4 in respect of financial instruments or commodities which are not eligible under Chapter 4, it shall calculate volatility adjustments for each individual item. Where an institution has obtained the approval to use the internal models approach defined in Chapter 4, it may also apply that approach in the trading book;
#### (g) in relation to the recognition of master netting agreements covering repurchase transactions, securities or commodities lending or borrowing transactions, or other capital market-driven transactions, institutions shall only recognise netting across positions in the trading book and the non-trading book when the netted transactions fulfil the following conditions:
(i) all transactions are marked to market daily;
(ii) any items borrowed, purchased or received under the transactions may be recognised as eligible financial collateral under Chapter 4 without the application of points (c) to (f) of this paragraph;
(h) where a credit derivative included in the trading book forms part of an internal hedge and the credit protection is recognised under this Regulation in accordance with Article 204, institutions shall apply one of the following approaches:
##### (h) where a credit derivative included in the trading book forms part of an internal hedge and the credit protection is recognised under this Regulation in accordance with Article 204, institutions shall apply one of the following approaches:
(i) treat it as if there were no counterparty risk arising from the position in that credit derivative;
(ii) consistently include for the purpose of calculating the own funds requirements for counterparty credit risk all credit derivatives in the trading book forming part of internal hedges or purchased as protection against a CCR exposure where the credit protection is recognised as eligible under Chapter 4.
## Section 9
### Own funds requirements for exposures to a central counterparty
#### Article 300
##### Definitions
For the purposes of this Section, the following definitions shall apply:
Section 9
Own funds requirements for exposures to a central counterparty
Article 300
Definitions
For the purposes of this Section and of Part Seven, the following definitions apply:
(1) ‘bankruptcy remote’, in relation to client assets, means that effective arrangements exist which ensure that those assets will not be available to the creditors of a CCP or of a clearing member in the event of the insolvency of that CCP or clearing member respectively, or that the assets will not be available to the clearing member to cover losses it incurred following the default of a client or clients other than those that provided those assets;
@@ -7714,243 +8219,231 @@
(3) ‘clearing member’ means a clearing member as defined in point (14) of Article 2 of Regulation (EU) No 648/2012;
(4) ‘client’ means a client as defined in point (15) of Article 2 of Regulation (EU) No 648/2012 or an undertaking that has established indirect clearing arrangements with a clearing member in accordance with Article 4(3) of that Regulation.
#### Article 301
##### Material scope
This Section applies to the following contracts and transactions for as long as they are outstanding with a CCP:
(a) the contracts listed in Annex II and credit derivatives;
(b) repurchase transactions;
(c) securities or commodities lending or borrowing transactions;
(d) long settlement transactions;
(e) margin lending transactions.
Institutions may choose whether to apply one of the following two treatments to the contracts and transactions outstanding with a QCCP listed in paragraph 1:
(a) the treatment for trade exposures and exposures from default fund contributions set out in Article 306, except for the treatment set out in paragraph 1(b) of that Article, and in Article 307, respectively;
(b) the treatment set out in Article 310.
#### Article 302
##### Monitoring of exposures to CCPs
#### Article 303
##### Treatment of clearing members' exposures to CCPs
Where an institution acts as a clearing member, either for its own purposes or as a financial intermediary between a client and a CCP, it shall calculate the own funds requirements for its exposures to a CCP in accordance with Article 301(2) and (3).
#### Article 304
##### Treatment of clearing members' exposures to clients
An institution acting as a clearing member may multiply its EAD by a scalar when calculating the own funds requirement for its exposures to a client in accordance with the Mark-to-Market Method, the Standardised Method or the Original Exposure Method. The scalars that the institutions may apply are the following:
(a) 0,71 for a margin period of risk of five days;
(b) 0,77 for a margin period of risk of six days;
(c) 0,84 for a margin period of risk of seven days;
(d) 0,89 for a margin period of risk of eight days;
(e) 0,95 for a margin period of risk of nine days;
(f) 1 for a margin period of risk of ten days or more.
When developing those draft regulatory technical standards, EBA shall apply the following principles:
(a) it shall define the margin period of risk for each of the types of contracts and transactions listed in Article 301(1);
(b) the margin periods of risk to be defined in point (a) shall reflect the close-out period of the contracts and transactions referred to in that point.
EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 30 June 2014.
(4) ‘client’ means a client as defined in point (15) of Article 2 of Regulation (EU) No 648/2012 or an undertaking that has established indirect clearing arrangements with a clearing member in accordance with Article 4(3) of that Regulation;
(5) ‘cash transaction’ means a transaction in cash, debt instruments or equities, a spot foreign exchange transaction or a spot commodities transaction; however, repurchase transactions, securities or commodities lending transactions, and securities or commodities borrowing transactions, are not cash transactions;
(6) ‘indirect clearing arrangement’ means an arrangement that meets the conditions set out in the second subparagraph of Article 4(3) of Regulation (EU) No 648/2012;
(7) ‘higher-level client’ means an entity providing clearing services to a lower-level client;
#### (8) ‘lower-level client’ means an entity accessing the services of a CCP through a higher-level client;
##### (9) ‘multi-level client structure’ means an indirect clearing arrangement under which clearing services are provided to an institution by an entity which is not a clearing member, but is itself a client of a clearing member or of a higher-level client;
(10) ‘unfunded contribution to a default fund’ means a contribution that an institution that acts as a clearing member has contractually committed to provide to a CCP after the CCP has depleted its default fund to cover the losses it incurred following the default of one or more of its clearing members;
(11) ‘fully guaranteed deposit lending or borrowing transaction’ means a fully collateralised money market transaction in which two counterparties exchange deposits and a CCP interposes itself between them to ensure the performance of those counterparties' payment obligations.
Article 301
Material scope
This Section applies to the following contracts and transactions, for as long as they are outstanding with a CCP:
(a) the derivative contracts listed in Annex II and credit derivatives;
(b) securities financing transactions and fully guaranteed deposit lending or borrowing transactions; and
(c) long settlement transactions.
This Section does not apply to exposures arising from the settlement of cash transactions. Institutions shall apply the treatment laid down in Title V to trade exposures arising from those transactions and a 0 % risk weight to default fund contributions covering only those transactions. Institutions shall apply the treatment set out in Article 307 to default fund contributions that cover any of the contracts listed in the first subparagraph of this paragraph in addition to cash transactions.
#### For the purposes of this Section, the following requirements shall apply:
##### (a) the initial margin shall not include contributions to a CCP for mutualised loss sharing arrangements;
#### (b) the initial margin shall include collateral deposited by an institution acting as a clearing member or by a client in excess of the minimum amount required respectively by the CCP or by the institution acting as a clearing member, provided the CCP or the institution acting as a clearing member may, in appropriate cases, prevent the institution acting as a clearing member or the client from withdrawing such excess collateral;
##### (c) where a CCP uses the initial margin to mutualise losses among its clearing members, institutions that act as clearing members shall treat that initial margin as a default fund contribution.
Article 302
Monitoring of exposures to CCPs
Article 303
#### Treatment of clearing members' exposures to CCPs
##### An institution that acts as a clearing member, either for its own purposes or as a financial intermediary between a client and a CCP, shall calculate the own funds requirements for its exposures to a CCP as follows:
(a) it shall apply the treatment set out in Article 306 to its trade exposures with the CCP;
(b) it shall apply the treatment set out in Article 307 to its default fund contributions to the CCP.
Article 304
Treatment of clearing members' exposures to clients
Where an institution that acts as a clearing member uses the methods set out in Section 3 or 6 of this Chapter to calculate the own funds requirement for its exposures, the following provisions shall apply:
(a) by way of derogation from Article 285(2), the institution may use a margin period of risk of at least five business days for its exposures to a client;
#### (b) the institution shall apply a margin period of risk of at least 10 business days for its exposures to a CCP;
##### (c) by way of derogation from Article 285(3), where a netting set included in the calculation meets the condition set out in point (a) of that paragraph, the institution may disregard the limit set out in that point, provided that the netting set does not meet the condition set out in point (b) of that paragraph and does not contain disputed trades or exotic options;
(d) where a CCP retains variation margin against a transaction, and the institution's collateral is not protected against the insolvency of the CCP, the institution shall apply a margin period of risk that is the lower of one year and the remaining maturity of the transaction, with a floor of 10 business days.
In the case of a multi-level client structure, the treatment set out in the first subparagraph may be applied at each level of that structure.
Article 305
Treatment of clients' exposures
Without prejudice to the approach specified in paragraph 1, where an institution is a client, it may calculate the own funds requirements for its trade exposures for CCP-related transactions with its clearing member in accordance with Article 306 provided that all the following conditions are met:
(a) the positions and assets of that institution related to those transactions are distinguished and segregated, at the level of both the clearing member and the CCP, from the positions and assets of both the clearing member and the other clients of that clearing member and as a result of that distinction and segregation those positions and assets are bankruptcy remote in the event of the default or insolvency of the clearing member or one or more of its other clients;
#### (b) laws, regulations, rules and contractual arrangements applicable to or binding that institution or the CCP facilitate the transfer of the client's positions relating to those contracts and transactions and of the corresponding collateral to another clearing member within the applicable margin period of risk in the event of default or insolvency of the original clearing member. In such circumstance, the client's positions and the collateral shall be transferred at market value unless the client requests to close out the position at market value;
##### (c) the client has conducted a sufficiently thorough legal review, which it has kept up to date, that substantiates that the arrangements that ensure that the condition set out in point (b) is met are legal, valid, binding and enforceable under the relevant laws of the relevant jurisdiction or jurisdictions;
(d) the CCP is a QCCP.
When assessing its compliance with the condition set out in point (b) of the first subparagraph, an institution may take into account any clear precedents of transfers of client positions and of corresponding collateral at a CCP, and any industry intent to continue with that practice.
Article 306
Own funds requirements for trade exposures
An institution shall apply the following treatment to its trade exposures with CCPs:
#### (a) it shall apply a risk weight of 2 % to the exposure values of all its trade exposures with QCCPs;
##### (b) it shall apply the risk weight used for the Standardised Approach to credit risk as set out in Article 107(2)(b) to all its trade exposures with non-qualifying CCPs;
(c) where an institution acts as a financial intermediary between a client and a CCP, and the terms of the CCP-related transaction stipulate that the institution is not required to reimburse the client for any losses suffered due to changes in the value of that transaction in the event that the CCP defaults, that institution may set the exposure value of the trade exposure with the CCP that corresponds to that CCP-related transaction to zero;
(d) where an institution acts as a financial intermediary between a client and a CCP, and the terms of the CCP-related transaction stipulate that the institution is required to reimburse the client for any losses suffered due to changes in the value of that transaction in the event that the CCP defaults, that institution shall apply the treatment in point (a) or (b), as applicable, to the trade exposure with the CCP that corresponds to that CCP-related transaction.
Article 307
Own funds requirements for contributions to the default fund of a CCP
#### An institution that acts as a clearing member shall apply the following treatment to its exposures arising from its contributions to the default fund of a CCP:
##### (a) it shall calculate the own funds requirement for its pre-funded contributions to the default fund of a QCCP in accordance with the approach set out in Article 308;
(b) it shall calculate the own funds requirement for its pre-funded and unfunded contributions to the default fund of a non-qualifying CCP in accordance with the approach set out in Article 309;
(c) it shall calculate the own funds requirement for its unfunded contributions to the default fund of a QCCP in accordance with the treatment set out in Article 310.
#### Article 308
##### Own funds requirements for pre-funded contributions to the default fund of a QCCP
An institution shall calculate the own funds requirement to cover the exposure arising from its pre-funded contribution as follows:
#### where:
##### Article 309
Own funds requirements for pre-funded contributions to the default fund of a non-qualifying CCP and for unfunded contributions to a non-qualifying CCP
#### An institution shall apply the following formula to calculate the own funds requirement for the exposures arising from its pre-funded contributions to the default fund of a non-qualifying CCP and from unfunded contributions to such CCP:
##### Article 310
Own funds requirements for unfunded contributions to the default fund of a QCCP
An institution shall apply a 0 % risk weight to its unfunded contributions to the default fund of a QCCP.
Article 311
Own funds requirements for exposures to CCPs that cease to meet certain conditions
## Where the condition set out in paragraph 1 is met, institutions shall, within three months of becoming aware of the circumstance referred to therein, or at an earlier time if the competent authorities of those institutions so require, do the following with respect to their exposures to that CCP:
### (a) apply the treatment set out in point (b) of Article 306(1) to their trade exposures to that CCP;
## (b) apply the treatment set out in Article 309 to their pre-funded contributions to the default fund of that CCP and to its unfunded contributions to that CCP;
### (c) treat their exposures to that CCP, other than the exposures listed in points (a) and (b) of this paragraph, as exposures to a corporate in accordance with the Standardised Approach for credit risk set out in Chapter 2.
#### TITLE III
##### OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS FOR OPERATIONAL RISK
CHAPTER 1
General principles governing the use of the different approaches
Article 312
Permission and notification
Competent authorities shall permit institutions to use an alternative relevant indicator for the business lines of retail banking and commercial banking where the conditions set out in Articles 319(2) and 320 are met.
Institutions shall also apply for permission from their competent authorities where they want to implement material extensions and changes to those Advanced Measurement Approaches. Competent authorities shall grant the permission only where institutions would continue to meet the standards specified in the first subparagraph following those material extensions and changes.
EBA shall develop draft regulatory technical standards to specify the following:
(a) the assessment methodology under which the competent authorities permit institutions to use Advanced Measurement Approaches;
#### (b) the conditions for assessing the materiality of extensions and changes to the Advanced Measurement Approaches;
##### (c) the modalities of the notification required in paragraph 3.
EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 31 December 2014.
Power is delegated to the Commission to adopt the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
#### Article 305
##### Treatment of clients' exposures
Without prejudice to the approach specified in paragraph 1, where an institution is a client, it may calculate the own funds requirements for its trade exposures for CCP-related transactions with its clearing member in accordance with Article 306 provided that all the following conditions are met:
(a) the positions and assets of that institution related to those transactions are distinguished and segregated, at the level of both the clearing member and the CCP, from the positions and assets of both the clearing member and the other clients of that clearing member and as a result of that distinction and segregation those positions and assets are bankruptcy remote in the event of the default or insolvency of the clearing member or one or more of its other clients;
(b) laws, regulations, rules and contractual arrangements applicable to or binding that institution or the CCP facilitate the transfer of the client's positions relating to those contracts and transactions and of the corresponding collateral to another clearing member within the applicable margin period of risk in the event of default or insolvency of the original clearing member. In such circumstance, the client's positions and the collateral shall be transferred at market value unless the client requests to close out the position at market value;
(c) the institution has available an independent, written and reasoned legal opinion that concludes that, in the event of legal challenge, the relevant courts and administrative authorities would find that the client would bear no losses on account of the insolvency of its clearing member or of any of its clearing member's clients under the laws of the jurisdiction of the institution, its clearing member and the CCP, the law governing the transactions and contracts the institution clears through the CCP, the law governing the collateral, and the law governing any contract or agreement necessary to meet the condition in point (b);
(d) the CCP is a QCCP.
#### Article 306
##### Own funds requirements for trade exposures
An institution shall apply the following treatment to its trade exposures with CCPs:
(a) it shall apply a risk weight of 2 % to the exposure values of all its trade exposures with QCCPs;
(b) it shall apply the risk weight used for the Standardised Approach to credit risk as set out in Article 107(2)(b) to all its trade exposures with non-qualifying CCPs;
(c) where an institution is acting as a financial intermediary between a client and a CCP and the terms of the CCP-related transaction stipulate that the institution is not obligated to reimburse the client for any losses suffered due to changes in the value of that transaction in the event that the CCP defaults, the exposure value of the transaction with the CCP that corresponds to that CCP-related transaction is equal to zero.
#### Article 307
##### Own funds requirements for pre-funded contributions to the default fund of a CCP
An institution acting as a clearing member shall apply the following treatment to its exposures arising from its contributions to the default fund of a CCP:
(a) it shall calculate the own funds requirement for its pre-funded contributions to the default fund of a QCCP in accordance with the approach set out in Article 308;
(b) it shall calculate the own funds requirement for its pre-funded contributions to the default fund of a non-qualifying CCP in accordance with the approach set out in Article 309.
#### Article 308
##### Own funds requirements for pre-funded contributions to the default fund of a QCCP
An institution shall calculate the own funds requirement (Ki) to cover the exposure arising from its pre-funded contribution (DFi) as follows:
where:
An institution shall calculate KCM as follows:
(a) where KCCP ≤ DFCCP, the institution shall use the following formula:
(b) where DFCCP < KCCP ≤DF*, the institution shall use the following formula:
(c) where DF* < KCCP, the institution shall use the following formula:
where:
#### Article 309
##### Own funds requirements for pre-funded contributions to the default fund of a non-qualifying CCP and for unfunded contributions to a non-qualifying CCP
An institution shall apply the following formula to calculate the own funds requirement (Ki) for the exposures arising from its pre-funded contributions to the default fund of a non-qualifying CCP (DFi) and from unfunded contributions (UCi) to such CCP:
where c2·and μ are defined as in Article 308(3).
#### Article 310
##### Alternative calculation of own funds requirement for exposures to a QCCP
An institution shall apply the following formula to calculate the own funds requirement (Ki) for the exposures arising from its trade exposures and the trade exposures of its clients (TEi) and pre-funded contributions (DFi) to the default fund of a QCCP:
#### Article 311
##### Own funds requirements for exposures to CCPs that cease to meet certain conditions
An institution shall apply the treatment set out in this Article where one or both of the following conditions have been met:
(a) the institution has received from a CCP a notification required by point (j)(ii) of Article 50b of Regulation (EU) No 648/2012 that the CCP has stopped calculating KCCP;
(b) it has become known to the institution, following a public announcement or notification from the competent authority of a CCP used by the institution or from that CCP itself, that the CCP will no longer comply with the conditions for authorisation or recognition, as applicable.
Where the competent authority considers that the reasons referred to in the first subparagraph are valid, it may permit institutions in its Member State to apply the treatment set out in Article 310 to their trade exposures and default fund contributions to that CCP. Where it grants such permission, it shall disclose the reasons for its decision.
Where the competent authority considers that the reasons referred to in the first subparagraph are not valid, all institutions in its Member State, irrespective of the treatment they chose in accordance with Article 301(2), shall apply the treatment set out in points (a) to (d) of paragraph 3 of this Article.
Where the condition in point (b) of paragraph 1 has been met, irrespective of whether the condition in point (a) of that paragraph has been met or not, an institution shall, within three months of the circumstance set out in point (b) of that paragraph arising, or earlier where the competent authority of the institution requires it, do the following with respect to its exposures to that CCP:
(a) cease to apply the treatment it chose in accordance with Article 301(2);
(b) apply the treatment set out in point (b) of Article 306(1) to its trade exposures to that CCP;
(c) apply the treatment set out in Article 309 to its pre-funded contributions to the default fund of that CCP and to its unfunded contributions to that CCP;
(d) treat exposures other than those listed in points (b) and (c) to that CCP as exposures to a corporate in accordance with the Standardised Approach for credit risk as set out in Chapter 2.
## TITLE III
### OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS FOR OPERATIONAL RISK
## CHAPTER 1
### General principles governing the use of the different approaches
#### Article 312
##### Permission and notification
Competent authorities shall permit institutions to use an alternative relevant indicator for the business lines of retail banking and commercial banking where the conditions set out in Articles 319(2) and 320 are met.
Institutions shall also apply for permission from their competent authorities where they want to implement material extensions and changes to those Advanced Measurement Approaches. Competent authorities shall grant the permission only where institutions would continue to meet the standards specified in the first subparagraph following those material extensions and changes.
Article 313
#### Reverting to the use of less sophisticated approaches
##### An institution may only revert to the use of a less sophisticated approach for operational risk where both the following conditions are met:
(a) the institution has demonstrated to the satisfaction of the competent authority that the use of a less sophisticated approach is not proposed in order to reduce the operational risk related own funds requirements of the institution, is necessary on the basis of nature and complexity of the institution and would not have a material adverse impact on the solvency of the institution or its ability to manage operational risk effectively;
(b) the institution has received the prior permission of the competent authority.
Article 314
Combined use of different approaches
An institution may use an Advanced Measurement Approach in combination with either the Basic Indicator Approach or the Standardised Approach, where both of the following conditions are met:
(a) the combination of Approaches used by the institution captures all its operational risks and competent authorities are satisfied with the methodology used by the institution to cover different activities, geographical locations, legal structures or other relevant divisions determined on an internal basis;
(b) the criteria set out in Article 320 and the standards set out in Articles 321 and 322 are fulfilled for the part of activities covered by the Standardised Approach and the Advanced Measurement Approaches respectively.
For institutions that want to use an Advanced Measurement Approach in combination with either the Basic Indicator Approach or the Standardised Approach competent authorities shall impose the following additional conditions for granting permission:
(a) on the date of implementation of an Advanced Measurement Approach, a significant part of the institution's operational risks are captured by that Approach;
(b) the institution takes a commitment to apply the Advanced Measurement Approach across a material part of its operations within a time schedule that was submitted to and approved by its competent authorities.
A competent authority shall grant such permission only where the institution has committed to apply the Standardised Approach within a time schedule that was submitted to and approved by the competent authority.
EBA shall develop draft regulatory technical standards to specify the following:
(a) the assessment methodology under which the competent authorities permit institutions to use Advanced Measurement Approaches;
(b) the conditions for assessing the materiality of extensions and changes to the Advanced Measurement Approaches;
(c) the modalities of the notification required in paragraph 3.
EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 31 December 2014.
Power is delegated to the Commission to adopt the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
#### Article 313
##### Reverting to the use of less sophisticated approaches
An institution may only revert to the use of a less sophisticated approach for operational risk where both the following conditions are met:
(a) the institution has demonstrated to the satisfaction of the competent authority that the use of a less sophisticated approach is not proposed in order to reduce the operational risk related own funds requirements of the institution, is necessary on the basis of nature and complexity of the institution and would not have a material adverse impact on the solvency of the institution or its ability to manage operational risk effectively;
(b) the institution has received the prior permission of the competent authority.
#### Article 314
##### Combined use of different approaches
An institution may use an Advanced Measurement Approach in combination with either the Basic Indicator Approach or the Standardised Approach, where both of the following conditions are met:
(a) the combination of Approaches used by the institution captures all its operational risks and competent authorities are satisfied with the methodology used by the institution to cover different activities, geographical locations, legal structures or other relevant divisions determined on an internal basis;
(b) the criteria set out in Article 320 and the standards set out in Articles 321 and 322 are fulfilled for the part of activities covered by the Standardised Approach and the Advanced Measurement Approaches respectively.
For institutions that want to use an Advanced Measurement Approach in combination with either the Basic Indicator Approach or the Standardised Approach competent authorities shall impose the following additional conditions for granting permission:
(a) on the date of implementation of an Advanced Measurement Approach, a significant part of the institution's operational risks are captured by that Approach;
(b) the institution takes a commitment to apply the Advanced Measurement Approach across a material part of its operations within a time schedule that was submitted to and approved by its competent authorities.
A competent authority shall grant such permission only where the institution has committed to apply the Standardised Approach within a time schedule that was submitted to and approved by the competent authority.
EBA shall develop draft regulatory technical standards to specify the following:
(a) the conditions that competent authorities shall use when assessing the methodology referred to in point (a) of paragraph 2;
(b) the conditions that the competent authorities shall use when deciding whether to impose the additional conditions referred to in paragraph 3.
EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 31 December 2016.
Power is delegated to the Commission to adopt the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
## CHAPTER 2
### Basic Indicator Approach
#### Article 315
##### Own funds requirement
Institutions shall calculate the average over three years of the relevant indicator on the basis of the last three twelve-monthly observations at the end of the financial year. When audited figures are not available, institutions may use business estimates.
#### Article 316
##### Relevant indicator
## (a) the conditions that competent authorities shall use when assessing the methodology referred to in point (a) of paragraph 2;
### (b) the conditions that the competent authorities shall use when deciding whether to impose the additional conditions referred to in paragraph 3.
#### EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 31 December 2016.
##### Power is delegated to the Commission to adopt the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
CHAPTER 2
#### Basic Indicator Approach
##### Article 315
Own funds requirement
### Institutions shall calculate the average over three years of the relevant indicator on the basis of the last three twelve-monthly observations at the end of the financial year. When audited figures are not available, institutions may use business estimates.
Article 316
Relevant indicator
For institutions applying accounting standards established by Directive 86/635/EEC, based on the accounting categories for the profit and loss account of institutions under Article 27 of that Directive, the relevant indicator is the sum of the elements listed in Table 1 of this paragraph. Institutions shall include each element in the sum with its positive or negative sign.
### Table 1
Table 1
1Interest receivable and similar income
@@ -7977,19 +8470,25 @@
(c) when revaluation of trading items is part of the profit and loss statement, institutions may include revaluation. When institutions apply Article 36(2) of Directive 86/635/EEC, they shall include revaluation booked in the profit and loss account.
EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 31 December 2017.
Power is delegated to the Commission to adopt the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
## CHAPTER 3
### Standardised Approach
#### Article 317
##### Own funds requirement
Where an institution can prove to its competent authority that, due to a merger, an acquisition or a disposal of entities or activities, using a three year average to calculate the relevant indicator would lead to a biased estimation for the own funds requirement for operational risk, the competent authority may permit institutions to amend the calculation in a way that would take into account such events and shall duly inform EBA thereof. In such circumstances, the competent authority may, on its own initiative, also require an institution to amend the calculation.
By way of derogation from the first subparagraph of this paragraph, institutions may choose not to apply the accounting categories for the profit and loss account under Article 27 of Directive 86/635/EEC to financial and operating leases for the purpose of calculating the relevant indicator, and may instead:
## (a) include interest income from financial and operating leases and profits from leased assets in the category referred to in point 1 of Table 1;
### (b) include interest expense from financial and operating leases, losses, depreciation and impairment of operating leased assets in the category referred to in point 2 of Table 1.
#### EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 31 December 2017.
##### Power is delegated to the Commission to adopt the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
CHAPTER 3
Standardised Approach
Article 317
#### Own funds requirement
##### Where an institution can prove to its competent authority that, due to a merger, an acquisition or a disposal of entities or activities, using a three year average to calculate the relevant indicator would lead to a biased estimation for the own funds requirement for operational risk, the competent authority may permit institutions to amend the calculation in a way that would take into account such events and shall duly inform EBA thereof. In such circumstances, the competent authority may, on its own initiative, also require an institution to amend the calculation.
Where an institution has been in operation for less than three years it may use forward-looking business estimates in calculating the relevant indicator, provided that it starts using historical data as soon as it is available.
@@ -8004,9 +8503,9 @@
| Agency services | Safekeeping and administration of financial instruments for the account of clients, including custodianship and related services such as cash/collateral management | 15 % |
| Asset management | Portfolio management Managing of UCITS Other forms of asset management | 12 % |
#### Article 318
##### Principles for business line mapping
Article 318
Principles for business line mapping
Institutions shall apply the following principles for business line mapping:
@@ -8020,17 +8519,17 @@
(e) the mapping of activities into business lines for operational risk capital purposes shall be consistent with the categories institutions use for credit and market risks;
(f) senior management shall be responsible for the mapping policy under the control of the management body of the institution;
(g) institutions shall subject the mapping process to business lines to independent review.
#### (f) senior management shall be responsible for the mapping policy under the control of the management body of the institution;
##### (g) institutions shall subject the mapping process to business lines to independent review.
EBA shall submit those draft implementing technical standards to the Commission by 31 December 2017.
Power is conferred on the Commission to adopt the implementing technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Article 15 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
#### Article 319
##### Alternative Standardised Approach
Article 319
Alternative Standardised Approach
Under the Alternative Standardised Approach, for the business lines ‘retail banking’ and ‘commercial banking’, institutions shall apply the following:
@@ -8038,33 +8537,33 @@
(b) the loans and advances consist of the total drawn amounts in the corresponding credit portfolios. For the ‘commercial banking’ business line, institutions shall also include securities held in the non trading book in the nominal amount of loans and advances.
To be permitted to use the Alternative Standardised Approach, an institution shall meet all the following conditions:
(a) its retail or commercial banking activities shall account for at least 90 % of its income;
#### To be permitted to use the Alternative Standardised Approach, an institution shall meet all the following conditions:
##### (a) its retail or commercial banking activities shall account for at least 90 % of its income;
(b) a significant proportion of its retail or commercial banking activities shall comprise loans associated with a high PD;
(c) the Alternative Standardised Approach provides an appropriate basis for calculating its own funds requirement for operational risk.
#### Article 320
##### Criteria for the Standardised Approach
The criteria referred to in the first subparagraph of Article 312(1) are the following:
(a) an institution shall have in place a well-documented assessment and management system for operational risk with clear responsibilities assigned for this system. It shall identify its exposures to operational risk and track relevant operational risk data, including material loss data. This system shall be subject to regular independent review carried out by an internal or external party possessing the necessary knowledge to carry out such review;
(b) an institution's operational risk assessment system shall be closely integrated into the risk management processes of the institution. Its output shall be an integral part of the process of monitoring and controlling the institution's operational risk profile;
(c) an institution shall implement a system of reporting to senior management that provides operational risk reports to relevant functions within the institution. An institution shall have in place procedures for taking appropriate action according to the information within the reports to management.
## CHAPTER 4
### Advanced measurement approaches
#### Article 321
##### Qualitative standards
Article 320
Criteria for the Standardised Approach
## The criteria referred to in the first subparagraph of Article 312(1) are the following:
### (a) an institution shall have in place a well-documented assessment and management system for operational risk with clear responsibilities assigned for this system. It shall identify its exposures to operational risk and track relevant operational risk data, including material loss data. This system shall be subject to regular independent review carried out by an internal or external party possessing the necessary knowledge to carry out such review;
#### (b) an institution's operational risk assessment system shall be closely integrated into the risk management processes of the institution. Its output shall be an integral part of the process of monitoring and controlling the institution's operational risk profile;
##### (c) an institution shall implement a system of reporting to senior management that provides operational risk reports to relevant functions within the institution. An institution shall have in place procedures for taking appropriate action according to the information within the reports to management.
CHAPTER 4
Advanced measurement approaches
Article 321
Qualitative standards
The qualitative standards referred to in Article 312(2) are the following:
@@ -8074,17 +8573,17 @@
(c) an institution shall have in place regular reporting of operational risk exposures and loss experience and shall have in place procedures for taking appropriate corrective action;
(d) an institution's risk management system shall be well documented. An institution shall have in place routines for ensuring compliance and policies for the treatment of non-compliance;
(e) an institution shall subject its operational risk management processes and measurement systems to regular reviews performed by internal or external auditors;
#### (d) an institution's risk management system shall be well documented. An institution shall have in place routines for ensuring compliance and policies for the treatment of non-compliance;
##### (e) an institution shall subject its operational risk management processes and measurement systems to regular reviews performed by internal or external auditors;
(f) an institution's internal validation processes shall operate in a sound and effective manner;
(g) data flows and processes associated with an institution's risk measurement system shall be transparent and accessible.
#### Article 322
##### Quantitative Standards
Article 322
Quantitative Standards
The standards relating to process are the following:
@@ -8120,17 +8619,17 @@
The qualifying standards relating to business environment and internal control factors are the following:
(a) an institution's firm-wide risk assessment methodology shall capture key business environment and internal control factors that can change the institutions operational risk profile;
(b) an institution shall justify the choice of each factor as a meaningful driver of risk, based on experience and involving the expert judgment of the affected business areas;
#### (a) an institution's firm-wide risk assessment methodology shall capture key business environment and internal control factors that can change the institutions operational risk profile;
##### (b) an institution shall justify the choice of each factor as a meaningful driver of risk, based on experience and involving the expert judgment of the affected business areas;
(c) an institution shall be able to justify to competent authorities the sensitivity of risk estimates to changes in the factors and the relative weighting of the various factors. In addition to capturing changes in risk due to improvements in risk controls, an institution's risk measurement framework shall also capture potential increases in risk due to greater complexity of activities or increased business volume;
(d) an institution shall document its risk measurement framework and shall subject it to independent review within the institution and by competent authorities. Over time, an institution shall validate and reassess the process and the outcomes through comparison to actual internal loss experience and relevant external data.
#### Article 323
##### Impact of insurance and other risk transfer mechanisms
Article 323
Impact of insurance and other risk transfer mechanisms
The insurance and the institutions' insurance framework shall meet all the following conditions:
@@ -8146,21 +8645,21 @@
(f) the framework for recognising insurance is well reasoned and documented.
The methodology for recognising insurance shall capture all the following elements through discounts or haircuts in the amount of insurance recognition:
(a) the residual term of the insurance policy, where less than one year;
#### The methodology for recognising insurance shall capture all the following elements through discounts or haircuts in the amount of insurance recognition:
##### (a) the residual term of the insurance policy, where less than one year;
(b) the policy's cancellation terms, where less than one year;
(c) the uncertainty of payment as well as mismatches in coverage of insurance policies.
#### Article 324
##### Loss event type classification
The loss events types referred to in point (b) of Article 322(3) are the following:
| Event-Type Category | Definition |
## Article 324
### Loss event type classification
## The loss events types referred to in point (b) of Article 322(3) are the following:
### | Event-Type Category | Definition |
| --- | --- |
| Internal fraud | Losses due to acts of a type intended to defraud, misappropriate property or circumvent regulations, the law or company policy, excluding diversity/discrimination events, which involves at least one internal party |
| External fraud | Losses due to acts of a type intended to defraud, misappropriate property or circumvent the law, by a third party |
@@ -8170,17 +8669,17 @@
| Business disruption and system failures | Losses arising from disruption of business or system failures |
| Execution, Delivery & Process Management | Losses from failed transaction processing or process management, from relations with trade counterparties and vendors |
## TITLE IV
### OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS FOR MARKET RISK
## CHAPTER 1
### **General provisions**
#### Article 325
##### Approaches for calculating the own funds requirements for market risk
#### TITLE IV
##### OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS FOR MARKET RISK
CHAPTER 1
**General provisions**
Article 325
Approaches for calculating the own funds requirements for market risk
An institution shall calculate the own funds requirements for market risk of all trading book positions and non-trading book positions that are subject to foreign exchange risk or commodity risk in accordance with the following approaches:
@@ -8214,17 +8713,17 @@
Positions with any of the following underlying instruments shall not be included in the ACTP:
(a) underlying instruments that are assigned to the exposure classes referred to in point (h) or (i) of Article 112;
(b) a claim on a special purpose entity, collateralised, directly or indirectly, by a position that, in accordance with paragraph 6, would itself not be eligible for inclusion in the ACTP.
#### (a) underlying instruments that are assigned to the exposure classes referred to in point (h) or (i) of Article 112;
##### (b) a claim on a special purpose entity, collateralised, directly or indirectly, by a position that, in accordance with paragraph 6, would itself not be eligible for inclusion in the ACTP.
EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 28 September 2020.
Power is delegated to the Commission to supplement this Regulation by adopting the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
#### Article 325a
##### Exemptions from specific reporting requirements for market risk
Article 325a
Exemptions from specific reporting requirements for market risk
An institution shall be exempted from the reporting requirement set out in Article 430b, provided that the size of the institution's on- and off-balance-sheet business that is subject to market risk is equal to or less than each of the following thresholds, on the basis of an assessment carried out on a monthly basis using data as of the last day of the month:
@@ -8244,17 +8743,17 @@
(e) all the non-trading book positions that are subject to commodity risk shall be valued in accordance with Articles 357 and 358;
(f) the absolute value of long positions shall be added to the absolute value of short positions.
The exemption from the reporting requirements laid down in Article 430b shall cease to apply within three months of either of the following cases:
#### (f) the absolute value of long positions shall be added to the absolute value of short positions.
##### The exemption from the reporting requirements laid down in Article 430b shall cease to apply within three months of either of the following cases:
(a) the institution does not meet the condition set out in point (a) or (b) of paragraph 1 for three consecutive months; or
(b) the institution does not meet the condition set out in point (a) or (b) of paragraph 1 during more than 6 out of the last 12 months.
#### Article 325b
##### Permission for consolidated requirements
Article 325b
Permission for consolidated requirements
Institutions may apply paragraph 1 only with the permission of the competent authorities which shall be granted if all the following conditions are met:
@@ -8262,45 +8761,45 @@
(b) the regulatory, legal or contractual framework in which the institutions operate guarantees mutual financial support within the group.
Where there are undertakings located in third countries, all the following conditions shall be met in addition to those set out in paragraph 2:
(a) such undertakings have been authorised in a third country and either satisfy the definition of a credit institution or are recognised third-country investment firms;
(b) on an individual basis, such undertakings comply with own funds requirements equivalent to those laid down in this Regulation;
(c) no regulations exist in the third countries in question which might significantly affect the transfer of funds within the group.
## *CHAPTER 1a*
### ***Alternative standardised approach***
## Section 1
### **General provisions**
#### Article 325c
##### Scope and structure of the alternative standardised approach
Institutions shall calculate the own funds requirements for market risk in accordance with the alternative standardised approach for a portfolio of trading book positions or non-trading book positions that are subject to foreign exchange or commodity risk as the sum of the following three components:
(a) the own funds requirement under the sensitivities-based method set out in Section 2;
(b) the own funds requirement for the default risk set out in Section 5 which is only applicable to the trading book positions referred to in that Section;
(c) the own funds requirement for residual risks set out in Section 4 which is only applicable to the trading book positions referred to in that Section.
## Section 2
### **Sensitivities-based method for calculating the own funds requirement**
#### Article 325d
##### Definitions
For the purposes of this Chapter, the following definitions apply:
(1) ‘risk class’ means one of the following seven categories:
## Where there are undertakings located in third countries, all the following conditions shall be met in addition to those set out in paragraph 2:
### (a) such undertakings have been authorised in a third country and either satisfy the definition of a credit institution or are recognised third-country investment firms;
## (b) on an individual basis, such undertakings comply with own funds requirements equivalent to those laid down in this Regulation;
### (c) no regulations exist in the third countries in question which might significantly affect the transfer of funds within the group.
#### *CHAPTER 1a*
##### ***Alternative standardised approach***
Section 1
**General provisions**
Article 325c
Scope and structure of the alternative standardised approach
## Institutions shall calculate the own funds requirements for market risk in accordance with the alternative standardised approach for a portfolio of trading book positions or non-trading book positions that are subject to foreign exchange or commodity risk as the sum of the following three components:
### (a) the own funds requirement under the sensitivities-based method set out in Section 2;
#### (b) the own funds requirement for the default risk set out in Section 5 which is only applicable to the trading book positions referred to in that Section;
##### (c) the own funds requirement for residual risks set out in Section 4 which is only applicable to the trading book positions referred to in that Section.
Section 2
**Sensitivities-based method for calculating the own funds requirement**
Article 325d
Definitions
#### For the purposes of this Chapter, the following definitions apply:
##### (1) ‘risk class’ means one of the following seven categories:
(i) general interest rate risk;
(ii) credit spread risk (CSR) for non-securitisation;
(iii) credit spread risk for securitisation not included in the alternative correlation trading portfolio (non-ACTP CSR);
@@ -8313,9 +8812,9 @@
(3) ‘bucket’ means a sub-category of positions within one risk class with a similar risk profile to which a risk weight as defined in Subsection 1 of Section 3 is assigned.
#### Article 325e
##### Components of the sensitivities-based method
Article 325e
Components of the sensitivities-based method
Institutions shall calculate the own funds requirement for market risk under the sensitivities-based method by aggregating the following three own funds requirements in accordance with Article 325h:
@@ -8327,65 +8826,65 @@
For the purpose of the calculation referred to in paragraph 1,
(a) all the positions of instruments with optionality shall be subject to the own funds requirements referred to in points (a), (b) and (c) of paragraph 1;
(b) all the positions of instruments without optionality shall only be subject to the own funds requirements referred to in point (a) of paragraph 1.
#### (a) all the positions of instruments with optionality shall be subject to the own funds requirements referred to in points (a), (b) and (c) of paragraph 1;
##### (b) all the positions of instruments without optionality shall only be subject to the own funds requirements referred to in point (a) of paragraph 1.
For the purposes of this Chapter, instruments with optionality include, among others: calls, puts, caps, floors, swap options, barrier options and exotic options. Embedded options, such as prepayment or behavioural options, shall be considered to be stand-alone positions in options for the purpose of calculating the own funds requirements for market risk.
For the purposes of this Chapter, instruments whose cash flows can be written as a linear function of the underlying's notional amount shall be considered to be instruments without optionality.
#### Article 325f
##### Own funds requirements for delta and vega risks
Article 325f
Own funds requirements for delta and vega risks
The net sensitivities to each risk factor within each bucket shall be multiplied by the corresponding risk weights set out in Section 6, giving rise to weighted sensitivities to each risk factor within that bucket in accordance with the following formula:
The weighted sensitivities to the different risk factors within each bucket shall be aggregated in accordance with the formula below, where the quantity within the square root function is floored at zero, giving rise to the bucket-specific sensitivity. The corresponding correlations for weighted sensitivities within the same bucket (ρkl), set out in Section 6, shall be used.
The bucket-specific sensitivity shall be calculated for each bucket within a risk class in accordance with paragraphs 5, 6 and 7. Once the bucket-specific sensitivity has been calculated for all buckets, weighted sensitivities to all risk factors across buckets shall be aggregated in accordance with the formula below, using the corresponding correlations γbc for weighted sensitivities in different buckets set out in Section 6, giving rise to the risk-class specific own funds requirement for delta or vega risk:
#### The weighted sensitivities to the different risk factors within each bucket shall be aggregated in accordance with the formula below, where the quantity within the square root function is floored at zero, giving rise to the bucket-specific sensitivity. The corresponding correlations for weighted sensitivities within the same bucket (ρkl), set out in Section 6, shall be used.
##### The bucket-specific sensitivity shall be calculated for each bucket within a risk class in accordance with paragraphs 5, 6 and 7. Once the bucket-specific sensitivity has been calculated for all buckets, weighted sensitivities to all risk factors across buckets shall be aggregated in accordance with the formula below, using the corresponding correlations γbc for weighted sensitivities in different buckets set out in Section 6, giving rise to the risk-class specific own funds requirement for delta or vega risk:
where:
The risk-class specific own funds requirements for delta or vega risk shall be calculated for each risk class in accordance with paragraphs 1 to 8.
#### Article 325g
##### Own funds requirements for curvature risk
#### The risk-class specific own funds requirements for delta or vega risk shall be calculated for each risk class in accordance with paragraphs 1 to 8.
##### Article 325g
Own funds requirements for curvature risk
Institutions shall calculate the own funds requirements for curvature risk in accordance with the delegated act referred to in Article 461a.
#### Article 325h
##### Aggregation of risk-class specific own funds requirements for delta, vega and curvature risks
The process to calculate the risk-class specific own funds requirements for delta, vega and curvature risks described in Articles 325f and 325g shall be performed three times per risk class, each time using a different set of correlation parameters ρkl (correlation between risk factors within a bucket) and γbc (correlation between buckets within a risk class). Each of those three sets shall correspond to a different scenario, as follows:
(a) the medium correlations scenario, whereby the correlation parameters ρkl and γbc remain unchanged from those specified in Section 6;
Article 325h
Aggregation of risk-class specific own funds requirements for delta, vega and curvature risks
#### The process to calculate the risk-class specific own funds requirements for delta, vega and curvature risks described in Articles 325f and 325g shall be performed three times per risk class, each time using a different set of correlation parameters ρkl (correlation between risk factors within a bucket) and γbc (correlation between buckets within a risk class). Each of those three sets shall correspond to a different scenario, as follows:
##### (a) the medium correlations scenario, whereby the correlation parameters ρkl and γbc remain unchanged from those specified in Section 6;
(b) the high correlations scenario, whereby the correlation parameters ρkl and γbc that are specified in Section 6 shall be uniformly multiplied by 1,25, with ρkl and γbc subject to a cap at 100 %;
(c) the low correlations scenario shall be specified in the delegated act referred to in Article 461a.
#### Article 325i
##### Treatment of index instruments and multi-underlying options
Institutions shall treat the index instruments and multi-underlying options in accordance with the delegated act referred to in Article 461a.
#### Article 325j
##### Treatment of collective investment undertakings
#### (c) the low correlations scenario shall be specified in the delegated act referred to in Article 461a.
##### Article 325i
Treatment of index instruments and multi-underlying options
#### Institutions shall treat the index instruments and multi-underlying options in accordance with the delegated act referred to in Article 461a.
##### Article 325j
Treatment of collective investment undertakings
Institutions shall treat the collective investment undertakings in accordance with the delegated act referred to in Article 461a.
#### Article 325k
##### Underwriting positions
Institutions shall apply one of the appropriate multiplying factors listed in Table 1 to the net sensitivities of all the underwriting positions in each individual issuer, excluding the underwriting positions which are subscribed or sub-underwritten by third parties on the basis of formal agreements, and calculate the own funds requirements for market risk in accordance with the approach set out in this Chapter on the basis of the adjusted net sensitivities.
| Business day 0 | 0 % |
Article 325k
## Underwriting positions
### Institutions shall apply one of the appropriate multiplying factors listed in Table 1 to the net sensitivities of all the underwriting positions in each individual issuer, excluding the underwriting positions which are subscribed or sub-underwritten by third parties on the basis of formal agreements, and calculate the own funds requirements for market risk in accordance with the approach set out in this Chapter on the basis of the adjusted net sensitivities.
## | Business day 0 | 0 % |
| --- | --- |
| Business day 1 | 10 % |
| Business days 2 and 3 | 25 % |
@@ -8393,19 +8892,19 @@
| Business day 5 | 75 % |
| After business day 5 | 100 % |
For the purposes of this Article, ‘business day 0’ means the business day on which the institution becomes unconditionally committed to accepting a known quantity of securities at an agreed price.
## Section 3
### **Risk factor and sensitivity definitions**
## Subsection 1
### **Risk factor definitions**
#### Article 325l
##### General interest rate risk factors
### For the purposes of this Article, ‘business day 0’ means the business day on which the institution becomes unconditionally committed to accepting a known quantity of securities at an agreed price.
#### Section 3
##### **Risk factor and sensitivity definitions**
Subsection 1
**Risk factor definitions**
Article 325l
General interest rate risk factors
The delta general interest rate risk factors applicable to interest rate-sensitive instruments shall be the relevant risk-free rates per currency and per each of the following maturities: 0,25 years, 0,5 years, 1 year, 2 years, 3 years, 5 years, 10 years, 15 years, 20 years, 30 years. Institutions shall assign risk factors to the specified vertices by linear interpolation or by using a method that is most consistent with the pricing functions used by the independent risk control function of the institution to report market risk or profits and losses to senior management.
@@ -8421,23 +8920,23 @@
For netting purposes, institutions shall consider implied volatilities linked to the same risk-free rates and mapped to the same maturities to constitute the same risk factor.
Where institutions map implied volatilities to the maturities as referred to in this paragraph, the following requirements shall apply:
(a) where the maturity of the option is aligned with the maturity of the underlying, a single risk factor shall be considered, which shall be mapped to that maturity;
(b) where the maturity of the option is shorter than the maturity of the underlying, the following risk factors shall be considered as follows:
#### Where institutions map implied volatilities to the maturities as referred to in this paragraph, the following requirements shall apply:
##### (a) where the maturity of the option is aligned with the maturity of the underlying, a single risk factor shall be considered, which shall be mapped to that maturity;
#### (b) where the maturity of the option is shorter than the maturity of the underlying, the following risk factors shall be considered as follows:
(i) the first risk factor shall be mapped to the maturity of the option;
(ii) the second risk factor shall be mapped to the residual maturity of the underlying of the option at the expiry date of the option.
There shall be no curvature risk own funds requirements for inflation and cross currency basis risks.
#### Article 325m
##### Credit spread risk factors for non-securitisation
#### Article 325n
##### Credit spread risk factors for securitisation
##### There shall be no curvature risk own funds requirements for inflation and cross currency basis risks.
Article 325m
Credit spread risk factors for non-securitisation
Article 325n
Credit spread risk factors for securitisation
Institutions shall apply the credit spread risk factors referred to in paragraph 5 to securitisation positions that are not included in the ACTP, as referred to in Article 325(6), (7) and (8).
@@ -8451,9 +8950,9 @@
(c) the curvature risk factors shall be the relevant credit spread yield curves of the issuers of the underlying exposures of the securitisation position expressed as a vector of credit spread rates for different maturities, inferred as indicated in point (a) of this paragraph; for each instrument, the vector shall contain as many components as there are different maturities of credit spread rates that are used as variables by the institution's pricing model for that instrument.
The credit spread risk factors to be applied by institutions to securitisation positions that are not included in the ACTP shall refer to the spread of the tranche rather than the spread of the underlying instruments and shall be the following:
(a) the delta risk factors shall be the relevant tranche credit spread rates, mapped to the following maturities, in accordance with the maturity of the tranche: 0,5 years, 1 year, 3 years, 5 years, 10 years;
#### The credit spread risk factors to be applied by institutions to securitisation positions that are not included in the ACTP shall refer to the spread of the tranche rather than the spread of the underlying instruments and shall be the following:
##### (a) the delta risk factors shall be the relevant tranche credit spread rates, mapped to the following maturities, in accordance with the maturity of the tranche: 0,5 years, 1 year, 3 years, 5 years, 10 years;
(b) the vega risk factors applicable to options with securitisation positions that are not included in the ACTP as underlyings shall be the implied volatilities of the credit spreads of the tranches, each of them mapped to the following maturities in accordance with the maturity of the option subject to own funds requirements: 0,5 years, 1 year, 3 years, 5 years, 10 years;
@@ -8465,25 +8964,25 @@
For the purposes of equity risk, a specific equity repo curve shall constitute a single risk factor, which is expressed as a vector of repo rates for different maturities. For each instrument, the vector shall contain as many components as there are different maturities of repo rates that are used as variables by the institution's pricing model for that instrument.
Institutions shall calculate the sensitivity of an instrument to an equity risk factor as the change in the value of the instrument, according to its pricing model, as a result of a 1 basis point shift in each of the components of the vector. Institutions shall offset sensitivities to the repo rate risk factor of the same equity security, regardless of the number of components of each vector.
#### Article 325p
##### Commodity risk factors
The sensitivity of the instrument to each risk factor used in the curvature risk formula shall be calculated as specified in Article 325g. For the purposes of curvature risk, institutions shall consider vectors having a different number of components to constitute the same risk factor, provided that those vectors correspond to the same commodity type.
#### Institutions shall calculate the sensitivity of an instrument to an equity risk factor as the change in the value of the instrument, according to its pricing model, as a result of a 1 basis point shift in each of the components of the vector. Institutions shall offset sensitivities to the repo rate risk factor of the same equity security, regardless of the number of components of each vector.
##### Article 325p
## Commodity risk factors
### The sensitivity of the instrument to each risk factor used in the curvature risk formula shall be calculated as specified in Article 325g. For the purposes of curvature risk, institutions shall consider vectors having a different number of components to constitute the same risk factor, provided that those vectors correspond to the same commodity type.
#### Article 325q
##### Foreign exchange risk factors
## Subsection 2
### **Sensitivity definitions**
#### Article 325r
##### Delta risk sensitivities
Subsection 2
**Sensitivity definitions**
Article 325r
Delta risk sensitivities
Institutions shall calculate delta general interest rate risk (GIRR) sensitivities as follows:
@@ -8554,9 +9053,9 @@
=
risk factors other than
in the pricing function Vi.
Institutions shall calculate the delta commodity risk sensitivities to each risk factor k as follows:
#### in the pricing function Vi.
##### Institutions shall calculate the delta commodity risk sensitivities to each risk factor k as follows:
where:
@@ -8570,9 +9069,9 @@
Institutions shall calculate the vega risk sensitivity of an option to a given risk factor k as follows:
#### where:
##### Article 325t
where:
Article 325t
Requirements on sensitivity computations
@@ -8586,21 +9085,21 @@
By way of derogation from paragraph 1, subject to the permission of the competent authorities, an institution may use alternative definitions of delta risk sensitivities in the calculation of the own funds requirements of a trading book position under this Chapter, provided that the institution meets all the following conditions:
(a) those alternative definitions are used for internal risk management purposes and for the reporting of profits and losses to senior management by an independent risk control unit within the institution;
(b) the institution demonstrates that those alternative definitions are more appropriate for capturing the sensitivities for the position than are the formulas set out in this Subsection, and that the resulting sensitivities do not materially differ from those formulas.
By way of derogation from paragraph 1, subject to the permission of the competent authorities, an institution may calculate vega sensitivities on the basis of a linear transformation of alternative definitions of sensitivities in the calculation of the own funds requirements of a trading book position under this Chapter, provided that the institution meets both the following conditions:
(a) those alternative definitions are used for internal risk management purposes and for the reporting of profits and losses to senior management by an independent risk control unit within the institution;
## (b) the institution demonstrates that those alternative definitions are more appropriate for capturing the sensitivities for the position than are the formulas set out in this Subsection, and that the linear transformation referred to in the first subparagraph reflects a vega risk sensitivity.
### Section 4
#### **The residual risk add-on**
##### Article 325u
## (a) those alternative definitions are used for internal risk management purposes and for the reporting of profits and losses to senior management by an independent risk control unit within the institution;
### (b) the institution demonstrates that those alternative definitions are more appropriate for capturing the sensitivities for the position than are the formulas set out in this Subsection, and that the resulting sensitivities do not materially differ from those formulas.
#### By way of derogation from paragraph 1, subject to the permission of the competent authorities, an institution may calculate vega sensitivities on the basis of a linear transformation of alternative definitions of sensitivities in the calculation of the own funds requirements of a trading book position under this Chapter, provided that the institution meets both the following conditions:
##### (a) those alternative definitions are used for internal risk management purposes and for the reporting of profits and losses to senior management by an independent risk control unit within the institution;
(b) the institution demonstrates that those alternative definitions are more appropriate for capturing the sensitivities for the position than are the formulas set out in this Subsection, and that the linear transformation referred to in the first subparagraph reflects a vega risk sensitivity.
Section 4
**The residual risk add-on**
Article 325u
Own funds requirements for residual risks
@@ -8622,95 +9121,95 @@
(a) the instrument is listed on a recognised exchange;
(b) the instrument is eligible for central clearing in accordance with Regulation (EU) No 648/2012;
(c) the instrument perfectly offsets the market risk of another position in the trading book, in which case the two perfectly matching trading book positions shall be exempted from the own funds requirement for residual risks.
When developing those draft regulatory technical standards, EBA shall examine whether longevity risk, weather, natural disasters and future realised volatility should be considered as exotic underlyings.
## (b) the instrument is eligible for central clearing in accordance with Regulation (EU) No 648/2012;
### (c) the instrument perfectly offsets the market risk of another position in the trading book, in which case the two perfectly matching trading book positions shall be exempted from the own funds requirement for residual risks.
#### When developing those draft regulatory technical standards, EBA shall examine whether longevity risk, weather, natural disasters and future realised volatility should be considered as exotic underlyings.
##### EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 28 June 2021.
Power is delegated to the Commission to supplement this Regulation by adopting the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
Section 5
**Own funds requirements for the default risk**
Article 325v
Definitions and general provisions
For the purposes of this Section, the following definitions apply:
(a) ‘short exposure’ means that the default of an issuer or group of issuers leads to a gain for the institution, regardless of the type of instrument or transaction creating the exposure;
## (b) ‘long exposure’ means that the default of an issuer or group of issuers leads to a loss for the institution, regardless of the type of instrument or transaction creating the exposure;
### (c) ‘gross jump-to-default (gross JTD) amount’ means the estimated size of the loss or gain that the default of the obligor would produce for a specific exposure;
#### (d) ‘net jump-to-default (net JTD) amount’ means the estimated size of the loss or gain that an institution would incur due to the default of an obligor, after offsetting between gross JTD amounts has taken place,
##### (e) ‘loss given default’ or ‘LGD’ means the loss given default of the obligor on an instrument issued by that obligor expressed as a share of the notional amount of the instrument;
(f) ‘default risk weight’ means the percentage representing the estimated probability of the default of each obligor, according to the creditworthiness of that obligor.
Subsection 1
**Own funds requirements for the default risk for non-securitisations**
Article 325w
Gross jump-to-default amounts
Institutions shall calculate the gross JTD amounts for each long exposure to debt instruments as follows:
Institutions shall calculate the gross JTD amounts for each short exposure to debt instruments as follows:
For the purposes of the calculation set out in paragraphs 1 and 2, the LGD for debt instruments to be applied by institutions shall be the following:
(a) exposures to non-senior debt instruments shall be assigned an LGD of 100 %;
(b) exposures to senior debt instruments shall be assigned an LGD of 75 %;
(c) exposures to covered bonds, as referred to in Article 129, shall be assigned an LGD of 25 %.
For the purposes of the calculations set out in paragraphs 1 and 2, notional amounts shall be determined as follows:
(a) in the case of debt instruments, the notional amount is the face value of the debt instrument;
(b) in the case of derivative instruments with debt security underlyings, the notional amount is the notional amount of the derivative instrument.
For exposures to equity instruments, institutions shall calculate the gross JTD amounts as follows, instead of using the formulas referred to in paragraphs 1 and 2:
EBA shall develop draft regulatory technical standards to specify:
#### (a) how institutions are to calculate JTD amounts for different types of instruments in accordance with this Article;
##### (b) which alternative methodologies institutions are to use for the purposes of the estimation of gross JTD amounts referred to in paragraph 7.
(c) the notional amounts of instruments other than the ones referred to in points (a) and (b) of paragraph 4.
EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 28 June 2021.
## Power is delegated to the Commission to supplement this Regulation by adopting the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
### Section 5
#### **Own funds requirements for the default risk**
##### Article 325v
Definitions and general provisions
For the purposes of this Section, the following definitions apply:
(a) ‘short exposure’ means that the default of an issuer or group of issuers leads to a gain for the institution, regardless of the type of instrument or transaction creating the exposure;
(b) ‘long exposure’ means that the default of an issuer or group of issuers leads to a loss for the institution, regardless of the type of instrument or transaction creating the exposure;
(c) ‘gross jump-to-default (gross JTD) amount’ means the estimated size of the loss or gain that the default of the obligor would produce for a specific exposure;
(d) ‘net jump-to-default (net JTD) amount’ means the estimated size of the loss or gain that an institution would incur due to the default of an obligor, after offsetting between gross JTD amounts has taken place,
(e) ‘loss given default’ or ‘LGD’ means the loss given default of the obligor on an instrument issued by that obligor expressed as a share of the notional amount of the instrument;
## (f) ‘default risk weight’ means the percentage representing the estimated probability of the default of each obligor, according to the creditworthiness of that obligor.
### Subsection 1
#### **Own funds requirements for the default risk for non-securitisations**
##### Article 325w
Gross jump-to-default amounts
Institutions shall calculate the gross JTD amounts for each long exposure to debt instruments as follows:
Institutions shall calculate the gross JTD amounts for each short exposure to debt instruments as follows:
For the purposes of the calculation set out in paragraphs 1 and 2, the LGD for debt instruments to be applied by institutions shall be the following:
(a) exposures to non-senior debt instruments shall be assigned an LGD of 100 %;
(b) exposures to senior debt instruments shall be assigned an LGD of 75 %;
(c) exposures to covered bonds, as referred to in Article 129, shall be assigned an LGD of 25 %.
For the purposes of the calculations set out in paragraphs 1 and 2, notional amounts shall be determined as follows:
(a) in the case of debt instruments, the notional amount is the face value of the debt instrument;
(b) in the case of derivative instruments with debt security underlyings, the notional amount is the notional amount of the derivative instrument.
For exposures to equity instruments, institutions shall calculate the gross JTD amounts as follows, instead of using the formulas referred to in paragraphs 1 and 2:
EBA shall develop draft regulatory technical standards to specify:
(a) how institutions are to calculate JTD amounts for different types of instruments in accordance with this Article;
(b) which alternative methodologies institutions are to use for the purposes of the estimation of gross JTD amounts referred to in paragraph 7.
(c) the notional amounts of instruments other than the ones referred to in points (a) and (b) of paragraph 4.
EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 28 June 2021.
#### Power is delegated to the Commission to supplement this Regulation by adopting the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
##### Article 325x
Net jump-to-default amounts
Power is delegated to the Commission to supplement this Regulation by adopting the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
#### Article 325x
##### Net jump-to-default amounts
Offsetting shall be either full or partial, depending on the maturities of the offsetting exposures:
(a) offsetting shall be full where all offsetting exposures have maturities of one year or more;
#### (b) offsetting shall be partial where at least one of the offsetting exposures has a maturity of less than one year, in which case the size of the JTD amount of each exposure with a maturity of less than one year shall be multiplied by the ratio of the exposure's maturity relative to one year.
##### Article 325y
Calculation of the own funds requirements for the default risk
Net JTD amounts, irrespective of the type of counterparty, shall be multiplied by the default risk weights that correspond to their credit quality, as specified in Table 2:
| Credit quality category | Default risk weight |
(b) offsetting shall be partial where at least one of the offsetting exposures has a maturity of less than one year, in which case the size of the JTD amount of each exposure with a maturity of less than one year shall be multiplied by the ratio of the exposure's maturity relative to one year.
Article 325y
## Calculation of the own funds requirements for the default risk
### Net JTD amounts, irrespective of the type of counterparty, shall be multiplied by the default risk weights that correspond to their credit quality, as specified in Table 2:
#### | Credit quality category | Default risk weight |
| --- | --- |
| Credit quality step 1 | 0,5 % |
| Credit quality step 2 | 3 % |
@@ -8721,39 +9220,39 @@
| Unrated | 15 % |
| Defaulted | 100 % |
Weighted net JTD amounts shall be aggregated within each bucket, in accordance with the following formula:
## For the purposes of calculating the DRCb and the WtS, the long positions and short positions shall be aggregated for all positions within a bucket, regardless of the credit quality step to which those positions are allocated, to produce the bucket-specific own funds requirements for the default risk.
### Subsection 2
#### **Own funds requirements for the default risk for securitisations not included in the ACTP**
##### Article 325z
#### Jump-to-default amounts
##### Article 325aa
Calculation of the own funds requirement for the default risk for securitisations
Risk-weighted net JTD amounts shall be assigned to the following buckets:
(a) one common bucket for all corporates, regardless of the region;
(b) 44 different buckets corresponding to one bucket per region for each of the 11 asset classes defined in the second subparagraph.
## For the purposes of the first subparagraph, the 11 asset classes are ABCP, auto loans/leases, residential mortgage-backed securities (RMBS), credit cards, commercial mortgage-backed securities (CMBS), collateralised loan obligations, collateralised debt obligations squared (CDO-squared), small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs), student loans, other retail, other wholesale. The four regions are Asia, Europe, North America, and rest of the world.
### Subsection 3
#### **Own funds requirements for the default risk for securitisations included in the ACTP**
##### Article 325ab
#### Scope
##### Article 325ac
##### Weighted net JTD amounts shall be aggregated within each bucket, in accordance with the following formula:
#### For the purposes of calculating the DRCb and the WtS, the long positions and short positions shall be aggregated for all positions within a bucket, regardless of the credit quality step to which those positions are allocated, to produce the bucket-specific own funds requirements for the default risk.
##### Subsection 2
**Own funds requirements for the default risk for securitisations not included in the ACTP**
Article 325z
Jump-to-default amounts
Article 325aa
## Calculation of the own funds requirement for the default risk for securitisations
### Risk-weighted net JTD amounts shall be assigned to the following buckets:
#### (a) one common bucket for all corporates, regardless of the region;
##### (b) 44 different buckets corresponding to one bucket per region for each of the 11 asset classes defined in the second subparagraph.
#### For the purposes of the first subparagraph, the 11 asset classes are ABCP, auto loans/leases, residential mortgage-backed securities (RMBS), credit cards, commercial mortgage-backed securities (CMBS), collateralised loan obligations, collateralised debt obligations squared (CDO-squared), small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs), student loans, other retail, other wholesale. The four regions are Asia, Europe, North America, and rest of the world.
##### Subsection 3
**Own funds requirements for the default risk for securitisations included in the ACTP**
Article 325ab
Scope
Article 325ac
Jump-to-default amounts for the ACTP
@@ -8772,37 +9271,37 @@
(b) detachment point = N / Total Names;
where ‘Total Names’ shall be the total number of names in the underlying basket or pool.
Net JTD amounts shall be determined by offsetting long gross JTD amounts and short gross JTD amounts. Offsetting shall only be possible between exposures that are otherwise identical except for maturity. Offsetting shall only be possible as follows:
(a) for indices, index tranches and bespoke tranches, offsetting shall be possible across maturities within the same index family, series and tranche, subject to the provisions on exposures of less than one year laid down in Article 325x; long gross JTD amounts and short gross JTD amounts that perfectly replicate each other may be offset through decomposition into single name equivalent exposures using a valuation model; in such cases, the sum of the gross JTD amounts of the single name equivalent exposures obtained through decomposition shall be equal to the gross JTD amount of the undecomposed exposure;
#### Net JTD amounts shall be determined by offsetting long gross JTD amounts and short gross JTD amounts. Offsetting shall only be possible between exposures that are otherwise identical except for maturity. Offsetting shall only be possible as follows:
##### (a) for indices, index tranches and bespoke tranches, offsetting shall be possible across maturities within the same index family, series and tranche, subject to the provisions on exposures of less than one year laid down in Article 325x; long gross JTD amounts and short gross JTD amounts that perfectly replicate each other may be offset through decomposition into single name equivalent exposures using a valuation model; in such cases, the sum of the gross JTD amounts of the single name equivalent exposures obtained through decomposition shall be equal to the gross JTD amount of the undecomposed exposure;
(b) offsetting through decomposition as set out is point (a) shall not be allowed for resecuritisations or derivatives on securitisation;
(c) for indices and index tranches, offsetting shall be possible across maturities within the same index family, series and tranche by replication or by decomposition; where the long exposures and short exposures are otherwise equivalent, apart from one residual component, offsetting shall be allowed and the net JTD amount shall reflect the residual exposure;
#### (d) different tranches of the same index series, different series of the same index and different index families may not be used to offset each other.
##### Article 325ad
(d) different tranches of the same index series, different series of the same index and different index families may not be used to offset each other.
Article 325ad
Calculation of the own funds requirements for the default risk for the ACTP
Net JTD amounts shall be multiplied by:
(a) for tranched products, the default risk weights corresponding to their credit quality as specified in Article 325y(1) and (2);
(b) for non-tranched products, the default risk weights referred to in Article 325aa(1).
Weighted net JTD amounts shall be aggregated within each bucket in accordance with the following formula:
Institutions shall calculate the own funds requirements for the default risk for the ACTP by using the following formula:
## where:
### Section 6
## **Risk weights and correlations**
### Subsection 1
## (a) for tranched products, the default risk weights corresponding to their credit quality as specified in Article 325y(1) and (2);
### (b) for non-tranched products, the default risk weights referred to in Article 325aa(1).
## Weighted net JTD amounts shall be aggregated within each bucket in accordance with the following formula:
### Institutions shall calculate the own funds requirements for the default risk for the ACTP by using the following formula:
#### where:
##### Section 6
**Risk weights and correlations**
Subsection 1
#### **Delta risk weights and correlations**
@@ -8827,13 +9326,13 @@
##### Article 325af
Intra bucket correlations for general interest rate risk
Between two weighted sensitivities of general interest rate risk factors WSk and WSl within the same bucket, corresponding to the same curve, but having different maturities, correlation shall be set in accordance with the following formula:
#### where:
##### Article 325ag
#### Intra bucket correlations for general interest rate risk
##### Between two weighted sensitivities of general interest rate risk factors WSk and WSl within the same bucket, corresponding to the same curve, but having different maturities, correlation shall be set in accordance with the following formula:
where:
Article 325ag
#### Correlations across buckets for general interest rate risk
@@ -8891,11 +9390,11 @@
##### Article 325ak
Risk weights for credit spread risk for securitisations included in the ACTP
Risk weights for the sensitivities to credit spread risk factors for securitisations included in the ACTP risk factors shall be the same for all maturities (0,5 years, 1 year, 3 years, 5 years, 10 years) within each bucket and shall be specified for each bucket in Table 6 pursuant to the delegated act referred to in Article 461a:
#### | Bucket number | Credit quality | Sector |
#### Risk weights for credit spread risk for securitisations included in the ACTP
##### Risk weights for the sensitivities to credit spread risk factors for securitisations included in the ACTP risk factors shall be the same for all maturities (0,5 years, 1 year, 3 years, 5 years, 10 years) within each bucket and shall be specified for each bucket in Table 6 pursuant to the delegated act referred to in Article 461a:
| Bucket number | Credit quality | Sector |
| --- | --- | --- |
| 1 | All | Central government, including central banks, of Member States |
| 2 | Credit quality step 1 to 3 | Central government, including central banks, of a third country, multilateral development banks and international organisations referred to in Article 117(2) or Article 118 |
@@ -8916,7 +9415,7 @@
| 17 | Health care, utilities, professional and technical activities | |
| 18 | Other sector | |
##### Article 325al
Article 325al
#### Correlations for credit spread risk for securitisations included in the ACTP
@@ -8956,22 +9455,22 @@
##### Article 325an
Intra-bucket correlations for credit spread risk for securitisations not included in the ACTP
Between two sensitivities *W*S*k* and *W*S*l* within the same bucket, the correlation parameter *ρk*
#### Intra-bucket correlations for credit spread risk for securitisations not included in the ACTP
##### Between two sensitivities *W*S*k* and *W*S*l* within the same bucket, the correlation parameter *ρk*
l shall be set as follows:
#### The correlation parameters referred to in paragraph 1 shall not apply to bucket 25 in Table 7 of Article 325am(1). The own funds requirement for the delta risk aggregation formula within bucket 25 shall be equal to the sum of the absolute values of the net weighted sensitivities allocated to that bucket:
##### Article 325ao
#### Correlations across buckets for credit spread risk for securitisations not included in the ACTP
##### Article 325ap
Risk weights for equity risk
Risk weights for the sensitivities to equity and equity repo rate risk factors shall be specified for each bucket in Table 8 pursuant to the delegated act referred to in Article 461a:
The correlation parameters referred to in paragraph 1 shall not apply to bucket 25 in Table 7 of Article 325am(1). The own funds requirement for the delta risk aggregation formula within bucket 25 shall be equal to the sum of the absolute values of the net weighted sensitivities allocated to that bucket:
Article 325ao
Correlations across buckets for credit spread risk for securitisations not included in the ACTP
Article 325ap
#### Risk weights for equity risk
##### Risk weights for the sensitivities to equity and equity repo rate risk factors shall be specified for each bucket in Table 8 pursuant to the delegated act referred to in Article 461a:
| Bucket number | Market capitalisation | Economy | Sector |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
@@ -8989,25 +9488,25 @@
EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 28 June 2021.
#### Power is delegated to the Commission to supplement this Regulation by adopting the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
##### Article 325aq
Power is delegated to the Commission to supplement this Regulation by adopting the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
Article 325aq
Intra-bucket correlations for equity risk
In other cases than the cases referred to in paragraph 1, the correlation parameter ρkl between two sensitivities *W*S*k* and *W*S*l* to equity spot price within the same bucket shall be set as follows:
(a) 15 % between two sensitivities within the same bucket that fall under the category large market capitalisation, emerging market economy (bucket number 1, 2, 3 or 4);
(b) 25 % between two sensitivities within the same bucket that fall under the category large market capitalisation, advanced economy (bucket number 5, 6, 7 or 8);
#### (a) 15 % between two sensitivities within the same bucket that fall under the category large market capitalisation, emerging market economy (bucket number 1, 2, 3 or 4);
##### (b) 25 % between two sensitivities within the same bucket that fall under the category large market capitalisation, advanced economy (bucket number 5, 6, 7 or 8);
(c) 7,5 % between two sensitivities within the same bucket that fall under the category small market capitalisation, emerging market economy (bucket number 9);
(d) 12,5 % between two sensitivities within the same bucket that fall under the category small market capitalisation, advanced economy (bucket number 10).
#### The correlation parameters specified in paragraphs 1 to 4 shall not apply to bucket 11. The capital requirement for the delta risk aggregation formula within bucket 11 shall be equal to the sum of the absolute values of the net weighted sensitivities allocated to that bucket:
##### Article 325ar
#### (d) 12,5 % between two sensitivities within the same bucket that fall under the category small market capitalisation, advanced economy (bucket number 10).
##### The correlation parameters specified in paragraphs 1 to 4 shall not apply to bucket 11. The capital requirement for the delta risk aggregation formula within bucket 11 shall be equal to the sum of the absolute values of the net weighted sensitivities allocated to that bucket:
Article 325ar
Correlations across buckets for equity risk
@@ -9020,7 +9519,7 @@
Risk weights for sensitivities to commodity risk factors shall be specified for each bucket in Table 9 pursuant to the delegated act referred to in Article 461a:
#### | Bucket number | Bucket name |
| Bucket number | Bucket name |
| --- | --- |
| 1 | Energy - solid combustibles |
| 2 | Energy - liquid combustibles |
@@ -9034,17 +9533,17 @@
| 10 | Softs and other agricultural commodities |
| 11 | Other commodity |
##### Article 325at
Article 325at
Intra-bucket correlations for commodity risk
The correlation parameter *ρk*
l between two sensitivities *W*S*k* and *W*S*l* within the same bucket shall be set as follows:
The intra-bucket correlations ρkl
#### The intra-bucket correlations ρkl
<sup>(commodity)</sup> are:
| Bucket number | Bucket name | Correlation ρkl (commodity) |
##### | Bucket number | Bucket name | Correlation ρkl (commodity) |
| --- | --- | --- |
| 1 | Energy - solid combustibles | 55 % |
| 2 | Energy - liquid combustibles | 95 % |
@@ -9062,49 +9561,49 @@
(a) two risk factors that are allocated to bucket 3 in Table 10 and that concern electricity which is generated in different regions or is delivered at different periods under the contractual agreement shall be considered distinct commodity risk factors;
#### (b) two risk factors that are allocated to bucket 4 in Table 10 and that concern freight where the freight route or week of delivery differ shall be considered distinct commodity risk factors.
##### Article 325au
Correlations across buckets for commodity risk
(b) two risk factors that are allocated to bucket 4 in Table 10 and that concern freight where the freight route or week of delivery differ shall be considered distinct commodity risk factors.
#### Article 325au
##### Correlations across buckets for commodity risk
The correlation parameter *γb*
c applying to the aggregation of sensitivities between different buckets shall be set at:
(a) 20 % where the two buckets fall within bucket numbers 1 to 10;
#### (b) 0 % where either of the two buckets is bucket number 11.
##### Article 325av
Risk weights for foreign exchange risk
(b) 0 % where either of the two buckets is bucket number 11.
#### Article 325av
##### Risk weights for foreign exchange risk
The risk weight of the foreign exchange risk factors concerning currency pairs which are composed of the euro and the currency of a Member State participating in the second stage of the economic and monetary union (ERM II) shall be one of the following:
(a) the risk weight referred to in paragraph 1, divided by 3;
#### (b) the maximum fluctuation within the fluctuation band formally agreed by the Member State and the European Central Bank, if that fluctuation band is narrower than the fluctuation band defined under ERM II.
##### Article 325aw
Correlations for foreign exchange risk
## A uniform correlation parameter *γb*
## (a) the risk weight referred to in paragraph 1, divided by 3;
### (b) the maximum fluctuation within the fluctuation band formally agreed by the Member State and the European Central Bank, if that fluctuation band is narrower than the fluctuation band defined under ERM II.
#### Article 325aw
##### Correlations for foreign exchange risk
A uniform correlation parameter *γb*
c equal to 60 % shall apply to the aggregation of sensitivities to foreign exchange risk factors.
### Subsection 2
#### **Vega and curvature risk weights and correlations**
##### Article 325ax
Vega and curvature risk weights
Subsection 2
**Vega and curvature risk weights and correlations**
#### Article 325ax
##### Vega and curvature risk weights
The share referred to in paragraph 2 shall be made dependent on the presumed liquidity of each type of risk factor in accordance with the following formula:
where:
#### | Risk class | LHrisk class |
| Risk class | LHrisk class |
| --- | --- |
| GIRR | 60 |
| CSR non-securitisations | 120 |
@@ -9115,27 +9614,27 @@
| Commodity | 120 |
| Foreign exchange | 40 |
##### Article 325ay
Vega and curvature risk correlations
Between vega risk sensitivities within the same bucket of the general interest rate risk (GIRR) class, the correlation parameter rkl shall be set as follows:
where:
Between vega risk sensitivities within a bucket of the other risk classes, the correlation parameter ρkl shall be set as follows:
Article 325ay
## Vega and curvature risk correlations
### Between vega risk sensitivities within the same bucket of the general interest rate risk (GIRR) class, the correlation parameter rkl shall be set as follows:
## where:
### *CHAPTER 1b*
## ***Alternative internal model approach***
### Section 1
#### **Permission and own funds requirements**
##### Article 325az
### Between vega risk sensitivities within a bucket of the other risk classes, the correlation parameter ρkl shall be set as follows:
#### where:
##### *CHAPTER 1b*
***Alternative internal model approach***
Section 1
**Permission and own funds requirements**
Article 325az
Alternative internal model approach and permission to use alternative internal models
@@ -9167,37 +9666,37 @@
Power is delegated to the Commission to supplement this Regulation by adopting the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
EBA shall develop draft regulatory technical standards to specify the extraordinary circumstances under which competent authorities may permit an institution:
(a) to continue using its alternative internal models for the purpose of calculating the own funds requirements for the market risk of a trading desk that no longer meets the conditions referred to in point (c) of paragraph 2 of this Article and in Article 325bg(1);
#### EBA shall develop draft regulatory technical standards to specify the extraordinary circumstances under which competent authorities may permit an institution:
##### (a) to continue using its alternative internal models for the purpose of calculating the own funds requirements for the market risk of a trading desk that no longer meets the conditions referred to in point (c) of paragraph 2 of this Article and in Article 325bg(1);
(b) to limit the add-on to the one resulting from overshootings under back-testing hypothetical changes.
EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 28 June 2024.
#### Power is delegated to the Commission to supplement this Regulation by adopting the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
##### Article 325ba
Power is delegated to the Commission to supplement this Regulation by adopting the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
Article 325ba
Own funds requirements when using alternative internal models
An institution using an alternative internal model shall calculate the own funds requirements for the portfolio of all positions assigned to the trading desks for which the institution has been granted permission as referred to in Article 325az(2) as the higher of the following:
(a) the sum of the following values:
## (a) the sum of the following values:
(i) the institution's previous day's expected shortfall risk measure, calculated in accordance with Article 325bb (ESt-1), and
(ii) the institution's previous day's stress scenario risk measure, calculated in accordance with Section 5 (SSt-1); or
(b) the sum of the following values:
### (b) the sum of the following values:
(i) the average of the institution's daily expected shortfall risk measure, calculated in accordance with Article 325bb for each of the preceding sixty business days (ES<sup>avg</sup>), multiplied by the multiplication factor (mc); and
(ii) the average of the institution's daily stress scenario risk measure, calculated in accordance with Section 5 for each of the preceding sixty business days (SS<sup>avg</sup>).
Institutions holding positions in traded debt and equity instruments that are included in the scope of the internal default risk model and assigned to the trading desks referred to in paragraph 1 shall fulfil an additional own funds requirement, expressed as the higher of the following values:
(a) the most recent own funds requirement for default risk, calculated in accordance with Section 3;
## (b) the average of the amount referred to in point (a) over the preceding 12 weeks.
### Section 2
#### Institutions holding positions in traded debt and equity instruments that are included in the scope of the internal default risk model and assigned to the trading desks referred to in paragraph 1 shall fulfil an additional own funds requirement, expressed as the higher of the following values:
##### (a) the most recent own funds requirement for default risk, calculated in accordance with Section 3;
(b) the average of the amount referred to in point (a) over the preceding 12 weeks.
Section 2
#### **General requirements**
@@ -9207,9 +9706,9 @@
Institutions shall calculate the expected shortfall risk measure referred to in point (a) of Article 325ba(1) for any given date ‘t’ and for any given portfolio of trading book positions as follows:
#### where:
##### Article 325bc
where:
Article 325bc
Partial expected shortfall calculations
@@ -9217,9 +9716,9 @@
(a) daily calculations of the partial expected shortfall measures;
(b) at 97,5th percentile, one tailed confidence interval;
(c) for a given portfolio of trading book positions, institution shall calculate the partial expected shortfall measure at time ‘t’ accordance with the following formula:
#### (b) at 97,5th percentile, one tailed confidence interval;
##### (c) for a given portfolio of trading book positions, institution shall calculate the partial expected shortfall measure at time ‘t’ accordance with the following formula:
where:
PESt
=
@@ -9250,9 +9749,9 @@
(a) An institution that no longer meets the requirement referred to in the first paragraph of this point shall immediately notify the competent authorities thereof and shall update the subset of the modellable risk factors within two weeks in order to meet that requirement; where, after two weeks, that institution has failed to meet that requirement, the institution shall revert to the approach set out in Chapter 1a to calculate the own funds requirements for market risk for some trading desks, until that institution is able to demonstrate to the competent authority that it is meeting the requirement set out in the first subparagraph of this point;
#### (c) the data inputs used to determine the scenarios of future shocks applied to the modellable risk factors referred to in points (a) and (b) of this paragraph shall be calibrated to historical data referred to in point (c) of paragraph 4; those data shall be updated on at least a monthly basis.
##### (c) the data inputs used to determine the scenarios of future shocks applied to the modellable risk factors referred to in points (a) and (b) shall be calibrated to historical data from the preceding 12-month period; where there is a significant upsurge in the price volatility of a material number of modellable risks factors of an institution's portfolio which are not in the subset of the risk factors referred to in point (a) of paragraph 2, competent authorities may require an institution to use historical data for a period shorter than the preceding 12-months, but such a shorter period shall not be shorter than the preceding six-months; competent authorities shall notify EBA of any decision to require an institution to use historical data from a shorter period than 12 months and shall substantiate that decision.
(c) the data inputs used to determine the scenarios of future shocks applied to the modellable risk factors referred to in points (a) and (b) of this paragraph shall be calibrated to historical data referred to in point (c) of paragraph 4; those data shall be updated on at least a monthly basis.
(c) the data inputs used to determine the scenarios of future shocks applied to the modellable risk factors referred to in points (a) and (b) shall be calibrated to historical data from the preceding 12-month period; where there is a significant upsurge in the price volatility of a material number of modellable risks factors of an institution's portfolio which are not in the subset of the risk factors referred to in point (a) of paragraph 2, competent authorities may require an institution to use historical data for a period shorter than the preceding 12-months, but such a shorter period shall not be shorter than the preceding six-months; competent authorities shall notify EBA of any decision to require an institution to use historical data from a shorter period than 12 months and shall substantiate that decision.
Article 325bd
@@ -9274,9 +9773,9 @@
(a) how institutions are to map the risk factors of the positions referred to in paragraph 1 to broad categories of risk factors and broad sub-categories of risk factors for the purposes of paragraph 1;
(b) which currencies constitute the most liquid currencies sub-category of the broad category of interest rate risk factor of Table 2;
(c) which currency pairs constitute the most liquid currency pairs sub-category of the broad category of foreign exchange risk factor of Table 2;
#### (b) which currencies constitute the most liquid currencies sub-category of the broad category of interest rate risk factor of Table 2;
##### (c) which currency pairs constitute the most liquid currency pairs sub-category of the broad category of foreign exchange risk factor of Table 2;
(d) the definitions of small market capitalisation and large market capitalisation for the purposes of the equity price and volatility sub-category of the broad category of equity risk factor of Table 2.
@@ -9319,9 +9818,9 @@
Assessment of the modellability of risk factors
#### EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 28 March 2020.
##### Power is delegated to the Commission to supplement this Regulation by adopting the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 28 March 2020.
Power is delegated to the Commission to supplement this Regulation by adopting the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
Article 325bf
@@ -9355,9 +9854,9 @@
(c) an overshooting shall be counted for each business day for which the institution is not able to assess the value of the portfolio or is not able to calculate the value-at-risk number referred to in paragraph 3.
The multiplication factor (mc) shall be the sum of the value of 1,5 and an add-on between 0 and 0,5 in accordance with Table 3. For the portfolio referred to in paragraph 5, that add-on shall be calculated on the basis of the number of overshootings that occurred over the most recent 250 business days as evidenced by the institution's back-testing of the value-at-risk number calculated in accordance with point (a) of this subparagraph. The calculation of the add-on shall be subject to the following requirements:
(a) an overshooting shall be a one-day change in the portfolio's value that exceeds the related value-at-risk number calculated by the institution's internal model in accordance with the following:
#### The multiplication factor (mc) shall be the sum of the value of 1,5 and an add-on between 0 and 0,5 in accordance with Table 3. For the portfolio referred to in paragraph 5, that add-on shall be calculated on the basis of the number of overshootings that occurred over the most recent 250 business days as evidenced by the institution's back-testing of the value-at-risk number calculated in accordance with point (a) of this subparagraph. The calculation of the add-on shall be subject to the following requirements:
##### (a) an overshooting shall be a one-day change in the portfolio's value that exceeds the related value-at-risk number calculated by the institution's internal model in accordance with the following:
(i) a one-day holding period;
(ii) a 99th percentile, one tailed confidence interval;
(iii) scenarios of future shocks shall apply to the risk factors of the trading desks' positions referred to in Article 325bg(3) and which are considered modellable in accordance with Article 325be;
@@ -9380,219 +9879,219 @@
In extraordinary circumstances, competent authorities may limit the add-on to that resulting from overshootings under back-testing hypothetical changes where the number of overshootings under back-testing actual changes does not result from deficiencies in the internal model.
#### EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 28 March 2020.
EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 28 March 2020.
Power is delegated to the Commission to supplement this Regulation by adopting the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
Article 325bg
Profit and loss attribution requirement
EBA shall develop draft regulatory technical standards to specify:
(a) the criteria necessary to ensure that the theoretical changes in the value of a trading desk's portfolio is sufficiently close to the hypothetical changes in the value of a trading desk's portfolio for the purposes of paragraph 2, taking into account international regulatory developments;
#### (b) the consequences for an institution where the theoretical changes in the value of a trading desk's portfolio are not sufficiently close to the hypothetical changes in the value of a trading desk's portfolio for the purposes of paragraph 2;
##### (c) the frequency at which the P&L attribution is to be performed by an institution;
(d) the technical elements to be included in the theoretical and hypothetical changes in the value of a trading desk's portfolio for the purposes of this Article;
(e) the manner in which institutions that use the internal model are to aggregate the total own funds requirement for market risk for all their trading book positions and non-trading book positions that are subject to foreign exchange risk or commodity risk, taking into account the consequences referred to in point (b).
EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 28 March 2020.
Power is delegated to the Commission to supplement this Regulation by adopting the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
Article 325bh
Requirements on risk measurement
Institutions using an internal risk-measurement model that is used to calculate the own funds requirements for market risk as referred to in Article 325ba shall ensure that that model meets all the following requirements:
(a) the internal risk-measurement model shall capture a sufficient number of risk factors, which shall include at least the risk factors referred to in Subsection 1 of Section 3 of Chapter 1a unless the institution demonstrates to the competent authorities that the omission of those risk factors does not have a material impact on the results of the P&L attribution requirement referred to in Article 325bg; an institution shall be able to explain to the competent authorities why it has incorporated a risk factor in its pricing model but not in its internal risk-measurement model;
(b) the internal risk-measurement model shall capture nonlinearities for options and other products as well as correlation risk and basis risk;
#### (c) the internal risk-measurement model shall incorporate a set of risk factors that correspond to the interest rates in each currency in which the institution has interest rate sensitive on- or off-balance-sheet positions; the institution shall model the yield curves using one of the generally accepted approaches; the yield curve shall be divided into various maturity segments to capture the variations of volatility of rates along the yield curve; for material exposures to interest-rate risk in the major currencies and markets, the yield curve shall be modelled using a minimum of six maturity segments, and the number of risk factors used to model the yield curve shall be proportionate to the nature and complexity of the institution's trading strategies, the model shall also capture the risk spread of less than perfectly correlated movements between different yield curves or different financial instruments on the same underlying issuer;
##### (d) the internal risk-measurement model shall incorporate risk factors corresponding to gold and to the individual foreign currencies in which the institution's positions are denominated; for CIUs, the actual foreign exchange positions of the CIU shall be taken into account; institutions may rely on third-party reporting of the foreign exchange position of the CIU, provided that the correctness of that report is adequately ensured; foreign exchange positions of a CIU of which an institution is not aware of shall be carved out from the internal models approach and treated in accordance with Chapter 1a;
(e) the sophistication of the modelling technique shall be proportionate to the materiality of the institutions' activities in the equity markets; the internal risk-measurement model shall use a separate risk factor at least for each of the equity markets in which the institution holds significant positions and at least one risk factor that captures systemic movements in equity prices and the dependency of that risk factor on the individual risk factors for each equity market;
(f) the internal risk-measurement model shall use a separate risk factor at least for each commodity in which the institution holds significant positions, unless the institution has a small aggregate commodity position compared to all its trading activities, in which case it may use a separate risk factor for each broad commodity type; for material exposures to commodity markets, the model shall capture the risk of less than perfectly correlated movements between commodities that are similar, but not identical, the exposure to changes in forward prices arising from maturity mismatches, and the convenience yield between derivative and cash positions;
(g) the proxies used shall show a good track record for the actual position held, shall be appropriately conservative, and shall be used only where the available data are insufficient, such as during the period of stress referred to in point (c) of Article 325bc(2);
(h) for material exposures to volatility risks in instruments with optionality, the internal risk-measurement model shall capture the dependency of implied volatilities across strike prices and options' maturities.
Article 325bi
Qualitative requirements
Any internal risk-measurement model used for the purposes of this Chapter shall be conceptually sound, shall be calculated and implemented with integrity, and shall comply with all the following qualitative requirements:
(a) any internal risk-measurement model used to calculate capital requirements for market risk shall be closely integrated into the daily risk management process of the institution and shall serve as the basis for reporting risk exposures to senior management;
(b) an institution shall have a risk control unit that is independent from business trading units and that reports directly to senior management; that unit shall be responsible for designing and implementing any internal risk-measurement model; that unit shall conduct the initial and on-going validation of any internal model used for the purposes of this Chapter and shall be responsible for the overall risk management system; that unit shall produce and analyse daily reports on the output of any internal model used to calculate capital requirements for market risk, as well as reports on the appropriateness of measures to be taken in terms of trading limits;
(c) the management body and senior management shall be actively involved in the risk-control process, and the daily reports produced by the risk control unit shall be reviewed at a level of management with sufficient authority to require the reduction of positions taken by individual traders and to require the reduction of the institution's overall risk exposure;
(d) the institution shall have a sufficient number of staff with a level of skills that is appropriate to the sophistication of the internal risk-measurement models, and a sufficient number of staff with skills in the trading, risk control, audit and back-office areas;
(e) the institution shall have in place a documented set of internal policies, procedures and controls for monitoring and ensuring compliance with the overall operation of its internal risk-measurement models;
(f) any internal risk-measurement model, including any pricing model, shall have a proven track record of being reasonably accurate in measuring risks, and shall not differ significantly from the models that the institution uses for its internal risk management;
(g) the institution shall frequently conduct rigorous programmes of stress testing, including reverse stress tests, which shall encompass any internal risk-measurement model; the results of those stress tests shall be reviewed by senior management at least on a monthly basis and shall comply with the policies and limits approved by the management body; the institution shall take appropriate actions where the results of those stress tests show excessive losses arising from the trading's business of the institution under certain circumstances;
(h) the institution shall conduct an independent review of its internal risk-measurement models, either as part of its regular internal auditing process, or by mandating a third-party undertaking to conduct that review, which shall be conducted to the satisfaction of the competent authorities.
For the purposes of point (h) of the first subparagraph, a third-party undertaking means an undertaking that provides auditing or consulting services to institutions and that has staff who have sufficient skills in the area of market risk in trading activities.
The review referred to in point (h) of paragraph 1 shall include both the activities of the business trading units and the independent risk control unit. The institution shall conduct a review of its overall risk management process at least once a year. That review shall assess the following:
(a) the adequacy of the documentation of the risk management system and process and the organisation of the risk control unit;
(b) the integration of risk measures into daily risk management and the integrity of the management information system;
#### (c) the processes the institution employs for approving the risk-pricing models and valuation systems that are used by front and back-office personnel;
##### (d) the scope of risks captured by the model, the accuracy and appropriateness of the risk-measurement system, and the validation of any significant changes to the internal risk-measurement model;
(e) the accuracy and completeness of position data, the accuracy and appropriateness of volatility and correlation assumptions, the accuracy of valuation and risk sensitivity calculations, and the accuracy and appropriateness for generating data proxies where the available data are insufficient to meet the requirement set out in this Chapter;
(f) the verification process that the institution employs to evaluate the consistency, timeliness and reliability of the data sources used to run any of its internal risk-measurement models, including the independence of those data sources;
(g) the verification process that the institution employs to evaluate back-testing requirements and P&L attribution requirements that are conducted in order to assess the accuracy of its internal risk-measurement models;
(h) where the review is performed by a third-party undertaking in accordance with point (h) of paragraph 1 of this Article, the verification that the internal validation process set out in Article 325bj fulfils its objectives.
Article 325bj
Internal validation
Institutions shall conduct the validation referred to in paragraph 1 in the following circumstances:
#### (a) when any internal risk-measurement model is initially developed and when any significant changes are made to that model;
##### (b) on a periodic basis, and where there have been significant structural changes in the market or changes to the composition of the portfolio which might lead to the internal risk-measurement model no longer being adequate.
The validation of the internal risk-measurement models of an institution shall not be limited to back-testing and P&L attribution requirements, but shall, at a minimum, include the following:
(a) tests to verify whether the assumptions made in the internal model are appropriate and do not underestimate or overestimate the risk;
(b) own internal model validation tests, including back-testing in addition to the regulatory back-testing programmes, in relation to the risks and structures of their portfolios;
(c) the use of hypothetical portfolios to ensure that the internal risk-measurement model is able to account for particular structural features that may arise, for example, material basis risks and concentration risk, or the risks associated with the use of proxies.
Article 325bk
Calculation of stress scenario risk measure
EBA shall develop draft regulatory technical standards to specify:
(a) how institutions are to develop extreme scenarios of future shock applicable to non-modellable risk factors and how they are to apply those extreme scenarios of future shock to those risk factors;
## (b) a regulatory extreme scenario of future shock for each broad sub-category of risk factors listed in Table 2 of Article 325bd, which institutions may use when they are unable to develop an extreme scenario of future shock in accordance with point (a) of this subparagraph, or which competent authorities may require that institution apply if those authorities are not satisfied with the extreme scenario of future shock developed by the institution;
### (c) the circumstances under which institutions may calculate a stress scenario risk measure for more than one non-modellable risk factor;
#### (d) how institutions are to aggregate the stress scenario risk measures of all non-modellable risk factors included in their trading book positions and non-trading book positions that are subject to foreign exchange risk or commodity risk.
##### In developing those draft regulatory technical standards, EBA shall take into consideration the requirement that the level of own funds requirements for market risk of a non-modellable risk factor as set out in this Article shall be as high as the level of own funds requirements for market risk that would have been calculated under this Chapter if that risk factor were modellable.
#### EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 28 September 2020.
##### Power is delegated to the Commission to supplement this Regulation by adopting the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
Article 325bg
Profit and loss attribution requirement
EBA shall develop draft regulatory technical standards to specify:
(a) the criteria necessary to ensure that the theoretical changes in the value of a trading desk's portfolio is sufficiently close to the hypothetical changes in the value of a trading desk's portfolio for the purposes of paragraph 2, taking into account international regulatory developments;
(b) the consequences for an institution where the theoretical changes in the value of a trading desk's portfolio are not sufficiently close to the hypothetical changes in the value of a trading desk's portfolio for the purposes of paragraph 2;
(c) the frequency at which the P&L attribution is to be performed by an institution;
(d) the technical elements to be included in the theoretical and hypothetical changes in the value of a trading desk's portfolio for the purposes of this Article;
(e) the manner in which institutions that use the internal model are to aggregate the total own funds requirement for market risk for all their trading book positions and non-trading book positions that are subject to foreign exchange risk or commodity risk, taking into account the consequences referred to in point (b).
#### EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 28 March 2020.
#### Section 3
##### **Internal default risk model**
Article 325bl
Scope of the internal default risk model
Article 325bm
Permission to use an internal default risk model
Article 325bn
#### Own funds requirements for default risk using an internal default risk model
##### Institutions shall calculate the own funds requirements for default risk using an internal default risk model for the portfolio of all trading book positions as referred to in Article 325bl as follows:
#### (a) the own funds requirements shall be equal to a value-at-risk number measuring potential losses in the market value of the portfolio caused by the default of issuers related to those positions at the 99,9 % confidence interval over a one-year time horizon;
##### (b) the potential loss referred to in point (a) means a direct or indirect loss in the market value of a position which was caused by the default of the issuers and which is incremental to any losses already taken into account in the current valuation of the position; the default of the issuers of equity positions shall be represented by the value for the issuers' equity prices being set to zero;
(c) institutions shall determine default correlations between different issuers on the basis of a conceptually sound methodology, using objective historical data on market credit spreads or equity prices that cover at least a 10 year period that includes the stress period identified by the institution in accordance with Article 325bc(2); the calculation of default correlations between different issuers shall be calibrated to a one-year time horizon;
(d) the internal default risk model shall be based on a one-year constant position assumption.
Article 325bo
Recognition of hedges in an internal default risk model
Article 325bp
Particular requirements for an internal default risk model
To simulate the default of issuers in the internal default risk model, the institution's estimates of default probabilities shall meet the following requirements:
(a) the default probabilities shall be floored at 0,03 %;
(b) the default probabilities shall be based on a one-year time horizon, unless stated otherwise in this Section;
(c) the default probabilities shall be measured using, solely or in combination with current market prices, data observed during a historical period of at least five years of actual past defaults and extreme declines in market prices equivalent to default events; default probabilities shall not be inferred solely from current market prices;
(d) an institution that has been granted permission to estimate default probabilities in accordance with Section 1 of Chapter 3 of Title II shall use the methodology set out therein to calculate default probabilities;
(e) an institution that has not been granted permission to estimate default probabilities in accordance with Section 1 of Chapter 3 of Title II shall develop an internal methodology or use external sources to estimate default probabilities; in both situations, the estimates of default probabilities shall be consistent with the requirements set out in this Article.
To simulate the default of issuers in the internal default risk model, the institution's estimates of loss given default shall meet the following requirements:
(a) the loss given default estimates are floored at 0 %;
(b) the loss given default estimates shall reflect the seniority of each position;
(c) an institution that has been granted permission to estimate loss given default in accordance with Section 1 of Chapter 3 of Title II shall use the methodology set out therein to calculate loss given default estimates;
(d) an institution that has not been granted permission to estimate loss given default in accordance with Section 1 of Chapter 3 of Title II shall develop an internal methodology or use external sources to estimate loss given default; in both situations, the estimates of loss given default shall be consistent with the requirements set out in this Article.
As part of the independent review and validation of the internal models that they use for the purposes of this Chapter, including for the risk-measurement system, institutions shall:
## (a) verify that their approach for the modelling of correlations and price changes is appropriate for their portfolio, including the choice and weights of the systematic risk factors in the model;
### (b) perform a variety of stress tests, including sensitivity analyses and scenario analyses, to assess the qualitative and quantitative reasonableness of the internal default risk model, in particular with regard to the treatment of concentrations; and
## (c) apply appropriate quantitative validation including relevant internal modelling benchmarks.
### The tests referred to in point (b) shall not be limited to the range of past events experienced.
#### EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 28 September 2020.
##### Power is delegated to the Commission to supplement this Regulation by adopting the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
Article 325bh
Requirements on risk measurement
Institutions using an internal risk-measurement model that is used to calculate the own funds requirements for market risk as referred to in Article 325ba shall ensure that that model meets all the following requirements:
(a) the internal risk-measurement model shall capture a sufficient number of risk factors, which shall include at least the risk factors referred to in Subsection 1 of Section 3 of Chapter 1a unless the institution demonstrates to the competent authorities that the omission of those risk factors does not have a material impact on the results of the P&L attribution requirement referred to in Article 325bg; an institution shall be able to explain to the competent authorities why it has incorporated a risk factor in its pricing model but not in its internal risk-measurement model;
(b) the internal risk-measurement model shall capture nonlinearities for options and other products as well as correlation risk and basis risk;
(c) the internal risk-measurement model shall incorporate a set of risk factors that correspond to the interest rates in each currency in which the institution has interest rate sensitive on- or off-balance-sheet positions; the institution shall model the yield curves using one of the generally accepted approaches; the yield curve shall be divided into various maturity segments to capture the variations of volatility of rates along the yield curve; for material exposures to interest-rate risk in the major currencies and markets, the yield curve shall be modelled using a minimum of six maturity segments, and the number of risk factors used to model the yield curve shall be proportionate to the nature and complexity of the institution's trading strategies, the model shall also capture the risk spread of less than perfectly correlated movements between different yield curves or different financial instruments on the same underlying issuer;
(d) the internal risk-measurement model shall incorporate risk factors corresponding to gold and to the individual foreign currencies in which the institution's positions are denominated; for CIUs, the actual foreign exchange positions of the CIU shall be taken into account; institutions may rely on third-party reporting of the foreign exchange position of the CIU, provided that the correctness of that report is adequately ensured; foreign exchange positions of a CIU of which an institution is not aware of shall be carved out from the internal models approach and treated in accordance with Chapter 1a;
(e) the sophistication of the modelling technique shall be proportionate to the materiality of the institutions' activities in the equity markets; the internal risk-measurement model shall use a separate risk factor at least for each of the equity markets in which the institution holds significant positions and at least one risk factor that captures systemic movements in equity prices and the dependency of that risk factor on the individual risk factors for each equity market;
(f) the internal risk-measurement model shall use a separate risk factor at least for each commodity in which the institution holds significant positions, unless the institution has a small aggregate commodity position compared to all its trading activities, in which case it may use a separate risk factor for each broad commodity type; for material exposures to commodity markets, the model shall capture the risk of less than perfectly correlated movements between commodities that are similar, but not identical, the exposure to changes in forward prices arising from maturity mismatches, and the convenience yield between derivative and cash positions;
#### (g) the proxies used shall show a good track record for the actual position held, shall be appropriately conservative, and shall be used only where the available data are insufficient, such as during the period of stress referred to in point (c) of Article 325bc(2);
##### (h) for material exposures to volatility risks in instruments with optionality, the internal risk-measurement model shall capture the dependency of implied volatilities across strike prices and options' maturities.
Article 325bi
Qualitative requirements
Any internal risk-measurement model used for the purposes of this Chapter shall be conceptually sound, shall be calculated and implemented with integrity, and shall comply with all the following qualitative requirements:
(a) any internal risk-measurement model used to calculate capital requirements for market risk shall be closely integrated into the daily risk management process of the institution and shall serve as the basis for reporting risk exposures to senior management;
(b) an institution shall have a risk control unit that is independent from business trading units and that reports directly to senior management; that unit shall be responsible for designing and implementing any internal risk-measurement model; that unit shall conduct the initial and on-going validation of any internal model used for the purposes of this Chapter and shall be responsible for the overall risk management system; that unit shall produce and analyse daily reports on the output of any internal model used to calculate capital requirements for market risk, as well as reports on the appropriateness of measures to be taken in terms of trading limits;
(c) the management body and senior management shall be actively involved in the risk-control process, and the daily reports produced by the risk control unit shall be reviewed at a level of management with sufficient authority to require the reduction of positions taken by individual traders and to require the reduction of the institution's overall risk exposure;
(d) the institution shall have a sufficient number of staff with a level of skills that is appropriate to the sophistication of the internal risk-measurement models, and a sufficient number of staff with skills in the trading, risk control, audit and back-office areas;
(e) the institution shall have in place a documented set of internal policies, procedures and controls for monitoring and ensuring compliance with the overall operation of its internal risk-measurement models;
(f) any internal risk-measurement model, including any pricing model, shall have a proven track record of being reasonably accurate in measuring risks, and shall not differ significantly from the models that the institution uses for its internal risk management;
(g) the institution shall frequently conduct rigorous programmes of stress testing, including reverse stress tests, which shall encompass any internal risk-measurement model; the results of those stress tests shall be reviewed by senior management at least on a monthly basis and shall comply with the policies and limits approved by the management body; the institution shall take appropriate actions where the results of those stress tests show excessive losses arising from the trading's business of the institution under certain circumstances;
(h) the institution shall conduct an independent review of its internal risk-measurement models, either as part of its regular internal auditing process, or by mandating a third-party undertaking to conduct that review, which shall be conducted to the satisfaction of the competent authorities.
For the purposes of point (h) of the first subparagraph, a third-party undertaking means an undertaking that provides auditing or consulting services to institutions and that has staff who have sufficient skills in the area of market risk in trading activities.
The review referred to in point (h) of paragraph 1 shall include both the activities of the business trading units and the independent risk control unit. The institution shall conduct a review of its overall risk management process at least once a year. That review shall assess the following:
(a) the adequacy of the documentation of the risk management system and process and the organisation of the risk control unit;
(b) the integration of risk measures into daily risk management and the integrity of the management information system;
(c) the processes the institution employs for approving the risk-pricing models and valuation systems that are used by front and back-office personnel;
(d) the scope of risks captured by the model, the accuracy and appropriateness of the risk-measurement system, and the validation of any significant changes to the internal risk-measurement model;
(e) the accuracy and completeness of position data, the accuracy and appropriateness of volatility and correlation assumptions, the accuracy of valuation and risk sensitivity calculations, and the accuracy and appropriateness for generating data proxies where the available data are insufficient to meet the requirement set out in this Chapter;
(f) the verification process that the institution employs to evaluate the consistency, timeliness and reliability of the data sources used to run any of its internal risk-measurement models, including the independence of those data sources;
#### (g) the verification process that the institution employs to evaluate back-testing requirements and P&L attribution requirements that are conducted in order to assess the accuracy of its internal risk-measurement models;
##### (h) where the review is performed by a third-party undertaking in accordance with point (h) of paragraph 1 of this Article, the verification that the internal validation process set out in Article 325bj fulfils its objectives.
Article 325bj
Internal validation
Institutions shall conduct the validation referred to in paragraph 1 in the following circumstances:
(a) when any internal risk-measurement model is initially developed and when any significant changes are made to that model;
(b) on a periodic basis, and where there have been significant structural changes in the market or changes to the composition of the portfolio which might lead to the internal risk-measurement model no longer being adequate.
The validation of the internal risk-measurement models of an institution shall not be limited to back-testing and P&L attribution requirements, but shall, at a minimum, include the following:
(a) tests to verify whether the assumptions made in the internal model are appropriate and do not underestimate or overestimate the risk;
#### (b) own internal model validation tests, including back-testing in addition to the regulatory back-testing programmes, in relation to the risks and structures of their portfolios;
##### (c) the use of hypothetical portfolios to ensure that the internal risk-measurement model is able to account for particular structural features that may arise, for example, material basis risks and concentration risk, or the risks associated with the use of proxies.
Article 325bk
Calculation of stress scenario risk measure
EBA shall develop draft regulatory technical standards to specify:
(a) how institutions are to develop extreme scenarios of future shock applicable to non-modellable risk factors and how they are to apply those extreme scenarios of future shock to those risk factors;
(b) a regulatory extreme scenario of future shock for each broad sub-category of risk factors listed in Table 2 of Article 325bd, which institutions may use when they are unable to develop an extreme scenario of future shock in accordance with point (a) of this subparagraph, or which competent authorities may require that institution apply if those authorities are not satisfied with the extreme scenario of future shock developed by the institution;
(c) the circumstances under which institutions may calculate a stress scenario risk measure for more than one non-modellable risk factor;
(d) how institutions are to aggregate the stress scenario risk measures of all non-modellable risk factors included in their trading book positions and non-trading book positions that are subject to foreign exchange risk or commodity risk.
In developing those draft regulatory technical standards, EBA shall take into consideration the requirement that the level of own funds requirements for market risk of a non-modellable risk factor as set out in this Article shall be as high as the level of own funds requirements for market risk that would have been calculated under this Chapter if that risk factor were modellable.
## EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 28 September 2020.
### Power is delegated to the Commission to supplement this Regulation by adopting the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
#### Section 3
##### **Internal default risk model**
#### Article 325bl
##### Scope of the internal default risk model
#### Article 325bm
##### Permission to use an internal default risk model
Article 325bn
Own funds requirements for default risk using an internal default risk model
Institutions shall calculate the own funds requirements for default risk using an internal default risk model for the portfolio of all trading book positions as referred to in Article 325bl as follows:
(a) the own funds requirements shall be equal to a value-at-risk number measuring potential losses in the market value of the portfolio caused by the default of issuers related to those positions at the 99,9 % confidence interval over a one-year time horizon;
(b) the potential loss referred to in point (a) means a direct or indirect loss in the market value of a position which was caused by the default of the issuers and which is incremental to any losses already taken into account in the current valuation of the position; the default of the issuers of equity positions shall be represented by the value for the issuers' equity prices being set to zero;
#### (c) institutions shall determine default correlations between different issuers on the basis of a conceptually sound methodology, using objective historical data on market credit spreads or equity prices that cover at least a 10 year period that includes the stress period identified by the institution in accordance with Article 325bc(2); the calculation of default correlations between different issuers shall be calibrated to a one-year time horizon;
##### (d) the internal default risk model shall be based on a one-year constant position assumption.
#### Article 325bo
##### Recognition of hedges in an internal default risk model
Article 325bp
Particular requirements for an internal default risk model
To simulate the default of issuers in the internal default risk model, the institution's estimates of default probabilities shall meet the following requirements:
(a) the default probabilities shall be floored at 0,03 %;
(b) the default probabilities shall be based on a one-year time horizon, unless stated otherwise in this Section;
(c) the default probabilities shall be measured using, solely or in combination with current market prices, data observed during a historical period of at least five years of actual past defaults and extreme declines in market prices equivalent to default events; default probabilities shall not be inferred solely from current market prices;
(d) an institution that has been granted permission to estimate default probabilities in accordance with Section 1 of Chapter 3 of Title II shall use the methodology set out therein to calculate default probabilities;
(e) an institution that has not been granted permission to estimate default probabilities in accordance with Section 1 of Chapter 3 of Title II shall develop an internal methodology or use external sources to estimate default probabilities; in both situations, the estimates of default probabilities shall be consistent with the requirements set out in this Article.
To simulate the default of issuers in the internal default risk model, the institution's estimates of loss given default shall meet the following requirements:
(a) the loss given default estimates are floored at 0 %;
(b) the loss given default estimates shall reflect the seniority of each position;
(c) an institution that has been granted permission to estimate loss given default in accordance with Section 1 of Chapter 3 of Title II shall use the methodology set out therein to calculate loss given default estimates;
(d) an institution that has not been granted permission to estimate loss given default in accordance with Section 1 of Chapter 3 of Title II shall develop an internal methodology or use external sources to estimate loss given default; in both situations, the estimates of loss given default shall be consistent with the requirements set out in this Article.
As part of the independent review and validation of the internal models that they use for the purposes of this Chapter, including for the risk-measurement system, institutions shall:
(a) verify that their approach for the modelling of correlations and price changes is appropriate for their portfolio, including the choice and weights of the systematic risk factors in the model;
(b) perform a variety of stress tests, including sensitivity analyses and scenario analyses, to assess the qualitative and quantitative reasonableness of the internal default risk model, in particular with regard to the treatment of concentrations; and
(c) apply appropriate quantitative validation including relevant internal modelling benchmarks.
The tests referred to in point (b) shall not be limited to the range of past events experienced.
## EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 28 September 2020.
### Power is delegated to the Commission to supplement this Regulation by adopting the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
## CHAPTER 2
### Own funds requirements for position risk
#### Section 1
##### General provisions and specific instruments
Article 326
CHAPTER 2
#### Own funds requirements for position risk
##### Section 1
#### General provisions and specific instruments
##### Article 326
#### Own funds requirements for position risk
##### The institution's own funds requirement for position risk shall be the sum of the own funds requirements for the general and specific risk of its positions in debt and equity instruments. Securitisation positions in the trading book shall be treated as debt instruments.
#### Article 327
##### Netting
Article 327
Netting
#### Article 328
@@ -9600,29 +10099,29 @@
Article 329
Options and warrants
#### EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 31 December 2013.
##### Power is delegated to the Commission to adopt the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
#### Options and warrants
##### EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 31 December 2013.
Power is delegated to the Commission to adopt the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
Article 330
#### Swaps
##### Swaps shall be treated for interest-rate risk purposes on the same basis as on-balance-sheet instruments. Thus, an interest-rate swap under which an institution receives floating-rate interest and pays fixed-rate interest shall be treated as equivalent to a long position in a floating-rate instrument of maturity equivalent to the period until the next interest fixing and a short position in a fixed-rate instrument with the same maturity as the swap itself.
Article 331
Interest rate risk on derivative instruments
Swaps
Swaps shall be treated for interest-rate risk purposes on the same basis as on-balance-sheet instruments. Thus, an interest-rate swap under which an institution receives floating-rate interest and pays fixed-rate interest shall be treated as equivalent to a long position in a floating-rate instrument of maturity equivalent to the period until the next interest fixing and a short position in a fixed-rate instrument with the same maturity as the swap itself.
#### Article 331
##### Interest rate risk on derivative instruments
Institutions which do not use models under paragraph 1 may, treat as fully offsetting any positions in derivative instruments covered in Articles 328 to 330 which meet the following conditions at least:
(a) the positions are of the same value and denominated in the same currency;
#### (b) the reference rate (for floating-rate positions) or coupon (for fixed-rate positions) is closely matched;
##### (c) the next interest-fixing date or, for fixed coupon positions, residual maturity corresponds with the following limits:
(b) the reference rate (for floating-rate positions) or coupon (for fixed-rate positions) is closely matched;
(c) the next interest-fixing date or, for fixed coupon positions, residual maturity corresponds with the following limits:
(i) less than one month hence: same day;
(ii) between one month and one year hence: within seven days;
(iii) over one year hence: within 30 days.
@@ -9635,43 +10134,43 @@
(a) a total return swap creates a long position in the general risk of the reference obligation and a short position in the general risk of a government bond with a maturity equivalent to the period until the next interest fixing and which is assigned a 0 % risk weight under Title II, Chapter 2. It also creates a long position in the specific risk of the reference obligation;
(b) a credit default swap does not create a position for general risk. For the purposes of specific risk, the institution shall record a synthetic long position in an obligation of the reference entity, unless the derivative is rated externally and meets the conditions for a qualifying debt item, in which case a long position in the derivative is recorded. If premium or interest payments are due under the product, these cash flows shall be represented as notional positions in government bonds;
(c) a single name credit linked note creates a long position in the general risk of the note itself, as an interest rate product. For the purpose of specific risk, a synthetic long position is created in an obligation of the reference entity. An additional long position is created in the issuer of the note. Where the credit linked note has an external rating and meets the conditions for a qualifying debt item, a single long position with the specific risk of the note need only be recorded;
#### (b) a credit default swap does not create a position for general risk. For the purposes of specific risk, the institution shall record a synthetic long position in an obligation of the reference entity, unless the derivative is rated externally and meets the conditions for a qualifying debt item, in which case a long position in the derivative is recorded. If premium or interest payments are due under the product, these cash flows shall be represented as notional positions in government bonds;
##### (c) a single name credit linked note creates a long position in the general risk of the note itself, as an interest rate product. For the purpose of specific risk, a synthetic long position is created in an obligation of the reference entity. An additional long position is created in the issuer of the note. Where the credit linked note has an external rating and meets the conditions for a qualifying debt item, a single long position with the specific risk of the note need only be recorded;
(d) in addition to a long position in the specific risk of the issuer of the note, a multiple name credit linked note providing proportional protection creates a position in each reference entity, with the total notional amount of the contract assigned across the positions according to the proportion of the total notional amount that each exposure to a reference entity represents. Where more than one obligation of a reference entity can be selected, the obligation with the highest risk weighting determines the specific risk;
(e) a first-asset-to-default credit derivative creates a position for the notional amount in an obligation of each reference entity. If the size of the maximum credit event payment is lower than the own funds requirement under the method in the first sentence of this point, the maximum payment amount may be taken as the own funds requirement for specific risk.
#### A -n-th-asset-to-default credit derivative creates a position for the notional amount in an obligation of each reference entity less the n-1 reference entities with the lowest specific risk own funds requirement. If the size of the maximum credit event payment is lower than the own funds requirement under the method in the first sentence of this point, this amount may be taken as the own funds requirement for specific risk.
##### Where an n-th-to-default credit derivative is externally rated, the protection seller shall calculate the specific risk own funds requirement using the rating of the derivative and apply the respective securitisation risk weights as applicable.
Article 333
## Securities sold under a repurchase agreement or lent
### The transferor of securities or guaranteed rights relating to title to securities in a repurchase agreement and the lender of securities in a securities lending shall include these securities in the calculation of its own funds requirement under this Chapter provided that such securities are trading book positions.
#### Section 2
##### Debt instruments
Article 334
## Net positions in debt instruments
### Net positions shall be classified according to the currency in which they are denominated and shall calculate the own funds requirement for general and specific risk in each individual currency separately.
#### Sub-Section 1
##### Specific risk
## (e) a first-asset-to-default credit derivative creates a position for the notional amount in an obligation of each reference entity. If the size of the maximum credit event payment is lower than the own funds requirement under the method in the first sentence of this point, the maximum payment amount may be taken as the own funds requirement for specific risk.
### A -n-th-asset-to-default credit derivative creates a position for the notional amount in an obligation of each reference entity less the n-1 reference entities with the lowest specific risk own funds requirement. If the size of the maximum credit event payment is lower than the own funds requirement under the method in the first sentence of this point, this amount may be taken as the own funds requirement for specific risk.
#### Where an n-th-to-default credit derivative is externally rated, the protection seller shall calculate the specific risk own funds requirement using the rating of the derivative and apply the respective securitisation risk weights as applicable.
##### Article 333
Securities sold under a repurchase agreement or lent
## The transferor of securities or guaranteed rights relating to title to securities in a repurchase agreement and the lender of securities in a securities lending shall include these securities in the calculation of its own funds requirement under this Chapter provided that such securities are trading book positions.
### Section 2
#### Debt instruments
##### Article 334
Net positions in debt instruments
#### Net positions shall be classified according to the currency in which they are denominated and shall calculate the own funds requirement for general and specific risk in each individual currency separately.
##### Sub-Section 1
Specific risk
Article 335
#### Cap on the own funds requirement for a net position
##### The institution may cap the own funds requirement for specific risk of a net position in a debt instrument at the maximum possible default-risk related loss. For a short position, that limit may be calculated as a change in value due to the instrument or, where relevant, the underlying names immediately becoming default risk-free.
Cap on the own funds requirement for a net position
The institution may cap the own funds requirement for specific risk of a net position in a debt instrument at the maximum possible default-risk related loss. For a short position, that limit may be calculated as a change in value due to the instrument or, where relevant, the underlying names immediately becoming default risk-free.
Article 336
@@ -9679,14 +10178,14 @@
The institution shall assign its net positions in the trading book in instruments that are not securitisation positions as calculated in accordance with Article 327 to the appropriate categories in Table 1 on the basis of their issuer or obligor, external or internal credit assessment, and residual maturity, and then multiply them by the weightings shown in that table. It shall sum its weighted positions resulting from the application of this Article regardless of whether they are long or short in order to calculate its own funds requirement against specific risk.
| Categories | Specific risk own funds requirement |
#### | Categories | Specific risk own funds requirement |
| --- | --- |
| Debt securities which would receive a 0 % risk weight under the Standardised Approach for credit risk. | 0 % |
| Debt securities which would receive a 20 % or 50 % risk weight under the Standardised Approach for credit risk and other qualifying items as defined in paragraph 4. | 0,25 % (residual term to final maturity six months or less) 1,00 % (residual term to final maturity greater than six months and up to and including 24 months) 1,60 % (residual term to maturity exceeding 24 months) |
| Debt securities which would receive a 100 % risk weight under the Standardised Approach for credit risk. | 8,00 % |
| Debt which would receive a 150 % risk weight under the Standardised Approach for credit risk. | 12,00 % |
Other qualifying items are:
##### Other qualifying items are:
(a) long and short positions in assets for which a credit assessment by a nominated ECAI is not available and which meet all of the following conditions:
(i) they are considered by the institution concerned to be sufficiently liquid;
@@ -9703,9 +10202,9 @@
Own funds requirement for securitisation instruments
#### In accordance with Article 16 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010, the EBA shall issue guidelines on the use of estimates of PD and LGD as inputs when those estimates are based on an IRC model.
##### Where an originator institution of a synthetic securitisation does not meet the conditions for significant risk transfer set out in Article 245, the originator institution shall include the exposures underlying the securitisation in its calculation of own funds requirements as if those exposures had not been securitised and shall ignore the effect of the synthetic securitisation for credit protection purposes.
In accordance with Article 16 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010, the EBA shall issue guidelines on the use of estimates of PD and LGD as inputs when those estimates are based on an IRC model.
Where an originator institution of a synthetic securitisation does not meet the conditions for significant risk transfer set out in Article 245, the originator institution shall include the exposures underlying the securitisation in its calculation of own funds requirements as if those exposures had not been securitised and shall ignore the effect of the synthetic securitisation for credit protection purposes.
Article 338
@@ -9721,21 +10220,21 @@
A two-way market is deemed to exist where there are independent bona fide offers to buy and sell so that a price reasonably related to the last sales price or current bona fide competitive bid and offer quotations can be determined within one day and settled at such price within a relatively short time conforming to trade custom.
Positions which reference any of the following shall not be part of the correlation trading portfolio:
(a) an underlying that is capable of being assigned to the exposure class ‘retail exposures’ or to the exposure class ‘exposures secured by mortgages on immovable property’ under the Standardised Approach for credit risk in an institution's non-trading book;
(b) a claim on a special purpose entity, collateralised, directly or indirectly, by a position that would itself not be eligible for inclusion in the correlation trading portfolio in accordance with paragraph 1 and this paragraph.
An institution shall determine the larger of the following amounts as the specific risk own funds requirement for the correlation trading portfolio:
## (a) the total specific risk own funds requirement that would apply just to the net long positions of the correlation trading portfolio;
### (b) the total specific risk own funds requirement that would apply just to the net short positions of the correlation trading portfolio.
#### Sub-Section 2
##### General risk
## Positions which reference any of the following shall not be part of the correlation trading portfolio:
### (a) an underlying that is capable of being assigned to the exposure class ‘retail exposures’ or to the exposure class ‘exposures secured by mortgages on immovable property’ under the Standardised Approach for credit risk in an institution's non-trading book;
#### (b) a claim on a special purpose entity, collateralised, directly or indirectly, by a position that would itself not be eligible for inclusion in the correlation trading portfolio in accordance with paragraph 1 and this paragraph.
##### An institution shall determine the larger of the following amounts as the specific risk own funds requirement for the correlation trading portfolio:
(a) the total specific risk own funds requirement that would apply just to the net long positions of the correlation trading portfolio;
(b) the total specific risk own funds requirement that would apply just to the net short positions of the correlation trading portfolio.
Sub-Section 2
General risk
Article 339
@@ -9766,17 +10265,17 @@
(a) 10 % of the sum of the matched weighted positions in all maturity bands;
(b) 40 % of the matched weighted position in zone one;
(c) 30 % of the matched weighted position in zone two;
#### (b) 40 % of the matched weighted position in zone one;
##### (c) 30 % of the matched weighted position in zone two;
(d) 30 % of the matched weighted position in zone three;
(e) 40 % of the matched weighted position between zones one and two and between zones two and three;
#### (f) 150 % of the matched weighted position between zones one and three;
##### (g) 100 % of the residual unmatched weighted positions.
(f) 150 % of the matched weighted position between zones one and three;
(g) 100 % of the residual unmatched weighted positions.
Article 340
@@ -9796,17 +10295,17 @@
| Two | > 1,0 ≤ 3,6 | 0,85 |
| Three | > 3,6 | 0,7 |
The institution shall then calculate the unmatched duration-weighted positions for each zone. It shall then follow the procedures laid down for unmatched weighted positions in Article 339(5) to (8).
The institution's own funds requirement shall then be calculated as the sum of the following:
(a) 2 % of the matched duration-weighted position for each zone;
(b) 40 % of the matched duration-weighted positions between zones one and two and between zones two and three;
## (c) 150 % of the matched duration-weighted position between zones one and three;
### (d) 100 % of the residual unmatched duration-weighted positions.
## The institution shall then calculate the unmatched duration-weighted positions for each zone. It shall then follow the procedures laid down for unmatched weighted positions in Article 339(5) to (8).
### The institution's own funds requirement shall then be calculated as the sum of the following:
#### (a) 2 % of the matched duration-weighted position for each zone;
##### (b) 40 % of the matched duration-weighted positions between zones one and two and between zones two and three;
(c) 150 % of the matched duration-weighted position between zones one and three;
(d) 100 % of the residual unmatched duration-weighted positions.
#### Section 3
@@ -9814,43 +10313,43 @@
Article 341
Net positions in equity instruments
#### EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 31 January 2014.
##### Power is delegated to the Commission to adopt the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
Article 342
#### Specific risk of equity instruments
##### The institution shall multiply its overall gross position by 8 % in order to calculate its own funds requirement against specific risk.
#### Net positions in equity instruments
##### EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 31 January 2014.
Power is delegated to the Commission to adopt the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
#### Article 342
##### Specific risk of equity instruments
The institution shall multiply its overall gross position by 8 % in order to calculate its own funds requirement against specific risk.
Article 343
#### General risk of equity instruments
##### The own funds requirement against general risk shall be the institution's overall net position multiplied by 8 %.
Article 344
Stock indices
## EBA shall submit those draft implementing technical standards to the Commission by 1 January 2014.
### Power is conferred on the Commission to adopt the implementing technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Article 15 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
#### Section 4
##### Underwriting
Article 345
Reduction of net positions
In the case of the underwriting of debt and equity instruments, an institution may use the following procedure in calculating its own funds requirements. The institution shall first calculate the net positions by deducting the underwriting positions which are subscribed or sub-underwritten by third parties on the basis of formal agreements. The institution shall then reduce the net positions by the reduction factors in Table 4 and calculate its own funds requirements using the reduced underwriting positions.
## | working day 0: | 100 % |
## General risk of equity instruments
### The own funds requirement against general risk shall be the institution's overall net position multiplied by 8 %.
#### Article 344
##### Stock indices
EBA shall submit those draft implementing technical standards to the Commission by 1 January 2014.
Power is conferred on the Commission to adopt the implementing technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Article 15 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
Section 4
## Underwriting
### Article 345
#### Reduction of net positions
##### In the case of the underwriting of debt and equity instruments, an institution may use the following procedure in calculating its own funds requirements. The institution shall first calculate the net positions by deducting the underwriting positions which are subscribed or sub-underwritten by third parties on the basis of formal agreements. The institution shall then reduce the net positions by the reduction factors in Table 4 and calculate its own funds requirements using the reduced underwriting positions.
| working day 0: | 100 % |
| --- | --- |
| working day 1: | 90 % |
| working days 2 to 3: | 75 % |
@@ -9858,11 +10357,11 @@
| working day 5: | 25 % |
| after working day 5: | 0 %. |
### ‘Working day zero’ shall be the working day on which the institution becomes unconditionally committed to accepting a known quantity of securities at an agreed price.
#### Section 5
##### Specific risk own funds requirements for positions hedged by credit derivatives
‘Working day zero’ shall be the working day on which the institution becomes unconditionally committed to accepting a known quantity of securities at an agreed price.
Section 5
Specific risk own funds requirements for positions hedged by credit derivatives
Article 346
@@ -9874,9 +10373,9 @@
(b) a long cash position is hedged by a total rate of return swap (or vice versa) and there is an exact match between the reference obligation and the underlying exposure (i.e., the cash position). The maturity of the swap itself may be different from that of the underlying exposure.
In these situations, a specific risk own funds requirement shall not be applied to either side of the position.
Partial allowance shall be given, absent the situations in paragraphs 3 and 4, in the following situations:
#### In these situations, a specific risk own funds requirement shall not be applied to either side of the position.
##### Partial allowance shall be given, absent the situations in paragraphs 3 and 4, in the following situations:
(a) the position falls under paragraph 3(b) but there is an asset mismatch between the reference obligation and the underlying exposure. However, the positions meet the following requirements:
(i) the reference obligation ranks pari passu with or is junior to the underlying obligation;
@@ -9884,27 +10383,27 @@
(b) the position falls under paragraph 3(a) or paragraph 4 but there is a currency or maturity mismatch between the credit protection and the underlying asset. Such currency mismatch shall be included in the own funds requirement for foreign exchange risk;
#### (c) the position falls under paragraph 4 but there is an asset mismatch between the cash position and the credit derivative. However, the underlying asset is included in the (deliverable) obligations in the credit derivative documentation.
##### In order to give partial allowance, rather than adding the specific risk own funds requirements for each side of the transaction, only the higher of the two own funds requirements shall apply.
Article 347
Allowance for hedges by first and nth-to default credit derivatives
In the case of first-to-default credit derivatives and nth-to-default credit derivatives, the following treatment applies for the allowance to be given in accordance with Article 346:
## (a) where an institution obtains credit protection for a number of reference entities underlying a credit derivative under the terms that the first default among the assets shall trigger payment and that this credit event shall terminate the contract, the institution may offset specific risk for the reference entity to which the lowest specific risk percentage charge among the underlying reference entities applies in accordance with Table 1 in Article 336;
### (b) where the nth default among the exposures triggers payment under the credit protection, the protection buyer may only offset specific risk if protection has also been obtained for defaults 1 to n-1 or when n-1 defaults have already occurred. In such cases, the methodology set out in point (a) for first-to-default credit derivatives shall be followed appropriately amended for nth-to-default products.
#### Section 6
##### Own funds requirements for CIUs
#### Article 348
##### Own funds requirements for CIUs
(c) the position falls under paragraph 4 but there is an asset mismatch between the cash position and the credit derivative. However, the underlying asset is included in the (deliverable) obligations in the credit derivative documentation.
## In order to give partial allowance, rather than adding the specific risk own funds requirements for each side of the transaction, only the higher of the two own funds requirements shall apply.
### Article 347
#### Allowance for hedges by first and nth-to default credit derivatives
##### In the case of first-to-default credit derivatives and nth-to-default credit derivatives, the following treatment applies for the allowance to be given in accordance with Article 346:
#### (a) where an institution obtains credit protection for a number of reference entities underlying a credit derivative under the terms that the first default among the assets shall trigger payment and that this credit event shall terminate the contract, the institution may offset specific risk for the reference entity to which the lowest specific risk percentage charge among the underlying reference entities applies in accordance with Table 1 in Article 336;
##### (b) where the nth default among the exposures triggers payment under the credit protection, the protection buyer may only offset specific risk if protection has also been obtained for defaults 1 to n-1 or when n-1 defaults have already occurred. In such cases, the methodology set out in point (a) for first-to-default credit derivatives shall be followed appropriately amended for nth-to-default products.
Section 6
Own funds requirements for CIUs
Article 348
Own funds requirements for CIUs
Article 349
@@ -9912,21 +10411,21 @@
CIUs shall be eligible for the approach set out in Article 350, where all the following conditions are met:
(a) the CIU's prospectus or equivalent document shall include all of the following:
#### (a) the CIU's prospectus or equivalent document shall include all of the following:
(i) the categories of assets in which the CIU is authorised to invest;
(ii) where investment limits apply, the relative limits and the methodologies to calculate them;
(iii) where leverage is allowed, the maximum level of leverage;
(iv) where concluding OTC financial derivatives transactions or repurchase transactions or securities borrowing or lending is allowed, a policy to limit counterparty risk arising from these transactions;
(b) the business of the CIU shall be reported in half-yearly and annual reports to enable an assessment to be made of the assets and liabilities, income and operations over the reporting period;
##### (b) the business of the CIU shall be reported in half-yearly and annual reports to enable an assessment to be made of the assets and liabilities, income and operations over the reporting period;
(c) the shares or units of the CIU shall be redeemable in cash, out of the undertaking's assets, on a daily basis at the request of the unit holder;
(d) investments in the CIU shall be segregated from the assets of the CIU manager;
#### (e) there shall be adequate risk assessment of the CIU, by the investing institution;
##### (f) CIUs shall be managed by persons supervised in accordance with Directive 2009/65/EC or equivalent legislation.
(e) there shall be adequate risk assessment of the CIU, by the investing institution;
(f) CIUs shall be managed by persons supervised in accordance with Directive 2009/65/EC or equivalent legislation.
Article 350
@@ -9942,109 +10441,109 @@
(a) it will be assumed that the CIU first invests to the maximum extent allowed under its mandate in the asset classes attracting the highest own funds requirement for specific and general risk separately, and then continues making investments in descending order until the maximum total investment limit is reached. The position in the CIU will be treated as a direct holding in the assumed position;
(b) institutions shall take account of the maximum indirect exposure that they could achieve by taking leveraged positions through the CIU when calculating their own funds requirement for specific and general risk separately, by proportionally increasing the position in the CIU up to the maximum exposure to the underlying investment items resulting from the mandate;
(c) if the own funds requirement for specific and general risk together in accordance with this paragraph exceed that set out in Article 348(1) the own funds requirement shall be capped at that level.
Institutions may rely on the following third parties to calculate and report own funds requirements for position risk for positions in CIUs falling under paragraphs 1 to 4, in accordance with the methods set out in this Chapter:
(a) the depository of the CIU provided that the CIU exclusively invests in securities and deposits all securities at this depository;
## (b) for other CIUs, the CIU management company, provided that the CIU management company meets the criteria set out in Article 132(3)(a).
## (b) institutions shall take account of the maximum indirect exposure that they could achieve by taking leveraged positions through the CIU when calculating their own funds requirement for specific and general risk separately, by proportionally increasing the position in the CIU up to the maximum exposure to the underlying investment items resulting from the mandate;
### (c) if the own funds requirement for specific and general risk together in accordance with this paragraph exceed that set out in Article 348(1) the own funds requirement shall be capped at that level.
#### Institutions may rely on the following third parties to calculate and report own funds requirements for position risk for positions in CIUs falling under paragraphs 1 to 4, in accordance with the methods set out in this Chapter:
##### (a) the depository of the CIU provided that the CIU exclusively invests in securities and deposits all securities at this depository;
(b) for other CIUs, the CIU management company, provided that the CIU management company meets the criteria set out in Article 132(3)(a).
#### The correctness of the calculation shall be confirmed by an external auditor.
##### CHAPTER 3
Own funds requirements for foreign-exchange risk
Article 351
De minimis and weighting for foreign exchange risk
If the sum of an institution's overall net foreign-exchange position and its net gold position, calculated in accordance with the procedure set out in Article 352, including for any foreign exchange and gold positions for which own funds requirements are calculated using an internal model, exceeds 2 % of its total own funds, the institution shall calculate an own funds requirement for foreign exchange risk. The own funds requirement for foreign exchange risk shall be the sum of its overall net foreign-exchange position and its net gold position in the reporting currency, multiplied by 8 %.
Article 352
Calculation of the overall net foreign exchange position
The institution's net open position in each currency (including the reporting currency) and in gold shall be calculated as the sum of the following elements (positive or negative):
(a) the net spot position (i.e. all asset items less all liability items, including accrued interest, in the currency in question or, for gold, the net spot position in gold);
(b) the net forward position, which are all amounts to be received less all amounts to be paid under forward exchange and gold transactions, including currency and gold futures and the principal on currency swaps not included in the spot position;
(c) irrevocable guarantees and similar instruments that are certain to be called and likely to be irrecoverable;
(d) the net delta, or delta-based, equivalent of the total book of foreign-currency and gold options;
(e) the market value of other options.
#### The delta used for purposes of point (d) shall be that of the exchange concerned. For OTC options, or where delta is not available from the exchange concerned, the institution may calculate delta itself using an appropriate model, subject to permission by the competent authorities. Permission shall be granted if the model appropriately estimates the rate of change of the option's or warrant's value with respect to small changes in the market price of the underlying.
##### The institution may include net future income/expenses not yet accrued but already fully hedged if it does so consistently.
The institution may break down net positions in composite currencies into the component currencies in accordance with the quotas in force.
EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 31 December 2013.
Power is delegated to the Commission to adopt the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
Before the entry into force of the technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph, competent authorities may continue to apply the existing national treatments, where the competent authorities have applied those treatments before 31 December 2013.
#### Article 353
##### Foreign exchange risk of CIUs
Institutions may rely on the following third parties' reporting of the foreign exchange positions in the CIU:
(a) the depository institution of the CIU provided that the CIU exclusively invests in securities and deposits all securities at this depository institution;
## (b) for other CIUs, the CIU management company, provided that the CIU management company meets the criteria set out in point (a) of Article 132(3).
### The correctness of the calculation shall be confirmed by an external auditor.
#### CHAPTER 3
##### Own funds requirements for foreign-exchange risk
Article 351
#### De minimis and weighting for foreign exchange risk
##### If the sum of an institution's overall net foreign-exchange position and its net gold position, calculated in accordance with the procedure set out in Article 352, including for any foreign exchange and gold positions for which own funds requirements are calculated using an internal model, exceeds 2 % of its total own funds, the institution shall calculate an own funds requirement for foreign exchange risk. The own funds requirement for foreign exchange risk shall be the sum of its overall net foreign-exchange position and its net gold position in the reporting currency, multiplied by 8 %.
Article 352
Calculation of the overall net foreign exchange position
The institution's net open position in each currency (including the reporting currency) and in gold shall be calculated as the sum of the following elements (positive or negative):
(a) the net spot position (i.e. all asset items less all liability items, including accrued interest, in the currency in question or, for gold, the net spot position in gold);
(b) the net forward position, which are all amounts to be received less all amounts to be paid under forward exchange and gold transactions, including currency and gold futures and the principal on currency swaps not included in the spot position;
(c) irrevocable guarantees and similar instruments that are certain to be called and likely to be irrecoverable;
(d) the net delta, or delta-based, equivalent of the total book of foreign-currency and gold options;
(e) the market value of other options.
The delta used for purposes of point (d) shall be that of the exchange concerned. For OTC options, or where delta is not available from the exchange concerned, the institution may calculate delta itself using an appropriate model, subject to permission by the competent authorities. Permission shall be granted if the model appropriately estimates the rate of change of the option's or warrant's value with respect to small changes in the market price of the underlying.
The institution may include net future income/expenses not yet accrued but already fully hedged if it does so consistently.
The institution may break down net positions in composite currencies into the component currencies in accordance with the quotas in force.
EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 31 December 2013.
#### Power is delegated to the Commission to adopt the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
##### Before the entry into force of the technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph, competent authorities may continue to apply the existing national treatments, where the competent authorities have applied those treatments before 31 December 2013.
Article 353
Foreign exchange risk of CIUs
Institutions may rely on the following third parties' reporting of the foreign exchange positions in the CIU:
(a) the depository institution of the CIU provided that the CIU exclusively invests in securities and deposits all securities at this depository institution;
#### (b) for other CIUs, the CIU management company, provided that the CIU management company meets the criteria set out in point (a) of Article 132(3).
##### The correctness of the calculation shall be confirmed by an external auditor.
Article 354
Closely correlated currencies
## EBA shall submit those draft implementing technical standards to the Commission by 1 January 2014.
### Power is conferred on the Commission to adopt the implementing technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Article 15 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
#### CHAPTER 4
##### Own funds requirements for commodities risk
#### Article 354
##### Closely correlated currencies
EBA shall submit those draft implementing technical standards to the Commission by 1 January 2014.
#### Power is conferred on the Commission to adopt the implementing technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Article 15 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
##### CHAPTER 4
Own funds requirements for commodities risk
Article 355
#### Choice of method for commodities risk
##### Subject to Articles 356 to 358, institutions shall calculate the own funds requirement for commodities risk with one of the methods set out in Article 359, 360 or 361.
Choice of method for commodities risk
Subject to Articles 356 to 358, institutions shall calculate the own funds requirement for commodities risk with one of the methods set out in Article 359, 360 or 361.
Article 356
Ancillary commodities business
Institutions with ancillary agricultural commodities business may determine the own funds requirements for their physical commodity stock at the end of each year for the following year where all of the following conditions are met:
#### Ancillary commodities business
##### Institutions with ancillary agricultural commodities business may determine the own funds requirements for their physical commodity stock at the end of each year for the following year where all of the following conditions are met:
(a) at any time of the year it holds own funds for this risk which are not lower than the average own funds requirement for that risk estimated on a conservative basis for the coming year;
(b) it estimates on a conservative basis the expected volatility for the figure calculated under point (a);
#### (c) its average own funds requirement for this risk does not exceed 5 % of its own funds or EUR 1 million and, taking into account the volatility estimated in accordance with (b), the expected peak own funds requirements do not exceed 6,5 % of its own funds;
##### (d) the institution monitors on an ongoing basis whether the estimates carried out under points (a) and (b) still reflect the reality.
Article 357
(c) its average own funds requirement for this risk does not exceed 5 % of its own funds or EUR 1 million and, taking into account the volatility estimated in accordance with (b), the expected peak own funds requirements do not exceed 6,5 % of its own funds;
#### (d) the institution monitors on an ongoing basis whether the estimates carried out under points (a) and (b) still reflect the reality.
##### Article 357
Positions in commodities
For the purposes of calculating a position in a commodity, the following positions shall be treated as positions in the same commodity:
#### (a) positions in different sub-categories of commodities in cases where the sub-categories are deliverable against each other;
##### (b) positions in similar commodities if they are close substitutes and where a minimum correlation of 0,9 between price movements can be clearly established over a minimum period of one year.
(a) positions in different sub-categories of commodities in cases where the sub-categories are deliverable against each other;
(b) positions in similar commodities if they are close substitutes and where a minimum correlation of 0,9 between price movements can be clearly established over a minimum period of one year.
Article 358
@@ -10052,17 +10551,17 @@
Institutions shall adequately reflect other risks associated with options, apart from the delta risk, in the own funds requirements.
EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 31 December 2013.
Power is delegated to the Commission to adopt the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
#### EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 31 December 2013.
##### Power is delegated to the Commission to adopt the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
Before the entry into force of the technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph, competent authorities may continue to apply the existing national treatments, where the competent authorities have applied those treatments before 31 December 2013.
Where an institution is either of the following, it shall include the commodities concerned in the calculation of its own funds requirement for commodities risk:
#### (a) the transferor of commodities or guaranteed rights relating to title to commodities in a repurchase agreement;
##### (b) the lender of commodities in a commodities lending agreement.
(a) the transferor of commodities or guaranteed rights relating to title to commodities in a repurchase agreement;
(b) the lender of commodities in a commodities lending agreement.
Article 359
@@ -10082,61 +10581,61 @@
Positions in the same commodity may be offset and assigned to the appropriate maturity bands on a net basis for the following:
(a) positions in contracts maturing on the same date;
(b) positions in contracts maturing within 10 days of each other if the contracts are traded on markets which have daily delivery dates.
#### (a) positions in contracts maturing on the same date;
##### (b) positions in contracts maturing within 10 days of each other if the contracts are traded on markets which have daily delivery dates.
The institution's own funds requirement for each commodity shall be calculated on the basis of the relevant maturity ladder as the sum of the following:
(a) the sum of the matched long and short positions, multiplied by the appropriate spread rate as indicated in the second column of Table 1 for each maturity band and by the spot price for the commodity;
#### (b) the matched position between two maturity bands for each maturity band into which an unmatched position is carried forward, multiplied by 0,6 %, which is the carry rate and by the spot price for the commodity;
##### (c) the residual unmatched positions, multiplied by 15 % which is the outright rate and by the spot price for the commodity.
Article 360
(b) the matched position between two maturity bands for each maturity band into which an unmatched position is carried forward, multiplied by 0,6 %, which is the carry rate and by the spot price for the commodity;
#### (c) the residual unmatched positions, multiplied by 15 % which is the outright rate and by the spot price for the commodity.
##### Article 360
Simplified approach
The institution's own funds requirement for each commodity shall be calculated as the sum of the following:
#### (a) 15 % of the net position, long or short, multiplied by the spot price for the commodity;
##### (b) 3 % of the gross position, long plus short, multiplied by the spot price for the commodity.
(a) 15 % of the net position, long or short, multiplied by the spot price for the commodity;
(b) 3 % of the gross position, long plus short, multiplied by the spot price for the commodity.
Article 361
Extended maturity ladder approach
Institutions may use the minimum spread, carry and outright rates set out in the following Table 2 instead of those indicated in Article 359 provided that the institutions:
(a) undertake significant commodities business;
(b) have an appropriately diversified commodities portfolio;
(c) are not yet in a position to use internal models for the purpose of calculating the own funds requirement for commodities risk.
## | | Precious metals (except gold) | Base metals | Agricultural products (softs) | Other, including energy products |
## Institutions may use the minimum spread, carry and outright rates set out in the following Table 2 instead of those indicated in Article 359 provided that the institutions:
### (a) undertake significant commodities business;
## (b) have an appropriately diversified commodities portfolio;
### (c) are not yet in a position to use internal models for the purpose of calculating the own funds requirement for commodities risk.
#### | | Precious metals (except gold) | Base metals | Agricultural products (softs) | Other, including energy products |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| Spread rate (%) | 1,0 | 1,2 | 1,5 | 1,5 |
| Carry rate (%) | 0,3 | 0,5 | 0,6 | 0,6 |
| Outright rate (%) | 8 | 10 | 12 | 15 |
### Institutions shall notify the use they make of this Article to their competent authorities together with evidence of their efforts to implement an internal model for the purpose of calculating the own funds requirement for commodities risk.
## CHAPTER 5
### Use of internal models to calculate own funds requirements
#### Section 1
##### Permission and own funds requirements
##### Institutions shall notify the use they make of this Article to their competent authorities together with evidence of their efforts to implement an internal model for the purpose of calculating the own funds requirement for commodities risk.
CHAPTER 5
#### Use of internal models to calculate own funds requirements
##### Section 1
Permission and own funds requirements
Article 362
#### Specific and general risks
##### Position risk on a traded debt instrument or equity instrument or derivative thereof may be divided into two components for purposes of this Chapter. The first shall be its specific risk component and shall encompass the risk of a price change in the instrument concerned due to factors related to its issuer or, in the case of a derivative, the issuer of the underlying instrument. The general risk component shall encompass the risk of a price change in the instrument due in the case of a traded debt instrument or debt derivative to a change in the level of interest rates or in the case of an equity or equity derivative to a broad equity-market movement unrelated to any specific attributes of individual securities.
Specific and general risks
Position risk on a traded debt instrument or equity instrument or derivative thereof may be divided into two components for purposes of this Chapter. The first shall be its specific risk component and shall encompass the risk of a price change in the instrument concerned due to factors related to its issuer or, in the case of a derivative, the issuer of the underlying instrument. The general risk component shall encompass the risk of a price change in the instrument due in the case of a traded debt instrument or debt derivative to a change in the level of interest rates or in the case of an equity or equity derivative to a broad equity-market movement unrelated to any specific attributes of individual securities.
Article 363
@@ -10158,17 +10657,17 @@
Institutions shall notify the competent authorities of all other extensions and changes to the use of those internal models that the institution has received permission to use.
EBA shall develop draft regulatory technical standards to specify the following:
(a) the conditions for assessing materiality of extensions and changes to the use of internal models;
#### EBA shall develop draft regulatory technical standards to specify the following:
##### (a) the conditions for assessing materiality of extensions and changes to the use of internal models;
(b) the assessment methodology under which competent authorities permit institutions to use internal models;
(c) the conditions under which the share of positions covered by the internal model within a risk category shall be considered significant as referred to in paragraph 2.
#### EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 31 December 2014.
##### Power is delegated to the Commission to adopt the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 31 December 2014.
Power is delegated to the Commission to adopt the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
Article 364
@@ -10186,23 +10685,23 @@
Institutions that use an internal model to calculate their own funds requirement for specific risk of debt instruments shall fulfil an additional own funds requirement expressed as the sum of the following points (a) and (b):
(a) the own funds requirement calculated in accordance with Article 337 and 338 for the specific risk of securitisation positions and nth to default credit derivatives in the trading book with the exception of those incorporated in an own funds requirement for the specific risk of the correlation trading portfolio in accordance with Section 5 and, where applicable, the own funds requirement for specific risk in accordance with Chapter 2, Section 6, for those positions in CIUs for which neither the conditions in Article 350(1) nor Article 350(2) are fulfilled;
(b) the higher of:
## (a) the own funds requirement calculated in accordance with Article 337 and 338 for the specific risk of securitisation positions and nth to default credit derivatives in the trading book with the exception of those incorporated in an own funds requirement for the specific risk of the correlation trading portfolio in accordance with Section 5 and, where applicable, the own funds requirement for specific risk in accordance with Chapter 2, Section 6, for those positions in CIUs for which neither the conditions in Article 350(1) nor Article 350(2) are fulfilled;
### (b) the higher of:
(i) the most recent risk number for the incremental default and migration risk calculated in accordance with Section 3;
(ii) the average of this number over the preceding 12 weeks.
Institutions that have a correlation trading portfolio, which meets the requirements in Article 338(1) to (3), may fulfil an own funds requirement on the basis of Article 377 instead of Article 338(4), calculated as the higher of the following:
(a) the most recent risk number for the correlation trading portfolio calculated in accordance with Section 5;
## (b) the average of this number over the preceding 12-weeks;
### (c) 8 % of the own funds requirement that would, at the time of calculation of the most recent risk number referred to in point (a), be calculated in accordance with Article 338(4) for all those positions incorporated into the internal model for the correlation trading portfolio.
#### Section 2
##### General requirements
#### Institutions that have a correlation trading portfolio, which meets the requirements in Article 338(1) to (3), may fulfil an own funds requirement on the basis of Article 377 instead of Article 338(4), calculated as the higher of the following:
##### (a) the most recent risk number for the correlation trading portfolio calculated in accordance with Section 5;
(b) the average of this number over the preceding 12-weeks;
(c) 8 % of the own funds requirement that would, at the time of calculation of the most recent risk number referred to in point (a), be calculated in accordance with Article 338(4) for all those positions incorporated into the internal model for the correlation trading portfolio.
Section 2
General requirements
Article 365
@@ -10210,21 +10709,21 @@
The calculation of the value-at-risk number referred to in Article 364 shall be subject to the following requirements:
(a) daily calculation of the value-at-risk number;
(b) a 99th percentile, one-tailed confidence interval;
#### (a) daily calculation of the value-at-risk number;
##### (b) a 99th percentile, one-tailed confidence interval;
(c) a 10-day holding period;
(d) an effective historical observation period of at least one year except where a shorter observation period is justified by a significant upsurge in price volatility;
#### (e) at least monthly data set updates.
##### The institution may use value-at-risk numbers calculated according to shorter holding periods than 10 days scaled up to 10 days by an appropriate methodology that is reviewed periodically.
Article 366
Regulatory back testing and multiplication factors
(e) at least monthly data set updates.
The institution may use value-at-risk numbers calculated according to shorter holding periods than 10 days scaled up to 10 days by an appropriate methodology that is reviewed periodically.
#### Article 366
##### Regulatory back testing and multiplication factors
Each of the multiplication factors (mc) and (ms) shall be the sum of at least 3 and an addend between 0 and 1 in accordance with Table 1. That addend shall depend on the number of overshootings for the most recent 250 business days as evidenced by the institution's back-testing of the value-at-risk number as set out in Article 365(1).
@@ -10238,9 +10737,9 @@
| 9 | 0,85 |
| 10 or more | 1,00 |
#### Back-testing on hypothetical changes in the portfolio's value shall be based on a comparison between the portfolio's end-of-day value and, assuming unchanged positions, its value at the end of the subsequent day.
##### Back-testing on actual changes in the portfolio's value shall be based on a comparison between the portfolio's end-of-day value and its actual value at the end of the subsequent day excluding fees, commissions, and net interest income.
Back-testing on hypothetical changes in the portfolio's value shall be based on a comparison between the portfolio's end-of-day value and, assuming unchanged positions, its value at the end of the subsequent day.
Back-testing on actual changes in the portfolio's value shall be based on a comparison between the portfolio's end-of-day value and its actual value at the end of the subsequent day excluding fees, commissions, and net interest income.
Article 367
@@ -10252,17 +10751,17 @@
(b) the model shall capture a sufficient number of risk factors, depending on the level of activity of the institution in the respective markets. Where a risk factor is incorporated into the institution's pricing model but not into the risk-measurement model, the institution shall be able to justify such an omission to the satisfaction of the competent authority. The risk- measurement model shall capture nonlinearities for options and other products as well as correlation risk and basis risk. Where proxies for risk factors are used they shall show a good track record for the actual position held.
Any internal model used to calculate capital requirements for position risk, foreign exchange risk or commodities risk shall meet all of the following requirements:
(a) the model shall incorporate a set of risk factors corresponding to the interest rates in each currency in which the institution has interest rate sensitive on- or off-balance sheet positions. The institution shall model the yield curves using one of the generally accepted approaches. For material exposures to interest-rate risk in the major currencies and markets, the yield curve shall be divided into a minimum of six maturity segments, to capture the variations of volatility of rates along the yield curve. The model shall also capture the risk of less than perfectly correlated movements between different yield curves;
#### Any internal model used to calculate capital requirements for position risk, foreign exchange risk or commodities risk shall meet all of the following requirements:
##### (a) the model shall incorporate a set of risk factors corresponding to the interest rates in each currency in which the institution has interest rate sensitive on- or off-balance sheet positions. The institution shall model the yield curves using one of the generally accepted approaches. For material exposures to interest-rate risk in the major currencies and markets, the yield curve shall be divided into a minimum of six maturity segments, to capture the variations of volatility of rates along the yield curve. The model shall also capture the risk of less than perfectly correlated movements between different yield curves;
(b) the model shall incorporate risk factors corresponding to gold and to the individual foreign currencies in which the institution's positions are denominated. For CIUs the actual foreign exchange positions of the CIU shall be taken into account. Institutions may rely on third party reporting of the foreign exchange position of the CIU, where the correctness of that report is adequately ensured. If an institution is not aware of the foreign exchange positions of a CIU, this position shall be carved out and treated in accordance with Article 353(3);
(c) the model shall use a separate risk factor at least for each of the equity markets in which the institution holds significant positions;
#### (d) the model shall use a separate risk factor at least for each commodity in which the institution holds significant positions. The model shall also capture the risk of less than perfectly correlated movements between similar, but not identical, commodities and the exposure to changes in forward prices arising from maturity mismatches. It shall also take account of market characteristics, notably delivery dates and the scope provided to traders to close out positions;
##### (e) the institution's internal model shall conservatively assess the risk arising from less liquid positions and positions with limited price transparency under realistic market scenarios. In addition, the internal model shall meet minimum data standards. Proxies shall be appropriately conservative and shall be used only where available data is insufficient or is not reflective of the true volatility of a position or portfolio.
(d) the model shall use a separate risk factor at least for each commodity in which the institution holds significant positions. The model shall also capture the risk of less than perfectly correlated movements between similar, but not identical, commodities and the exposure to changes in forward prices arising from maturity mismatches. It shall also take account of market characteristics, notably delivery dates and the scope provided to traders to close out positions;
(e) the institution's internal model shall conservatively assess the risk arising from less liquid positions and positions with limited price transparency under realistic market scenarios. In addition, the internal model shall meet minimum data standards. Proxies shall be appropriately conservative and shall be used only where available data is insufficient or is not reflective of the true volatility of a position or portfolio.
Article 368
@@ -10290,33 +10789,33 @@
(a) the adequacy of the documentation of the risk-management system and process and the organisation of the risk-control unit;
(b) the integration of risk measures into daily risk management and the integrity of the management information system;
(c) the process the institution employs for approving risk-pricing models and valuation systems that are used by front and back-office personnel;
#### (b) the integration of risk measures into daily risk management and the integrity of the management information system;
##### (c) the process the institution employs for approving risk-pricing models and valuation systems that are used by front and back-office personnel;
(d) the scope of risks captured by the risk-measurement model and the validation of any significant changes in the risk-measurement process;
(e) the accuracy and completeness of position data, the accuracy and appropriateness of volatility and correlation assumptions, and the accuracy of valuation and risk sensitivity calculations;
#### (f) the verification process the institution employs to evaluate the consistency, timeliness and reliability of data sources used to run internal models, including the independence of such data sources;
##### (g) the verification process the institution uses to evaluate back-testing that is conducted to assess the models' accuracy.
Article 369
Internal Validation
Institutions shall have processes in place to ensure that all their internal models used for purposes of this Chapter have been adequately validated by suitably qualified parties independent of the development process to ensure that they are conceptually sound and adequately capture all material risks. The validation shall be conducted when the internal model is initially developed and when any significant changes are made to the internal model. The validation shall also be conducted on a periodic basis but especially where there have been any significant structural changes in the market or changes to the composition of the portfolio which might lead to the internal model no longer being adequate. As techniques and best practices for internal validation evolve, institutions shall apply these advances. Internal model validation shall not be limited to back-testing, but shall, at a minimum, also include the following:
(a) tests to demonstrate that any assumptions made within the internal model are appropriate and do not underestimate or overestimate the risk;
## (b) in addition to the regulatory back-testing programmes, institutions shall carry out their own internal model validation tests, including back-testing, in relation to the risks and structures of their portfolios;
### (c) the use of hypothetical portfolios to ensure that the internal model is able to account for particular structural features that may arise, for example material basis risks and concentration risk.
#### Section 3
##### Requirements particular to specific risk modelling
(f) the verification process the institution employs to evaluate the consistency, timeliness and reliability of data sources used to run internal models, including the independence of such data sources;
(g) the verification process the institution uses to evaluate back-testing that is conducted to assess the models' accuracy.
## Article 369
### Internal Validation
#### Institutions shall have processes in place to ensure that all their internal models used for purposes of this Chapter have been adequately validated by suitably qualified parties independent of the development process to ensure that they are conceptually sound and adequately capture all material risks. The validation shall be conducted when the internal model is initially developed and when any significant changes are made to the internal model. The validation shall also be conducted on a periodic basis but especially where there have been any significant structural changes in the market or changes to the composition of the portfolio which might lead to the internal model no longer being adequate. As techniques and best practices for internal validation evolve, institutions shall apply these advances. Internal model validation shall not be limited to back-testing, but shall, at a minimum, also include the following:
##### (a) tests to demonstrate that any assumptions made within the internal model are appropriate and do not underestimate or overestimate the risk;
(b) in addition to the regulatory back-testing programmes, institutions shall carry out their own internal model validation tests, including back-testing, in relation to the risks and structures of their portfolios;
(c) the use of hypothetical portfolios to ensure that the internal model is able to account for particular structural features that may arise, for example material basis risks and concentration risk.
Section 3
Requirements particular to specific risk modelling
Article 370
@@ -10324,33 +10823,33 @@
An internal model used for calculating own funds requirements for specific risk and an internal model for correlation trading shall meet the following additional requirements:
(a) it explains the historical price variation in the portfolio;
(b) it captures concentration in terms of magnitude and changes of composition of the portfolio;
(c) it is robust to an adverse environment;
(d) it is validated through back-testing aimed at assessing whether specific risk is being accurately captured. If the institution performs such back-testing on the basis of relevant sub-portfolios, these shall be chosen in a consistent manner;
#### (a) it explains the historical price variation in the portfolio;
##### (b) it captures concentration in terms of magnitude and changes of composition of the portfolio;
## (c) it is robust to an adverse environment;
### (d) it is validated through back-testing aimed at assessing whether specific risk is being accurately captured. If the institution performs such back-testing on the basis of relevant sub-portfolios, these shall be chosen in a consistent manner;
#### (e) it captures name-related basis risk and shall in particular be sensitive to material idiosyncratic differences between similar but not identical positions;
##### (f) it captures event risk.
## Article 371
### Exclusions from specific risk models
#### Section 4
##### Internal model for incremental default and migration risk
Article 371
Exclusions from specific risk models
Section 4
Internal model for incremental default and migration risk
Article 372
Requirement to have an internal IRC model
An institution that uses an internal model for calculating own funds requirements for specific risk of traded debt instruments shall also have an internal incremental default and migration risk (IRC) model in place to capture the default and migration risks of its trading book positions that are incremental to the risks captured by the value-at-risk measure as specified in Article 365(1). The institution shall demonstrate that its internal model meets the following standards under the assumption of a constant level of risk, and adjusted where appropriate to reflect the impact of liquidity, concentrations, hedging and optionality:
(a) the internal model provides a meaningful differentiation of risk and accurate and consistent estimates of incremental default and migration risk;
#### An institution that uses an internal model for calculating own funds requirements for specific risk of traded debt instruments shall also have an internal incremental default and migration risk (IRC) model in place to capture the default and migration risks of its trading book positions that are incremental to the risks captured by the value-at-risk measure as specified in Article 365(1). The institution shall demonstrate that its internal model meets the following standards under the assumption of a constant level of risk, and adjusted where appropriate to reflect the impact of liquidity, concentrations, hedging and optionality:
##### (a) the internal model provides a meaningful differentiation of risk and accurate and consistent estimates of incremental default and migration risk;
(b) the internal model's estimates for potential losses play an essential role in the risk management of the institution;
@@ -10360,45 +10859,45 @@
##### EBA shall issue guidelines on the requirements in Articles 373 to 376.
Article 373
Scope of the internal IRC model
#### The internal IRC model shall cover all positions subject to an own funds requirement for specific interest rate risk, including those subject to a 0 % specific risk capital charge under Article 336, but shall not cover securitisation positions and n-th-to-default credit derivatives.
##### The institution may, subject to permission by the competent authorities, choose to consistently include all listed equity positions and derivatives positions based on listed equities. The permission shall be granted if such inclusion is consistent with how the institution internally measures and manages risk.
#### Article 374
##### Parameters of the internal IRC model
Article 375
Recognition of hedges in the internal IRC model
#### Article 373
##### Scope of the internal IRC model
The internal IRC model shall cover all positions subject to an own funds requirement for specific interest rate risk, including those subject to a 0 % specific risk capital charge under Article 336, but shall not cover securitisation positions and n-th-to-default credit derivatives.
The institution may, subject to permission by the competent authorities, choose to consistently include all listed equity positions and derivatives positions based on listed equities. The permission shall be granted if such inclusion is consistent with how the institution internally measures and manages risk.
Article 374
Parameters of the internal IRC model
#### Article 375
##### Recognition of hedges in the internal IRC model
For positions that are hedged via dynamic hedging strategies, a rebalancing of the hedge within the liquidity horizon of the hedged position may be recognised provided that the institution:
(a) chooses to model rebalancing of the hedge consistently over the relevant set of trading book positions;
#### (b) demonstrates that the inclusion of rebalancing results in a better risk measurement;
##### (c) demonstrates that the markets for the instruments serving as hedges are liquid enough to allow for such rebalancing even during periods of stress. Any residual risks resulting from dynamic hedging strategies shall be reflected in the own funds requirement.
Article 376
Particular requirements for the internal IRC model
As part of the independent review and validation of their internal models used for purposes of this Chapter, inclusively for purposes of the risk measurement system, an institution shall in particular do all of the following:
(a) validate that its modelling approach for correlations and price changes is appropriate for its portfolio, including the choice and weights of its systematic risk factors;
## (b) perform a variety of stress tests, including sensitivity analysis and scenario analysis, to assess the qualitative and quantitative reasonableness of the internal model, particularly with regard to the treatment of concentrations. Such tests shall not be limited to the range of events experienced historically;
### (c) apply appropriate quantitative validation including relevant internal modelling benchmarks.
#### Section 5
##### Internal model for correlation trading
(b) demonstrates that the inclusion of rebalancing results in a better risk measurement;
(c) demonstrates that the markets for the instruments serving as hedges are liquid enough to allow for such rebalancing even during periods of stress. Any residual risks resulting from dynamic hedging strategies shall be reflected in the own funds requirement.
## Article 376
### Particular requirements for the internal IRC model
#### As part of the independent review and validation of their internal models used for purposes of this Chapter, inclusively for purposes of the risk measurement system, an institution shall in particular do all of the following:
##### (a) validate that its modelling approach for correlations and price changes is appropriate for its portfolio, including the choice and weights of its systematic risk factors;
(b) perform a variety of stress tests, including sensitivity analysis and scenario analysis, to assess the qualitative and quantitative reasonableness of the internal model, particularly with regard to the treatment of concentrations. Such tests shall not be limited to the range of events experienced historically;
(c) apply appropriate quantitative validation including relevant internal modelling benchmarks.
Section 5
Internal model for correlation trading
Article 377
@@ -10410,35 +10909,35 @@
(b) credit spread risk, including the gamma and cross-gamma effects;
(c) volatility of implied correlations, including the cross effect between spreads and correlations;
(d) basis risk, including both of the following:
## (c) volatility of implied correlations, including the cross effect between spreads and correlations;
### (d) basis risk, including both of the following:
(i) the basis between the spread of an index and those of its constituent single names;
(ii) the basis between the implied correlation of an index and that of bespoke portfolios;
(e) recovery rate volatility, as it relates to the propensity for recovery rates to affect tranche prices;
(f) to the extent the comprehensive risk measure incorporates benefits from dynamic hedging, the risk of hedge slippage and the potential costs of rebalancing such hedges;
## (g) any other material price risks of positions in the correlation trading portfolio.
### The institution shall have appropriate policies and procedures in place in order to separate the positions for which it holds permission to incorporate them in the own funds requirement in accordance with this Article from other positions for which it does not hold such permission.
#### TITLE V
##### OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS FOR SETTLEMENT RISK
Article 378
Settlement/delivery risk
#### (e) recovery rate volatility, as it relates to the propensity for recovery rates to affect tranche prices;
##### (f) to the extent the comprehensive risk measure incorporates benefits from dynamic hedging, the risk of hedge slippage and the potential costs of rebalancing such hedges;
(g) any other material price risks of positions in the correlation trading portfolio.
The institution shall have appropriate policies and procedures in place in order to separate the positions for which it holds permission to incorporate them in the own funds requirement in accordance with this Article from other positions for which it does not hold such permission.
TITLE V
OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS FOR SETTLEMENT RISK
#### Article 378
##### Settlement/delivery risk
In the case of transactions in which debt instruments, equities, foreign currencies and commodities excluding repurchase transactions and securities or commodities lending and securities or commodities borrowing are unsettled after their due delivery dates, an institution shall calculate the price difference to which it is exposed.
The price difference is calculated as the difference between the agreed settlement price for the debt instrument, equity, foreign currency or commodity in question and its current market value, where the difference could involve a loss for the credit institution.
#### The institution shall multiply that price difference by the appropriate factor in the right column of the following Table 1 in order to calculate the institution's own funds requirement for settlement risk.
##### | Number of working days after due settlement date | (%) |
The institution shall multiply that price difference by the appropriate factor in the right column of the following Table 1 in order to calculate the institution's own funds requirement for settlement risk.
| Number of working days after due settlement date | (%) |
| --- | --- |
| 5 — 15 | 8 |
| 16 — 30 | 50 |
@@ -10447,36 +10946,36 @@
Article 379
Free deliveries
An institution shall be required to hold own funds, as set out in Table 2, where the following occurs:
#### Free deliveries
##### An institution shall be required to hold own funds, as set out in Table 2, where the following occurs:
(a) it has paid for securities, foreign currencies or commodities before receiving them or it has delivered securities, foreign currencies or commodities before receiving payment for them;
(b) in the case of cross-border transactions, one day or more has elapsed since it made that payment or delivery.
#### | Column 1 | Column 2 | Column 3 | Column 4 |
## (b) in the case of cross-border transactions, one day or more has elapsed since it made that payment or delivery.
### | Column 1 | Column 2 | Column 3 | Column 4 |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| Transaction Type | Up to first contractual payment or delivery leg | From first contractual payment or delivery leg up to four days after second contractual payment or delivery leg | From 5 business days post second contractual payment or delivery leg until extinction of the transaction |
| Free delivery | No capital charge | Treat as an exposure | Treat as an exposure risk weighted at 1 250  % |
##### If the amount of positive exposure resulting from free delivery transactions is not material, institutions may apply a risk weight of 100 % to these exposures, except where a risk weight of 1 250  % in accordance with Column 4 of Table 2 in paragraph 1 is required.
Article 380
## Waiver
### Where a system wide failure of a settlement system, a clearing system or a CCP occurs, competent authorities may waive the own funds requirements calculated as set out in Articles 378 and 379 until the situation is rectified. In this case, the failure of a counterparty to settle a trade shall not be deemed a default for purposes of credit risk.
#### TITLE VI
##### OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS FOR CREDIT VALUATION ADJUSTMENT RISK
#### If the amount of positive exposure resulting from free delivery transactions is not material, institutions may apply a risk weight of 100 % to these exposures, except where a risk weight of 1 250  % in accordance with Column 4 of Table 2 in paragraph 1 is required.
##### Article 380
Waiver
#### Where a system wide failure of a settlement system, a clearing system or a CCP occurs, competent authorities may waive the own funds requirements calculated as set out in Articles 378 and 379 until the situation is rectified. In this case, the failure of a counterparty to settle a trade shall not be deemed a default for purposes of credit risk.
##### TITLE VI
OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS FOR CREDIT VALUATION ADJUSTMENT RISK
Article 381
#### Meaning of credit valuation adjustment
##### For the purposes of this Title and Chapter 6 of Title II, ‘credit valuation adjustment’ or ‘CVA’ means an adjustment to the mid-market valuation of the portfolio of transactions with a counterparty. That adjustment reflects the current market value of the credit risk of the counterparty to the institution, but does not reflect the current market value of the credit risk of the institution to the counterparty.
Meaning of credit valuation adjustment
For the purposes of this Title and Chapter 6 of Title II, ‘credit valuation adjustment’ or ‘CVA’ means an adjustment to the mid-market valuation of the portfolio of transactions with a counterparty. That adjustment reflects the current market value of the credit risk of the counterparty to the institution, but does not reflect the current market value of the credit risk of the institution to the counterparty.
Article 382
@@ -10486,21 +10985,21 @@
(a) transactions with non-financial counterparties as defined in point (9) of Article 2 of Regulation (EU) No 648/2012, or with non-financial counterparties established in a third country, where those transactions do not exceed the clearing threshold as specified in Article 10(3) and (4) of that Regulation;
(b) intragroup transactions as provided for in Article 3 of Regulation (EU) No 648/2012 unless Member States adopt national laws requiring the structural separation within a banking group, in which case competent authorities may require those intragroup transactions between the structurally separated institutions to be included in the own funds requirements;
(b) intragroup transactions as provided for in Article 3 of Regulation (EU) No 648/2012, unless Member States adopt national law requiring the structural separation within a banking group, in which case competent authorities may require those intragroup transactions between the structurally separated entities to be included in the own funds requirements;
(c) transactions with counterparties referred to in point (10) of Article 2 of Regulation (EU) No 648/2012 and subject to the transitional provisions set out in Article 89(1) of that Regulation until those transitional provisions cease to apply;
(d) transactions with counterparties referred to in Article 1(4) and (5) of Regulation (EU) No 648/2012 and transactions with counterparties for which Article 114(4) and Article 115(2) of this Regulation specifies a risk weight of 0 % for exposures to those counterparties.
The exemption from the CVA risk charge for those transactions referred to in point (c) of this paragraph) which are entered into during the transitional period laid down in Article 89(1) of Regulation (EU) No 648/2012 shall apply for the length of the contract of that transaction.
#### (d) transactions with counterparties referred to in Article 1(4) and (5) of Regulation (EU) No 648/2012 and transactions with counterparties for which Article 114(4) and Article 115(2) of this Regulation specifies a risk weight of 0 % for exposures to those counterparties.
##### The exemption from the CVA risk charge for those transactions referred to in point (c) of this paragraph) which are entered into during the transitional period laid down in Article 89(1) of Regulation (EU) No 648/2012 shall apply for the length of the contract of that transaction.
In regard to point (a), where an institution ceases to be exempt through crossing the exemption threshold or due to a change in the exemption threshold, outstanding contracts shall remain exempt until the date of their maturity.
EBA in cooperation with ESMA shall develop draft regulatory technical standards to specify the procedures for excluding transactions with non-financial counterparties established in a third country from the own funds requirement for CVA risk charge.
#### EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards within six months of the date of the review referred to in the first subparagraph,
##### Power is delegated to the Commission to adopt the regulatory technical standards referred to in the second subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards within six months of the date of the review referred to in the first subparagraph,
Power is delegated to the Commission to adopt the regulatory technical standards referred to in the second subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
Article 383
@@ -10549,29 +11048,29 @@
(c) the three-times multiplication factor used in the calculation of own funds requirements based on a value-at-risk and a stressed value-at-risk in accordance with 364(1) will apply to these calculations. EBA shall monitor for consistency any supervisory discretion used to apply a higher multiplication factor than that three-times multiplication factor to the value-at-risk and stressed value-at-risk inputs to the CVA risk charge. Competent authorities applying a multiplication factor higher than three shall provide a written justification to EBA;
(d) the calculation shall be carried out on at least a monthly basis and the EE that is used shall be calculated on the same frequency. If lower than a daily frequency is used, for the purpose of the calculation specified in points (a)(ii) and (b)(ii) of Article 364(1) institutions shall take the average over three months.
EBA shall develop draft regulatory technical standards to specify in greater detail:
#### (d) the calculation shall be carried out on at least a monthly basis and the EE that is used shall be calculated on the same frequency. If lower than a daily frequency is used, for the purpose of the calculation specified in points (a)(ii) and (b)(ii) of Article 364(1) institutions shall take the average over three months.
##### EBA shall develop draft regulatory technical standards to specify in greater detail:
(a) how a proxy spread is to be determined by the institution's approved internal model for the specific risk of debt instruments for the purposes of identifying si and LGDMKT referred to in paragraph 1;
(b) the number and size of portfolios that fulfil the criterion of a limited number of smaller portfolios referred to in paragraph 4.
#### EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 1 January 2014.
##### Power is delegated to the Commission to adopt the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
Article 384
Standardised method
EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 1 January 2014.
Power is delegated to the Commission to adopt the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
#### Article 384
##### Standardised method
An institution which does not calculate the own funds requirements for CVA risk for its counterparties in accordance with Article 383 shall calculate a portfolio own funds requirements for CVA risk for each counterparty in accordance with the following formula, taking into account CVA hedges that are eligible in accordance with Article 386:
where:
#### Where a counterparty is included in an index on which a credit default swap used for hedging counterparty credit risk is based, the institution may subtract the notional amount attributable to that counterparty in accordance with its reference entity weight from the index CDS notional amount and treat it as a single name hedge (Bi) of the individual counterparty with maturity based on the maturity of the index.
##### | Credit quality step | Weight wi |
#### where:
##### Where a counterparty is included in an index on which a credit default swap used for hedging counterparty credit risk is based, the institution may subtract the notional amount attributable to that counterparty in accordance with its reference entity weight from the index CDS notional amount and treat it as a single name hedge (Bi) of the individual counterparty with maturity based on the maturity of the index.
| Credit quality step | Weight wi |
| --- | --- |
| 1 | 0,7 % |
| 2 | 0,8 % |
@@ -10580,11 +11079,11 @@
| 5 | 3,0 % |
| 6 | 10,0 % |
Article 385
#### Alternative to using CVA methods to calculating own funds requirements
##### As an alternative to Article 384, for instruments referred to in Article 382 and subject to the prior consent of the competent authority, institutions using the Original Exposure Method as laid down in Article 275, may apply a multiplication factor of 10 to the resulting risk-weighted exposure amounts for counterparty credit risk for those exposures instead of calculating own funds requirements for CVA risk.
Article 385
Alternative to using CVA methods for calculating own funds requirements
As an alternative to Article 384, for instruments referred to in Article 382 and subject to the prior consent of the competent authority, institutions using the Original Exposure Method as laid down in Article 282 may apply a multiplication factor of 10 to the resulting risk-weighted exposure amounts for counterparty credit risk for those exposures instead of calculating the own funds requirements for CVA risk.
Article 386
@@ -10592,81 +11091,71 @@
Hedges shall be ‘eligible hedges’ for the purposes of the calculation of own funds requirements for CVA risk in accordance with Articles 383 and 384 only where they are used for the purpose of mitigating CVA risk and managed as such, and are one of the following:
(a) single-name credit default swaps or other equivalent hedging instruments referencing the counterparty directly;
(b) index credit default swaps, provided that the basis between any individual counterparty spread and the spreads of index credit default swap hedges is reflected, to the satisfaction of the competent authority, in the value-at-risk and the stressed value-at-risk.
The requirement in point (b) that the basis between any individual counterparty spread and the spreads of index credit default swap hedges is reflected in the value-at-risk and the stressed value-at-risk shall also apply to cases where a proxy is used for the spread of a counterparty.
For all counterparties for which a proxy is used, an institution shall use reasonable basis time series out of a representative group of similar names for which a spread is available.
## If the basis between any individual counterparty spread and the spreads of index credit default swap hedges is not reflected to the satisfaction of the competent authority, then an institution shall reflect only 50 % of the notional amount of index hedges in the value-at-risk and the stressed value-at-risk.
### Over-hedging of the exposures with single name credit default swaps under the method laid out in Article 383 is not allowed.
#### PART FOUR
##### LARGE EXPOSURES
Article 387
#### Subject matter
##### Institutions shall monitor and control their large exposures in accordance with this Part.
Article 388
Negative Scope
#### This Part shall not apply to investment firms that fulfil the criteria set out in Article 95(1) or Article 96(1).
##### This Part shall not apply to a group on the basis of its consolidated situation, if that group only includes investment firms referred to in Article 95(1) or Article 96(1) and ancillary companies and where that group does not include credit institutions.
## (a) single-name credit default swaps or other equivalent hedging instruments referencing the counterparty directly;
### (b) index credit default swaps, provided that the basis between any individual counterparty spread and the spreads of index credit default swap hedges is reflected, to the satisfaction of the competent authority, in the value-at-risk and the stressed value-at-risk.
#### The requirement in point (b) that the basis between any individual counterparty spread and the spreads of index credit default swap hedges is reflected in the value-at-risk and the stressed value-at-risk shall also apply to cases where a proxy is used for the spread of a counterparty.
##### For all counterparties for which a proxy is used, an institution shall use reasonable basis time series out of a representative group of similar names for which a spread is available.
If the basis between any individual counterparty spread and the spreads of index credit default swap hedges is not reflected to the satisfaction of the competent authority, then an institution shall reflect only 50 % of the notional amount of index hedges in the value-at-risk and the stressed value-at-risk.
#### Over-hedging of the exposures with single name credit default swaps under the method laid out in Article 383 is not allowed.
##### PART FOUR
LARGE EXPOSURES
#### Article 387
##### Subject matter
Institutions shall monitor and control their large exposures in accordance with this Part.
Article 389
#### Definition
##### For the purposes of this Part, ‘exposures’, means any asset or off-balance sheet item referred to in Part Three, Title II, Chapter 2, without applying the risk weights or degrees of risk.
Article 390
Definition
For the purposes of this Part, ‘exposures’, means any asset or off-balance sheet item referred to in Part Three, Title II, Chapter 2, without applying the risk weights or degrees of risk.
Article 390
Calculation of the exposure value
The institutions that calculate the own funds requirements for their trading-book business in accordance with Part Three, Title IV, Chapter 2, Article 299 and Part Three, Title V and, as appropriate, with Part Three, Title IV, Chapter 5, shall calculate the exposures to individual clients which arise on the trading book by adding together the following items:
(a) the positive excess of an institution's long positions over its short positions in all the financial instruments issued by the client in question, the net position in each of the different instruments being calculated in accordance with the methods laid down in Part Three, Title IV, Chapter 2;
(b) the net exposure, in the case of the underwriting of a debt or an equity instrument;
(c) the exposures due to the transactions, agreements and contracts referred to in Articles 299 and 378 to 380 with the client in question, such exposures being calculated in the manner laid down in those Articles, for the calculation of exposure values.
For the purposes of point (b), the net exposure is calculated by deducting those underwriting positions which are subscribed or sub-underwritten by third parties on the basis of a formal agreement reduced by the factors set out in Article 345.
For the purposes of point (b), institutions shall set up systems to monitor and control their underwriting exposures between the time of the initial commitment and the next business day in the light of the nature of the risks incurred in the markets in question.
For the purposes of point (c), Part Three, Title II, Chapter 3 shall be excluded from the reference in Article 299.
For exposures in the trading book, institutions may:
(a) offset their long positions and short positions in the same financial instruments issued by a given client, with the net position in each of the different instruments being calculated in accordance with the methods laid down in Chapter 2 of Title IV of Part Three;
(b) offset their long positions and short positions in different financial instruments issued by a given client, but only where the financial instrument underlying the short position is junior to the financial instrument underlying the long position or where the underlying instruments are of the same seniority.
For the purposes of points (a) and (b), financial instruments may be allocated into buckets on the basis of different degrees of seniority in order to determine the relative seniority of positions.
When calculating the exposure value for the contracts referred to in the first subparagraph, where those contracts are allocated to the trading book, institutions shall also comply with the principles set out in Article 299.
By way of derogation from the first subparagraph, institutions with permission to use the methods referred to in Section 4 of Chapter 4 of Title II of Part Three and Section 6 of Chapter 6 of Title II of Part Three may use those methods for calculating the exposure value for securities financing transactions.
Exposures shall not include any of the following:
(a) in the case of foreign exchange transactions, exposures incurred in the ordinary course of settlement during the two working days following payment;
(b) in the case of transactions for the purchase or sale of securities, exposures incurred in the ordinary course of settlement during five working days following payment or delivery of the securities, whichever the earlier;
(a) in the case of foreign exchange transactions, exposures incurred in the ordinary course of settlement during the two business days following payment;
(b) in the case of transactions for the purchase or sale of securities, exposures incurred in the ordinary course of settlement during the five business days following payment or delivery of the securities, whichever is the earlier;
(c) in the case of the provision of money transmission including the execution of payment services, clearing and settlement in any currency and correspondent banking or financial instruments clearing, settlement and custody services to clients, delayed receipts in funding and other exposures arising from client activity which do not last longer than the following business day;
(d) in the case of the provision of money transmission including the execution of payment services, clearing and settlement in any currency and correspondent banking, intra-day exposures to institutions providing those services;
(e) exposures deducted from own funds in accordance with Articles 36, 56 and 66.
EBA shall develop draft regulatory technical standards to specify the following:
(a) the conditions and methodologies used to determine the overall exposure to a client or a group of connected clients in respect of the types of exposures referred to in paragraph 7;
(b) the conditions under which the structure of the transaction referred to in paragraph 7 does not constitute an additional exposure.
EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 1 January 2014.
Power is delegated to the Commission to adopt the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
(e) exposures deducted from Common Equity Tier 1 items or Additional Tier 1 items in accordance with Articles 36 and 56 or any other deduction from those items that reduces the solvency ratio.
EBA shall develop draft regulatory technical standards to specify:
#### (a) the conditions and methodologies to be used to determine the overall exposure to a client or a group of connected clients for the types of exposures referred to in paragraph 7;
##### (b) the conditions under which the structure of the transactions referred to in paragraph 7 do not constitute an additional exposure.
EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 1 January 2014.
Power is delegated to the Commission to adopt the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
#### EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 28 March 2020.
@@ -10674,61 +11163,61 @@
Article 391
Definition of an institution for large exposures purposes
#### For the purposes of calculating the value of exposures in accordance with this Part the term ‘institution’ shall include a private or public undertaking, including its branches, which, were it established in the Union, would fulfil the definition of the term ‘institution’ and has been authorised in a third country that applies prudential supervisory and regulatory requirements at least equivalent to those applied in the Union.
##### For the purposes of the first paragraph, the Commission may adopt, by means of implementing acts, and subject to the examination procedure referred to in Article 464(2), decisions as to whether a third country applies prudential supervisory and regulatory requirements at least equivalent to those applied in the Union.
Article 392
#### Definition of a large exposure
##### An institution's exposure to a client or group of connected clients shall be considered a large exposure where its value is equal to or exceeds 10 % of its eligible capital.
#### Definition of an institution for large exposures purposes
##### For the purposes of calculating the value of exposures in accordance with this Part the term ‘institution’ shall include a private or public undertaking, including its branches, which, were it established in the Union, would fulfil the definition of the term ‘institution’ and has been authorised in a third country that applies prudential supervisory and regulatory requirements at least equivalent to those applied in the Union.
For the purposes of the first paragraph, the Commission may adopt, by means of implementing acts, and subject to the examination procedure referred to in Article 464(2), decisions as to whether a third country applies prudential supervisory and regulatory requirements at least equivalent to those applied in the Union.
#### Article 392
##### Definition of a large exposure
An institution's exposure to a client or a group of connected clients shall be considered a large exposure where the value of the exposure is equal to or exceeds 10 % of its Tier 1 capital.
Article 393
#### Capacity to identify and manage large exposures
##### An institution shall have sound administrative and accounting procedures and adequate internal control mechanisms for the purposes of identifying, managing, monitoring, reporting and recording all large exposures and subsequent changes to them, in accordance with this Regulation.
Article 394
Capacity to identify and manage large exposures
An institution shall have sound administrative and accounting procedures and adequate internal control mechanisms for the purposes of identifying, managing, monitoring, reporting and recording all large exposures and subsequent changes to them, in accordance with this Regulation.
Article 394
Reporting requirements
An institution shall report the following information about every large exposure to the competent authorities, including large exposures exempted from the application of Article 395(1):
(a) the identification of the client or the group of connected clients to which an institution has a large exposure;
(b) the exposure value before taking into account the effect of the credit risk mitigation, when applicable;
Institutions shall report the following information to their competent authorities for each large exposure that they hold, including large exposures exempted from the application of Article 395(1):
(a) the identity of the client or the group of connected clients to which the institution has a large exposure;
(b) the exposure value before taking into account the effect of the credit risk mitigation, where applicable;
(c) where used, the type of funded or unfunded credit protection;
(d) the exposure value after taking into account the effect of the credit risk mitigation calculated for the purpose of Article 395(1).
Where an institution is subject to Part Three, Title II, Chapter 3 its 20 largest exposures on a consolidated basis, excluding those exempted from the application of Article 395(1) shall be made available to the competent authorities.
An institution shall report the following information to the competent authorities, in addition to reporting the information referred to in paragraph 1, in relation to its 10 largest exposures on a consolidated basis to institutions as well as its 10 largest exposures on a consolidated basis to unregulated financial sector entities, including large exposures exempted from the application of Article 395(1):
(a) the identification of the client or the group of connected clients to which an institution has a large exposure;
(b) the exposure value before taking into account the effect of the credit risk mitigation, when applicable;
(d) the exposure value, after taking into account the effect of the credit risk mitigation calculated for the purposes of Article 395(1), where applicable.
Institutions that are subject to Chapter 3 of Title II of Part Three shall report their 20 largest exposures to their competent authorities on a consolidated basis, excluding the exposures exempted from the application of Article 395(1).
Institutions shall also report exposures of a value greater than or equal to EUR 300 million but less than 10 % of the institution's Tier 1 capital to their competent authorities on a consolidated basis.
In addition to the information referred to in paragraph 1 of this Article, institutions shall report the following information to their competent authorities in relation to their 10 largest exposures to institutions on a consolidated basis, as well as their 10 largest exposures to shadow banking entities which carry out banking activities outside the regulated framework on a consolidated basis, including large exposures exempted from the application of Article 395(1):
(a) the identity of the client or the group of connected clients to which an institution has a large exposure;
(b) the exposure value before taking into account the effect of the credit risk mitigation, where applicable;
(c) where used, the type of funded or unfunded credit protection;
(d) the exposure value after taking into account the effect of the credit risk mitigation calculated for the purpose of Article 395(1);
(e) the expected run-off of the exposure expressed as the amount maturing within monthly maturity buckets up to one year, quarterly maturity buckets up to three years and annually thereafter.
In developing those draft regulatory technical standards, EBA shall take into account international developments and internationally agreed standards on shadow banking and shall consider whether:
#### (d) the exposure value after taking into account the effect of the credit risk mitigation calculated for the purposes of Article 395(1), where applicable.
##### In developing those draft regulatory technical standards, EBA shall take into account international developments and internationally agreed standards on shadow banking and shall consider whether:
(a) the relation with an individual entity or a group of entities may carry risks to the institution's solvency or liquidity position;
(b) entities that are subject to solvency or liquidity requirements similar to those imposed by this Regulation and Directive 2013/36/EU should be entirely or partially excluded from the obligation to be reported referred to in paragraph 2 on shadow banking entities.
#### EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 28 June 2020.
##### Power is delegated to the Commission to supplement this Regulation by adopting the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 28 June 2020.
Power is delegated to the Commission to supplement this Regulation by adopting the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
Article 395
@@ -10742,19 +11231,19 @@
By 31 December 2015 the Commission shall assess the appropriateness and the impact of imposing limits on exposures to shadow banking entities which carry out banking activities outside a regulated framework, taking into account Union and international developments in the area of shadow banking and large exposures as well as credit risk mitigation in accordance with Articles 399 to 403. The Commission shall submit the report to the European Parliament and the Council, together, if appropriate, with a legislative proposal on exposure limits to shadow banking entities which carry out banking activities outside a regulated framework.
The limits laid down in this Article may be exceeded for the exposures on the institution's trading book if the following conditions are met:
(a) the exposure on the non-trading book to the client or group of connected clients in question does not exceed the limit laid down in paragraph 1, this limit being calculated with reference to eligible capital, so that the excess arises entirely on the trading book;
(b) the institution meets an additional own funds requirement on the excess in respect of the limit laid down in paragraph 1 which is calculated in accordance with Articles 397 and 398;
(c) where 10 days or less have elapsed since the excess occurred, the trading-book exposure to the client or group of connected clients in question shall not exceed 500 % of the institution's eligible capital;
(d) any excesses that have persisted for more than 10 days do not, in aggregate, exceed 600 % of the institution's eligible capital.
In each case in which the limit has been exceeded, the institution shall report the amount of the excess and the name of the client concerned and, where applicable, the name of the group of connected clients concerned, without delay to the competent authorities.
Notwithstanding paragraph 1 of this Article and Article 400(1)(f), where Member States adopt national laws requiring structural measures to be taken within a banking group, competent authorities may require the institutions of the banking group which hold deposits that are covered by a Deposit Guarantee Scheme in accordance with Directive 94/19/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 30 May 1994 on deposit-guarantee schemes (<sup>20</sup>) or an equivalent deposit guarantee scheme in a third country to apply a large exposure limit below 25 % but not lower than 15 % between 28 June 2013 and 30 June 2015, and than 10 % from 1 July 2015 on a sub-consolidated basis in accordance with Article 11(5) to intragroup exposures where these exposures consist of exposures to an entity that does not belong to the same subgroup as regards the structural measures.
The limits laid down in this Article may be exceeded for the exposures in the institution's trading book, provided that all the following conditions are met:
(a) the exposure in the non-trading book to the client or group of connected clients in question does not exceed the limit laid down in paragraph 1, this limit being calculated with reference to Tier 1 capital, so that the excess arises entirely in the trading book;
(b) the institution meets an additional own funds requirement on the part of the exposure in excess of the limit laid down in paragraph 1 of this Article which is calculated in accordance with Articles 397 and 398;
(c) where 10 days or less have elapsed since the excess referred to in point (b) occurred, the trading-book exposure to the client or group of connected clients in question does not exceed 500 % of the institution's Tier 1 capital;
(d) any excesses that have persisted for more than 10 days do not, in aggregate, exceed 600 % of the institution's Tier 1 capital.
Each time the limit has been exceeded, the institution shall report to the competent authorities without delay the amount of the excess and the name of the client concerned and, where applicable, the name of the group of connected clients concerned.
Notwithstanding paragraph 1 of this Article and Article 400(1)(f), where Member States adopt national laws requiring structural measures to be taken within a banking group, competent authorities may require the institutions of the banking group which hold deposits that are covered by a Deposit Guarantee Scheme in accordance with Directive 94/19/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 30 May 1994 on deposit-guarantee schemes (<sup>22</sup>) or an equivalent deposit guarantee scheme in a third country to apply a large exposure limit below 25 % but not lower than 15 % between 28 June 2013 and 30 June 2015, and than 10 % from 1 July 2015 on a sub-consolidated basis in accordance with Article 11(5) to intragroup exposures where these exposures consist of exposures to an entity that does not belong to the same subgroup as regards the structural measures.
For the purpose of this paragraph, the following conditions shall be met:
@@ -10770,23 +11259,25 @@
(b) an explanation as to why such draft measures are deemed to be suitable, effective and proportionate to protect depositors;
(c) an assessment of the likely positive or negative impact of the measures on the internal market based on information which is available to the Member State.
Within one month of receiving the notification referred to in paragraph 7, EBA shall provide its opinion on the points mentioned in that paragraph to the Council, the Commission and the Member State concerned. Competent authorities concerned may also provide their opinions on the points mentioned in that paragraph to the Council, the Commission and the Member State concerned.
#### (c) an assessment of the likely positive or negative impact of the measures on the internal market based on information which is available to the Member State.
##### Within one month of receiving the notification referred to in paragraph 7, EBA shall provide its opinion on the points mentioned in that paragraph to the Council, the Commission and the Member State concerned. Competent authorities concerned may also provide their opinions on the points mentioned in that paragraph to the Council, the Commission and the Member State concerned.
Taking utmost account of the opinions referred to in the second subparagraph and if there is robust and strong evidence that the measures have a negative impact on the internal market that outweighs the financial stability benefits, the Commission shall, within two months of receiving the notification, reject the proposed national measures. Otherwise, the Commission shall accept the proposed national measures for an initial period of 2 years and where appropriate the measures may be subject to amendment.
The Commission shall only reject the proposed national measures if it considers the proposed national measures entail disproportionate adverse effects on the whole or parts of the financial system in other Member States or in the Union as a whole, thus forming or creating an obstacle to the functioning of the internal market or to the free movement of capital in accordance with the provisions of the TFEU.
#### The assessment of the Commission shall take account of the opinion of EBA and shall take into account the evidence presented in accordance with paragraph 7.
##### Before the expiry of the measures, the competent authorities may propose new measures for the extension of the period of application for an additional period of 2 years each time. In this case, they shall notify the Commission, the Council, the competent authorities concerned and EBA. Approval of the new measures shall be subject to the process set out in this Article. This Article shall be without prejudice to Article 458.
The assessment of the Commission shall take account of the opinion of EBA and shall take into account the evidence presented in accordance with paragraph 7.
Before the expiry of the measures, the competent authorities may propose new measures for the extension of the period of application for an additional period of 2 years each time. In this case, they shall notify the Commission, the Council, the competent authorities concerned and EBA. Approval of the new measures shall be subject to the process set out in this Article. This Article shall be without prejudice to Article 458.
Article 396
Compliance with large exposures requirements
Where the amount of EUR 150 million referred to in Article 395(1) is applicable, the competent authorities may allow on a case-by-case basis the 100 % limit in terms of the institution's eligible capital to be exceeded.
#### Where the amount of EUR 150 million referred to in Article 395(1) is applicable, the competent authorities may allow the 100 % limit in terms of the institution's Tier 1 capital to be exceeded on a case-by-case basis.
##### Where, in the exceptional cases referred to in the first and second subparagraph of this paragraph, a competent authority allows an institution to exceed the limit set out in Article 395(1) for a period longer than three months, the institution shall present a plan for a timely return to compliance with that limit to the satisfaction of the competent authority and shall carry out that plan within the period agreed with the competent authority. The competent authority shall monitor the implementation of the plan and shall require a more rapid return to compliance if appropriate.
For the purposes of paragraph 1, EBA shall issue guidelines in accordance with Article 16 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010 to specify how the competent authorities may determine:
@@ -10802,7 +11293,7 @@
#### As from 10 days after the excess has occurred, the components of the excess, selected in accordance with paragraph 1, shall be allocated to the appropriate line in Column 1 of Table 1 in ascending order of specific-risk requirements in Part Three, Title IV, Chapter 2 and/or requirements in Article 299 and Part Three, Title V. The additional own funds requirement shall be equal to the sum of the specific-risk requirements in Part Three, Title IV, Chapter 2 and/or the Article 299 and Part Three, Title V requirements on these components, multiplied by the corresponding factor in Column 2 of Table 1.
##### | Column 1: Excess over the limits (on the basis of a percentage of eligible capital) | Column 2: Factors |
##### | Column 1: Excess over the limits (on the basis of a percentage of  Tier 1 capital) | Column 2: Factors |
| --- | --- |
| Up to 40 % | 200 % |
| From 40 % to 60 % | 300 % |
@@ -10813,15 +11304,17 @@
Article 398
Procedures to prevent institutions from avoiding the additional own funds requirement
#### Institutions shall not deliberately avoid the additional own funds requirements set out in Article 397 that they would otherwise incur, on exposures exceeding the limit laid down in Article 395(1) once those exposures have been maintained for more than 10 days, by means of temporarily transferring the exposures in question to another company, whether within the same group or not, and/or by undertaking artificial transactions to close out the exposure during the 10-day period and create a new exposure.
##### Institutions shall maintain systems which ensure that any transfer which has the effect referred to in the first subparagraph is immediately reported to the competent authorities.
#### Article 399
##### Eligible credit mitigation techniques
#### Procedures to prevent institutions from avoiding the additional own funds requirement
##### Institutions shall not deliberately avoid the additional own funds requirements set out in Article 397 that they would otherwise incur, on exposures exceeding the limit laid down in Article 395(1) once those exposures have been maintained for more than 10 days, by means of temporarily transferring the exposures in question to another company, whether within the same group or not, and/or by undertaking artificial transactions to close out the exposure during the 10-day period and create a new exposure.
Institutions shall maintain systems which ensure that any transfer which has the effect referred to in the first subparagraph is immediately reported to the competent authorities.
Article 399
Eligible credit mitigation techniques
For the purposes of Articles 400 to 403, the term ‘guarantee’ shall include credit derivatives recognised under Chapter 4 of Title II of Part Three other than credit linked notes.
Article 400
@@ -10847,9 +11340,17 @@
(i) exposures arising from undrawn credit facilities that are classified as low-risk off-balance sheet items in Annex I and provided that an agreement has been concluded with the client or group of connected clients under which the facility may be drawn only if it has been ascertained that it will not cause the limit applicable under Article 395(1) to be exceeded;
(j) trade exposures to central counterparties and default fund contributions to central counterparties;
(k) exposures to deposit guarantee schemes under Directive 94/19/EC arising from the funding of those schemes, if the member institutions of the scheme have a legal or contractual obligation to fund the scheme.
(j) clearing members' trade exposures and default fund contributions to qualified central counterparties;
(k) exposures to deposit guarantee schemes under Directive 94/19/EC arising from the funding of those schemes, if the member institutions of the scheme have a legal or contractual obligation to fund the scheme;
(l) clients' trade exposures referred to in Article 305(2) or (3);
(m) holdings by resolution entities, or by their subsidiaries which are not themselves resolution entities, of own funds instruments and eligible liabilities referred to in Article 45f(2) of Directive 2014/59/EU that have been issued by any of the following entities:
(i) in respect of resolution entities, other entities belonging to the same resolution group;
(ii) in respect of subsidiaries of a resolution entity that are not themselves resolution entities, the relevant subsidiary's subsidiaries belonging to the same resolution group;
(n) exposures arising from a minimum value commitment that meets all the conditions set out in Article 132c(3).
Cash received under a credit linked note issued by the institution and loans and deposits of a counterparty to or with the institution which are subject to an on-balance sheet netting agreement recognised under Part Three, Title II, Chapter 4 shall be deemed to fall under point (g).
@@ -10859,7 +11360,7 @@
(b) asset items constituting claims on regional governments or local authorities of Member States where those claims would be assigned a 20 % risk weight under Part Three, Title II, Chapter 2 and other exposures to or guaranteed by those regional governments or local authorities, claims on which would be assigned a 20 % risk weight under Part Three, Title II, Chapter 2;
(c) exposures, including participations or other kinds of holdings, incurred by an institution to its parent undertaking, to other subsidiaries of that parent undertaking or to its own subsidiaries, in so far as those undertakings are covered by the supervision on a consolidated basis to which the institution itself is subject, in accordance with this Regulation, Directive 2002/87/EC or with equivalent standards in force in a third country; exposures that do not meet these criteria, whether or not exempted from Article 395(1), shall be treated as exposures to a third party;
(c) exposures incurred by an institution, including through participations or other kinds of holdings, to its parent undertaking, to other subsidiaries of that parent undertaking, or to its own subsidiaries and qualifying holdings, in so far as those undertakings are covered by the supervision on a consolidated basis to which the institution itself is subject, in accordance with this Regulation, Directive 2002/87/EC or with equivalent standards in force in a third country; exposures that do not meet those criteria, whether or not exempted from Article 395(1) of this Regulation, shall be treated as exposures to a third party;
(d) asset items constituting claims on and other exposures, including participations or other kinds of holdings, to regional or central credit institutions with which the credit institution is associated in a network in accordance with legal or statutory provisions and which are responsible, under those provisions, for cash-clearing operations within the network;
@@ -10875,186 +11376,232 @@
(j) legally required guarantees used when a mortgage loan financed by issuing mortgage bonds is paid to the mortgage borrower before the final registration of the mortgage in the land register, provided that the guarantee is not used as reducing the risk in calculating the risk -weighted exposure amounts;
(k) assets items constituting claims on and other exposures to recognised exchanges.
#### (k) exposures in the form of a collateral or a guarantee for residential loans, provided by an eligible protection provider referred to in Article 201 qualifying for the credit rating which is at least the lower of the following:
(i) credit quality step 2;
(ii) the credit quality step corresponding to the central government foreign currency rating of the Member State where the protection provider's headquarters are located;
##### (l) exposures in the form of a guarantee for officially supported export credits, provided by an export credit agency qualifying for the credit rating which is at least the lower of the following:
(i) credit quality step 2;
(ii) the credit quality step corresponding to the central government foreign currency rating of the Member State where the export credit agency's headquarters are located.
Competent authorities may only make use of the exemption provided for in paragraph 2 where the following conditions are met:
(a) the specific nature of the exposure, the counterparty or the relationship between the institution and the counterparty eliminate or reduce the risk of the exposure; and
#### (b) any remaining concentration risk can be addressed by other equally effective means such as the arrangements, processes and mechanisms provided for in Article 81 of Directive 2013/36/EU.
##### Competent authorities shall inform EBA whether or not they intend to use any of the exemptions provided for in paragraph 2 in accordance with points (a) and (b) of this paragraph and shall consult EBA on this choice.
Article 401
(b) any remaining concentration risk can be addressed by other equally effective means such as the arrangements, processes and mechanisms provided for in Article 81 of Directive 2013/36/EU.
Competent authorities shall inform EBA of whether they intend to use any of the exemptions provided for in paragraph 2 in accordance with points (a) and (b) of this paragraph and provide EBA with the reasons substantiating the use of those exemptions.
Article 401
Calculating the effect of the use of credit risk mitigation techniques
Competent authorities shall grant the permission referred to in preceding subparagraph only if the institution can estimate the effects of financial collateral on their exposures separately from other LGD-relevant aspects.
The estimates produced by the institution shall be sufficiently suitable for reducing the exposure value for the purposes of compliance with the provisions of Article 395.
Where an institution is permitted to use its own estimates of the effects of financial collateral, it shall do so on a basis consistent with the approach adopted in the calculation of the own funds requirements in accordance with this Regulation.
Institutions permitted to use own estimates of LGDs and conversion factors for an exposure class under Part Three, Title II, Chapter 3, which do not calculate the value of their exposures using the method referred to in the first subparagraph of this paragraph, may use the Financial Collateral Comprehensive Method or the approach set out in Article 403(1)(b) for calculating the value of exposures.
These periodic stress tests referred to in the first subparagraph shall address risks arising from potential changes in market conditions that could adversely impact the institutions' adequacy of own funds and risks arising from the realisation of collateral in stressed situations.
The stress tests carried out shall be adequate and appropriate for the assessment of such risks.
In the event that the periodic stress test indicates a lower realisable value of collateral taken than would be permitted to be taken into account while making use of the Financial Collateral Comprehensive Method or the method described in paragraph 2 as appropriate, the value of collateral permitted to be recognised in calculating the value of exposures for the purposes of Article 395(1) shall be reduced accordingly.
Institutions referred to in the first subparagraph shall include the following in their strategies to address concentration risk:
#### By way of derogation from paragraph 1, institutions with permission to use the methods referred to in Section 4 of Chapter 4 of Title II of Part Three and Section 6 of Chapter 6 of Title II of Part Three, may use those methods for calculating the exposure value of securities financing transactions.
##### The periodic stress tests referred to in the first subparagraph shall address risks arising from potential changes in market conditions that could adversely impact the institutions' adequacy of own funds and risks arising from the realisation of collateral in stressed situations.
The stress tests carried out shall be adequate and appropriate for the assessment of those risks.
Institutions shall include the following in their strategies to address concentration risk:
(a) policies and procedures to address risks arising from maturity mismatches between exposures and any credit protection on those exposures;
#### (b) policies and procedures in the event that a stress test indicates a lower realisable value of collateral than taken into account while making use of the Financial Collateral Comprehensive Method or the method described in paragraph 2;
##### (c) policies and procedures relating to concentration risk arising from the application of credit risk mitigation techniques, and in particular large indirect credit exposures, for example to a single issuer of securities taken as collateral.
(b) policies and procedures relating to concentration risk arising from the application of credit risk mitigation techniques, in particular from large indirect credit exposures, for example, exposures to a single issuer of securities taken as collateral.
Article 402
Exposures arising from mortgage lending
For the calculation of exposure values for the purposes of Article 395, an institution may reduce the value of an exposure or any part of an exposure fully secured by immovable property in accordance with Article 125(1) by the pledged amount of the market or mortgage lending value of the immovable property concerned but not more than 50 % of the market or 60 % of the mortgage lending value in those Member States that have laid down rigorous criteria for the assessment of the mortgage lending value in statutory or regulatory provisions, if all of the following conditions are met:
(a) the competent authorities of the Member States have not set a higher risk weight than 35 % for exposures or parts of exposures secured by residential property in accordance with Article 124(2);
(b) the exposure or part of the exposure is fully secured by:
(i) mortgages on residential property; or
(ii) a residential property in a leasing transaction under which the lessor retains full ownership of the residential property and the lessee has not yet exercised his option to purchase;
(c) the requirements in Article 208 and Article 229(1) are met.
For the calculation of exposure values for the purposes of Article 395, an institution may reduce the value of an exposure or any part of an exposure fully secured by immovable property in accordance with Article 126(1) by the pledged amount of the market or mortgage lending value of the immovable property concerned but not more than 50 % of the market or 60 % of the mortgage lending value in those Member States that have laid down rigorous criteria for the assessment of the mortgage lending value in statutory or regulatory provisions, if all of the following conditions are met:
(a) the competent authorities of the Member States have not set a higher risk weight than 50 % for exposures or parts of exposures secured by commercial immovable property in accordance with Article 124(2);
(b) the exposure is fully secured by:
(i) mortgages on offices or other commercial premises; or
(ii) offices or other commercial premises and the exposures related to immovable property leasing transactions;
(c) the requirements in Article 126(2)(a), Article 208 and Article 229(1) are met;
For the calculation of exposure values for the purposes of Article 395, institutions may, except where prohibited by applicable national law, reduce the value of an exposure or any part of an exposure that is fully secured by residential property in accordance with Article 125(1) by the pledged amount of the market value or mortgage lending value of the property concerned, but by not more than 50 % of the market value or 60 % of the mortgage lending value in those Member States that have laid down rigorous criteria for the assessment of the mortgage lending value in statutory or regulatory provisions, provided that all the following conditions are met:
(a) the competent authorities of the Member States have not set a risk weight higher than 35 % for exposures or parts of exposures secured by residential property in accordance with Article 124(2);
(b) the exposure or part of the exposure is fully secured by any of the following:
(i) one or more mortgages on residential property; or
(ii) a residential property in a leasing transaction under which the lessor retains full ownership of the residential property and the lessee has not yet exercised his or her option to purchase;
(c) the requirements laid down in Article 208 and Article 229(1) are met.
For the calculation of exposure values for the purposes of Article 395, an institution may, except where prohibited by applicable national law, reduce the value of an exposure or any part of an exposure that is fully secured by commercial immovable property in accordance with Article 126(1) by the pledged amount of the market value or mortgage lending value of the property concerned, but not by more than 50 % of the market value or 60 % of the mortgage lending value in those Member States that have laid down rigorous criteria for the assessment of the mortgage lending value in statutory or regulatory provisions, provided that all the following conditions are met:
(a) the competent authorities of the Member States have not set a risk weight higher than 50 % for exposures or parts of exposures secured by commercial immovable property in accordance with Article 124(2);
(b) the exposure is fully secured by any of the following:
(i) one or more mortgages on offices or other commercial premises; or
(ii) one or more offices or other commercial premises and the exposures related to property leasing transactions;
(c) the requirements in point (a) of Article 126(2) and in Article 208 and Article 229(1) are met;
(d) the commercial immovable property is fully constructed.
An institution may treat an exposure to a counterparty that results from a reverse repurchase agreement under which the institution has purchased from the counterparty non-accessory independent mortgage liens on immovable property of third parties as a number of individual exposures to each of those third parties, provided that all of the following conditions are met:
(a) the counterparty is an institution;
(b) the exposure is fully secured by liens on the immovable property of those third parties that have been purchased by the institution and the institution is able to exercise those liens;
#### (a) the counterparty is an institution or an investment firm;
##### (b) the exposure is fully secured by liens on the immovable property of those third parties that have been purchased by the institution and the institution is able to exercise those liens;
(c) the institution has ensured that the requirements in Article 208 and Article 229(1) are met;
(d) the institution becomes beneficiary of the claims that the counterparty has against the third parties in the event of default, insolvency or liquidation of the counterparty;
#### (e) the institution reports to the competent authorities in accordance with Article 394 the total amount of exposures to each other institution that are treated in accordance with this paragraph.
##### For these purposes, the institution shall assume that it has an exposure to each of those third parties for the amount of the claim that the counterparty has on the third party instead of the corresponding amount of the exposure to the counterparty. The remainder of the exposure to the counter party, if any, shall continue to be treated as an exposure to the counter party.
Article 403
(e) the institution reports to the competent authorities in accordance with Article 394 the total amount of exposures to each other institution or investment firm that are treated in accordance with this paragraph.
For these purposes, the institution shall assume that it has an exposure to each of those third parties for the amount of the claim that the counterparty has on the third party instead of the corresponding amount of the exposure to the counterparty. The remainder of the exposure to the counter party, if any, shall continue to be treated as an exposure to the counter party.
Article 403
Substitution approach
Where an exposure to a client is guaranteed by a third party, or secured by collateral issued by a third party, an institution may:
(a) treat the portion of the exposure which is guaranteed as having been incurred to the guarantor rather than to the client provided that the unsecured exposure to the guarantor would be assigned an equal or lower risk weight than a risk weight of the unsecured exposure to the client under Part Three, Title II, Chapter 2;
(b) treat the portion of the exposure collateralised by the market value of recognised collateral as having been incurred to the third party rather than to the client, if the exposure is secured by collateral and provided that the collateralised portion of the exposure would be assigned an equal or lower risk weight than a risk weight of the unsecured exposure to the client under Part Three, Title II, Chapter 2.
Where an exposure to a client is guaranteed by a third party or is secured by collateral issued by a third party, an institution shall:
(a) treat the portion of the exposure which is guaranteed as exposure to the guarantor rather than to the client, provided that the unsecured exposure to the guarantor would be assigned a risk weight that is equal to or lower than the risk weight of the unsecured exposure to the client under Chapter 2 of Title II of Part Three;
(b) treat the portion of the exposure collateralised by the market value of recognised collateral as exposure to the third party rather than to the client, provided that the exposure is secured by collateral and provided that the collateralised portion of the exposure would be assigned a risk weight that is equal to or lower than the risk weight of the unsecured exposure to the client under Chapter 2 of Title II of Part Three.
The approach referred to in point (b) of the first subparagraph shall not be used by an institution where there is a mismatch between the maturity of the exposure and the maturity of the protection.
For the purpose of this Part, an institution may use both the Financial Collateral Comprehensive Method and the treatment set out in point (b) of the first subparagraph only where it is permitted to use both the Financial Collateral Comprehensive Method and the Financial Collateral Simple Method for the purposes of Article 92.
Where an institution applies point (a) of paragraph 1:
(a) where the guarantee is denominated in a currency different from that in which the exposure is denominated the amount of the exposure deemed to be covered shall be calculated in accordance with the provisions on the treatment of currency mismatch for unfunded credit protection set out in Part Three, Title II, Chapter 4;
(b) a mismatch between the maturity of the exposure and the maturity of the protection shall be treated in accordance with the provisions on the treatment of maturity mismatch set out in Part Three, Title II, Chapter 4;
## (c) partial coverage may be recognised in accordance with the treatment set out in Part Three, Title II, Chapter 4.
### EBA shall publish those guidelines by 31 December 2019.
## PART SIX
### LIQUIDITY
#### TITLE I
##### DEFINITIONS AND LIQUIDITY COVERAGE REQUIREMENT
Article 411
For the purposes of this Part, an institution may use both the Financial Collateral Comprehensive Method and the treatment set out in point (b) of the first subparagraph of this paragraph only where it is permitted to use both the Financial Collateral Comprehensive Method and the Financial Collateral Simple Method for the purposes of Article 92.
Where an institution applies point (a) of paragraph 1, the institution:
(a) where the guarantee is denominated in a currency different from that in which the exposure is denominated, shall calculate the amount of the exposure that is deemed to be covered in accordance with the provisions on the treatment of currency mismatch for unfunded credit protection set out in Part Three;
(b) shall treat any mismatch between the maturity of the exposure and the maturity of the protection in accordance with the provisions on the treatment of maturity mismatch set out in Chapter 4 of Title II of Part Three;
(c) may recognise partial coverage in accordance with the treatment set out in Chapter 4 of Title II of Part Three.
For the purposes of point (b) of paragraph 1, an institution may replace the amount in point (a) of this paragraph with the amount in point (b) of this paragraph, provided that the conditions set out in points (c), (d) and (e) of this paragraph are met:
## (a) the total amount of the institution's exposure to a collateral issuer due to tri-party repurchase agreements facilitated by a tri-party agent;
### (b) the full amount of the limits that the institution has instructed the tri-party agent referred to in point (a) to apply to the securities issued by the collateral issuer referred to in that point;
## (c) the institution has verified that the tri-party agent has in place appropriate safeguards to prevent breaches of the limits referred to in point (b);
### (d) the competent authority has not expressed to the institution any material concerns;
#### (e) the sum of the amount of the limit referred to in point (b) of this paragraph and any other exposures of the institution to the collateral issuer does not exceed the limit set out in Article 395(1).
##### EBA shall publish those guidelines by 31 December 2019.
PART SIX
LIQUIDITY
TITLE I
**DEFINITIONS AND LIQUIDITY REQUIREMENTS**
Article 411
Definitions
For the purposes of this Part, the following definitions apply:
#### (1) ‘financial customer’ means a customer that performs one or more of the activities listed in Annex I to Directive 2013/36/EU as its main business, or is one of the following:
(1) ‘financial customer’ means a customer, including a financial customer belonging to a non-financial corporate group, which performs one or more of the activities listed in Annex I to Directive 2013/36/EU as its main business, or which is one of the following:
(a) a credit institution;
(b) an investment firm;
(c) an SSPE;
(d) a CIU;
(c) a securitisation special purpose entity (SSPE);
(d) a collective investment undertaking (CIU);
(e) a non-open ended investment scheme;
(f) an insurance undertaking;
(g) a financial holding company or mixed-financial holding company.
##### (2) ‘retail deposit’ means a liability to a natural person or to an SME, where the natural person or the SME would qualify for the retail exposure class under the Standardised or IRB approaches for credit risk, or a liability to a company which is eligible for the treatment set out in Article 153(4) and where the aggregate deposits by all such enterprises on a group basis do not exceed EUR 1 million.
#### Article 412
##### Liquidity coverage requirement
#### Article 413
##### Stable Funding
Article 414
## Compliance with liquidity requirements
### Where an institution does not meet, or expects not to meet the requirement set out in Article 412 or the general obligation set out in Article 413(1), including during times of stress, it shall immediately notify the competent authorities and shall submit without undue delay to the competent authorities a plan for the timely restoration of compliance with Article 412 or Article 413(1). Until compliance has been restored, the institution shall report the items referred to in Title II or Title III, as appropriate, daily by the end of each business day unless the competent authority authorises a lower reporting frequency and a longer reporting delay. Competent authorities shall only grant such authorisations based on the individual situation of an institution and taking into account the scale and complexity of the institution's activities. They shall monitor the implementation of the restoration plan and shall require a more speedy restoration if appropriate.
#### TITLE II
##### LIQUIDITY REPORTING
(g) a reinsurance undertaking;
(h) a financial holding company or mixed-financial holding company;
(i) a financial institution;
(j) a pension scheme arrangement as defined in point (10) of Article 2 of Regulation (EU) No 648/2012;
(2) ‘retail deposit’ means a liability to a natural person or to a SME, where the SME would qualify for the retail exposure class under the standardised or IRB approaches for credit risk, or a liability to a company which is eligible for the treatment set out in Article 153(4), and where the aggregate deposits by that SME or company on a group basis do not exceed EUR 1 million;
(3) ‘personal investment company’ or ‘PIC’ means an undertaking or a trust, the owner or beneficial owner of which is either a natural person or a group of closely related natural persons which does not carry out any other commercial, industrial or professional activity and which was set up with the sole purpose of managing the wealth of the owner or owners, including ancillary activities such as segregating the owners' assets from corporate assets, facilitating the transmission of assets within a family or preventing a split of the assets after the death of a member of the family, provided that those ancillary activities are connected to the main purpose of managing the owners' wealth;
(4) ‘deposit broker’ means a natural person or an undertaking that places deposits from third parties, including retail deposits and corporate deposits but excluding deposits from financial institutions, with credit institutions in exchange of a fee;
(5) ‘unencumbered assets’ means assets which are not subject to any legal, contractual, regulatory or other restriction preventing the institution from liquidating, selling, transferring, assigning or, generally, disposing of those assets via an outright sale or a repurchase agreement;
(6) ‘non-mandatory overcollateralisation’ means any amount of assets which the institution is not obliged to attach to a covered bond issuance by virtue of legal or regulatory requirements, contractual commitments or for reasons of market discipline, including in particular where the assets are provided in excess of the minimum legal, statutory or regulatory overcollateralisation requirement applicable to the covered bonds under the national law of a Member State or a third country;
(7) ‘asset coverage requirement’ means the ratio of assets to liabilities as determined in accordance with the national law of a Member State or a third country for credit enhancement purposes in relation to covered bonds;
(8) ‘margin loans’ means collateralised loans extended to customers for the purpose of taking leveraged trading positions;
(9) ‘derivative contracts’ means the derivative contracts listed in Annex II and credit derivatives;
(10) ‘stress’ means a sudden or severe deterioration in the solvency or liquidity position of an institution due to changes in market conditions or idiosyncratic factors as a result of which there is a significant risk that the institution becomes unable to meet its commitments as they become due within the next 30 days;
(11) ‘level 1 assets’ means assets of extremely high liquidity and credit quality as referred to in the second subparagraph of Article 416(1);
#### (12) ‘level 2 assets’ means assets of high liquidity and credit quality as referred to in the second subparagraph of Article 416(1) of this Regulation; level 2 assets are further subdivided into level 2A and 2B assets as set out in the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1);
##### (13) ‘liquidity buffer’ means the amount of level 1 and level 2 assets that an institution holds in accordance with the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1);
(14) ‘net liquidity outflows’ means the amount which results from deducting an institution's liquidity inflows from its liquidity outflows;
#### (15) ‘reporting currency’ means the currency of the Member State where the head office of the institution is located;
##### (16) ‘factoring’ means a contractual agreement between a business (the ‘assignor’) and a financial entity (the ‘factor’) in which the assignor assigns or sells its receivables to the factor in exchange for the factor providing the assignor with one or more of the following services with regard to the receivables assigned:
(a) an advance of a percentage of the amount of the assigned receivables, generally short term, uncommitted and without automatic roll-over;
(b) receivables management, collection and credit protection, whereby, in general, the factor administers the assignor's sales ledger and collects the receivables in the factor's own name;
for the purposes of Title IV, factoring shall be treated as trade finance;
#### (17) ‘committed credit or liquidity facility’ means a credit or liquidity facility that is irrevocable or conditionally revocable.
##### Article 412
Liquidity coverage requirement
## Unless specified otherwise in the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1), where an item can be counted in more than one outflow category, it shall be counted in the outflow category that produces the greatest contractual outflow for that item.
### Article 413
#### Stable funding requirement
##### Article 414
Compliance with liquidity requirements
An institution that does not meet, or does not expect to meet, the requirements set out in Article 412 or in Article 413(1), including during times of stress, shall immediately notify the competent authorities thereof and shall submit to the competent authorities without undue delay a plan for the timely restoration of compliance with the requirements set out in Article 412 or Article 413(1), as appropriate. Until compliance has been restored, the institution shall report the items referred to in Title III, in Title IV, in the implementing act referred to in Article 415(3) or (3a) or in the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1), as appropriate, daily by the end of each business day, unless the competent authority authorises a lower reporting frequency and a longer reporting delay. Competent authorities shall only grant such authorisations on the basis of the individual situation of the institution, taking into account the scale and complexity of the institution's activities. Competent authorities shall monitor the implementation of such restoration plan and shall require a more rapid restoration of compliance where appropriate.
TITLE II
LIQUIDITY REPORTING
Article 415
Reporting obligation and reporting format
The reporting formats shall include all the necessary information and shall allow EBA to assess whether secured lending and collateral swap transactions where liquid assets referred to in points (a), (b) and (c) of Article 416(1) have been obtained against collateral that does not qualify under points (a), (b) and (c) of Article 416(1) have been properly unwound.
An institution shall report separately to the competent authorities of the home Member State the items referred to in paragraph 1 in the currency below when it has:
(a) aggregate liabilities in a currency different from the reporting currency under paragraph 1 amounting to or exceeding 5 % of the institution's or the single liquidity sub-group's total liabilities; or
(b) a significant branch in accordance with Article 51 of Directive 2013/36/EU in a host Member State using a currency different from the reporting currency under paragraph 1 of this Article.
The reporting frequency shall be at least monthly for items referred to in the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1) and at least quarterly for items referred to in Titles III and IV.
An institution shall report separately to the competent authorities the items referred to in the implementing technical standards referred to in paragraph 3 or 3a of this Article, in Title III until such time as the reporting obligation and the reporting format for the net stable funding ratio set out in Title IV have been specified and introduced in Union law, in Title IV and in the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1), as appropriate, in accordance with the following:
(a) where items are denominated in a currency other than the reporting currency and the institution has aggregate liabilities denominated in such a currency which amount to or exceed 5 % of the institution's or the single liquidity sub-group's total liabilities, excluding own funds and off-balance-sheet items, reporting shall be done in the currency of denomination;
(b) where items are denominated in the currency of a host Member State where the institution has a significant branch as referred to in Article 51 of Directive 2013/36/EU and that host Member State uses another currency than the reporting currency, the reporting shall be done in the currency of the Member State in which the significant branch is located;
(c) where items are denominated in the reporting currency, and the aggregate amount of liabilities in other currencies than the reporting currency amounts to or exceeds 5 % of the institution's or the single liquidity subgroup's total liabilities, excluding own funds and off-balance-sheet items, the reporting shall be done in the reporting currency.
EBA shall develop draft implementing technical standards to specify the following:
(a) uniform formats and IT solutions with associated instructions for frequencies and reference and remittance dates. The reporting formats and frequencies shall be proportionate to the nature, scale and complexity of the different activities of the institutions and shall comprise the reporting required in accordance with paragraphs 1 and 2;
(b) additional liquidity monitoring metrics required, to allow competent authorities to obtain a comprehensive view of the liquidity risk profile, proportionate to the nature, scale and complexity of an institution's activities.
EBA shall submit to the Commission those draft implementing technical standards for the items specified in point (a) by 28 July 2013 and for the items specified in point (b) by 1 January 2014.
Until the full introduction of binding liquidity requirements, competent authorities may continue to collect information through monitoring tools for the purpose of monitoring compliance with existing national liquidity standards.
Power is conferred on the Commission to adopt the implementing technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Article 15 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
(a) uniform formats and IT solutions with associated instructions for frequencies and reference and remittance dates; the reporting formats and frequencies shall be proportionate to the nature, scale and complexity of the different activities of the institutions and shall comprise the reporting required in accordance with paragraphs 1 and 2;
(b) additional liquidity monitoring metrics required, to allow competent authorities to obtain a comprehensive view of an institution's liquidity risk profile, proportionate to the nature, scale and complexity of an institution's activities.
EBA shall submit to the Commission those draft implementing technical standards for the items specified in point (a) by 28 July 2013 and for the items specified in point (b) by 1 January 2014.
Power is conferred on the Commission to adopt the implementing technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Article 15 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
EBA shall submit those draft implementing technical standards to the Commission by 28 June 2020.
Power is conferred on the Commission to adopt the implementing technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Article 15 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
Competent authorities that exercise supervision on a consolidated basis in accordance with Article 111 of Directive 2013/36/EU shall upon request provide in a timely manner and by electronic means the following authorities with all reporting submitted by the institution in accordance with the uniform reporting formats referred to in paragraph 3:
#### Power is conferred on the Commission to adopt the implementing technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Article 15 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
##### Competent authorities that exercise supervision on a consolidated basis in accordance with Article 111 of Directive 2013/36/EU shall upon request provide in a timely manner and by electronic means the following authorities with all reporting submitted by the institution in accordance with the uniform reporting formats referred to in paragraph 3:
(a) the competent authorities and the national central bank of the host Member States in which there are significant branches in accordance with Article 51 of Directive 2013/36/EU of the parent institution or institutions controlled by the same parent financial holding company;
(b) the competent authorities that have authorised subsidiaries of the parent institution or institutions controlled by the same parent financial holding company and the central bank of the same Member State;
#### (c) EBA;
##### (d) ECB.
(c) EBA;
(d) ECB.
Article 416
@@ -11096,23 +11643,19 @@
(iv) a mixed financial holding company;
(v) any other entity that performs one or more of the activities listed in Annex I to Directive 2013/36/EU as its main business.
In accordance with paragraph 1, institutions shall report assets that fulfil the following conditions as liquid assets:
(a) they are unencumbered or stand available within collateral pools to be used for the obtaining of additional funding under committed but not yet funded credit lines available to the institution;
(b) they are not issued by the institution itself or its parent or subsidiary institutions or another subsidiary of its parent institutions or parent financial holding company;
(c) their price is generally agreed upon by markets participants and can easily be observed in the market, or their price can be determined by a formula that is easy to calculate based on publicly available inputs and does not depend on strong assumptions as is typically the case for structured or exotic products;
(d) they are eligible collateral for standard liquidity operations of a central bank in a Member State or if the liquid assets are held to meet liquidity outflows in the currency of a third country, of the central bank of that third country;
(e) they are listed on a recognised exchange or they are tradable on active outright sale or via a simple repurchase agreement on approved repurchase markets. These criteria shall be assessed separately for each market.
The conditions referred to in points (c), (d) and (e) of the first subparagraph shall not apply to the assets referred to in points (a), (e) and (f) of paragraph 1.
The condition referred to in point (d) of the first subparagraph shall not apply in the case of liquid assets held to meet liquidity outflows in a currency in which there is an extremely narrow definition of central bank eligibility. In the case of liquid assets denominated in currencies of third countries, this exception shall apply and only apply if the competent authorities of the third country apply the same or an equivalent exception.
Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraphs 1, 2 and 3, pending the specification of a binding liquidity requirement in accordance with Article 460 and in accordance with the second subparagraph of paragraph 1 of this Article, institutions shall report on:
In accordance with paragraph 1, institutions shall report assets that fulfil the following conditions as liquid assets:
(a) the assets are unencumbered or stand available within collateral pools to be used for obtaining additional funding under committed or, where the pool is operated by a central bank, uncommitted but not yet funded credit lines available to the institution;
(b) the assets are not issued by the institution itself, by its parent or subsidiary institutions, or by another subsidiary of its parent institution or parent financial holding company;
(c) the price of the assets is generally agreed upon by market participants and can easily be observed in the market or the price can be determined by a formula that is easy to calculate on the basis of publicly available inputs and that does not depend on strong assumptions, as is typically the case for structured or exotic products;
(d) the assets are listed on a recognised exchange or they are tradable by an outright sale or via a simple repurchase agreement on repurchase markets; those criteria shall be assessed separately for each market.
#### The conditions referred to in points (c) and (d) of the first subparagraph shall not apply to the assets referred to in points (a), (e) and (f) of paragraph 1.
##### Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraphs 1, 2 and 3, pending the specification of a binding liquidity requirement in accordance with Article 460 and in accordance with the second subparagraph of paragraph 1 of this Article, institutions shall report on:
(a) other non-central bank eligible but tradable assets such as equities and gold based on transparent and objective criteria, including some or all of the criteria listed in Article 509(3), (4) and (5);
@@ -11120,13 +11663,7 @@
(c) other central bank eligible but non-tradable assets such as credit claims as established by EBA pursuant to the criteria in Article 509(3), (4) and (5).
EBA shall submit those draft implementing technical standards to the Commission by 31 March 2014.
Power is conferred on the Commission to adopt the implementing technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Article 15 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
#### Before the entry into force of the technical standards referred to in the third subparagraph, institutions may continue to apply the treatment set out in the second subparagraph of paragraph 3, where the competent authorities have applied that treatment before 1 January 2014.
##### The use or potential use by a CIU of derivative instruments to hedge risks of permitted investments shall not prevent that CIU from being eligible. Where the value of the shares or units of the CIU is not regularly marked to market by the third parties referred to in points (a) and (b) of Article 418(4) and the competent authority is not satisfied that an institution has developed robust methodologies and processes for such valuation as referred to in the first sentence of Article 418(4), shares or units in that CIU shall not be treated as liquid assets.
The use or potential use by a CIU of derivative instruments to hedge risks of permitted investments shall not prevent that CIU from being eligible for the treatment referred to in the first subparagraph of this paragraph. Where the value of the shares or units of the CIU is not regularly marked to market by the third parties referred to in points (a) and (b) of Article 418(4) and the competent authority is not satisfied that an institution has developed robust methodologies and processes for such valuation as referred to in Article 418(4), shares or units in that CIU shall not be treated as liquid assets.
Article 417
@@ -11134,9 +11671,9 @@
The institution shall only report as liquid assets those holdings of liquid assets that meet the following conditions:
(a) they are appropriately diversified. Diversification is not required in terms of assets corresponding to points (a), (b) and (c) of Article 416(1);
(b) they are legally and practically readily available at any time during the next 30 days to be liquidated via outright sale or via a simple repurchase agreement on approved repurchase markets in order to meet obligations coming due. Liquid assets referred to in point (c) of Article 416(1) which are held in third countries where there are transfer restrictions or which are denominated in non-convertible currencies shall be considered available only to the extent that they correspond to outflows in the third country or currency in question, unless the institution can demonstrate to the competent authorities that it has appropriately hedged the ensuing currency risk;
#### (a) they are appropriately diversified. Diversification is not required in terms of assets corresponding to points (a), (b) and (c) of Article 416(1);
##### (b) they are legally and practically readily available at any time during the next 30 days to be liquidated via outright sale or via a simple repurchase agreement on approved repurchase markets in order to meet obligations coming due. Liquid assets referred to in point (c) of Article 416(1) which are held in third countries where there are transfer restrictions or which are denominated in non-convertible currencies shall be considered available only to the extent that they correspond to outflows in the third country or currency in question, unless the institution can demonstrate to the competent authorities that it has appropriately hedged the ensuing currency risk;
(c) the liquid assets are controlled by a liquidity management function;
@@ -11146,12 +11683,12 @@
(iii) to test the usability of the assets;
(iv) to minimise the risk of negative signalling during a period of stress;
#### (e) price risks associated with the assets may be hedged but the liquid assets are subject to appropriate internal arrangements that ensure that they are readily available to the treasury when needed and especially that they are not used in other ongoing operations, including:
(e) price risks associated with the assets may be hedged but the liquid assets are subject to appropriate internal arrangements that ensure that they are readily available to the treasury when needed and especially that they are not used in other ongoing operations, including:
(i) hedging or other trading strategies;
(ii) providing credit enhancements in structured transactions;
(iii) covering operational costs.
##### (f) the denomination of the liquid assets is consistent with the distribution by currency of liquidity outflows after the deduction of inflows.
(f) the denomination of the liquid assets is consistent with the distribution by currency of liquidity outflows after the deduction of inflows.
Article 418
@@ -11167,35 +11704,37 @@
The look-through approach referred to in paragraph 2 shall be applied as follows:
(a) where the institution is aware of the underlying exposures of a CIU, it may look through to those underlying exposures in order to assign them to points (a) to (d) of Article 416(1);
(b) where the institution is not aware of the underlying exposures of a CIU, it shall be assumed that the CIU invests, to the maximum extent allowed under its mandate, in descending order in the asset types referred to in points (a) to (d) of Article 416(1) until the maximum total investment limit is reached.
#### (a) where the institution is aware of the underlying exposures of a CIU, it may look through to those underlying exposures in order to assign them to points (a) to (d) of Article 416(1);
##### (b) where the institution is not aware of the underlying exposures of a CIU, it shall be assumed that the CIU invests, to the maximum extent allowed under its mandate, in descending order in the asset types referred to in points (a) to (d) of Article 416(1) until the maximum total investment limit is reached.
Institutions shall develop robust methodologies and processes to calculate and report the market value and haircuts for shares or units in CIUs. Only where they can demonstrate to the satisfaction of the competent authority that the materiality of the exposure does not justify the development of their own methodologies, institutions may rely on the following third parties to calculate and report the haircuts for shares or units in CIUs, in accordance with the methods set out in points (a) and (b) of paragraph 3:
(a) the depository institution of the CIU provided that the CIU exclusively invests in securities and deposits all securities at this depository institution;
#### (b) for other CIUs, the CIU management company, provided that the CIU management company meets the criteria set out in Article 132(3)(a).
##### The correctness of the calculations by the depository institution or the CIU management company shall be confirmed by an external auditor.
(b) for other CIUs, the CIU management company, provided that the CIU management company meets the criteria set out in Article 132(3)(a).
The correctness of the calculations by the depository institution or the CIU management company shall be confirmed by an external auditor.
Article 419
Currencies with constraints on the availability of liquid assets
Where the justified needs for liquid assets in light of the requirement in Article 412 are exceeding the availability of those liquid assets in a currency, one or more of the following derogations shall apply:
(a) by way of derogation from point (f) of Article 417, the denomination of the liquid assets may be inconsistent with the distribution by currency of liquidity outflows after the deduction of inflows;
(b) for currencies of a Member State or third countries, required liquid assets may be substituted by credit lines from the central bank of that Member State or third country, which are contractually irrevocably committed for the next 30 days and are fairly priced, independent of the amount currently drawn, provided that the competent authorities of that Member State or third country do the same and that Member State or third country has comparable reporting requirements in place.
Where the justified needs for liquid assets in light of the requirement in Article 412 exceed the availability of those liquid assets in a currency, one or more of the following derogations shall apply:
(a) by way of derogation from point (f) of Article 417, the denomination of the liquid assets may be inconsistent with the distribution by currency of liquidity outflows after the deduction of inflows;
#### (b) for currencies of a Member State or third countries, required liquid assets may be substituted by credit lines from the central bank of that Member State or third country which are contractually irrevocably committed for the next 30 days and are fairly priced, independent of the amount currently drawn, provided that the competent authorities of that Member State or third country do the same and provided that that Member State or third country has comparable reporting requirements in place;
##### (c) where there is a deficit of level 1 assets, additional level 2A assets may be held by the institution, subject to higher haircuts, and any cap applicable to those assets in accordance with the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1) may be amended.
EBA shall submit those draft implementing technical standards to the Commission by 31 March 2014.
Power is conferred on the Commission to adopt the implementing technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Article 15 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
#### EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 28 December 2019.
##### Power is delegated to the Commission to supplement this Regulation by adopting the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 28 December 2019.
Power is delegated to the Commission to supplement this Regulation by adopting the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
Article 420
@@ -11205,33 +11744,33 @@
(a) the current amount outstanding for retail deposits as set out in Article 421;
(b) the current amounts outstanding of other liabilities that come due, can be called for payout by the issuing institutions or by the provider of the funding or entail an implicit expectation of the provider of the funding that the institution would repay the liability during the next 30 days as set out in Article 422;
(c) the additional outflows referred to in Article 423;
#### (b) the current amounts outstanding of other liabilities that come due, can be called for payout by the issuing institutions or by the provider of the funding or entail an implicit expectation of the provider of the funding that the institution would repay the liability during the next 30 days as set out in Article 422;
##### (c) the additional outflows referred to in Article 423;
(d) the maximum amount that can be drawn during the next 30 days from undrawn committed credit and liquidity facilities, as set out in Article 424;
(e) the additional outflows identified in the assessment in accordance with paragraph 2.
#### For this assessment, institutions shall take particular account of material reputational damage that could result from not providing liquidity support to such products or services. Institutions shall report not less than annually to the competent authorities those products and services for which the likelihood and potential volume of the liquidity outflows referred to in the first subparagraph are material and the competent authorities shall determine the outflows to be assigned. The competent authorities may apply an outflow rate up to 5 % for trade finance off-balance sheet related products, as referred to in Article 429 and Annex I.
##### The competent authorities shall at least annually report to EBA the types of products or services for which they have determined outflows on the basis of the reports from institutions. They shall in that report also explain the methodology applied to determine the outflows.
For this assessment, institutions shall take particular account of material reputational damage that could result from not providing liquidity support to such products or services. Institutions shall report not less than annually to the competent authorities those products and services for which the likelihood and potential volume of the liquidity outflows referred to in the first subparagraph are material and the competent authorities shall determine the outflows to be assigned. The competent authorities may apply an outflow rate up to 5 % for trade finance off-balance sheet related products, as referred to in Article 429 and Annex I.
The competent authorities shall at least annually report to EBA the types of products or services for which they have determined outflows on the basis of the reports from institutions. They shall in that report also explain the methodology applied to determine the outflows.
Article 421
Outflows on retail deposits
Institutions shall separately report the amount of retail deposits covered by a Deposit Guarantee Scheme in accordance with Directive 94/19/EC or an equivalent deposit guarantee scheme in a third country, and multiply by at least 5 % where the deposit is either of the following:
(a) part of an established relationship making withdrawal highly unlikely;
#### Institutions shall separately report the amount of retail deposits covered by a Deposit Guarantee Scheme in accordance with Directive 94/19/EC or an equivalent deposit guarantee scheme in a third country, and multiply by at least 5 % where the deposit is either of the following:
##### (a) part of an established relationship making withdrawal highly unlikely;
(b) held in a transactional account, including accounts to which salaries are regularly credited.
Institutions may exclude from the calculation of outflows certain clearly circumscribed categories of retail deposits as long as in each and every instance the institution rigorously applies the following for the whole category of those deposits, unless in individually justified circumstances of hardship for the depositor:
#### (a) within 30 days, the depositor is not allowed to withdraw the deposit; or
##### (b) for early withdrawals within 30 days, the depositor has to pay a penalty that includes the loss of interest between the date of withdrawal and the contractual maturity date plus a material penalty that does not have to exceed the interest due for the time elapsed between the date of deposit and the date of withdrawal.
(a) within 30 days, the depositor is not allowed to withdraw the deposit; or
(b) for early withdrawals within 30 days, the depositor has to pay a penalty that includes the loss of interest between the date of withdrawal and the contractual maturity date plus a material penalty that does not have to exceed the interest due for the time elapsed between the date of deposit and the date of withdrawal.
Article 422
@@ -11263,43 +11802,43 @@
Deposits from credit institutions placed at central credit institutions that are considered as liquid assets in accordance with Article 416(1)(f) shall be multiplied by 100 % outflow rate.
Pending a uniform definition of an established operational relationship as referred to in point (c) of paragraph 3, institutions shall themselves establish the criteria to identify an established operational relationship for which they have evidence that the client is unable to withdraw amounts legally due over a 30-day horizon without compromising their operational functioning and shall report these criteria to the competent authorities. Competent authorities may, in the absence of a uniform definition, provide general guidance that institutions shall follow in identifying deposits maintained by the depositor in a context of an established operational relationship.
Competent authorities may grant the permission to apply a lower outflow percentage on a case-by-case basis, to the liabilities referred to in paragraph 7, when all of the following conditions are fulfilled:
(a) the depositor is:
(i) a parent or subsidiary institution of the institution or another subsidiary of the same parent institution;
(ii) linked to the institution by a relationship within the meaning of Article 12(1) of Directive 83/349/EEC;
(iii) an institution falling within the same institutional protection scheme meeting the requirements of Article 113(7);
(iv) the central institution or a member of a network compliant with Article 400 (2)(d);
(b) there are reasons to expect a lower outflow over the next 30 days even under a combined idiosyncratic and market-wide stress scenario;
(c) a corresponding symmetric or more conservative inflow is applied by the depositor by way of derogation from Article 425;
(d) the institution and the depositor are established in the same Member State.
#### EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 1 January 2015.
##### Power is delegated to the Commission to adopt the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
Pending a uniform definition of an established operational relationship as referred to in point (c) of paragraph 3, institutions shall themselves establish the criteria for identifying an established operational relationship for which they have evidence that the client is unable to withdraw amounts legally due over a 30-day time horizon without compromising its operational functioning and shall report those criteria to the competent authorities. In the absence of a uniform definition, competent authorities may provide general guidance that institutions are to follow in identifying deposits maintained by the depositor in a context of an established operational relationship.
Competent authorities may grant the permission to apply a lower outflow percentage to the liabilities referred to in paragraph 7 on a case-by-case basis, provided that all the following conditions are met:
#### (a) the counterparty is any of the following:
(i) a parent or subsidiary institution of the institution, or a parent or subsidiary investment firm of the institution, or another subsidiary of the same parent institution or parent investment firm;
(ii) the counterparty is linked to the institution by a relationship within the meaning of Article 22(7) of Directive 2013/34/EU;
(iii) an institution falling within the same institutional protection scheme meeting the requirements of Article 113(7); or
(iv) the central institution or a member of a network compliant with point (d) of Article 400(2);
##### (b) there are reasons to expect a lower outflow over the next 30 days even under a combined idiosyncratic and market-wide stress scenario;
(c) a corresponding symmetric or more conservative inflow is applied by the counterparty by way of derogation from Article 425;
(d) the institution and the counterparty are established in the same Member State.
EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 1 January 2015.
Power is delegated to the Commission to adopt the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
Article 423
Additional outflows
EBA shall develop draft regulatory technical standards to determine the conditions of application in relation to the notion of materiality and methods for the measurement of this additional outflow.
EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 31 March 2014.
Power is delegated to the Commission to adopt the regulatory technical standards referred to in the second subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
EBA shall develop draft regulatory technical standards to specify the conditions under which the notion of materiality may be applied and specifying methods for the measurement of the additional outflow.
#### EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 31 March 2014.
##### Power is delegated to the Commission to adopt the regulatory technical standards referred to in the second subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
The institution shall add an additional outflow corresponding to:
(a) the excess collateral the institution holds that can be contractually called at any time by the counterparty;
#### (b) collateral that is due to be returned to a counterparty;
##### (c) collateral that corresponds to assets that would qualify as liquid assets for the purposes of Article 416 that can be substituted for assets corresponding to assets that would not qualify as liquid assets for the purposes of Article 416 without the consent of the institution.
(b) collateral that is due to be returned to a counterparty;
(c) collateral that corresponds to assets that would qualify as liquid assets for the purposes of Article 416 that can be substituted for assets corresponding to assets that would not qualify as liquid assets for the purposes of Article 416 without the consent of the institution.
Article 424
@@ -11311,17 +11850,17 @@
(b) they have been provided to clients that are not financial customers;
(c) they have not been provided for the purpose of replacing funding of the client in situations where he is unable to obtain its funding requirements in the financial markets.
The institutions shall report the maximum amount that can be drawn of other undrawn committed credit facilities and undrawn committed liquidity facilities within the next 30 days. This applies in particular to the following:
#### (c) they have not been provided for the purpose of replacing funding of the client in situations where he is unable to obtain its funding requirements in the financial markets.
##### The institutions shall report the maximum amount that can be drawn of other undrawn committed credit facilities and undrawn committed liquidity facilities within the next 30 days. This applies in particular to the following:
(a) liquidity facilities that the institution has granted to SSPEs other than those referred to in point (b) of paragraph 3;
(b) arrangements under which the institution is required to buy or swap assets from an SSPE;
#### (c) facilities extended to credit institutions;
##### (d) facilities extended to financial institutions and investment firms.
(c) facilities extended to credit institutions;
(d) facilities extended to financial institutions and investment firms.
Article 425
@@ -11334,7 +11873,7 @@
(b) monies due from trade financing transactions referred to in point (b) of the second subparagraph of Article 162(3) with a residual maturity of up to 30 days, shall be taken into account in full as inflows;
(c) assets with an undefined contractual end date shall be taken into account with a 20 % inflow provided that the contract allows the bank to withdraw and request payment within 30 days;
(c) loans with an undefined contractual end date shall be taken into account with a 20 % inflow, provided that the contract allows the institution to withdraw and request payment within 30 days;
(d) monies due from secured lending and capital market-driven transactions as defined in point (3) of Article 192 if they are collateralised by liquid assets as referred to in Article 416(1), shall not be taken into account up to the value net of haircuts of the liquid assets and shall be taken into account in full for the remaining monies due;
@@ -11346,29 +11885,29 @@
By way of derogation from point (g) of paragraph 2, competent authorities may grant the permission to apply a higher inflow on a case by case basis for credit and liquidity facilities when all of the following conditions are fulfilled:
(a) there are reasons to expect a higher inflow even under a combined market and idiosyncratic stress of the provider;
(b) the counterparty is a parent or subsidiary institution of the institution or another subsidiary of the same parent institution or linked to the institution by a relationship within the meaning of Article 12(1) of Directive 83/349/EEC or a member of the same institutional protection scheme referred to in Article 113(7) of this Regulation or the central institution or a member of a network that is subject to the waiver referred to in Article 10 of this Regulation;
#### (a) there are reasons to expect a higher inflow even under a combined market and idiosyncratic stress of the provider;
##### (b) the counterparty is a parent or subsidiary institution of the institution or another subsidiary of the same parent institution or linked to the institution by a relationship within the meaning of Article 12(1) of Directive 83/349/EEC or a member of the same institutional protection scheme referred to in Article 113(7) of this Regulation or the central institution or a member of a network that is subject to the waiver referred to in Article 10 of this Regulation;
(c) a corresponding symmetric or more conservative outflow is applied by the counterparty by way of derogation from Articles 422, 423 and 424;
(d) the institution and the counterparty are established in the same Member State.
#### EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 1 January 2015.
##### Power is delegated to the Commission to adopt the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
Article 426
Updating Future liquidity requirements
## Following, the adoption by the Commission of a delegated act to specify the liquidity requirement in accordance with Article 460, EBA may develop draft implementing technical standards to specify the conditions set out in Article 421(1), Article 422, with the exception of paragraphs 8, 9 and 10 of that Article, and Article 424 to take account of standards agreed internationally.
### Power is conferred on the Commission to adopt the implementing technical standards referred to in the first paragraph in accordance with Article 15 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
#### TITLE III
##### REPORTING ON STABLE FUNDING
## EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 1 January 2015.
### Power is delegated to the Commission to adopt the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
#### Article 426
##### Updating Future liquidity requirements
Following, the adoption by the Commission of a delegated act to specify the liquidity requirement in accordance with Article 460, EBA may develop draft implementing technical standards to specify the conditions set out in Article 421(1), Article 422, with the exception of paragraphs 8, 9 and 10 of that Article, and Article 424 to take account of standards agreed internationally.
Power is conferred on the Commission to adopt the implementing technical standards referred to in the first paragraph in accordance with Article 15 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
TITLE III
REPORTING ON STABLE FUNDING
Article 427
@@ -11399,17 +11938,17 @@
— liabilities resulting from securities issued with an effective maturity of less than one year;
(xii) any other liabilities.
Where applicable, all items shall be presented in the following five buckets according to the closest of their maturity date and the earliest date at which they can contractually be called:
(a) within three months;
#### Where applicable, all items shall be presented in the following five buckets according to the closest of their maturity date and the earliest date at which they can contractually be called:
##### (a) within three months;
(b) between three and six months;
(c) between six and nine months;
#### (d) between nine and 12 months;
##### (e) after 12 months.
(d) between nine and 12 months;
(e) after 12 months.
Article 428
@@ -11430,173 +11969,1062 @@
(e) gold;
(f) other precious metals;
(g) non-renewable loans and receivables, and separately those non-renewable loans and receivables for which borrowers are:
## (f) other precious metals;
### (g) non-renewable loans and receivables, and separately those non-renewable loans and receivables for which borrowers are:
(i) natural persons other than commercial sole proprietors and partnerships;
(ii) SMEs that qualify for the retail exposure class under the Standardised or IRB approaches for credit risk or to a company which is eligible for the treatment set out in Article 153(4) and where the aggregate deposit placed by that client or group of connected clients is less than EUR 1 million;
(iii) sovereigns, central banks and public sector entities;
(iv) clients not referred to in points (i) and (ii) other than financial customers;
(v) clients not referred to in points (i), (ii) and (iii) that are financial customers, and thereof separately those that are credit institutions and other financial customers;
(h) non-renewable loans and receivables referred to in point (g), and thereof separately those that are:
## (h) non-renewable loans and receivables referred to in point (g), and thereof separately those that are:
(i) collateralised by commercial immovable property (CRE);
(ii) collateralised by residential property (RRE);
(iii) match funded (pass-through) via bonds eligible for the treatment set out in Article 129(4) or (5) or via bonds as referred to in Article 52(4) of Directive 2009/65/EC;
(i) derivatives receivables;
## (j) any other assets;
### (k) undrawn committed credit facilities that qualify as ‘medium risk’ or ‘medium/low risk’ under Annex I.
#### PART SEVEN
##### LEVERAGE
Article 429
### (i) derivatives receivables;
#### (j) any other assets;
##### (k) undrawn committed credit facilities that qualify as ‘medium risk’ or ‘medium/low risk’ under Annex I.
TITLE IV
**THE NET STABLE FUNDING RATIO**
*CHAPTER 1*
***The net stable funding ratio***
#### Article 428a
##### Application on a consolidated basis
Where the net stable funding ratio set out in this Title applies on a consolidated basis in accordance with Article 11(4), the following provisions shall apply:
(a) the assets and off-balance-sheet items of a subsidiary having its head office in a third country which are subject to required stable funding factors under the net stable funding requirement set out in the national law of that third country that are higher than those specified in Chapter 4 shall be subject to consolidation in accordance with the higher factors specified in the national law of that third country;
(b) the liabilities and own funds of a subsidiary having its head office in a third country which are subject to available stable funding factors under the net stable funding requirement set out in the national law of that third country that are lower than those specified in Chapter 3 shall be subject to consolidation in accordance with the lower factors specified in the national law of that third country;
(c) third-country assets which meet the requirements laid down in the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1) and which are held by a subsidiary having its head office in a third country shall not be recognised as liquid assets for consolidation purposes where they do not qualify as liquid assets under the national law of that third country which sets out the liquidity coverage requirement.
Article 428b
## The net stable funding ratio
### The net stable funding requirement laid down in Article 413(1) shall be equal to the ratio of the institution's available stable funding as referred to in Chapter 3 to the institution's required stable funding as referred to in Chapter 4, and shall be expressed as a percentage. Institutions shall calculate their net stable funding ratio in accordance with the following formula:
#### In determining the level of any restriction on currency mismatches that may be applied in accordance with this Article, competent authorities shall at least consider:
##### (a) whether the institution has the ability to transfer available stable funding from one currency to another and across jurisdictions and legal entities within its group and the ability to swap currencies and raise funds in foreign currency markets over the one-year horizon of the net stable funding ratio;
(b) the impact of adverse exchange rate movements on existing mismatched positions and on the effectiveness of any foreign currency exchange hedges that are in place.
#### Any restriction on currency mismatches imposed in accordance with this Article shall constitute a specific liquidity requirement as referred to in Article 105 of Directive 2013/36/EU.
##### *CHAPTER 2*
***General rules for the calculation of the net stable funding ratio***
Article 428c
Calculation of the net stable funding ratio
Unless otherwise specified in this Title, where an item can be allocated to more than one required stable funding category, it shall be allocated to the required stable funding category that produces the greatest contractual required stable funding for that item.
Article 428d
#### Derivative contracts
##### Competent authorities may decide, with the approval of the relevant central bank, to waive the impact of derivative contracts on the calculation of the net stable funding ratio, including through the determination of the required stable funding factors and of provisions and losses, provided that all the following conditions are met:
(a) those contracts have a residual maturity of less than six months;
#### (b) the counterparty is the ECB or the central bank of a Member State;
##### (c) the derivative contracts serve the monetary policy of the ECB or the central bank of a Member State.
Where a subsidiary having its head office in a third country benefits from the waiver referred to in the first subparagraph under the national law of that third country which sets out the net stable funding requirement, that waiver as specified in the national law of the third country shall be taken into account for consolidation purposes.
Article 428e
Netting of secured lending transactions and capital market-driven transactions
Assets and liabilities resulting from securities financing transactions with a single counterparty shall be calculated on a net basis, provided that those assets and liabilities comply with the netting conditions set out in Article 429b(4).
Article 428f
Interdependent assets and liabilities
Subject to prior approval of the competent authorities, an institution may treat an asset and a liability as interdependent, provided that all the following conditions are met:
(a) the institution acts solely as a pass-through unit to channel the funding from the liability into the corresponding interdependent asset;
(b) the individual interdependent assets and liabilities are clearly identifiable and have the same principal amount;
(c) the asset and interdependent liability have substantially matched maturities, with a maximum delay of 20 days between the maturity of the asset and the maturity of the liability;
(d) the interdependent liability has been requested pursuant to a legal, regulatory or contractual commitment and is not used to fund other assets;
(e) the principal payment flows from the asset are not used for other purposes than repaying the interdependent liability;
#### (f) the counterparties for each pair of interdependent assets and liabilities are not the same.
##### Assets and liabilities shall be considered to meet the conditions set out in paragraph 1 and be considered as interdependent where they are directly linked to the following products or services:
(a) centralised regulated savings, provided that institutions are legally required to transfer regulated deposits to a centralised fund which is set up and controlled by the central government of a Member State and which provides loans to promote public interest objectives, and provided that the transfer of deposits to the centralised fund occurs on at least a monthly basis;
(b) promotional loans and credit and liquidity facilities that fulfil the criteria set out in the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1) for institutions acting as simple intermediaries that do not incur any funding risk;
(c) covered bonds that meet all the following conditions:
(i) they are bonds referred to in Article 52(4) of Directive 2009/65/EC or they meet the eligibility requirements for the treatment set out in Article 129(4) or (5) of this Regulation;
(ii) the underlying loans are fully match funded with the covered bonds that were issued or the covered bonds have non-discretionary extendable maturity triggers of one year or more until the term of the underlying loans in the event of refinancing failure at the maturity date of the covered bond;
#### (d) derivative client clearing activities, provided that the institution does not provide to its clients guarantees of the performance of the CCP and, as a result, does not incur any funding risk.
##### Article 428g
Deposits in institutional protection schemes and cooperative networks
Where an institution belongs to an institutional protection scheme of the type referred to in Article 113(7), to a network that is eligible for the waiver provided for in Article 10, or to a cooperative network in a Member State, the sight deposits that the institution maintains with the central institution and that the depositing institution considers to be liquid assets pursuant to the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1) shall be subject to the following:
(a) the depositing institution shall apply the required stable funding factor under Section 2 of Chapter 4, depending on the treatment of those sight deposits as level 1, level 2A or level 2B assets pursuant to the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1) and depending on the relevant haircut applied to those sight deposits for the calculation of the liquidity coverage ratio;
(b) the central institution receiving the deposit shall apply the corresponding symmetric available stable funding factor.
Article 428h
Preferential treatment within a group or within an institutional protection scheme
By way of derogation from Chapters 3 and 4, where Article 428g does not apply, competent authorities may authorise institutions on a case-by-case basis to apply a higher available stable funding factor or a lower required stable funding factor to assets, liabilities and committed credit or liquidity facilities, provided that all the following conditions are met:
(a) the counterparty is one of the following:
(i) the parent or a subsidiary of the institution;
(ii) another subsidiary of the same parent;
(iii) an undertaking that is related to the institution within the meaning of Article 22(7) of Directive 2013/34/EU;
(iv) a member of the same institutional protection scheme referred to in Article 113(7) of this Regulation as the institution;
(v) the central body or an affiliated credit institution of a network or a cooperative group as referred to in Article 10 of this Regulation;
(b) there are reasons to expect that the liability or committed credit or liquidity facility received by the institution constitutes a more stable source of funding, or that the asset or committed credit or liquidity facility granted by the institution requires less stable funding over the one-year horizon of the net stable funding ratio than the same liability, asset or committed credit or liquidity facility received or granted by other counterparties;
(c) the counterparty applies a required stable funding factor that is equal to or higher than the higher available stable funding factor or applies an available stable funding factor that is equal to or lower than the lower required stable funding factor;
## (d) the institution and the counterparty are established in the same Member State.
### Where the institution and the counterparty are established in different Member States, competent authorities may waive the condition set out in point (d) of paragraph 1, provided that, in addition to the criteria set out in paragraph 1, the following criteria are met:
## (a) there are legally binding agreements and commitments between group entities regarding the liability, asset or committed credit or liquidity facility;
### (b) the funding provider presents a low funding risk profile;
#### (c) the funding risk profile of the recipient of the funding has been adequately taken into account in the liquidity risk management of the funding provider.
##### The competent authorities shall consult each other in accordance with point (b) of Article 20(1) to determine whether the additional criteria set out in this paragraph are met.
CHAPTER 3
**Available stable funding**
#### *Section 1*
##### ***General provisions***
## Article 428i
### Calculation of the amount of available stable funding
#### Unless otherwise specified in this Chapter, the amount of available stable funding shall be calculated by multiplying the accounting value of various categories or types of liabilities and own funds by the available stable funding factors to be applied under Section 2. The total amount of available stable funding shall be the sum of the weighted amounts of liabilities and own funds.
##### Bonds and other debt securities that are issued by the institution, sold exclusively in the retail market, and held in a retail account, may be treated as belonging to the appropriate retail deposit category. Limitations shall be in place, such that those instruments cannot be bought and held by parties other than retail customers.
Article 428j
Residual maturity of a liability or of own funds
*Section 2*
***Available stable funding factors***
Article 428k
0 % available stable funding factor
Unless otherwise specified in Articles 428l to 428o, all liabilities without a stated maturity, including short positions and open maturity positions, shall be subject to a 0 % available stable funding factor, with the exception of the following:
(a) deferred tax liabilities, which shall be treated in accordance with the nearest possible date on which such liabilities could be realised;
(b) minority interests, which shall be treated in accordance with the term of the instrument.
Deferred tax liabilities and minority interests as referred to in paragraph 1 shall be subject to one of the following factors:
(a) 0 %, where the effective residual maturity of the deferred tax liability or minority interest is less than six months;
(b) 50 %, where the effective residual maturity of the deferred tax liability or minority interest is a minimum of six months but less than one year;
(c) 100 %, where the effective residual maturity of the deferred tax liability or minority interest is one year or more.
The following liabilities shall be subject to a 0 % available stable funding factor:
(a) trade date payables arising from purchases of financial instruments, of foreign currencies and of commodities, that are expected to settle within the standard settlement cycle or period that is customary for the relevant exchange or type of transactions, or that have failed to settle but are nonetheless expected to settle;
#### (b) liabilities that are categorised as being interdependent with assets in accordance with Article 428f;
##### (c) liabilities with a residual maturity of less than six months provided by:
(i) the ECB or the central bank of a Member State;
(ii) the central bank of a third country;
(iii) financial customers;
(d) any other liabilities and capital items or instruments not referred to in Articles 428l to 428o.
The following rules shall apply to the calculation referred to in the first subparagraph:
(a) variation margin received by institutions from their counterparties shall be deducted from the fair value of a netting set with positive fair value where the collateral received as variation margin qualifies as a level 1 asset pursuant to the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1), excluding extremely high quality covered bonds specified in that delegated act, and where institutions are legally entitled and operationally able to reuse that collateral;
(b) all variation margin posted by institutions with their counterparties shall be deducted from the fair value of a netting set with negative fair value.
Article 428l
#### 50 % available stable funding factor
##### The following liabilities shall be subject to a 50 % available stable funding factor:
(a) deposits received that fulfil the criteria for operational deposits set out in the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1);
#### (b) liabilities with a residual maturity of less than one year provided by:
(i) the central government of a Member State or of a third country;
(ii) regional governments or local authorities of a Member State or of a third country;
(iii) public sector entities in a Member State or in a third country;
(iv) multilateral development banks referred to in Article 117(2) and international organisations referred to in Article 118;
(v) non-financial corporate customers;
(vi) credit unions authorised by a competent authority, personal investment companies and clients that are deposit brokers to the extent that those liabilities do not fall under point (a) of this paragraph;
##### (c) liabilities with a residual contractual maturity of a minimum of six months but less than one year that are provided by:
(i) the ECB or the central bank of a Member State;
(ii) the central bank of a third country;
(iii) financial customers;
(d) any other liabilities with a residual maturity of a minimum of six months but less than one year not referred to in Articles 428m, 428n and 428o.
#### Article 428m
##### 90 % available stable funding factor
Sight retail deposits, retail deposits with a fixed notice period of less than one year and term retail deposits having a residual maturity of less than one year that fulfil the relevant criteria for other retail deposits set out in the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1) shall be subject to a 90 % available stable funding factor.
Article 428n
95 % available stable funding factor
Sight retail deposits, retail deposits with a fixed notice period of less than one year and term retail deposits having a residual maturity of less than one year that fulfil the relevant criteria for stable retail deposits set out in the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1) shall be subject to a 95 % available stable funding factor.
Article 428o
100 % available stable funding factor
## The following liabilities and capital items and instruments shall be subject to a 100 % available stable funding factor:
### (a) the Common Equity Tier 1 items of the institution before the adjustments required pursuant to Articles 32 to 35, the deductions pursuant to Article 36 and the application of the exemptions and alternatives laid down in Articles 48, 49 and 79;
## (b) the Additional Tier 1 items of the institution before the deduction of the items referred to in Article 56 and before Article 79 has been applied thereto, excluding any instruments with explicit or embedded options that, if exercised, would reduce the effective residual maturity to less than one year;
### (c) the Tier 2 items of the institution before the deductions referred to in Article 66 and before the application of Article 79, having a residual maturity of one year or more, excluding any instruments with explicit or embedded options that, if exercised, would reduce the effective residual maturity to less than one year;
#### (d) any other capital instruments of the institution with a residual maturity of one year or more, excluding any instruments with explicit or embedded options that, if exercised, would reduce the effective residual maturity to less than one year;
##### (e) any other secured and unsecured borrowings and liabilities with a residual maturity of one year or more, including term deposits, unless otherwise specified in Articles 428k to 428n.
CHAPTER 4
**Required stable funding**
*Section 1*
***General provisions***
Article 428p
Calculation of the amount of required stable funding
Assets that institutions have borrowed, including in securities financing transactions, shall be subject to the required stable funding factors to be applied under Section 2 where those assets are not accounted for on the balance sheet of the institution but the institution does have beneficial ownership of the assets.
Assets that have less than six months remaining in the encumbrance period shall be subject to the required stable funding factors to be applied under Section 2 to the same assets if they were held unencumbered.
The following assets shall be considered to be unencumbered:
(a) assets included in a pool which are available for immediate use as collateral to obtain additional funding under committed or, where the pool is operated by a central bank, uncommitted but not yet funded, credit lines that are available to the institution; those assets shall include assets placed by a credit institution with a central institution in a cooperative network or institutional protection scheme; institutions shall assume that assets in the pool are encumbered in order of increasing liquidity on the basis of the liquidity classification pursuant to the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1), starting with assets ineligible for the liquidity buffer;
(b) assets that the institution has received as collateral for credit risk mitigation purposes in secured lending, secured funding or collateral exchange transactions and that the institution may dispose of;
(c) assets attached as non-mandatory overcollateralisation to a covered bond issuance.
#### In the case of non-standard, temporary operations conducted by the ECB or the central bank of a Member State or the central bank of a third country in order to fulfil its mandate in a period of market-wide financial stress or in exceptional macroeconomic circumstances, the following assets may receive a reduced required stable funding factor:
##### (a) by way of derogation from point (f) of Article 428ad and from point (a) of Article 428ah(1), assets encumbered for the purposes of the operations referred to in this subparagraph;
## (b) by way of derogation from points (d)(i) and (d)(ii) of Article 428ad, from point (b) of Article 428af and from point (c) of Article 428ag, monies that result from the operations referred to in this subparagraph.
### Competent authorities shall determine, in agreement with the central bank that is the counterparty to the transaction the required stable funding factor to be applied to the assets referred to in points (a) and (b) of the first subparagraph. For encumbered assets as referred to in point (a) of the first subparagraph, the required stable funding factor to be applied shall not be lower than the required stable funding factor that would apply under Section 2 to those assets if they were held unencumbered.
#### When applying a reduced required stable funding factor in accordance with the second subparagraph, competent authorities shall closely monitor the impact of that reduced factor on institutions' stable funding positions and shall take appropriate supervisory measures where necessary.
##### Competent authorities shall report the types of off-balance-sheet exposures for which they have determined the required stable funding factors to EBA at least once a year. They shall include an explanation of the methodology applied to determine those factors in that report.
Article 428q
Residual maturity of an asset
*Section 2*
***Required stable funding factors***
Article 428r
0 % required stable funding factor
The following assets shall be subject to a 0 % required stable funding factor:
(a) unencumbered assets that are eligible as level 1 high quality liquid assets pursuant to the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1), excluding extremely high quality covered bonds specified in that delegated act, regardless of whether they comply with the operational requirements as set out in that delegated act;
(b) unencumbered shares or units in CIUs that are eligible for a 0 % haircut for the calculation of the liquidity coverage ratio pursuant to the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1), regardless of whether they comply with the operational requirements and with the requirements on the composition of the liquidity buffer set out in that delegated act;
(c) all reserves held by the institution in the ECB or in the central bank of a Member State or the central bank of a third country, including required reserves and excess reserves;
#### (d) all claims on the ECB, the central bank of a Member State or the central bank of a third country that have a residual maturity of less than six months;
##### (e) trade date receivables arising from sales of financial instruments, foreign currencies or commodities that are expected to settle within the standard settlement cycle or period that is customary for the relevant exchange or type of transaction, or that have failed to settle but are nonetheless expected to settle;
(f) assets that are categorised as being interdependent with liabilities in accordance with Article 428f;
(g) monies due from securities financing transactions with financial customers, where those transactions have a residual maturity of less than six months, where those monies due are collateralised by assets that qualify as level 1 assets pursuant to the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1), excluding extremely high quality covered bonds specified therein, and where the institution would be legally entitled and operationally able to reuse those assets for the duration of the transaction.
Institutions shall take the monies due referred to in point (g) of the first subparagraph of this paragraph into account on a net basis where Article 428e applies.
For subsidiaries having their head office in a third country, where the required central bank reserves are subject to a higher required stable funding factor under the net stable funding requirement set out in the national law of that third country, that higher required stable funding factor shall be taken into account for consolidation purposes.
Article 428s
5 % required stable funding factor
#### The following assets and off-balance-sheet items shall be subject to a 5 % required stable funding factor:
##### (a) unencumbered shares or units in CIUs that are eligible for a 5 % haircut for the calculation of the liquidity coverage ratio in accordance with the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1), regardless of whether they comply with the operational requirements and with the requirements on the composition of the liquidity buffer as set out in that delegated act;
(b) monies due from securities financing transactions with financial customers, where those transactions have a residual maturity of less than six months, other than those referred to in point (g) of Article 428r(1);
#### (c) the undrawn portion of committed credit and liquidity facilities pursuant to the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1);
##### (d) trade finance off-balance-sheet related products as referred to in Annex I with a residual maturity of less than six months.
Institutions shall take the monies due referred to in point (b) of the first subparagraph of this paragraph into account on a net basis where Article 428e applies.
#### Article 428t
##### 7 % required stable funding factor
Unencumbered assets that are eligible as level 1 extremely high quality covered bonds pursuant to the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1) shall be subject to a 7 % required stable funding factor, regardless of whether they comply with the operational requirements and with the requirements on the composition of the liquidity buffer as set out in that delegated act.
Article 428u
7,5 % required stable funding factor
Trade finance off-balance-sheet related products as referred to in Annex I with a residual maturity of at least six months but less than one year shall be subject to a 7,5 % required stable funding factor.
#### Article 428v
##### 10 % required stable funding factor
The following assets and off-balance-sheet items shall be subject to a 10 % required stable funding factor:
#### (a) monies due from transactions with financial customers that have a residual maturity of less than six months other than those referred to in point (g) of Article 428r(1) and in point (b) of Article 428s(1);
##### (b) trade finance on-balance-sheet related products with a residual maturity of less than six months;
(c) trade finance off-balance-sheet related products as referred to in Annex I with a residual maturity of one year or more.
#### Article 428w
##### 12 % required stable funding factor
Unencumbered shares or units in CIUs that are eligible for a 12 % haircut for the calculation of the liquidity coverage ratio in accordance with the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1) shall be subject to a 12 % required stable funding factor, regardless of whether they comply with the operational requirements and with the requirements on the composition of the liquidity buffer as set out in that delegated act.
#### Article 428x
##### 15 % required stable funding factor
Unencumbered assets that are eligible as level 2A assets pursuant to the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1) shall be subject to a 15 % required stable funding factor, regardless of whether they comply with the operational requirements and with the requirements on the composition of the liquidity buffer as set out in that delegated act.
#### Article 428y
##### 20 % required stable funding factor
Unencumbered shares or units in CIUs that are eligible for a 20 % haircut for the calculation of the liquidity coverage ratio in accordance with the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1) shall be subject to a 20 % required stable funding factor, regardless of whether they comply with the operational requirements and with the requirements on the composition of the liquidity buffer as set out in that delegated act.
Article 428z
25 % required stable funding factor
#### Unencumbered level 2B securitisations pursuant to the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1) shall be subject to a 25 % required stable funding factor, regardless of whether they comply with the operational requirements and with the requirements on the composition of the liquidity buffer as set out in that delegated act.
##### Article 428aa
30 % required stable funding factor
The following assets shall be subject to a 30 % required stable funding factor:
(a) unencumbered high quality covered bonds pursuant to the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1), regardless of whether they comply with the operational requirements and with the requirements on the composition of the liquidity buffer as set out in that delegated act;
#### (b) unencumbered shares or units in CIUs that are eligible for a 30 % haircut for the calculation of the liquidity coverage ratio in accordance with the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1), regardless of whether they comply with the operational requirements and with the requirements on the composition of the liquidity buffer as set out in that delegated act.
##### Article 428ab
35 % required stable funding factor
#### The following assets shall be subject to a 35 % required stable funding factor:
##### (a) unencumbered level 2B securitisations pursuant to the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1), regardless of whether they comply with the operational requirements and with the requirements on the composition of the liquidity buffer as set out in that delegated act;
(b) unencumbered shares or units in CIUs that are eligible for a 35 % haircut for the calculation of the liquidity coverage ratio pursuant to the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1), regardless of whether they comply with the operational requirements and with the requirements on the composition of the liquidity buffer as set out in that delegated act.
Article 428ac
40 % required stable funding factor
Unencumbered shares or units in CIUs that are eligible for a 40 % haircut for the calculation of the liquidity coverage ratio pursuant to the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1) shall be subject to a 40 % required stable funding factor, regardless of whether they comply with the operational requirements and with the requirements on the composition of the liquidity buffer as set out in that delegated act.
Article 428ad
50 % required stable funding factor
The following assets shall be subject to a 50 % required stable funding factor:
(a) unencumbered assets that are eligible as level 2B assets pursuant to the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1), excluding level 2B securitisations and high quality covered bonds pursuant to that delegated act, regardless of whether they comply with the operational requirements and with the requirements on the composition of the liquidity buffer as set out in that delegated act;
#### (b) deposits held by the institution in another financial institution that fulfil the criteria for operational deposits as set out in the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1);
##### (c) monies due from transactions with a residual maturity of less than one year with:
(i) the central government of a Member State or of a third country;
(ii) regional governments or local authorities in a Member State or in a third country;
(iii) public sector entities of a Member State or of a third country;
(iv) multilateral development banks referred to in Article 117(2) and international organisations referred to in Article 118;
(v) non-financial corporates, retail customers and SMEs;
(vi) credit unions authorised by a competent authority, personal investment companies and clients that are deposit brokers to the extent that those assets do not fall under point (b) of this paragraph;
(d) monies due from transactions with a residual maturity of at least six months but less than one year with:
(i) the European Central Bank or the central bank of a Member State;
(ii) the central bank of a third country;
(iii) financial customers;
#### (e) trade finance on-balance-sheet related products with a residual maturity of at least six months but less than one year;
##### (f) assets encumbered for a residual maturity of at least six months but less than one year, except where those assets would be assigned a higher required stable funding factor in accordance with Articles 428ae to 428ah if they were held unencumbered, in which case the higher required stable funding factor that would apply to those assets if they were held unencumbered shall apply;
(g) any other assets with a residual maturity of less than one year, unless otherwise specified in Articles 428r to 428ac.
Article 428ae
55 % required stable funding factor
#### Unencumbered shares or units in CIUs that are eligible for a 55 % haircut for the calculation of the liquidity coverage ratio in accordance with the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1) shall be subject to a 55 % required stable funding factor, regardless of whether they comply with the operational requirements and with the requirements on the composition of the liquidity buffer as set out in that delegated act.
##### Article 428af
65 % required stable funding factor
The following assets shall be subject to a 65 % required stable funding factor:
(a) unencumbered loans secured by mortgages on residential property or unencumbered residential loans fully guaranteed by an eligible protection provider as referred to in point (e) of Article 129(1) with a residual maturity of one year or more, provided that those loans are assigned a risk weight of 35 % or less in accordance with Chapter 2 of Title II of Part Three;
(b) unencumbered loans with a residual maturity of one year or more, excluding loans to financial customers and loans referred to in Articles 428r to 428ad, provided that those loans are assigned a risk weight of 35 % or less in accordance with Chapter 2 of Title II of Part Three.
Article 428ag
85 % required stable funding factor
The following assets and off-balance-sheet items shall be subject to a 85 % required stable funding factor:
(a) any assets and off-balance-sheet items, including cash, posted as initial margin for derivative contracts, unless those assets would be assigned a higher required stable funding factor in accordance with Article 428ah if held unencumbered, in which case the higher required stable funding factor that would apply to those assets if they were held unencumbered shall apply;
(b) any assets and off-balance-sheet items, including cash, posted as contribution to the default fund of a CCP, unless those would be assigned a higher required stable funding factor in accordance with Article 428ah if held unencumbered, in which case the higher required stable funding factor to be applied to the unencumbered asset shall apply;
#### (c) unencumbered loans with a residual maturity of one year or more, excluding loans to financial customers and loans referred to in Articles 428r to 428af, which are not past due for more than 90 days and which are assigned a risk weight of more than 35 % in accordance with Chapter 2 of Title II of Part Three;
##### (d) trade finance on-balance-sheet related products, with a residual maturity of one year or more;
(e) unencumbered securities with a residual maturity of one year or more that are not in default in accordance with Article 178 and that are not eligible as liquid assets pursuant to the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1);
(f) unencumbered exchange-traded equities that are not eligible as level 2B assets pursuant to the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1);
(g) physically traded commodities, including gold but excluding commodity derivatives;
(h) assets encumbered for a residual maturity of one year or more in a cover pool funded by covered bonds as referred to in Article 52(4) of Directive 2009/65/EC or covered bonds which meet the eligibility requirements for the treatment as set out in Article 129(4) or (5) of this Regulation.
Article 428ah
100 % required stable funding factor
## The following assets shall be subject to a 100 % required stable funding factor:
### (a) unless otherwise specified in this Chapter, any assets encumbered for a residual maturity of one year or more;
#### (b) any assets other than those referred to in Articles 428r to 428ag, including loans to financial customers having a residual contractual maturity of one year or more, non-performing exposures, items deducted from own funds, fixed assets, non-exchange-traded equities, retained interest, insurance assets, defaulted securities.
##### The following rules shall apply to the calculation referred to in the first subparagraph:
(a) variation margin received by institutions from their counterparties shall be deducted from the fair value of a netting set with positive fair value where the collateral received as variation margin qualifies as a level 1 asset pursuant to the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1), excluding extremely high quality covered bonds specified in that delegated act, and where institutions are legally entitled and operationally able to reuse that collateral;
(b) all variation margin posted by institutions with their counterparties shall be deducted from the fair value of a netting set with negative fair value.
## CHAPTER 5
### **Derogation for small and non-complex institutions**
## Article 428ai
### Derogation for small and non-complex institutions
#### By way of derogation from Chapters 3 and 4, small and non-complex institutions may choose, with the prior permission of their competent authority, to calculate the ratio between an institution's available stable funding as referred to in Chapter 6, and the institution's required stable funding as referred to in Chapter 7, expressed as a percentage.
##### A competent authority may require a small and non-complex institution to comply with the net stable funding requirement based on an institution's available stable funding as referred to in Chapter 3 and the required stable funding as referred to in Chapter 4 where it considers that the simplified methodology is not adequate to capture the funding risks of that institution.
#### CHAPTER 6
##### **Available stable funding for the simplified calculation of the net stable funding ratio**
## *Section 1*
### ***General provisions***
#### Article 428aj
##### Simplified calculation of the amount of available stable funding
Article 428ak
Residual maturity of a liability or own funds
*Section 2*
***Available stable funding factors***
Article 428al
0 % available stable funding factor
Unless otherwise specified in this Section, all liabilities without a stated maturity, including short positions and open maturity positions, shall be subject to a 0 % available stable funding factor, with the exception of the following:
(a) deferred tax liabilities, which shall be treated in accordance with the nearest possible date on which such liabilities could be realised;
(b) minority interests, which shall be treated in accordance with the term of the instrument concerned.
Deferred tax liabilities and minority interests as referred to in paragraph 1 shall be subject to one of the following factors:
(a) 0 %, where the effective residual maturity of the deferred tax liability or minority interest is less than one year;
(b) 100 %, where the effective residual maturity of the deferred tax liability or minority interest is one year or more.
The following liabilities shall be subject to a 0 % available stable funding factor:
(a) trade date payables arising from purchases of financial instruments, of foreign currencies and of commodities, that are expected to settle within the standard settlement cycle or period that is customary for the relevant exchange or type of transaction, or that have failed to settle but are nonetheless expected to settle;
#### (b) liabilities that are categorised as being interdependent with assets in accordance with Article 428f;
##### (c) liabilities with a residual maturity of less than one year provided by:
(i) the ECB or the central bank of a Member State;
(ii) the central bank of a third country;
(iii) financial customers;
(d) any other liabilities and capital items or instruments not referred to in this Article and Articles 428am to 428ap.
The following rules shall apply to the calculation referred to in the first subparagraph:
(a) variation margin received by institutions from their counterparties shall be deducted from the fair value of a netting set with positive fair value where the collateral received as variation margin qualifies as a level 1 asset pursuant to the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1), excluding extremely high quality covered bonds specified in that delegated act, and where institutions are legally entitled and operationally able to reuse that collateral;
#### (b) all variation margin posted by institutions with their counterparties shall be deducted from the fair value of a netting set with negative fair value.
##### Article 428am
50 % available stable funding factor
#### The following liabilities shall be subject to a 50 % available stable funding factor:
##### (a) deposits received that fulfil the criteria for operational deposits set out in the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1);
(b) liabilities with a residual maturity of less than one year provided by:
(i) the central government of a Member State or of a third country;
(ii) regional governments or local authorities in a Member State or in a third country;
(iii) public sector entities of a Member State or of a third country;
(iv) multilateral development banks referred to in Article 117(2) and international organisations referred to in Article 118;
(v) non-financial corporate customers;
(vi) credit unions authorised by a competent authority, personal investment companies and clients that are deposit brokers, with the exception of deposits received, that fulfil the criteria for operational deposits as set out in the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1).
#### Article 428an
##### 90 % available stable funding factor
Sight retail deposits, retail deposits with a fixed notice period of less than one year and term retail deposits having a residual maturity of less than one year that fulfil the relevant criteria for other retail deposits set out in the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1) shall be subject to a 90 % available stable funding factor.
Article 428ao
95 % available stable funding factor
Sight retail deposits, retail deposits with a fixed notice period of less than one year and term retail deposits having a residual maturity of less than one year that fulfil the relevant criteria for stable retail deposits set out in the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1) shall be subject to a 95 % available stable funding factor.
Article 428ap
100 % available stable funding factor
## The following liabilities and capital items and instruments shall be subject to a 100 % available stable funding factor:
### (a) the Common Equity Tier 1 items of the institution before the adjustments required pursuant to Articles 32 to 35, the deductions pursuant to Article 36 and the application of the exemptions and alternatives laid down in Articles 48, 49 and 79;
## (b) the Additional Tier 1 items of the institution before the deduction of the items referred to in Article 56 and before Article 79 has been applied thereto, excluding any instruments with explicit or embedded options that, if exercised, would reduce the effective residual maturity to less than one year;
### (c) the Tier 2 items of the institution before the deductions referred to in Article 66 and before the application of Article 79, having a residual maturity of one year or more, excluding any instruments with explicit or embedded options that, if exercised, would reduce the effective residual maturity to less than one year;
#### (d) any other capital instruments of the institution with a residual maturity of one year or more, excluding any instruments with explicit or embedded options that, if exercised, would reduce the effective residual maturity to less than one year;
##### (e) any other secured and unsecured borrowings and liabilities with a residual maturity of one year or more, including term deposits, unless otherwise specified in Articles 428al to 428ao.
CHAPTER 7
**Required stable funding for the simplified calculation of the net stable funding ratio**
*Section 1*
***General provisions***
Article 428aq
Simplified calculation of the amount of required stable funding
Assets that institutions have borrowed, including in securities financing transactions, that are not accounted for in their balance sheet but on which they have beneficial ownership shall be subject to the required stable funding factors to be applied under Section 2.
Assets that have less than six months remaining in the encumbrance period shall be subject to the required stable funding factors to be applied under Section 2 to the same assets if they were held unencumbered.
The following assets shall be considered to be unencumbered:
(a) assets included in a pool which are available for immediate use as collateral to obtain additional funding under committed or, where the pool is operated by a central bank, uncommitted but not yet funded credit lines available to the institution, including assets placed by a credit institution with the central institution in a cooperative network or institutional protection scheme;
(b) assets that the institution has received as collateral for credit risk mitigation purposes in secured lending, secured funding or collateral exchange transactions and that the institution may dispose of;
(c) assets attached as non-mandatory over-collateralisation to a covered bond issuance.
For the purposes of point (a) of the first subparagraph of this paragraph, institutions shall assume that assets in the pool are encumbered in order of increasing liquidity on the basis of the liquidity classification set out in the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1), starting with assets ineligible for the liquidity buffer.
#### In the case of non-standard, temporary operations conducted by the ECB or the central bank of a Member State or the central bank of a third country in order to fulfil its mandate in a period of market-wide financial stress or exceptional macroeconomic circumstances, the following assets may receive a reduced required stable funding factor:
##### (a) by way of derogation from Article 428aw and from point (a) of Article 428az(1), assets encumbered for the operations referred to in this subparagraph;
## (b) by way of derogation from Article 428aw and from point (b) of Article 428ay, monies resulting from the operations referred to in this subparagraph.
### Competent authorities shall determine, in agreement with the central bank that is the counterparty to the transaction the required stable funding factor to be applied to the assets referred to in points (a) and (b) of the first subparagraph. For encumbered assets referred to in point (a) of the first subparagraph, the required stable funding factor to be applied shall not be lower than the required stable funding factor that would apply under Section 2 to those assets if they were held unencumbered.
#### When applying a reduced required stable funding factor in accordance with the second subparagraph, competent authorities shall closely monitor the impact of that reduced factor on institutions' stable funding positions and take appropriate supervisory measures where necessary.
##### Competent authorities shall report to EBA the types of off-balance-sheet exposures for which they have determined the required stable funding factors at least once a year. They shall include in that report an explanation of the methodology applied to determine those factors.
Article 428ar
Residual maturity of an asset
*Section 2*
***Required stable funding factors***
Article 428as
0 % required stable funding factor
#### The following assets shall be subject to a 0 % required stable funding factor:
##### (a) unencumbered assets that are eligible as level 1 high quality liquid assets pursuant to the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1), excluding extremely high quality covered bonds specified in that delegated act, regardless of whether they comply with the operational requirements as set out in that delegated act;
#### (b) all reserves held by the institution in the ECB or in the central bank of a Member State or the central bank of a third country, including required reserves and excess reserves;
##### (c) all claims on the ECB, the central bank of a Member State or the central bank of a third country that have a residual maturity of less than six months;
(d) assets that are categorised as being interdependent with liabilities in accordance with Article 428f.
For subsidiaries having their head office in a third country, where the required central bank reserves are subject to a higher required stable funding factor under the net stable funding requirement set out in the national law of that third country, that higher required stable funding factor shall be taken into account for consolidation purposes.
Article 428at
#### 5 % required stable funding factor
##### Article 428au
10 % required stable funding factor
#### The following assets and off-balance-sheet items shall be subject to a 10 % required stable funding factor:
##### (a) unencumbered assets that are eligible as level 1 extremely high quality covered bonds pursuant to the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1), regardless of whether they comply with the operational requirements and with the requirements on the composition of the liquidity buffer as set out in that delegated act;
(b) trade finance off-balance-sheet related products as referred to in Annex I.
Article 428av
20 % required stable funding factor
Unencumbered assets that are eligible as level 2A assets pursuant to the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1), and unencumbered shares or units in CIUs pursuant to that delegated act shall be subject to a 20 % required stable funding factor, regardless of whether they comply with the operational requirements and with the requirements on the composition of the liquidity buffer as set out in that delegated act.
#### Article 428aw
##### 50 % required stable funding factor
The following assets shall be subject to a 50 % required stable funding factor:
#### (a) secured and unsecured loans with a residual maturity of less than one year and provided that they are encumbered less than one year;
##### (b) any other assets with a residual maturity of less than one year, unless otherwise specified in Articles 428as to 428av;
(c) assets encumbered for a residual maturity of at least six months but less than one year, except where those assets would be assigned a higher required stable funding factor in accordance with Articles 428ax, 428ay and 428az if they were held unencumbered, in which case the higher required stable funding factor that would apply to those assets if they were held unencumbered shall apply.
Article 428ax
55 % required stable funding factor
Assets that are eligible as level 2B assets pursuant to the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1), and shares or units in CIUs pursuant to that delegated act shall be subject to a 55 % required stable funding factor, regardless of whether they comply with the operational requirements and with the requirements on the composition of the liquidity buffer as set out in that delegated act, provided that they are encumbered less than one year.
Article 428ay
85 % required stable funding factor
The following assets and off-balance-sheet items shall be subject to a 85 % required stable funding factor:
#### (a) any assets and off-balance-sheet items, including cash, posted as initial margin for derivative contracts or posted as contribution to the default fund of a CCP, unless those assets would be assigned a higher required stable funding factor in accordance with Article 428az if held unencumbered, in which case the higher required stable funding factor that would apply to those assets if they were held unencumbered shall apply;
##### (b) unencumbered loans with a residual maturity of one year or more, excluding loans to financial customers, which are not past due for more than 90 days;
(c) trade finance on-balance-sheet related products, with a residual maturity of one year or more;
(d) unencumbered securities with a residual maturity of one year or more that are not in default in accordance with Article 178 and that are not eligible as liquid assets pursuant to the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1);
(e) unencumbered exchange-traded equities that are not eligible as level 2B assets pursuant to the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1);
(f) physically traded commodities, including gold but excluding commodity derivatives.
Article 428az
100 % required stable funding factor
## The following assets shall be subject to a 100 % required stable funding factor:
### (a) any assets encumbered for a residual maturity of one year or more;
#### (b) any assets other than those referred to in Articles 428as to 428ay, including loans to financial customers having a residual contractual maturity of one year or more, non-performing exposures, items deducted from own funds, fixed assets, non-exchange traded equities, retained interest, insurance assets, defaulted securities.
##### The following rules shall apply to the calculation referred to in the first subparagraph:
(a) variation margin received by institutions from their counterparties shall be deducted from the fair value of a netting set with positive fair value where the collateral received as variation margin qualifies as a level 1 asset pursuant to the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1), excluding extremely high quality covered bonds specified in that delegated act, and where institutions are legally entitled and operationally able to reuse that collateral;
(b) all variation margin posted by institutions with their counterparties shall be deducted from the fair value of a netting set with negative fair value.
PART SEVEN
**LEVERAGE**
Article 429
Calculation of the leverage ratio
Institutions shall calculate the leverage ratio at the reporting reference date.
The total exposure measure shall be the sum of the exposure values of:
(a) assets referred to in paragraph 5 unless they are deducted when determining the capital measure referred to in paragraph 3;
(b) derivatives referred to in paragraph 9;
(c) add-ons for counterparty credit risk of repurchase transactions, securities or commodities lending or borrowing transactions, long settlement transactions and margin lending transactions including those that are off-balance sheet referred to in Article 429b;
(d) off-balance sheet items referred to in paragraph 10.
Institutions shall determine the exposure value of assets, excluding contracts listed in Annex II and credit derivatives, in accordance with the following principles:
(a) the exposure values of assets means exposure values in accordance with the first sentence of Article 111(1);
(b) physical or financial collateral, guarantees or credit risk mitigation purchased shall not be used to reduce exposure values of assets;
(c) loans shall not be netted with deposits;
(d) repurchase transactions, securities or commodities lending or borrowing transactions, long settlement transactions and margin lending transactions shall not be netted.
By way of derogation from point (d) of paragraph 5, institutions may determine the exposure value of cash receivables and cash payables of repurchase transactions, securities or commodities lending or borrowing transactions, long settlement transactions and margin lending transactions with the same counterparty on a net basis only if all the following conditions are met:
For the purposes of paragraph 2, the total exposure measure shall be the sum of the exposure values of:
(a) assets, excluding derivative contracts listed in Annex II, credit derivatives and the positions referred to in Article 429e, calculated in accordance with Article 429b(1);
(b) derivative contracts listed in Annex II and credit derivatives, including those contracts and credit derivatives that are off-balance-sheet, calculated in accordance with Articles 429c and 429d;
(c) add-ons for counterparty credit risk of securities financing transactions, including those that are off-balance-sheet, calculated in accordance with Article 429e;
(d) off-balance-sheet items, excluding derivative contracts listed in Annex II, credit derivatives, securities financing transactions and positions referred to in Articles 429d and 429g, calculated in accordance with Article 429f;
(e) regular-way purchases or sales awaiting settlement, calculated in accordance with Article 429g.
Institutions shall treat long settlement transactions in accordance with points (a) to (d) of the first subparagraph, as applicable.
Institutions may reduce the exposure values referred to in points (a) and (d) of the first subparagraph by the corresponding amount of general credit risk adjustments to on- and off-balance-sheet items, respectively, subject to a floor of 0 where the credit risk adjustments have reduced the Tier 1 capital.
By way of derogation from point (d) of paragraph 4, the following provisions shall apply:
(a) a derivative instrument that is considered an off-balance-sheet item in accordance with point (d) of paragraph 4 but is treated as a derivative in accordance with the applicable accounting framework, shall be subject to the treatment set out in that point;
(b) where a client of an institution acting as a clearing member enters directly into a derivative transaction with a CCP and the institution guarantees the performance of its client's trade exposures to the CCP arising from that transaction, the institution shall calculate its exposure resulting from the guarantee in accordance with point (b) of paragraph 4, as if that institution had entered directly into the transaction with the client, including with regard to the receipt or provision of cash variation margin.
The treatment set out in point (b) of the first subparagraph shall also apply to an institution acting as a higher-level client that guarantees the performance of its client's trade exposures.
For the purposes of point (b) of the first subparagraph and of the second subparagraph of this paragraph, institutions may consider an affiliated entity as a client only where that entity is outside the regulatory scope of consolidation at the level at which the requirement set out in point (d) of Article 92(3) is applied.
Unless otherwise expressly provided for in this Part, institutions shall calculate the total exposure measure in accordance with the following principles:
(a) physical or financial collateral, guarantees or credit risk mitigation purchased shall not be used to reduce the total exposure measure;
#### (b) assets shall not be netted with liabilities.
##### By way of derogation from point (b) of paragraph 7, institutions may reduce the exposure value of a pre-financing loan or an intermediate loan by the positive balance on the savings account of the debtor to which the loan was granted and only include the resulting amount in the total exposure measure, provided that all the following conditions are met:
(a) the granting of the loan is conditional upon the opening of the savings account at the institution granting the loan and both the loan and the savings account are regulated by the same sectoral law;
(b) the balance on the savings account cannot be withdrawn, in part or in full, by the debtor for the entire duration of the loan;
(c) the institution can unconditionally and irrevocably use the balance on the savings account to settle any claim originating under the loan agreement in cases regulated by the sectoral law referred to in point (a), including the case of non-payment by or the insolvency of the debtor.
‘Pre-financing loan’ or ‘intermediate loan’ means a loan that is granted to the borrower for a limited period of time in order to bridge the borrower's financing gaps until the final loan is granted in accordance with the criteria laid down in the sectoral law regulating such transactions.
Article 429a
Exposures excluded from the total exposure measure
By way of derogation from Article 429(4), an institution may exclude any of the following exposures from its total exposure measure:
(a) the amounts deducted from Common Equity Tier 1 items in accordance with point (d) of Article 36(1);
(b) the assets deducted in the calculation of the capital measure referred to in Article 429(3);
(c) exposures that are assigned a risk weight of 0 % in accordance with Article 113(6) or (7);
(d) where the institution is a public development credit institution, the exposures arising from assets that constitute claims on central governments, regional governments, local authorities or public sector entities in relation to public sector investments and promotional loans;
(e) where the institution is not a public development credit institution, the parts of exposures arising from passing-through promotional loans to other credit institutions;
(f) the guaranteed parts of exposures arising from export credits that meet both of the following conditions:
(i) the guarantee is provided by an eligible provider of unfunded credit protection in accordance with Articles 201 and 202, including by export credit agencies or by central governments;
(ii) a 0 % risk weight applies to the guaranteed part of the exposure in accordance with Article 114(2) or (4) or Article 116(4);
(g) where the institution is a clearing member of a QCCP, the trade exposures of that institution, provided that they are cleared with that QCCP and meet the conditions set out in point (c) of Article 306(1);
(h) where the institution is a higher-level client within a multi-level client structure, the trade exposures to the clearing member or to an entity that serves as a higher-level client to that institution, provided that the conditions set out in Article 305(2) are met and provided that the institution is not obligated to reimburse its client for any losses suffered in the event of default of either the clearing member or the QCCP;
(i) fiduciary assets which meet all the following conditions:
(i) they are recognised on the institution's balance sheet by national generally accepted accounting principles, in accordance with Article 10 of Directive 86/635/EEC;
(ii) they meet the criteria for non-recognition set out in International Financial Reporting Standard (IFRS) 9, as applied in accordance with Regulation (EC) No 1606/2002;
(iii) they meet the criteria for non-consolidation set out in IFRS 10, as applied in accordance with Regulation (EC) No 1606/2002, where applicable;
(j) exposures that meet all the following conditions:
(i) they are exposures to a public sector entity;
(ii) they are treated in accordance with Article 116(4);
(iii) they arise from deposits that the institution is legally obliged to transfer to the public sector entity referred to in point (i) for the purpose of funding general interest investments;
(k) the excess collateral deposited at tri-party agents that has not been lent out;
(l) where under the applicable accounting framework an institution recognises the variation margin paid in cash to its counterparty as a receivable asset, the receivable asset, provided that the conditions set out in points (a) to (e) of Article 429c(3) are met;
(m) the securitised exposures from traditional securitisations that meet the conditions for significant risk transfer set out in Article 244(2);
(n) the following exposures to the institution’s central bank, subject to the conditions set out in paragraphs 5 and 6:
(i) coins and banknotes constituting legal currency in the jurisdiction of the central bank;
(ii) assets representing claims on the central bank, including reserves held at the central bank;
(o) where the institution is authorised in accordance with Article 16 and point (a) of Article 54(2) of Regulation (EU) No 909/2014, the institution's exposures due to banking-type ancillary services listed in point (a) of Section C of the Annex to that Regulation which are directly related to the core or ancillary services listed in Sections A and B of that Annex;
(p) where the institution is designated in accordance with point (b) of Article 54(2) of Regulation (EU) No 909/2014, the institution's exposures due to banking-type ancillary services listed in point (a) of Section C of the Annex to that Regulation which are directly related to the core or ancillary services of a central securities depository, authorised in accordance with Article 16 of that Regulation, listed in Sections A and B of that Annex.
For the purposes of point (m) of the first subparagraph, institutions shall include any retained exposure in the total exposure measure.
For the purposes of points (d) and (e) of paragraph 1, ‘public development credit institution’ means a credit institution that meets all the following conditions:
(a) it has been established by a Member State's central government, regional government or local authority;
(b) its activity is limited to advancing specified objectives of financial, social or economic public policy in accordance with the laws and provisions governing that institution, including articles of association, on a non-competitive basis;
(c) its goal is not to maximise profit or market share;
(d) subject to Union State aid rules, the central government, regional government or local authority has an obligation to protect the credit institution's viability or directly or indirectly guarantees at least 90 % of the credit institution's own funds requirements, funding requirements or promotional loans granted;
(e) it does not take covered deposits as defined in point (5) of Article 2(1) of Directive 2014/49/EU or in national law implementing that Directive that may be classified as fixed term or savings deposits from consumers as defined in point (a) of Article 3 of Directive 2008/48/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council (<sup>23</sup>).
For the purposes of point (b) of the first subparagraph, public policy objectives may include the provision of financing for promotional or development purposes to specified economic sectors or geographical areas of the relevant Member State.
For the purposes of points (d) and (e) of the first subparagraph, and without prejudice to the Union State aid rules and the obligations of the Member States thereunder, competent authorities may, upon request of an institution, treat an organisationally, structurally and financially independent and autonomous unit of that institution as a public development credit institution, provided that the unit fulfils all the conditions listed in the first subparagraph and that such treatment does not affect the effectiveness of the supervision of that institution. Competent authorities shall without delay notify the Commission and EBA of any decision to treat, for the purposes of this subparagraph, a unit of an institution as a public development credit institution. The competent authority shall annually review such decision.
Institutions may exclude the exposures listed in point (n) of paragraph 1 where all of the following conditions are met:
(a) the institution's competent authority has determined, after consultation with the relevant central bank, and publicly declared that exceptional circumstances exist that warrant the exclusion in order to facilitate the implementation of monetary policies;
(b) the exemption is granted for a limited period of time not exceeding one year;
#### (c) the institution’s competent authority has determined, after consultation with the relevant central bank, the date when the exceptional circumstances are deemed to have started and publicly announced that date; that date shall be set at the end of a quarter.
##### The exposures to be excluded under point (n) of paragraph 1 shall meet both of the following conditions:
(a) they are denominated in the same currency as the deposits taken by the institution;
(b) their average maturity does not significantly exceed the average maturity of the deposits taken by the institution.
By way of derogation from point (d) of Article 92(1), where an institution excludes the exposures referred to in point (n) of paragraph 1 of this Article, it shall at all times satisfy the following adjusted leverage ratio requirement for the duration of the exclusion:
where:
Article 429b
Calculation of the exposure value of assets
Institutions shall calculate the exposure value of assets, excluding derivative contracts listed in Annex II, credit derivatives and the positions referred to in Article 429e in accordance with the following principles:
(a) the exposure values of assets means an exposure value as referred to in the first sentence of Article 111(1);
(b) securities financing transactions shall not be netted.
A cash pooling arrangement offered by an institution does not violate the condition set out in point (b) of Article 429(7) only where the arrangement meets both of the following conditions:
(a) the institution offering the cash pooling arrangement transfers the credit and debit balances of several individual accounts of entities of a group included in the arrangement (‘original accounts’) into a separate, single account and thereby sets the balances of the original accounts to zero;
(b) the institution carries out the actions referred to in point (a) of this subparagraph on a daily basis.
For the purposes of this paragraph and paragraph 3, cash pooling arrangement means an arrangement whereby the credit or debit balances of several individual accounts are combined for the purposes of cash or liquidity management.
By way of derogation from paragraph 2 of this Article, a cash pooling arrangement that does not meet the condition set out in point (b) of that paragraph, but meets the condition set out in point (a) of that paragraph, does not violate the condition set out in point (b) of Article 429(7), provided that the arrangement meets all the following conditions:
(a) the institution has a legally enforceable right to set off the balances of the original accounts through the transfer into a single account at any point in time;
(b) there are no maturity mismatches between the balances of the original accounts;
(c) the institution charges or pays interest based on the combined balance of the original accounts;
(d) the competent authority of the institution considers that the frequency by which the balances of all original accounts are transferred is adequate for the purpose of including only the combined balance of the cash pooling arrangement in the total exposure measure.
By way of derogation from point (b) of paragraph 1, institutions may calculate the exposure value of cash receivable and cash payable under securities financing transactions with the same counterparty on a net basis only where all the following conditions are met:
(a) the transactions have the same explicit final settlement date;
(b) the right to set off the amount owed to the counterparty with the amount owed by the counterparty is legally enforceable in all the following situations:
(i) in the normal course of business;
(ii) in the event of default, insolvency and bankruptcy;
(c) the counterparties intend to settle net, settle simultaneously, or the transactions are subject to a settlement mechanism that results in the functional equivalent of net settlement.
For the purposes of point (c) of the first subparagraph, a settlement mechanism results in the functional equivalent of net settlement if, on the settlement date, the net result of the cash flows of the transactions under that mechanism is equal to the single net amount under net settlement.
In accordance with Article 166(9), where a commitment refers to the extension of another commitment, the lower of the two conversion factors associated with the individual commitment shall be used. The exposure value of low risk off- balance sheet items referred to in Article 111(1)(d) shall be subject to a floor equal to 10 % of their nominal value.
An institution that is a clearing member of a QCCP may exclude from the calculation of the exposure measure trade exposures of the following items, provided that those trade exposures are cleared with that QCCP and meet, at the same time, the conditions laid down in Article 306(1)(c):
(a) contracts listed in Annex II;
(b) credit derivatives;
(c) repurchase transactions;
(d) securities or commodities lending or borrowing transactions;
(e) long settlement transactions;
(f) margin lending transactions.
Competent authorities may permit an institution to exclude from the exposure measure exposures that meet all of the following conditions:
(a) they are exposures to a public sector entity;
#### (b) they are treated in accordance with Article 116(4);
##### (c) they arise from deposits that the institution is legally obliged to transfer to the public sector entity referred to in point (a) for the purposes of funding general interest investments.
Article 429a
Exposure value of derivatives
When determining the potential future credit exposure of credit derivatives, institutions shall apply the principles laid down in Article 299(2)(a) to all their credit derivatives, not only those assigned to the trading book.
In determining the exposure value, institutions may take into account the effects of contracts for novation and other netting agreements in accordance with Article 295. Cross-product netting shall not apply. However, institutions may net within the product category referred to in point (25)(c) of Article 272 and credit derivatives when they are subject to a contractual cross-product netting agreement referred to in Article 295(c).
For the purposes of paragraph 1, institutions may deduct variation margin received in cash from the counterparty from the current replacement cost portion of the exposure value in so far as under the applicable accounting framework the variation margin has not already been recognised as a reduction of the exposure value and when all the following conditions are met:
(b) the right to set off the amount owed to the counterparty with the amount owed by the counterparty is legally enforceable in the normal course of business and in the event of default, insolvency and bankruptcy;
(c) the counterparties intend to settle on a net basis or to settle simultaneously, or the transactions are subject to a settlement mechanism that results in the functional equivalent of net settlement.
#### For the purposes of point (c) of paragraph 4, institutions may consider that a settlement mechanism results in the functional equivalent of net settlement only where, on the settlement date, the net result of the cash flows of the transactions under that mechanism is equal to the single net amount under net settlement and all the following conditions are met:
##### (a) the transactions are settled through the same settlement system or settlement systems using a common settlement infrastructure;
(b) the settlement arrangements are supported by cash or intraday credit facilities intended to ensure that the settlement of the transactions will occur by the end of the business day;
(c) any issues arising from the securities legs of the securities financing transactions do not interfere with the completion of the net settlement of the cash receivables and payables.
The condition set out in point (c) of the first subparagraph is met only where the failure of any securities financing transaction in the settlement mechanism may delay settlement of only the matching cash leg or may create an obligation to the settlement mechanism, supported by an associated credit facility.
Where there is a failure of the securities leg of a securities financing transaction in the settlement mechanism at the end of the window for settlement in the settlement mechanism, institutions shall split out this transaction and its matching cash leg from the netting set and treat them on a gross basis.
Article 429c
Calculation of the exposure value of derivatives
When calculating the exposure value, institutions may take into account the effects of contracts for novation and other netting agreements in accordance with Article 295. Institutions shall not take into account cross-product netting, but may net within the product category as referred to in point (25)(c) of Article 272 and credit derivatives where they are subject to a contractual cross-product netting agreement as referred to in point (c) of Article 295.
Institutions shall include in the total exposure measure sold options even where their exposure value can be set to zero in accordance with the treatment laid down in Article 274(5).
For the purposes of paragraph 1 of this Article, institutions calculating the replacement cost of derivative contracts in accordance with Article 275 may recognise only collateral received in cash from their counterparties as the variation margin referred to in Article 275, where the applicable accounting framework has not already recognised the variation margin as a reduction of the exposure value and where all the following conditions are met:
(a) for trades not cleared through a QCCP, the cash received by the recipient counterparty is not segregated;
(b) the variation margin is calculated and exchanged on a daily basis based on mark-to-market valuation of derivatives positions;
(c) the variation margin received in cash is in the same currency as the currency of settlement of the derivative contract;
(d) the variation margin exchanged is the full amount that would be necessary to fully extinguish the mark-to-market exposure of the derivative subject to the threshold and minimum transfer amounts applicable to the counterparty;
(e) the derivative contract and the variation margin between the institution and the counterparty to that contract are covered by a single netting agreement that the institution may treat as risk-reducing in accordance with Article 295.
For the purposes of point (c) of the first subparagraph, where the derivative contract is subject to a qualifying master netting agreement, the currency of settlement means any currency of settlement specified in the derivative contract, the governing qualifying master netting agreement or the credit support annex to the qualifying master netting agreement.
Where under the applicable accounting framework an institution recognises the variation margin paid in cash to the counterparty as a receivable asset, it may exclude that asset from the exposure measure provided that the conditions in points (a) to (e) are met.
For the purposes of paragraph 3 the following shall apply:
(a) the deduction of variation margin received shall be limited to the positive current replacement cost portion of the exposure value;
(b) an institution shall not use variation margin received in cash to reduce the potential future credit exposure amount, including for the purposes of Article 298(1)(c)(ii);
In addition to the treatment laid down in paragraph 1, for written credit derivatives institutions shall include in the exposure value the effective notional amounts referenced by the written credit derivatives reduced by any negative fair value changes that have been incorporated in Tier 1 capital with respect to the written credit derivative. The resulting exposure value may be further reduced by the effective notional amount of a purchased credit derivative on the same reference name provided that all the following conditions are met:
(a) for single name credit derivatives, the credit derivatives purchased must be on a reference name which ranks *pari passu* with or is junior to the underlying reference obligation of the written credit derivative and a credit event on the senior reference asset would result in a credit event on the subordinated asset;
(b) where an institution purchases protection on a pool of reference names, the purchased protection may offset sold protection on a pool of reference names only if the pool of reference entities and the level of subordination in both transactions are identical;
(c) the remaining maturity of the credit derivative purchased is equal to or greater than the remaining maturity of the written credit derivative;
(d) in determining the additional exposure value for written credit derivatives, the notional amount of the purchased credit derivative is reduced by any positive fair value change that has been incorporated in Tier 1 capital with respect to the credit derivative purchased;
(e) for tranched products, the credit derivative purchased as protection is on a reference obligation which ranks equal to the underlying reference obligation of the written credit derivative.
#### Where the notional amount of a written credit derivative is not reduced by the notional amount of a purchased credit derivative, institutions may deduct the individual potential future exposure of that written credit derivative from the total potential future exposure determined according to paragraph 1 of this Article in conjunction with Article 274(2) or Article 299(2)(a) as applicable. In case that the potential future credit exposure shall be determined in conjunction with Article 298(1)(c)(ii), PCEgross may be reduced by the individual potential future exposure of written credit derivatives with no adjustment made to the NGR.
##### When institutions apply the method set out in Article 275, they shall not reduce the exposure measure by the amount of variation margin received in cash.
Article 429b
Counterparty credit risk add-on for repurchase transactions, securities or commodities lending or borrowing transactions, long settlement transactions and margin lending transactions
For the purposes of paragraph 1, for transactions with a counterparty which are not subject to a master netting agreement that meets the conditions laid down in Article 206 the add-on (Ei*)shall be determined on a transaction-by-transaction basis in accordance with the following formula:
(b) the variation margin is calculated and exchanged at least daily based on a mark-to-market valuation of derivatives positions;
(c) the variation margin received is in a currency specified in the derivative contract, governing master netting agreement, credit support annex to the qualifying master netting agreement or as defined by any netting agreement with a QCCP;
#### (d) the variation margin received is the full amount that would be necessary to extinguish the mark-to-market exposure of the derivative contract subject to the threshold and minimum transfer amounts that are applicable to the counterparty;
##### (e) the derivative contract and the variation margin between the institution and the counterparty to that contract are covered by a single netting agreement that the institution may treat as risk-reducing in accordance with Article 295.
Where an institution provides cash collateral to a counterparty and that collateral meets the conditions set out in points (a) to (e) of the first subparagraph, the institution shall consider that collateral as the variation margin posted with the counterparty and shall include it in the calculation of the replacement cost.
For the purposes of point (b) of the first subparagraph, an institution shall be considered to have met the condition set out therein where the variation margin is exchanged on the morning of the trading day following the trading day on which the derivative contract was stipulated, provided that the exchange is based on the value of the contract at the end of the trading day on which the contract was stipulated.
For the purposes of point (d) of the first subparagraph, where a margin dispute arises, institutions may recognise the amount of non-disputed collateral that has been exchanged.
Where institutions apply one of the methods referred to in the first subparagraph, they shall not reduce the total exposure measure by the amount of margin they have received.
Article 429d
Additional provisions on the calculation of the exposure value of written credit derivatives
Institutions shall calculate the effective notional amount of written credit derivatives by adjusting the notional amount of those derivatives to reflect the true exposure of the contracts that are leveraged or otherwise enhanced by the structure of the transaction.
Institutions may fully or partly reduce the exposure value calculated in accordance with paragraph 2 by the effective notional amount of purchased credit derivatives, provided that all the following conditions are met:
#### (a) the remaining maturity of the purchased credit derivative is equal to or greater than the remaining maturity of the written credit derivative;
##### (b) the purchased credit derivative is otherwise subject to the same or more conservative material terms as those in the corresponding written credit derivative;
(c) the purchased credit derivative is not purchased from a counterparty that would expose the institution to Specific Wrong-Way risk, as defined in point (b) of Article 291(1);
(d) where the effective notional amount of the written credit derivative is reduced by any negative change in fair value incorporated in the institution's Tier 1 capital, the effective notional amount of the purchased credit derivative is reduced by any positive fair value change that has been incorporated in Tier 1 capital;
(e) the purchased credit derivative is not included in a transaction that has been cleared by the institution on behalf of a client or that has been cleared by the institution in its role as a higher-level client in a multi-level client structure and for which the effective notional amount referenced by the corresponding written credit derivative is excluded from the total exposure measure in accordance with point (g) or (h) of the first subparagraph of Article 429a(1), as applicable.
For the purpose of calculating the potential future exposure in accordance with Article 429c(1), institutions may exclude from the netting set the portion of a written credit derivative which is not offset in accordance with the first subparagraph of this paragraph and for which the effective notional amount is included in the total exposure measure.
Article 429e
Counterparty credit risk add-on for securities financing transactions
Institutions shall calculate the add-on for transactions with a counterparty that are not subject to a master netting agreement that meets the conditions set out in Article 206 on a transaction-by-transaction basis in accordance with the following formula:
where:
For the purposes of paragraph 1, for transactions with a counterparty that are subject to a master netting agreement that meets the conditions laid down in Article 206, the add-on for those transactions (Ei*) shall be determined on an agreement-by-agreement basis in accordance with the following formula:
where:
Where an institution acts as an agent between two parties in repurchase transactions, securities or commodities lending or borrowing transactions, long settlement transactions and margin lending transactions including those that are off-balance sheet, the following apply:
(a) where the institution provides an indemnity or guarantee to a customer or counterparty limited to any difference between the value of the security or cash the customer has lent and the value of collateral the borrower has provided it shall only include in the exposure measure the add-on determined in accordance with paragraph 2 or 3, as applicable;
## (b) where the institution does not provide an indemnity or guarantee to any of the involved parties, the transaction shall not be included in the exposure measure;
### (c) where the institution is economically exposed to the underlying security or cash in the transaction beyond the exposure covered by the add-on, it shall include also in the exposure measure an exposure equal to the full amount of the security or cash.
#### PART SEVEN A
##### **REPORTING REQUIREMENTS**
Institutions may set
equal to zero where Ei is the cash lent to a counterparty and the associated cash receivable is not eligible for the netting treatment set out in Article 429b(4).
Institutions shall calculate the add-on for transactions with a counterparty that are subject to a master netting agreement that meets the conditions set out in Article 206 on an agreement-by-agreement basis in accordance with the following formula:
#### where:
##### Where an institution acts as an agent between two parties in a securities financing transaction, including an off-balance-sheet transaction, the following provisions shall apply to the calculation of the institution's total exposure measure:
(a) where the institution provides an indemnity or guarantee to one of the parties in the securities financing transaction and the indemnity or guarantee is limited to any difference between the value of the security or cash the party has lent and the value of collateral the borrower has provided, the institution shall only include the add-on calculated in accordance with paragraph 2 or 3, as applicable, in the total exposure measure;
#### (b) where the institution does not provide an indemnity or guarantee to any of the involved parties, the transaction shall not be included in the total exposure measure;
##### (c) where the institution is economically exposed to the underlying security or the cash in the transaction to an amount greater than the exposure covered by the add-on, it shall include in the total exposure measure also the full amount of the security or the cash to which it is exposed;
(d) where the institution acting as agent provides an indemnity or guarantee to both parties involved in a securities financing transaction, the institution shall calculate its total exposure measure in accordance with points (a), (b) and (c) separately for each party involved in the transaction.
Article 429f
Calculation of the exposure value of off-balance-sheet items
## Where a commitment refers to the extension of another commitment, Article 166(9) shall apply.
### Article 429g
#### Calculation of the exposure value of regular-way purchases and sales awaiting settlement
##### Institutions may offset the full nominal value of the commitments to pay related to regular-way purchases by the full nominal value of cash receivables related to regular-way sales awaiting settlement only where both of the following conditions are met:
(a) both the regular-way purchases and sales are settled on a delivery-versus-payment basis;
(b) the financial assets bought and sold that are associated with cash payables and receivables are fair valued through profit and loss and included in the institution's trading book.
PART SEVEN A
**REPORTING REQUIREMENTS**
Article 430
Reporting on prudential requirements and financial information
Institutions shall also submit to the competent authorities the information required for the purposes of the preparation of the reports referred to in Article 511.
Competent authorities shall submit the information received from institutions to EBA upon its request to facilitate the review referred to in Article 511.
EBA shall submit those draft implementing technical standards to the Commission by 28 July 2013.
Power is conferred on the Commission to adopt the implementing technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Article 15 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
Institutions shall report to their competent authorities on:
(a) own funds requirements, including the leverage ratio, as set out in Article 92 and Part Seven;
(b) the requirements laid down in Articles 92a and 92b, for institutions that are subject to those requirements;
(c) large exposures as set out in Article 394;
(d) liquidity requirements as set out in Article 415;
(e) the aggregate data for each national immovable property market as set out in Article 430a(1);
(f) the requirements and guidance set out in Directive 2013/36/EU qualified for standardised reporting, except for any additional reporting requirement under point (j) of Article 104(1) of that Directive;
(g) the level of asset encumbrance, including a breakdown by the type of asset encumbrance, such as repurchase agreements, securities lending, securitised exposures or loans.
Institutions exempted in accordance with Article 6(5) shall not be subject to the reporting requirement on the leverage ratio set out in point (a) of the first subparagraph of this paragraph on an individual basis.
In addition to the reporting on prudential requirements referred to in paragraph 1 of this Article, institutions shall report financial information to their competent authorities where they are one of the following:
(a) an institution that is subject to Article 4 of Regulation (EC) No 1606/2002;
(b) a credit institution that prepares its consolidated accounts in accordance with the international accounting standards pursuant to point (b) of Article 5 of Regulation (EC) No 1606/2002.
Any new reporting requirements set out in such implementing technical standards shall not be applicable earlier than six months from the date of their entry into force.
@@ -11614,7 +13042,7 @@
Power is conferred on the Commission to adopt the implementing technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Article 15 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
EBA shall assess the costs and benefits of the reporting requirements laid down in Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) No 680/2014 (<sup>21</sup>) in accordance with this paragraph and report its findings to the Commission by 28 June 2020. That assessment shall be carried out in particular in relation to small and non-complex institutions. For those purposes, the report shall:
EBA shall assess the costs and benefits of the reporting requirements laid down in Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) No 680/2014 (<sup>24</sup>) in accordance with this paragraph and report its findings to the Commission by 28 June 2020. That assessment shall be carried out in particular in relation to small and non-complex institutions. For those purposes, the report shall:
(a) classify institutions into categories based on their size, complexity and the nature and level of risk of their activities;
@@ -11627,417 +13055,542 @@
(d) assess the effects of a reduction of reporting requirement on costs and supervisory effectiveness; and
#### (e) make recommendations on how to reduce reporting requirements at least for small and non-complex institutions, to which end EBA shall target an expected average cost reduction of at least 10 % but ideally a 20 % cost reduction. EBA shall, in particular, assess whether:
(e) make recommendations on how to reduce reporting requirements at least for small and non-complex institutions, to which end EBA shall target an expected average cost reduction of at least 10 % but ideally a 20 % cost reduction. EBA shall, in particular, assess whether:
(i) the reporting requirements referred to in point (g) of paragraph 1 could be waived for small and non-complex institutions where asset encumbrance was below a certain threshold;
(ii) the reporting frequency required in accordance with points (a), (c), and (g) of paragraph 1 could be reduced for small and non-complex institutions.
##### EBA shall accompany that report by draft implementing technical standards referred to in paragraph 7.
Article 430b
EBA shall accompany that report by draft implementing technical standards referred to in paragraph 7.
Competent authorities shall consult EBA on whether institutions, other than those referred to in paragraphs 3 and 4, should report on financial information on a consolidated basis in accordance with paragraph 3, provided that all the following conditions are met:
#### (a) the relevant institutions are not already reporting on a consolidated basis;
##### (b) the relevant institutions are subject to an accounting framework in accordance with Directive 86/635/EEC;
(c) financial reporting is considered necessary to provide a comprehensive view of the risk profile of those institutions' activities and of the systemic risks they pose to the financial sector or the real economy as set out in Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
EBA shall develop draft implementing technical standards to specify the formats and templates that institutions referred to in the first subparagraph shall use for the purposes set out therein.
Power is conferred on the Commission to adopt the implementing technical standards referred to in the second subparagraph in accordance with Article 15 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
Competent authorities, resolution authorities and designated authorities shall make use of data exchange wherever possible to reduce reporting requirements. The provisions on the exchange of information and professional secrecy as laid down in Section II of Chapter I of Title VII of Directive 2013/36/EU shall apply.
Article 430a
Specific reporting obligations
Institutions shall report to their competent authorities on an annual basis the following aggregate data for each national immovable property market to which they are exposed:
#### (a) losses stemming from exposures for which an institution has recognised residential property as collateral, up to the lower of the pledged amount and 80 % of the market value or 80 % of the mortgage lending value, unless otherwise decided under Article 124(2);
##### (b) overall losses stemming from exposures for which an institution has recognised residential property as collateral, up to the part of the exposure treated as fully secured by residential property in accordance with Article 124(1);
(c) the exposure value of all outstanding exposures for which an institution has recognised residential property as collateral limited to the part treated as fully secured by residential property in accordance with Article 124(1);
(d) losses stemming from exposures for which an institution has recognised immovable commercial property as collateral, up to the lower of the pledged amount and 50 % of the market value or 60 % of the mortgage lending value, unless otherwise decided under Article 124(2);
(e) overall losses stemming from exposures for which an institution has recognised immovable commercial property as collateral, up to the part of the exposure treated as fully secured by immovable commercial property in accordance with Article 124(1);
#### (f) the exposure value of all outstanding exposures for which an institution has recognised immovable commercial property as collateral limited to the part treated as fully secured by immovable commercial property in accordance with Article 124(1).
##### Article 430b
Specific reporting requirements for market risk
Any new reporting requirements set out in such implementing technical standards shall not be applicable earlier than six months from the date of their entry into force.
#### EBA shall submit those draft implementing technical standards to the Commission by 30 June 2020.
##### Power is conferred on the Commission to adopt the implementing technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Article 15 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
EBA shall submit those draft implementing technical standards to the Commission by 30 June 2020.
Power is conferred on the Commission to adopt the implementing technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Article 15 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
Article 430c
Feasibility report on the integrated reporting system
When drafting the feasibility report, EBA shall involve competent authorities, as well as authorities that are responsible for deposit guarantee schemes, resolution and in particular the ESCB. The report shall take into account the previous work of the ESCB regarding integrated data collections and shall be based on an overall cost and benefit analysis including as a minimum:
(a) an overview of the quantity and scope of the current data collected by the competent authorities in their jurisdiction and of its origins and granularity;
(b) the establishment of a standard dictionary of the data to be collected, in order to increase the convergence of reporting requirements as regards regular reporting obligations, and to avoid unnecessary queries;
## (c) the establishment of a joint committee, including as a minimum EBA and the ESCB, for the development and implementation of the integrated reporting system;
### (d) the feasibility and possible design of a central data collection point for the integrated reporting system, including requirements to ensure strict confidentiality of the data collected, strong authentication and management of access rights to the system and cybersecurity, which:
## Feasibility report on the integrated reporting system
### When drafting the feasibility report, EBA shall involve competent authorities, as well as authorities that are responsible for deposit guarantee schemes, resolution and in particular the ESCB. The report shall take into account the previous work of the ESCB regarding integrated data collections and shall be based on an overall cost and benefit analysis including as a minimum:
## (a) an overview of the quantity and scope of the current data collected by the competent authorities in their jurisdiction and of its origins and granularity;
### (b) the establishment of a standard dictionary of the data to be collected, in order to increase the convergence of reporting requirements as regards regular reporting obligations, and to avoid unnecessary queries;
#### (c) the establishment of a joint committee, including as a minimum EBA and the ESCB, for the development and implementation of the integrated reporting system;
##### (d) the feasibility and possible design of a central data collection point for the integrated reporting system, including requirements to ensure strict confidentiality of the data collected, strong authentication and management of access rights to the system and cybersecurity, which:
(i) contains a central data register with all statistical data, resolution data and prudential data in the necessary granularity and frequency for the particular institution and is updated at necessary intervals;
(ii) serves as a point of contact for the competent authorities, where they receive, process and pool all data queries, where queries can be matched with existing collected reported data and which allows the competent authorities quick access to the requested information;
(iii) provides additional support to the competent authorities for the transmission of data queries to the institutions and enters the requested data into the central data register;
(iv) holds a coordinating role for the exchange of information and data between competent authorities; and
(v) takes into account the proceedings and processes of competent authorities and transfers them into a standardised system.
## PART EIGHT
### DISCLOSURE BY INSTITUTIONS
PART EIGHT
**DISCLOSURE BY INSTITUTIONS**
#### TITLE I
##### GENERAL PRINCIPLES
Article 431
#### Scope of disclosure requirements
##### Where those disclosures do not convey the risk profile comprehensively to market participants, institutions shall publicly disclose the information necessary in addition to that required in accordance with paragraph 1. However, they shall only be required to disclose information which is material and not proprietary or confidential in accordance with Article 432.
Article 432
Non-material, proprietary or confidential information
Information in disclosures shall be regarded as material where its omission or misstatement could change or influence the assessment or decision of a user of that information relying on it for the purpose of making economic decisions.
##### **GENERAL PRINCIPLES**
Article 431
Disclosure requirements and policies
Information to be disclosed in accordance with this Part shall be subject to the same level of internal verification as that applicable to the management report included in the institution's financial report.
Institutions shall also have policies in place to verify that their disclosures convey their risk profile comprehensively to market participants. Where institutions find that the disclosures required under this Part do not convey the risk profile comprehensively to market participants, they shall publicly disclose information in addition to the information required to be disclosed under this Part. Nonetheless, institutions shall only be required to disclose information that is material and not proprietary or confidential as referred to in Article 432.
Article 432
#### Non-material, proprietary or confidential information
##### Information in disclosures shall be regarded as material where its omission or misstatement could change or influence the assessment or decision of a user of that information relying on it for the purpose of making economic decisions.
EBA shall issue guidelines, in accordance with Article 16 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010, on how institutions have to apply materiality in relation to the disclosure requirements of Titles II and III.
Information shall be regarded as proprietary to institutions where disclosing it publicly would undermine their competitive position. Proprietary information may include information on products or systems that would render the investments of institutions therein less valuable, if shared with competitors.
#### Information shall be regarded as confidential where the institutions are obliged by customers or other counterparty relationships to keep that information confidential.
##### EBA shall issue guidelines, in accordance with Article 16 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010, on how institutions have to apply proprietary and confidentiality in relation to the disclosure requirements of Titles II and III.
Article 433
Frequency of disclosure
Institutions shall publish the disclosures required by this Part at least on an annual basis.
Annual disclosures shall be published in conjunction with the date of publication of the financial statements.
#### Institutions shall assess the need to publish some or all disclosures more frequently than annually in the light of the relevant characteristics of their business such as scale of operations, range of activities, presence in different countries, involvement in different financial sectors, and participation in international financial markets and payment, settlement and clearing systems. That assessment shall pay particular attention to the possible need for more frequent disclosure of items of information laid down in Article 437, and points (c) to (f) of Article 438, and information on risk exposure and other items prone to rapid change.
##### EBA shall, in accordance with Article 16 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010, issue guidelines by 31 December 2014 on institutions assessing more frequent disclosures of Titles II and III.
#### Article 434
##### Means of disclosures
Information shall be regarded as confidential where the institutions are obliged by customers or other counterparty relationships to keep that information confidential.
EBA shall issue guidelines, in accordance with Article 16 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010, on how institutions have to apply proprietary and confidentiality in relation to the disclosure requirements of Titles II and III.
#### Article 433
##### Frequency and scope of disclosures
Institutions shall publish the disclosures required under Titles II and III in the manner set out in Articles 433a, 433b and 433c.
Annual disclosures shall be published on the same date as the date on which institutions publish their financial statements or as soon as possible thereafter.
Semi-annual and quarterly disclosures shall be published on the same date as the date on which the institutions publish their financial reports for the corresponding period where applicable or as soon as possible thereafter.
Any delay between the date of publication of the disclosures required under this Part and the relevant financial statements shall be reasonable and, in any event, shall not exceed the timeframe set by competent authorities pursuant to Article 106 of Directive 2013/36/EU.
Article 433a
Disclosures by large institutions
Large institutions shall disclose the information outlined below with the following frequency:
#### (a) all the information required under this Part on an annual basis;
##### (b) on a semi-annual basis the information referred to in:
(i) point (a) of Article 437;
(ii) point (e) of Article 438;
(iii) points (e) to (l) of Article 439;
(iv) Article 440;
(v) points (c), (e), (f) and (g) of Article 442;
(vi) point (e) of Article 444;
(vii) Article 445;
(viii) point (a) and (b) of Article 448(1);
(ix) point (j) to (l) of Article 449;
(x) points (a) and (b) of Article 451(1);
(xi) Article 451a(3);
(xii) point (g) of Article 452;
(xiii) points (f) to (j) of Article 453;
(xiv) points (d), (e) and (g) of Article 455;
(c) on a quarterly basis the information referred to in:
(i) points (d) and (h) of Article 438;
(ii) the key metrics referred to in Article 447;
(iii) Article 451a(2).
By way of derogation from paragraph 1, large institutions other than G-SIIs that are non-listed institutions shall disclose the information outlined below with the following frequency:
(a) all the information required under this Part on an annual basis;
#### (b) the key metrics referred to in Article 447 on a semi-annual basis.
##### Article 433b
Disclosures by small and non-complex institutions
Small and non-complex institutions shall disclose the information outlined below with the following frequency:
(a) on an annual basis the information referred to in:
(i) points (a), (e) and (f) of Article 435(1);
(ii) point (d) of Article 438;
(iii) points (a) to (d), (h), (i), (j) of Article 450(1);
(b) on a semi-annual basis the key metrics referred to in Article 447.
Article 433c
Disclosures by other institutions
Institutions that are not subject to Article 433a or 433b shall disclose the information outlined below with the following frequency:
(a) all the information required under this Part on an annual basis;
(b) the key metrics referred to in Article 447 on a semi-annual basis.
By way of derogation from paragraph 1 of this Article, other institutions that are non-listed institutions shall disclose the following information on an annual basis:
#### (a) points (a), (e) and (f) of Article 435(1);
##### (b) points (a, (b) and (c) of Article 435(2);
#### (c) point (a) of Article 437;
##### (d) points (c) and (d) of Article 438;
(e) the key metrics referred to in Article 447;
(f) points (a) to (d), (h) to (k) of Article 450(1).
Article 434
Means of disclosures
Article 434a
Uniform disclosure formats
EBA shall develop draft implementing technical standards specifying uniform disclosure formats, and associated instructions in accordance with which the disclosures required under Titles II and III shall be made.
Those uniform disclosure formats shall convey sufficiently comprehensive and comparable information for users of that information to assess the risk profiles of institutions and their degree of compliance with the requirements laid down in Parts One to Seven. To facilitate the comparability of information, the implementing technical standards shall seek to maintain consistency of disclosure formats with international standards on disclosures.
Uniform disclosure formats shall be tabular where appropriate.
## EBA shall submit those draft implementing technical standards to the Commission by 28 June 2020.
### Power is conferred on the Commission to adopt those implementing technical standards in accordance with Article 15 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
#### TITLE II
##### TECHNICAL CRITERIA ON TRANSPARENCY AND DISCLOSURE
Article 435
Risk management objectives and policies
Institutions shall disclose their risk management objectives and policies for each separate category of risk, including the risks referred to under this Title. These disclosures shall include:
(a) the strategies and processes to manage those risks;
(b) the structure and organisation of the relevant risk management function including information on its authority and statute, or other appropriate arrangements;
## Uniform disclosure formats
### EBA shall develop draft implementing technical standards specifying uniform disclosure formats, and associated instructions in accordance with which the disclosures required under Titles II and III shall be made.
#### Those uniform disclosure formats shall convey sufficiently comprehensive and comparable information for users of that information to assess the risk profiles of institutions and their degree of compliance with the requirements laid down in Parts One to Seven. To facilitate the comparability of information, the implementing technical standards shall seek to maintain consistency of disclosure formats with international standards on disclosures.
##### Uniform disclosure formats shall be tabular where appropriate.
EBA shall submit those draft implementing technical standards to the Commission by 28 June 2020.
Power is conferred on the Commission to adopt those implementing technical standards in accordance with Article 15 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
TITLE II
**TECHNICAL CRITERIA ON TRANSPARENCY AND DISCLOSURE**
Article 435
Disclosure of risk management objectives and policies
Institutions shall disclose their risk management objectives and policies for each separate category of risk, including the risks referred to in this Title. Those disclosures shall include:
(a) the strategies and processes to manage those categories of risks;
(b) the structure and organisation of the relevant risk management function including information on the basis of its authority, its powers and accountability in accordance with the institution's incorporation and governing documents;
(c) the scope and nature of risk reporting and measurement systems;
(d) the policies for hedging and mitigating risk, and the strategies and processes for monitoring the continuing effectiveness of hedges and mitigants;
(e) a declaration approved by the management body on the adequacy of risk management arrangements of the institution providing assurance that the risk management systems put in place are adequate with regard to the institution's profile and strategy;
(f) a concise risk statement approved by the management body succinctly describing the institution's overall risk profile associated with the business strategy. This statement shall include key ratios and figures providing external stakeholders with a comprehensive view of the institution's management of risk, including how the risk profile of the institution interacts with the risk tolerance set by the management body.
Institutions shall disclose the following information, including regular, at least annual updates, regarding governance arrangements:
(a) the number of directorships held by members of the management body;
(e) a declaration approved by the management body on the adequacy of the risk management arrangements of the relevant institution providing assurance that the risk management systems put in place are adequate with regard to the institution's profile and strategy;
(f) a concise risk statement approved by the management body succinctly describing the relevant institution's overall risk profile associated with the business strategy; that statement shall include:
(i) key ratios and figures providing external stakeholders a comprehensive view of the institution's management of risk, including how the risk profile of the institution interacts with the risk tolerance set by the management body;
(ii) information on intragroup transactions and transactions with related parties that may have a material impact of the risk profile of the consolidated group.
#### Institutions shall disclose the following information regarding governance arrangements:
##### (a) the number of directorships held by members of the management body;
(b) the recruitment policy for the selection of members of the management body and their actual knowledge, skills and expertise;
(c) the policy on diversity with regard to selection of members of the management body, its objectives and any relevant targets set out in that policy, and the extent to which these objectives and targets have been achieved;
#### (d) whether or not the institution has set up a separate risk committee and the number of times the risk committee has met;
##### (e) the description of the information flow on risk to the management body.
Article 436
Scope of application
Institutions shall disclose the following information regarding the scope of application of the requirements of this Regulation in accordance with Directive 2013/36/EU:
(a) the name of the institution to which the requirements of this Regulation apply;
(b) an outline of the differences in the basis of consolidation for accounting and prudential purposes, with a brief description of the entities therein, explaining whether they are:
(i) fully consolidated;
(ii) proportionally consolidated;
(iii) deducted from own funds;
(iv) neither consolidated nor deducted;
(c) any current or foreseen material practical or legal impediment to the prompt transfer of own funds or repayment of liabilities among the parent undertaking and its subsidiaries;
#### (d) the aggregate amount by which the actual own funds are less than required in all subsidiaries not included in the consolidation, and the name or names of such subsidiaries;
##### (e) if applicable, the circumstance of making use of the provisions laid down in Articles 7 and 9.
Article 437
Own funds
(c) the policy on diversity with regard to selection of members of the management body, its objectives and any relevant targets set out in that policy, and the extent to which those objectives and targets have been achieved;
(d) whether or not the institution has set up a separate risk committee and the number of times the risk committee has met;
(e) the description of the information flow on risk to the management body.
Article 436
Disclosure of the scope of application
Institutions shall disclose the following information regarding the scope of application of this Regulation as follows:
(a) the name of the institution to which this Regulation applies;
(b) a reconciliation between the consolidated financial statements prepared in accordance with the applicable accounting framework and the consolidated financial statements prepared in accordance with the requirements on regulatory consolidation pursuant to Sections 2 and 3 of Title II of Part One; that reconciliation shall outline the differences between the accounting and regulatory scopes of consolidation and the legal entities included within the regulatory scope of consolidation where it differs from the accounting scope of consolidation; the outline of the legal entities included within the regulatory scope of consolidation shall describe the method of regulatory consolidation where it is different from the accounting consolidation method, whether those entities are fully or proportionally consolidated and whether the holdings in those legal entities are deducted from own funds;
#### (c) a breakdown of assets and liabilities of the consolidated financial statements prepared in accordance with the requirements on regulatory consolidation pursuant to Sections 2 and 3 of Title II of Part One, broken down by type of risks as referred to under this Part;
##### (d) a reconciliation identifying the main sources of differences between the carrying value amounts in the financial statements under the regulatory scope of consolidation as defined in Sections 2 and 3 of Title II of Part One, and the exposure amount used for regulatory purposes; that reconciliation shall be supplemented by qualitative information on those main sources of differences;
(e) for exposures from the trading book and the non-trading book that are adjusted in accordance with Article 34 and Article 105, a breakdown of the amounts of the constituent elements of an institution's prudent valuation adjustment, by type of risks, and the total of constituent elements separately for the trading book and non-trading book positions;
(f) any current or expected material practical or legal impediment to the prompt transfer of own funds or to the repayment of liabilities between the parent undertaking and its subsidiaries;
(g) the aggregate amount by which the actual own funds are less than required in all subsidiaries that are not included in the consolidation, and the name or names of those subsidiaries;
(h) where applicable, the circumstances under which use is made of the derogation referred to in Article 7 or the individual consolidation method laid down in Article 9.
Article 437
Disclosure of own funds
Institutions shall disclose the following information regarding their own funds:
(a) a full reconciliation of Common Equity Tier 1 items, Additional Tier 1 items, Tier 2 items and filters and deductions applied pursuant to Articles 32 to 35, 36, 56, 66 and 79 to own funds of the institution and the balance sheet in the audited financial statements of the institution;
(b) a description of the main features of the Common Equity Tier 1 and Additional Tier 1 instruments and Tier 2 instruments issued by the institution;
(c) the full terms and conditions of all Common Equity Tier 1, Additional Tier 1 and Tier 2 instruments;
(d) separate disclosure of the nature and amounts of the following:
(i) each prudential filter applied pursuant to Articles 32 to 35;
(ii) each deduction made pursuant to Articles 36, 56 and 66;
(iii) items not deducted in accordance with Articles 47, 48, 56, 66 and 79;
#### (a) a full reconciliation of Common Equity Tier 1 items, Additional Tier 1 items, Tier 2 items and the filters and deductions applied to own funds of the institution pursuant to Articles 32 to 36, 56, 66 and 79 with the balance sheet in the audited financial statements of the institution;
##### (b) a description of the main features of the Common Equity Tier 1 and Additional Tier 1 instruments and Tier 2 instruments issued by the institution;
(c) the full terms and conditions of all Common Equity Tier 1, Additional Tier 1 and Tier 2 instruments;
(d) a separate disclosure of the nature and amounts of the following:
(i) each prudential filter applied pursuant to Articles 32 to 35;
(ii) items deducted pursuant to Articles 36, 56 and 66;
(iii) items not deducted pursuant to Articles 47, 48, 56, 66 and 79;
(e) a description of all restrictions applied to the calculation of own funds in accordance with this Regulation and the instruments, prudential filters and deductions to which those restrictions apply;
(f) where institutions disclose capital ratios calculated using elements of own funds determined on a basis other than that laid down in this Regulation, a comprehensive explanation of the basis on which those capital ratios are calculated.
#### EBA shall submit those draft implementing technical standards to the Commission by 28 July 2013.
##### Power is conferred on the Commission to adopt the implementing technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Article 15 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
Article 438
Capital requirements
Institutions shall disclose the following information regarding the compliance by the institution with the requirements laid down in Article 92 of this Regulation and in Article 73 of Directive 2013/36/EU:
(a) a summary of the institution's approach to assessing the adequacy of its internal capital to support current and future activities;
(b) upon demand from the relevant competent authority, the result of the institution's internal capital adequacy assessment process including the composition of the additional own funds requirements based on the supervisory review process as referred to in point (a) of Article 104(1) of Directive 2013/36/EU;
(c) for institutions calculating the risk-weighted exposure amounts in accordance with Chapter 2 of Part Three, Title II, 8 % of the risk-weighted exposure amounts for each of the exposure classes specified in Article 112;
(d) for institutions calculating risk-weighted exposure amounts in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part Three, Title II, 8 % of the risk-weighted exposure amounts for each of the exposure classes specified in Article 147. For the retail exposure class, this requirement applies to each of the categories of exposures to which the different correlations in Article 154(1) to (4) correspond. For the equity exposure class, this requirement applies to:
(i) each of the approaches provided in Article 155;
(ii) exchange traded exposures, private equity exposures in sufficiently diversified portfolios, and other exposures;
(iii) exposures subject to supervisory transition regarding own funds requirements;
(iv) exposures subject to grandfathering provisions regarding own funds requirements;
(e) own funds requirements calculated in accordance with points (b) and (c) of Article 92(3);
#### (f) own funds requirements calculated in accordance with Part Three, Title III, Chapters 2, 3 and 4 and disclosed separately.
##### The institutions calculating the risk-weighted exposure amounts in accordance with Article 153(5) or Article 155(2) shall disclose the exposures assigned to each category in Table 1 of Article 153(5), or to each risk weight mentioned in Article 155(2).
Article 439
Exposure to counterparty credit risk
Institutions shall disclose the following information regarding the institution's exposure to counterparty credit risk as referred to in Part Three, Title II, Chapter 6:
(a) a discussion of the methodology used to assign internal capital and credit limits for counterparty credit exposures;
(b) a discussion of policies for securing collateral and establishing credit reserves;
(c) a discussion of policies with respect to Wrong-Way risk exposures;
(d) a discussion of the impact of the amount of collateral the institution would have to provide given a downgrade in its credit rating;
(e) gross positive fair value of contracts, netting benefits, netted current credit exposure, collateral held and net derivatives credit exposure. Net derivatives credit exposure is the credit exposure on derivatives transactions after considering both the benefits from legally enforceable netting agreements and collateral arrangements;
(f) measures for exposure value under the methods set out in Part Three, Title II, Chapter 6, Sections 3 to 6 whichever method is applicable;
(g) the notional value of credit derivative hedges, and the distribution of current credit exposure by types of credit exposure;
#### (h) the notional amounts of credit derivative transactions, segregated between use for the institution's own credit portfolio, as well as in its intermediation activities, including the distribution of the credit derivatives products used, broken down further by protection bought and sold within each product group;
##### (i) the estimate of α if the institution has received the permission of the competent authorities to estimate α.
Article 440
Capital buffers
An institution shall disclose the following information in relation to its compliance with the requirement for a countercyclical capital buffer referred to in Title VII, Chapter 4 of Directive 2013/36/EU:
(a) the geographical distribution of its credit exposures relevant for the calculation of its countercyclical capital buffer;
(b) the amount of its institution specific countercyclical capital buffer.
#### EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 31 December 2014.
##### Power is delegated to the Commission to adopt the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
Article 441
Indicators of global systemic importance
#### EBA shall submit those draft implementing technical standards to the Commission by 1 July 2014.
##### Power is conferred on the Commission to adopt the implementing technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Article 15 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
Article 442
Credit risk adjustments
Institutions shall disclose the following information regarding the institution's exposure to credit risk and dilution risk:
(a) the definitions for accounting purposes of ‘past due’ and ‘impaired’;
(b) a description of the approaches and methods adopted for determining specific and general credit risk adjustments;
(c) the total amount of exposures after accounting offsets and without taking into account the effects of credit risk mitigation, and the average amount of the exposures over the period broken down by different types of exposure classes;
(d) the geographic distribution of the exposures, broken down in significant areas by material exposure classes, and further detailed if appropriate;
(e) the distribution of the exposures by industry or counterparty type, broken down by exposure classes, including specifying exposure to SMEs, and further detailed if appropriate;
(f) the residual maturity breakdown of all the exposures, broken down by exposure classes, and further detailed if appropriate;
(g) by significant industry or counterparty type, the amount of:
(i) impaired exposures and past due exposures, provided separately;
(ii) specific and general credit risk adjustments;
(iii) charges for specific and general credit risk adjustments during the reporting period;
(h) the amount of the impaired exposures and past due exposures, provided separately, broken down by significant geographical areas including, if practical, the amounts of specific and general credit risk adjustments related to each geographical area;
#### (i) the reconciliation of changes in the specific and general credit risk adjustments for impaired exposures, shown separately. The information shall comprise:
(i) a description of the type of specific and general credit risk adjustments;
(ii) the opening balances;
(iii) the amounts taken against the credit risk adjustments during the reporting period;
(iv) the amounts set aside or reversed for estimated probable losses on exposures during the reporting period, any other adjustments including those determined by exchange rate differences, business combinations, acquisitions and disposals of subsidiaries, and transfers between credit risk adjustments;
(v) the closing balances.
##### Specific credit risk adjustments and recoveries recorded directly to the income statement shall be disclosed separately.
Article 443
Unencumbered assets
EBA shall issue guidelines specifying the disclosure of unencumbered assets, taking into account Recommendation ESRB/2012/2 of the European Systemic Risk Board of 20 December 2012 on funding of credit institutions (<sup>22</sup>) and in particular Recommendation D — Market transparency on asset encumbrance, by 30 June 2014. Those guidelines shall be adopted in accordance with Article 16 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
EBA shall develop draft regulatory technical standards to specify disclosure of the balance sheet value per exposure class broken down by asset quality and the total amount of the balance sheet value that is unencumbered, taking into account Recommendation ESRB/2012/2 and conditional on EBA considering in its report that such additional disclosure offers reliable and meaningful information.
#### EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 1 January 2016.
##### Power is delegated to the Commission to adopt the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
Article 444
Use of ECAIs
For institutions calculating the risk-weighted exposure amounts in accordance with Part Three, Title II, Chapter 2, the following information shall be disclosed for each of the exposure classes specified in Article 112:
(a) the names of the nominated ECAIs and ECAs and the reasons for any changes;
(f) a comprehensive explanation of the basis on which capital ratios are calculated where those capital ratios are calculated by using elements of own funds determined on a basis other than the basis laid down in this Regulation.
Article 437a
#### Disclosure of own funds and eligible liabilities
##### Institutions that are subject to Article 92a or 92b shall disclose the following information regarding their own funds and eligible liabilities:
(a) the composition of their own funds and eligible liabilities, their maturity and their main features;
(b) the ranking of eligible liabilities in the creditor hierarchy;
(c) the total amount of each issuance of eligible liabilities instruments referred to in Article 72b and the amount of those issuances that is included in eligible liabilities items within the limits specified in Article 72b(3) and (4);
(d) the total amount of excluded liabilities referred to in Article 72a(2).
Article 438
Disclosure of own funds requirements and risk-weighted exposure amounts
Institutions shall disclose the following information regarding their compliance with Article 92 of this Regulation and with the requirements laid down in Article 73 and in point (a) of Article 104(1) of Directive 2013/36/EU:
(a) a summary of their approach to assessing the adequacy of their internal capital to support current and future activities;
(b) the amount of the additional own funds requirements based on the supervisory review process as referred to in point (a) of Article 104(1) of Directive 2013/36/EU and its composition in terms of Common Equity Tier 1, additional Tier 1 and Tier 2 instruments;
#### (c) upon demand from the relevant competent authority, the result of the institution's internal capital adequacy assessment process;
##### (d) the total risk-weighted exposure amount and the corresponding total own funds requirement determined in accordance with Article 92, to be broken down by the different risk categories set out in Part Three and, where applicable, an explanation of the effect on the calculation of own funds and risk-weighted exposure amounts that results from applying capital floors and not deducting items from own funds;
(e) the on- and off-balance-sheet exposures, the risk-weighted exposure amounts and associated expected losses for each category of specialised lending referred to in Table 1 of Article 153(5) and the on- and off-balance-sheet exposures and risk-weighted exposure amounts for the categories of equity exposures set out in Article 155(2);
(f) the exposure value and the risk-weighted exposure amount of own funds instruments held in any insurance undertaking, reinsurance undertaking or insurance holding company that the institutions do not deduct from their own funds in accordance with Article 49 when calculating their capital requirements on an individual, sub-consolidated and consolidated basis;
(g) the supplementary own funds requirement and the capital adequacy ratio of the financial conglomerate calculated in accordance with Article 6 of Directive 2002/87/EC and Annex I to that Directive where method 1 or 2 set out in that Annex is applied;
(h) the variations in the risk-weighted exposure amounts of the current disclosure period compared to the immediately preceding disclosure period that result from the use of internal models, including an outline of the key drivers explaining those variations.
Article 439
Disclosure of exposures to counterparty credit risk
Institutions shall disclose the following information regarding their exposure to counterparty credit risk as referred to in Chapter 6 of Title II of Part Three:
(a) a description of the methodology used to assign internal capital and credit limits for counterparty credit exposures, including the methods to assign those limits to exposures to central counterparties;
(b) a description of policies related to guarantees and other credit risk mitigants, such as the policies for securing collateral and establishing credit reserves;
(c) a description of policies with respect to General Wrong-Way risk and Specific Wrong-Way risk as defined in Article 291;
(d) the amount of collateral the institution would have to provide if its credit rating was downgraded;
(e) the amount of segregated and unsegregated collateral received and posted per type of collateral, further broken down between collateral used for derivatives and securities financing transactions;
(f) for derivative transactions, the exposure values before and after the effect of the credit risk mitigation as determined under the methods set out in Sections 3 to 6 of Chapter 6 of Title II of Part Three, whichever method is applicable, and the associated risk exposure amounts broken down by applicable method;
(g) for securities financing transactions, the exposure values before and after the effect of the credit risk mitigation as determined under the methods set out in Chapters 4 and 6 of Title II of Part Three, whichever method is used, and the associated risk exposure amounts broken down by applicable method;
(h) the exposure values after credit risk mitigation effects and the associated risk exposures for credit valuation adjustment capital charge, separately for each method as set out in Title VI of Part Three;
#### (i) the exposure value to central counterparties and the associated risk exposures within the scope of Section 9 of Chapter 6 of Title II of Part Three, separately for qualifying and non-qualifying central counterparties, and broken down by types of exposures;
##### (j) the notional amounts and fair value of credit derivative transactions; credit derivative transactions shall be broken down by product type; within each product type, credit derivative transactions shall be broken down further by credit protection bought and credit protection sold;
(k) the estimate of alpha where the institution has received the permission of the competent authorities to use its own estimate of alpha in accordance with Article 284(9);
(l) separately, the disclosures included in point (e) of Article 444 and point (g) of Article 452;
(m) for institutions using the methods set out in Sections 4 to 5 of Chapter 6 of Title II Part Three, the size of their on- and off-balance-sheet derivative business as calculated in accordance with Article 273a(1) or (2), as applicable.
#### Where the central bank of a Member State provides liquidity assistance in the form of collateral swap transactions, the competent authority may exempt institutions from the requirements in points (d) and (e) of the first subparagraph where that competent authority considers that the disclosure of the information referred to therein could reveal that emergency liquidity assistance has been provided. For those purposes, the competent authority shall set out appropriate thresholds and objective criteria.
##### Article 440
Disclosure of countercyclical capital buffers
#### Institutions shall disclose the following information in relation to their compliance with the requirement for a countercyclical capital buffer as referred to in Chapter 4 of Title VII of Directive 2013/36/EU:
##### (a) the geographical distribution of the exposure amounts and risk-weighted exposure amounts of its credit exposures used as a basis for the calculation of their countercyclical capital buffer;
(b) the amount of their institution-specific countercyclical capital buffer.
Article 441
Disclosure of indicators of global systemic importance
G-SIIs shall disclose, on an annual basis, the values of the indicators used for determining their score in accordance with the identification methodology referred to in Article 131 of Directive 2013/36/EU.
Article 442
Disclosure of exposures to credit risk and dilution risk
Institutions shall disclose the following information regarding their exposures to credit risk and dilution risk:
(a) the scope and definitions that they use for accounting purposes of ‘past due’ and ‘impaired’ and the differences, if any, between the definitions of ‘past due’ and ‘default’ for accounting and regulatory purposes;
#### (b) a description of the approaches and methods adopted for determining specific and general credit risk adjustments;
##### (c) information on the amount and quality of performing, non-performing and forborne exposures for loans, debt securities and off-balance-sheet exposures, including their related accumulated impairment, provisions and negative fair value changes due to credit risk and amounts of collateral and financial guarantees received;
(d) an ageing analysis of accounting past due exposures;
#### (e) the gross carrying amounts of both defaulted and non-defaulted exposures, the accumulated specific and general credit risk adjustments, the accumulated write-offs taken against those exposures and the net carrying amounts and their distribution by geographical area and industry type and for loans, debt securities and off-balance-sheet exposures;
##### (f) any changes in the gross amount of defaulted on- and off-balance-sheet exposures, including, as a minimum, information on the opening and closing balances of those exposures, the gross amount of any of those exposures reverted to non-defaulted status or subject to a write-off;
(g) the breakdown of loans and debt securities by residual maturity.
Article 443
Disclosure of encumbered and unencumbered assets
Institutions shall disclose information concerning their encumbered and unencumbered assets. For those purposes, institutions shall use the carrying amount per exposure class broken down by asset quality and the total amount of the carrying amount that is encumbered and unencumbered. Disclosure of information on encumbered and unencumbered assets shall not reveal emergency liquidity assistance provided by central banks.
Article 444
Disclosure of the use of the Standardised Approach
#### Institutions calculating their risk-weighted exposure amounts in accordance with Chapter 2 of Title II of Part Three shall disclose the following information for each of the exposure classes set out in Article 112:
##### (a) the names of the nominated ECAIs and ECAs and the reasons for any changes in those nominations over the disclosure period;
(b) the exposure classes for which each ECAI or ECA is used;
(c) a description of the process used to transfer the issuer and issue credit assessments onto items not included in the trading book;
#### (d) the association of the external rating of each nominated ECAI or ECA with the credit quality steps prescribed in Part Three, Title II, Chapter 2, taking into account that this information needs not be disclosed if the institution complies with the standard association published by EBA;
##### (e) the exposure values and the exposure values after credit risk mitigation associated with each credit quality step prescribed in Part Three, Title II, Chapter 2 as well as those deducted from own funds.
Article 445
#### Exposure to market risk
##### The institutions calculating their own funds requirements in accordance with points (b) and (c) of Article 92(3) shall disclose those requirements separately for each risk referred to in those provisions. In addition, the own funds requirement for specific interest rate risk of securitisation positions shall be disclosed separately.
Article 446
#### Operational risk
##### Institutions shall disclose the approaches for the assessment of own funds requirements for operational risk that the institution qualifies for; a description of the methodology set out in Article 312(2), if used by the institution, including a discussion of relevant internal and external factors considered in the institution's measurement approach, and in the case of partial use, the scope and coverage of the different methodologies used.
Article 447
Exposures in equities not included in the trading book
Institutions shall disclose the following information regarding the exposures in equities not included in the trading book:
(a) the differentiation between exposures based on their objectives, including for capital gains relationship and strategic reasons, and an overview of the accounting techniques and valuation methodologies used, including key assumptions and practices affecting valuation and any significant changes in these practices;
(b) the balance sheet value, the fair value and, for those exchange-traded, a comparison to the market price where it is materially different from the fair value;
(c) the types, nature and amounts of exchange-traded exposures, private equity exposures in sufficiently diversified portfolios, and other exposures;
#### (d) the cumulative realised gains or losses arising from sales and liquidations in the period; and
##### (e) the total unrealised gains or losses, the total latent revaluation gains or losses, and any of these amounts included in Common Equity Tier 1 capital.
Article 448
Exposure to interest rate risk on positions not included in the trading book
Institutions shall disclose the following information on their exposure to interest rate risk on positions not included in the trading book:
#### (a) the nature of the interest rate risk and the key assumptions (including assumptions regarding loan prepayments and behaviour of non-maturity deposits), and frequency of measurement of the interest rate risk;
##### (b) the variation in earnings, economic value or other relevant measure used by the management for upward and downward rate shocks according to management's method for measuring the interest rate risk, broken down by currency.
Article 449
Exposure to securitisation positions
Institutions calculating risk-weighted exposure amounts in accordance with Part Three, Title II, Chapter 5 or own funds requirements in accordance with Article 337 or 338 shall disclose the following information, where relevant, separately for their trading and non-trading book:
(a) a description of the institution's objectives in relation to securitisation activity;
(b) the nature of other risks including liquidity risk inherent in securitised assets;
(c) the type of risks in terms of seniority of underlying securitisation positions and in terms of assets underlying those latter securitisation positions assumed and retained with re-securitisation activity;
(d) the different roles played by the institution in the securitisation process;
(e) an indication of the extent of the institution's involvement in each of the roles referred to in point (d);
(f) a description of the processes in place to monitor changes in the credit and market risk of securitisation exposures including, how the behaviour of the underlying assets impacts securitisation exposures and a description of how those processes differ for re-securitisation exposures;
(g) a description of the institution's policy governing the use of hedging and unfunded protection to mitigate the risks of retained securitisation and re-securitisation exposures, including identification of material hedge counterparties by relevant type of risk exposure;
(h) the approaches to calculating risk-weighted exposure amounts that the institution follows for its securitisation activities including the types of securitisation exposures to which each approach applies;
(i) the types of SSPE that the institution, as sponsor, uses to securitise third-party exposures including whether and in what form and to what extent the institution has exposures to those SSPEs, separately for on- and off-balance sheet exposures, as well as a list of the entities that the institution manages or advises and that invest in either the securitisation positions that the institution has securitised or in SSPEs that the institution sponsors;
(j) a summary of the institution's accounting policies for securitisation activities, including:
(i) whether the transactions are treated as sales or financings;
(ii) the recognition of gains on sales;
(iii) the methods, key assumptions, inputs and changes from the previous period for valuing securitisation positions;
(iv) the treatment of synthetic securitisations if not covered by other accounting policies;
(v) how assets awaiting securitisation are valued and whether they are recorded in the institution's non-trading book or the trading book;
(vi) policies for recognising liabilities on the balance sheet for arrangements that could require the institution to provide financial support for securitised assets;
(k) the names of the ECAIs used for securitisations and the types of exposure for which each agency is used;
(l) where applicable, a description of the Internal Assessment Approach as set out in Part Three, Title II, Chapter 5, Section 3, including the structure of the internal assessment process and relation between internal assessment and external ratings, the use of internal assessment other than for Internal Assessment Approach capital purposes, the control mechanisms for the internal assessment process including discussion of independence, accountability, and internal assessment process review, the exposure types to which the internal assessment process is applied and the stress factors used for determining credit enhancement levels, by exposure type;
(m) an explanation of significant changes to any of the quantitative disclosures in points (n) to (q) since the last reporting period;
(n) separately for the trading and the non-trading book, the following information broken down by exposure type:
(i) the total amount of outstanding exposures securitised by the institution, separately for traditional and synthetic securitisations and securitisations for which the institution acts only as sponsor;
(ii) the aggregate amount of on-balance sheet securitisation positions retained or purchased and off-balance sheet securitisation exposures;
(iii) the aggregate amount of assets awaiting securitisation;
(iv) for securitised facilities subject to the early amortisation treatment, the aggregate drawn exposures attributed to the originator's and investors' interests respectively, the aggregate capital requirements incurred by the institution against the originator's interest and the aggregate capital requirements incurred by the institution against the investor's shares of drawn balances and undrawn lines;
(v) the amount of securitisation positions that are deducted from own funds or risk-weighted at 1 250  %;
(vi) a summary of the securitisation activity of the current period, including the amount of exposures securitised and recognised gain or loss on sale;
(o) separately for the trading and the non-trading book, the following information:
(i) the aggregate amount of securitisation positions retained or purchased and the associated capital requirements, broken down between securitisation and re-securitisation exposures and further broken down into a meaningful number of risk-weight or capital requirement bands, for each capital requirements approach used;
(ii) the aggregate amount of re-securitisation exposures retained or purchased broken down according to the exposure before and after hedging/insurance and the exposure to financial guarantors, broken down according to guarantor credit worthiness categories or guarantor name;
(p) for the non-trading book and regarding exposures securitised by the institution, the amount of impaired/past due assets securitised and the losses recognised by the institution during the current period, both broken down by exposure type;
#### (q) for the trading book, the total outstanding exposures securitised by the institution and subject to a capital requirement for market risk, broken down into traditional/synthetic and by exposure type;
##### (r) where applicable, whether the institution has provided support within the terms of Article 248(1) and the impact on own funds.
Article 450
Remuneration policy
Institutions shall disclose at least the following information, regarding the remuneration policy and practices of the institution for those categories of staff whose professional activities have a material impact on its risk profile:
(a) information concerning the decision-making process used for determining the remuneration policy, as well as the number of meetings held by the main body overseeing remuneration during the financial year, including, if applicable, information about the composition and the mandate of a remuneration committee, the external consultant whose services have been used for the determination of the remuneration policy and the role of the relevant stakeholders;
(b) information on link between pay and performance;
#### (c) a description of the process used to transfer the issuer and issue credit ratings onto items not included in the trading book;
##### (d) the association of the external rating of each nominated ECAI or ECA with the risk weights that correspond to the credit quality steps as set out in Chapter 2 of Title II of Part Three, taking into account that it is not necessary to disclose that information where the institutions comply with the standard association published by EBA;
(e) the exposure values and the exposure values after credit risk mitigation associated with each credit quality step as set out in Chapter 2 of Title II of Part Three, by exposure class, as well as the exposure values deducted from own funds.
Article 445
Disclosure of exposure to market risk
Institutions calculating their own funds requirements in accordance with points (b) and (c) of Article 92(3) shall disclose those requirements separately for each risk referred to in those points. In addition, own funds requirements for the specific interest rate risk of securitisation positions shall be disclosed separately.
#### Article 446
##### Disclosure of operational risk management
Institutions shall disclose the following information about their operational risk management:
(a) the approaches for the assessment of own funds requirements for operation risk that the institution qualifies for;
(b) where the institution makes use of it, a description of the methodology set out in Article 312(2), which shall include a discussion of the relevant internal and external factors being considered in the institution's advanced measurement approach;
(c) in the case of partial use, the scope and coverage of the different methodologies used.
Article 447
Disclosure of key metrics
Institutions shall disclose the following key metrics in a tabular format:
(a) the composition of their own funds and their own funds requirements as calculated in accordance with Article 92;
(b) the total risk exposure amount as calculated in accordance with Article 92(3);
#### (c) where applicable, the amount and composition of additional own funds which the institutions are required to hold in accordance with point (a) of Article 104(1) of Directive 2013/36/EU;
##### (d) their combined buffer requirement which the institutions are required to hold in accordance with Chapter 4 of Title VII of Directive 2013/36/EU;
(e) their leverage ratio and the total exposure measure as calculated in accordance with Article 429;
(f) the following information in relation to their liquidity coverage ratio as calculated in accordance with the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1):
(i) the average or averages, as applicable, of their liquidity coverage ratio based on end-of-the-month observations over the preceding 12 months for each quarter of the relevant disclosure period;
(ii) the average or averages, as applicable, of total liquid assets, after applying the relevant haircuts, included in the liquidity buffer pursuant to the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1), based on end-of-the-month observations over the preceding 12 months for each quarter of the relevant disclosure period;
(iii) the averages of their liquidity outflows, inflows and net liquidity outflows as calculated pursuant to the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1), based on end-of-the-month observations over the preceding 12 months for each quarter of the relevant disclosure period;
(g) the following information in relation to their net stable funding requirement as calculated in accordance with Title IV of Part Six:
(i) the net stable funding ratio at the end of each quarter of the relevant disclosure period;
(ii) the available stable funding at the end of each quarter of the relevant disclosure period;
(iii) the required stable funding at the end of each quarter of the relevant disclosure period;
(h) their own funds and eligible liabilities ratios and their components, numerator and denominator, as calculated in accordance with Articles 92a and 92b and broken down at the level of each resolution group, where applicable.
Article 448
Disclosure of exposures to interest rate risk on positions not held in the trading book
As from 28 June 2021, institutions shall disclose the following quantitative and qualitative information on the risks arising from potential changes in interest rates that affect both the economic value of equity and the net interest income of their non-trading book activities referred to in Article 84 and Article 98(5) of Directive 2013/36/EU:
(a) the changes in the economic value of equity calculated under the six supervisory shock scenarios referred to in Article 98(5) of Directive 2013/36/EU for the current and previous disclosure periods;
#### (b) the changes in the net interest income calculated under the two supervisory shock scenarios referred to in Article 98(5) of Directive 2013/36/EU for the current and previous disclosure periods;
##### (c) a description of key modelling and parametric assumptions, other than those referred to in points (b) and (c) of Article 98(5a) of Directive 2013/36/EU used to calculate changes in the economic value of equity and in the net interest income required under points (a) and (b) of this paragraph;
(d) an explanation of the significance of the risk measures disclosed under points (a) and (b) of this paragraph and of any significant variations of those risk measures since the previous disclosure reference date;
(e) the description of how institutions define, measure, mitigate and control the interest rate risk of their non-trading book activities for the purposes of the competent authorities' review in accordance with Article 84 of Directive 2013/36/EU, including:
(i) a description of the specific risk measures that the institutions use to evaluate changes in their economic value of equity and in their net interest income;
(ii) a description of the key modelling and parametric assumptions used in the institutions' internal measurement systems that would differ from the common modelling and parametric assumptions referred to in Article 98(5a) of Directive 2013/36/EU for the purpose of calculating changes to the economic value of equity and to the net interest income, including the rationale for those differences;
(iii) a description of the interest rate shock scenarios that institutions use to estimate the interest rate risk;
(iv) the recognition of the effect of hedges against those interest rate risks, including internal hedges that meet the requirements laid down in Article 106(3);
(v) an outline of how often the evaluation of the interest rate risk occurs;
(f) the description of the overall risk management and mitigation strategies for those risks;
(g) average and longest repricing maturity assigned to non-maturity deposits.
Article 449
Disclosure of exposures to securitisation positions
Institutions calculating risk-weighted exposure amounts in accordance with Chapter 5 of Title II of Part Three or own funds requirements in accordance with Article 337 or 338 shall disclose the following information separately for their trading book and non-trading book activities:
(a) a description of their securitisation and re-securitisation activities, including their risk management and investment objectives in connection with those activities, their role in securitisation and re-securitisation transactions, whether they use the simple, transparent and standardised securitisation (STS) as defined in point (10) of Article 242, and the extent to which they use securitisation transactions to transfer the credit risk of the securitised exposures to third parties with, where applicable, a separate description of their synthetic securitisation risk transfer policy;
(b) the type of risks they are exposed to in their securitisation and re-securitisation activities by level of seniority of the relevant securitisation positions providing a distinction between STS and non-STS positions and:
(i) the risk retained in own-originated transactions;
(ii) the risk incurred in relation to transactions originated by third parties;
(c) their approaches for calculating the risk-weighted exposure amounts that they apply to their securitisation activities, including the types of securitisation positions to which each approach applies and with a distinction between STS and non-STS positions;
(d) a list of SSPEs falling into any of the following categories, with a description of their types of exposures to those SSPEs, including derivative contracts:
(i) SSPEs which acquire exposures originated by the institutions;
(ii) SSPEs sponsored by the institutions;
(iii) SSPEs and other legal entities for which the institutions provide securitisation-related services, such as advisory, asset servicing or management services;
(iv) SSPEs included in the institutions' regulatory scope of consolidation;
(e) a list of any legal entities in relation to which the institutions have disclosed that they have provided support in accordance with Chapter 5 of Title II of Part Three;
(f) a list of legal entities affiliated with the institutions and that invest in securitisations originated by the institutions or in securitisation positions issued by SSPEs sponsored by the institutions;
#### (g) a summary of their accounting policies for securitisation activity, including where relevant a distinction between securitisation and re-securitisation positions;
##### (h) the names of the ECAIs used for securitisations and the types of exposure for which each agency is used;
(i) where applicable, a description of the Internal Assessment Approach as set out in Chapter 5 of Title II of Part Three, including the structure of the internal assessment process and the relation between internal assessment and external ratings of the relevant ECAI disclosed in accordance with point (h), the control mechanisms for the internal assessment process including discussion of independence, accountability, and internal assessment process review, the exposure types to which the internal assessment process is applied and the stress factors used for determining credit enhancement levels;
(j) separately for the trading book and the non-trading book, the carrying amount of securitisation exposures, including information on whether institutions have transferred significant credit risk in accordance with Articles 244 and 245, for which institutions act as originator, sponsor or investor, separately for traditional and synthetic securitisations, and for STS and non-STS transactions and broken down by type of securitisation exposures;
#### (k) for the non-trading book activities, the following information:
(i) the aggregate amount of securitisation positions where institutions act as originator or sponsor and the associated risk-weighted assets and capital requirements by regulatory approaches, including exposures deducted from own funds or risk weighted at 1 250  %, broken down between traditional and synthetic securitisations and between securitisation and re-securitisation exposures, separately for STS and non-STS positions, and further broken down into a meaningful number of risk-weight or capital requirement bands and by approach used to calculate the capital requirements;
(ii) the aggregate amount of securitisation positions where institutions act as investor and the associated risk-weighted assets and capital requirements by regulatory approaches, including exposures deducted from own funds or risk weighted at 1 250  %, broken down between traditional and synthetic securitisations, securitisation and re-securitisation positions, and STS and non-STS positions, and further broken down into a meaningful number of risk weight or capital requirement bands and by approach used to calculate the capital requirements;
##### (l) for exposures securitised by the institution, the amount of exposures in default and the amount of the specific credit risk adjustments made by the institution during the current period, both broken down by exposure type.
Article 449a
Disclosure of environmental, social and governance risks (ESG risks)
From 28 June 2022, large institutions which have issued securities that are admitted to trading on a regulated market of any Member State, as defined in point (21) of Article 4(1) of Directive 2014/65/EU, shall disclose information on ESG risks, including physical risks and transition risks, as defined in the report referred to in Article 98(8) of Directive 2013/36/EU.
The information referred to in the first paragraph shall be disclosed on an annual basis for the first year and biannually thereafter.
Article 450
Disclosure of remuneration policy
Institutions shall disclose the following information regarding their remuneration policy and practices for those categories of staff whose professional activities have a material impact on the risk profile of the institutions:
(a) information concerning the decision-making process used for determining the remuneration policy, as well as the number of meetings held by the main body overseeing remuneration during the financial year, including, where applicable, information about the composition and the mandate of a remuneration committee, the external consultant whose services have been used for the determination of the remuneration policy and the role of the relevant stakeholders;
(b) information about the link between pay of the staff and their performance;
(c) the most important design characteristics of the remuneration system, including information on the criteria used for performance measurement and risk adjustment, deferral policy and vesting criteria;
(d) the ratios between fixed and variable remuneration set in accordance with Article 94(1)(g) of Directive 2013/36/EU;
(d) the ratios between fixed and variable remuneration set in accordance with point (g) of Article 94(1) of Directive 2013/36/EU;
(e) information on the performance criteria on which the entitlement to shares, options or variable components of remuneration is based;
@@ -12045,119 +13598,138 @@
(g) aggregate quantitative information on remuneration, broken down by business area;
(h) aggregate quantitative information on remuneration, broken down by senior management and members of staff whose actions have a material impact on the risk profile of the institution, indicating the following:
(i) the amounts of remuneration for the financial year, split into fixed and variable remuneration, and the number of beneficiaries;
(ii) the amounts and forms of variable remuneration, split into cash, shares, share-linked instruments and other types;
(iii) the amounts of outstanding deferred remuneration, split into vested and unvested portions;
(iv) the amounts of deferred remuneration awarded during the financial year, paid out and reduced through performance adjustments;
(v) new sign-on and severance payments made during the financial year, and the number of beneficiaries of such payments;
(vi) the amounts of severance payments awarded during the financial year, number of beneficiaries and highest such award to a single person;
(i) the number of individuals being remunerated EUR 1 million or more per financial year, for remuneration between EUR 1 million and EUR 5 million broken down into pay bands of EUR 500 000 and for remuneration of EUR 5 million and above broken down into pay bands of EUR 1 million;
#### (j) upon demand from the Member State or competent authority, the total remuneration for each member of the management body or senior management.
##### Institutions shall comply with the requirements set out in this Article in a manner that is appropriate to their size, internal organisation and the nature, scope and complexity of their activities and without prejudice to Directive 95/46/EC.
Article 451
Leverage
Institutions shall disclose the following information regarding their leverage ratio calculated in accordance with Article 429 and their management of the risk of excessive leverage:
(a) the leverage ratio and how the institution applies Article 499(2) and (3);
(b) a breakdown of the total exposure measure as well as a reconciliation of the total exposure measure with the relevant information disclosed in published financial statements;
(c) where applicable, the amount of derecognised fiduciary items in accordance with Article 429(11);
#### (h) aggregate quantitative information on remuneration, broken down by senior management and members of staff whose professional activities have a material impact on the risk profile of the institutions, indicating the following:
(i) the amounts of remuneration awarded for the financial year, split into fixed remuneration including a description of the fixed components, and variable remuneration, and the number of beneficiaries;
(ii) the amounts and forms of awarded variable remuneration, split into cash, shares, share-linked instruments and other types separately for the part paid upfront and the deferred part;
(iii) the amounts of deferred remuneration awarded for previous performance periods, split into the amount due to vest in the financial year and the amount due to vest in subsequent years;
(iv) the amount of deferred remuneration due to vest in the financial year that is paid out during the financial year, and that is reduced through performance adjustments;
(v) the guaranteed variable remuneration awards during the financial year, and the number of beneficiaries of those awards;
(vi) the severance payments awarded in previous periods, that have been paid out during the financial year;
(vii) the amounts of severance payments awarded during the financial year, split into paid upfront and deferred, the number of beneficiaries of those payments and highest payment that has been awarded to a single person;
##### (i) the number of individuals that have been remunerated EUR 1 million or more per financial year, with the remuneration between EUR 1 million and EUR 5 million broken down into pay bands of EUR 500 000 and with the remuneration of EUR 5 million and above broken down into pay bands of EUR 1 million;
(j) upon demand from the relevant Member State or competent authority, the total remuneration for each member of the management body or senior management;
(k) information on whether the institution benefits from a derogation laid down in Article 94(3) of Directive 2013/36/EU.
For the purposes of point (k) of the first subparagraph of this paragraph, institutions that benefit from such a derogation shall indicate whether they benefit from that derogation on the basis of point (a) or (b) of Article 94(3) of Directive 2013/36/EU. They shall also indicate for which of the remuneration principles they apply the derogation(s), the number of staff members that benefit from the derogation(s) and their total remuneration, split into fixed and variable remuneration.
Institutions shall comply with the requirements set out in this Article in a manner that is appropriate to their size, internal organisation and the nature, scope and complexity of their activities and without prejudice to Regulation (EU) 2016/679 of the European Parliament and of the Council (<sup>25</sup>).
Article 451
Disclosure of the leverage ratio
#### Institutions that are subject to Part Seven shall disclose the following information regarding their leverage ratio as calculated in accordance with Article 429 and their management of the risk of excessive leverage:
##### (a) the leverage ratio and how the institutions apply Article 499(2);
(b) a breakdown of the total exposure measure referred to in Article 429(4), as well as a reconciliation of the total exposure measure with the relevant information disclosed in published financial statements;
(c) where applicable, the amount of exposures calculated in accordance with Articles 429(8) and 429a(1) and the adjusted leverage ratio calculated in accordance with Article 429a(7);
(d) a description of the processes used to manage the risk of excessive leverage;
(e) a description of the factors that had an impact on the leverage ratio during the period to which the disclosed leverage ratio refers.
## EBA shall submit those draft implementing technical standards to the Commission by 30 June 2014.
### Power is conferred on the Commission to adopt the implementing technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Article 15 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
#### TITLE III
##### QUALIFYING REQUIREMENTS FOR THE USE OF PARTICULAR INSTRUMENTS OR METHODOLOGIES
Article 452
Use of the IRB Approach to credit risk
Institutions calculating the risk-weighted exposure amounts under the IRB Approach shall disclose the following information:
Article 451a
Disclosure of liquidity requirements
Institutions shall disclose the following information in relation to their liquidity coverage ratio as calculated in accordance with the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1):
(a) the average or averages, as applicable, of their liquidity coverage ratio based on end-of-the-month observations over the preceding 12 months for each quarter of the relevant disclosure period;
## (b) the average or averages, as applicable, of total liquid assets, after applying the relevant haircuts, included in the liquidity buffer pursuant to the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1), based on end-of-the-month observations over the preceding 12 months for each quarter of the relevant disclosure period, and a description of the composition of that liquidity buffer;
### (c) the averages of their liquidity outflows, inflows and net liquidity outflows as calculated in accordance with the delegated act referred to in Article 460(1), based on end-of-the-month observations over the preceding 12 months for each quarter of the relevant disclosure period and the description of their composition.
#### Institutions shall disclose the following information in relation to their net stable funding ratio as calculated in accordance with Title IV of Part Six:
##### (a) quarter-end figures of their net stable funding ratio calculated in accordance with Chapter 2 of Title IV of Part Six for each quarter of the relevant disclosure period;
(b) an overview of the amount of available stable funding calculated in accordance with Chapter 3 of Title IV of Part Six;
(c) an overview of the amount of required stable funding calculated in accordance with Chapter 4 of Title IV of Part Six.
TITLE III
**QUALIFYING REQUIREMENTS FOR THE USE OF PARTICULAR INSTRUMENTS OR METHODOLOGIES**
Article 452
Disclosure of the use of the IRB Approach to credit risk
Institutions calculating the risk-weighted exposure amounts under the IRB Approach to credit risk shall disclose the following information:
(a) the competent authority's permission of the approach or approved transition;
(b) an explanation and review of:
(i) the structure of internal rating systems and relation between internal and external ratings;
(ii) the use of internal estimates other than for calculating risk-weighted exposure amounts in accordance with Part Three, Title II, Chapter 3;
(iii) the process for managing and recognising credit risk mitigation;
(iv) the control mechanisms for rating systems including a description of independence, accountability, and rating systems review;
(c) a description of the internal ratings process, provided separately for the following exposure classes:
(i) central governments and central banks;
(ii) institutions;
(iii) corporate, including SMEs, specialised lending and purchased corporate receivables;
(iv) retail, for each of the categories of exposures to which the different correlations in Article 154(1) to (4) correspond;
(v) equities;
(d) the exposure values for each of the exposure classes specified in Article 147. Exposures to central governments and central banks, institutions and corporates where institutions use own estimates of LGDs or conversion factors for the calculation of risk-weighted exposure amounts, shall be disclosed separately from exposures for which the institutions do not use such estimates;
(e) for each of the exposure classes central governments and central banks, institutions, corporates and equity, and across a sufficient number of obligor grades (including default) to allow for a meaningful differentiation of credit risk, institutions shall disclose:
(i) the total exposures, including for the exposure classes central governments and central banks, institutions and corporates, the sum of outstanding loans and exposure values for undrawn commitments; and for equities the outstanding amount;
(ii) the exposure-weighted average risk weight;
(iii) for the institutions using own estimates of conversion factors for the calculation of risk-weighted exposure amounts, the amount of undrawn commitments and exposure-weighted average exposure values for each exposure class;
(f) For the retail exposure class and for each of the categories set out in point (c)(iv), either the disclosures outlined in point (e) (if applicable, on a pooled basis), or an analysis of exposures (outstanding loans and exposure values for undrawn commitments) against a sufficient number of EL grades to allow for a meaningful differentiation of credit risk (if applicable, on a pooled basis);
(g) the actual specific credit risk adjustments in the preceding period for each exposure class (for retail, for each of the categories as set out in point (c)(iv)) and how they differ from past experience;
(h) a description of the factors that impacted on the loss experience in the preceding period (for example, has the institution experienced higher than average default rates, or higher than average LGDs and conversion factors);
(i) the institution's estimates against actual outcomes over a longer period. At a minimum, this shall include information on estimates of losses against actual losses in each exposure class (for retail, for each of the categories as set out in point (c)(iv) over a period sufficient to allow for a meaningful assessment of the performance of the internal rating processes for each exposure class (for retail for each of the categories as set out in point (c)(iv). Where appropriate, the institutions shall further decompose this to provide analysis of PD and, for the institutions using own estimates of LGDs and/or conversion factors, LGD and conversion factor outcomes against estimates provided in the quantitative risk assessment disclosures set out in this Article;
(j) for all exposure classes specified in Article 147 and for each category of exposure to which the different correlations in Article 154 (1) to (4) correspond:
(i) for the institutions using own LGD estimates for the calculation of risk-weighted exposure amounts, the exposure-weighted average LGD and PD in percentage for each relevant geographical location of credit exposures;
(ii) for the institutions that do not use own LGD estimates, the exposure-weighted average PD in percentage for each relevant geographical location of credit exposures.
#### For the purposes of point (c), the description shall include the types of exposure included in the exposure class, the definitions, methods and data for estimation and validation of PD and, if applicable, LGD and conversion factors, including assumptions employed in the derivation of these variables, and the descriptions of material deviations from the definition of default as set out in Article 178, including the broad segments affected by such deviations.
##### For the purposes of point (j), the relevant geographical location of credit exposures means exposures in the Member States in which the institution has been authorised and Member States or third countries in which institutions carry out activities through a branch or a subsidiary.
Article 453
Use of credit risk mitigation techniques
The institutions applying credit risk mitigation techniques shall disclose the following information:
(a) the policies and processes for, and an indication of the extent to which the entity makes use of, on- and off-balance sheet netting;
(b) the policies and processes for collateral valuation and management;
(c) a description of the main types of collateral taken by the institution;
(d) the main types of guarantor and credit derivative counterparty and their creditworthiness;
(e) information about market or credit risk concentrations within the credit mitigation taken;
#### (f) for institutions calculating risk-weighted exposure amounts under the Standardised Approach or the IRB Approach, but not providing own estimates of LGDs or conversion factors in respect of the exposure class, separately for each exposure class, the total exposure value (after, where applicable, on- or off-balance sheet netting) that is covered — after the application of volatility adjustments — by eligible financial collateral, and other eligible collateral;
##### (g) for institutions calculating risk-weighted exposure amounts under the Standardised Approach or the IRB Approach, separately for each exposure class, the total exposure (after, where applicable, on- or off-balance sheet netting) that is covered by guarantees or credit derivatives. For the equity exposure class, this requirement applies to each of the approaches provided in Article 155.
Article 454
#### Use of the Advanced Measurement Approaches to operational risk
##### The institutions using the Advanced Measurement Approaches set out in Articles 321 to 324 for the calculation of their own funds requirements for operational risk shall disclose a description of the use of insurances and other risk transfer mechanisms for the purpose of mitigation of this risk.
Article 455
Use of Internal Market Risk Models
Institutions calculating their capital requirements in accordance with Article 363 shall disclose the following information:
(b) for each exposure class referred to in Article 147, the percentage of the total exposure value of each exposure class subject to the Standardised Approach laid down in Chapter 2 of Title II of Part Three or to the IRB Approach laid down in Chapter 3 of Title II of Part Three, as well as the part of each exposure class subject to a roll-out plan; where institutions have received permission to use own LGDs and conversion factors for the calculation of risk-weighted exposure amounts, they shall disclose separately the percentage of the total exposure value of each exposure class subject to that permission;
(c) the control mechanisms for rating systems at the different stages of model development, controls and changes, which shall include information on:
(i) the relationship between the risk management function and the internal audit function;
(ii) the rating system review;
(iii) the procedure to ensure the independence of the function in charge of reviewing the models from the functions responsible for the development of the models;
(iv) the procedure to ensure the accountability of the functions in charge of developing and reviewing the models;
#### (d) the role of the functions involved in the development, approval and subsequent changes of the credit risk models;
##### (e) the scope and main content of the reporting related to credit risk models;
(f) a description of the internal ratings process by exposure class, including the number of key models used with respect to each portfolio and a brief discussion of the main differences between the models within the same portfolio, covering:
(i) the definitions, methods and data for estimation and validation of PD, which shall include information on how PDs are estimated for low default portfolios, whether there are regulatory floors and the drivers for differences observed between PD and actual default rates at least for the last three periods;
(ii) where applicable, the definitions, methods and data for estimation and validation of LGD, such as methods to calculate downturn LGD, how LGDs are estimated for low default portfolio and the time lapse between the default event and the closure of the exposure;
(iii) where applicable, the definitions, methods and data for estimation and validation of conversion factors, including assumptions employed in the derivation of those variables;
(g) as applicable, the following information in relation to each exposure class referred to in Article 147:
(i) their gross on-balance-sheet exposure;
(ii) their off-balance-sheet exposure values prior to the relevant conversion factor;
(iii) their exposure after applying the relevant conversion factor and credit risk mitigation;
(iv) any model, parameter or input relevant for the understanding of the risk weighting and the resulting risk exposure amounts disclosed across a sufficient number of obligor grades (including default) to allow for a meaningful differentiation of credit risk;
(v) separately for those exposure classes in relation to which institutions have received permission to use own LGDs and conversion factors for the calculation of risk-weighted exposure amounts, and for exposures for which the institutions do not use such estimates, the values referred to in points (i) to (iv) subject to that permission;
(h) institutions' estimates of PDs against the actual default rate for each exposure class over a longer period, with separate disclosure of the PD range, the external rating equivalent, the weighted average and arithmetic average PD, the number of obligors at the end of the previous year and of the year under review, the number of defaulted obligors, including the new defaulted obligors, and the annual average historical default rate.
For the purposes of point (b) of this Article, institutions shall use the exposure value as defined in Article 166.
Article 453
Disclosure of the use of credit risk mitigation techniques
Institutions using credit risk mitigation techniques shall disclose the following information:
(a) the core features of the policies and processes for on- and off-balance-sheet netting and an indication of the extent to which institutions make use of balance sheet netting;
(b) the core features of the policies and processes for eligible collateral evaluation and management;
(c) a description of the main types of collateral taken by the institution to mitigate credit risk;
(d) for guarantees and credit derivatives used as credit protection, the main types of guarantor and credit derivative counterparty and their creditworthiness used for the purpose of reducing capital requirements, excluding those used as part of synthetic securitisation structures;
#### (e) information about market or credit risk concentrations within the credit risk mitigation taken;
##### (f) for institutions calculating risk-weighted exposure amounts under the Standardised Approach or the IRB Approach, the total exposure value not covered by any eligible credit protection and the total exposure value covered by eligible credit protection after applying volatility adjustments; the disclosure set out in this point shall be made separately for loans and debt securities and including a breakdown of defaulted exposures;
(g) the corresponding conversion factor and the credit risk mitigation associated with the exposure and the incidence of credit risk mitigation techniques with and without substitution effect;
#### (h) for institutions calculating risk-weighted exposure amounts under the Standardised Approach, the on- and off-balance-sheet exposure value by exposure class before and after the application of conversion factors and any associated credit risk mitigation;
##### (i) for institutions calculating risk-weighted exposure amounts under the Standardised Approach, the risk-weighted exposure amount and the ratio between that risk-weighted exposure amount and the exposure value after applying the corresponding conversion factor and the credit risk mitigation associated with the exposure; the disclosure set out in this point shall be made separately for each exposure class;
(j) for institutions calculating risk-weighted exposure amounts under the IRB Approach, the risk-weighted exposure amount before and after recognition of the credit risk mitigation impact of credit derivatives; where institutions have received permission to use own LGDs and conversion factors for the calculation of risk-weighted exposure amounts, they shall make the disclosure set out in this point separately for the exposure classes subject to that permission.
Article 454
Disclosure of the use of the Advanced Measurement Approaches to operational risk
The institutions using the Advanced Measurement Approaches set out in Articles 321 to 324 for the calculation of their own funds requirements for operational risk shall disclose a description of their use of insurance and other risk-transfer mechanisms for the purpose of mitigating that risk.
Article 455
Use of internal market risk models
Institutions calculating their capital requirements in accordance with Article 363 shall disclose the following information:
(a) for each sub-portfolio covered:
(i) the characteristics of the models used;
@@ -12165,24 +13737,24 @@
(iii) a description of stress testing applied to the sub-portfolio;
(iv) a description of the approaches used for back-testing and validating the accuracy and consistency of the internal models and modelling processes;
(b) the scope of permission by the competent authority;
(c) a description of the extent and methodologies for compliance with the requirements set out in Articles 104 and 105;
(d) the highest, the lowest and the mean of the following:
(i) the daily value-at-risk measures over the reporting period and as per the period end;
(ii) the stressed value-at-risk measures over the reporting period and as per the period end;
(iii) the risk numbers for incremental default and migration risk and for the specific risk of the correlation trading portfolio over the reporting period and as per the period-end;
(e) the elements of the own funds requirement as specified in Article 364;
## (f) the weighted average liquidity horizon for each sub-portfolio covered by the internal models for incremental default and migration risk and for correlation trading;
### (g) a comparison of the daily end-of-day value-at-risk measures to the one-day changes of the portfolio's value by the end of the subsequent business day together with an analysis of any important overshooting during the reporting period.
#### PART NINE
##### DELEGATED AND IMPLEMENTING ACTS
## (b) the scope of permission by the competent authority;
### (c) a description of the extent and methodologies for compliance with the requirements set out in Articles 104 and 105;
#### (d) the highest, the lowest and the mean of the following:
(i) the daily value-at-risk measures over the reporting period and at the end of the reporting period;
(ii) the stressed value-at-risk measures over the reporting period and at the end of the reporting period;
(iii) the risk numbers for incremental default and migration risk and for the specific risk of the correlation trading portfolio over the reporting period and at the end of the reporting period;
##### (e) the elements of the own funds requirement as specified in Article 364;
(f) the weighted average liquidity horizon for each sub-portfolio covered by the internal models for incremental default and migration risk and for correlation trading;
(g) a comparison of the daily end-of-day value-at-risk measures to the one-day changes of the portfolio's value by the end of the subsequent business day together with an analysis of any important overshooting during the reporting period.
PART NINE
DELEGATED AND IMPLEMENTING ACTS
Article 456
@@ -12200,27 +13772,25 @@
(e) the list and classification of the off-balance sheet items in Annexes I and II, in order to take account of developments on financial markets;
(f) adjustment of the categories of investment firms in Article 95(1) and Article 96(1) to take account of developments on financial markets;
(g) clarification of the requirement laid down in Article 97 to ensure uniform application of this Regulation.
(h) amendment of the own funds requirements as set out in Articles 301 to 311 of this Regulation and Articles 50a to 50d of Regulation (EU) No 648/2012 to take account of developments or amendments of the international standards for exposures to a central counterparty;
(i) clarification of the terms referred to in the exemptions provided for in Article 400;
(j) amendment of the capital measure and the total exposure measure of the leverage ratio referred to in Article 429(2) in order to correct any shortcomings discovered on the basis of the reporting referred to in Article 430(1) before the leverage ratio has to be published by institutions as set out in Article 451(1)(a).
EBA shall monitor the own funds requirements for credit valuation adjustment risk and by 1 January 2015 submit a report to the Commission. In particular, the report shall assess:
(a) the treatment of CVA risk as a stand-alone charge versus an integrated component of the market risk framework;
(j) amendment of the capital measure and the total exposure measure of the leverage ratio referred to in Article 429(2) in order to correct any shortcomings discovered on the basis of the reporting referred to in Article 430(1) before the leverage ratio has to be published by institutions as set out in Article 451(1)(a);
(k) amendments to the disclosure requirements laid down in Titles II and III of Part Eight to take account of developments or amendments of the international standards on disclosure.
#### EBA shall monitor the own funds requirements for credit valuation adjustment risk and by 1 January 2015 submit a report to the Commission. In particular, the report shall assess:
##### (a) the treatment of CVA risk as a stand-alone charge versus an integrated component of the market risk framework;
(b) the scope of the CVA risk charge including the exemption in Article 482;
(c) eligible hedges;
#### (d) calculation of capital requirements of CVA risk.
##### On the basis of that report and where the findings are that such action is necessary the Commission shall also be empowered to adopt a delegated act in accordance with Article 462 to amend Article 381, Article 382(1) to (3) and Articles 383 to 386 concerning those items.
(d) calculation of capital requirements of CVA risk.
On the basis of that report and where the findings are that such action is necessary the Commission shall also be empowered to adopt a delegated act in accordance with Article 462 to amend Article 381, Article 382(1) to (3) and Articles 383 to 386 concerning those items.
Article 457
@@ -12234,17 +13804,17 @@
(c) the own funds requirements for securitisation laid down in Articles 242 to 270a;
(d) the own funds requirements for counterparty credit risks in accordance with Articles 272 to 311;
(e) the own funds requirements for operational risk laid down in Articles 315 to 324;
#### (d) the own funds requirements for counterparty credit risks in accordance with Articles 272 to 311;
##### (e) the own funds requirements for operational risk laid down in Articles 315 to 324;
(f) the own funds requirements for market risk laid down in Articles 325 to 377;
(g) the own funds requirements for settlement risk laid down in Articles 378 and 379;
#### (h) the own funds requirements for credit valuation adjustment risk laid down in Articles 383, 384 and 386;
##### (i) Part Two and Article 99 only as a result of developments in accounting standards or requirements which take account of Union legislation.
(h) the own funds requirements for credit valuation adjustment risk laid down in Articles 383, 384 and 386;
(i) Part Two and Article 430 only as a result of developments in accounting standards or requirements which take account of Union legislative acts.
Article 458
@@ -12281,31 +13851,31 @@
The Council shall only reject the draft national measures if it considers that one or more of the following conditions are not met:
(a) the changes in the intensity of macroprudential or systemic risk are of such nature as to pose risk to financial stability at national level;
(b) the macroprudential tools set out in this Regulation and in Directive 2013/36/EU are less suitable or effective than the draft national measures to deal with the macroprudential or systemic risk identified;
#### (a) the changes in the intensity of macroprudential or systemic risk are of such nature as to pose risk to financial stability at national level;
##### (b) the macroprudential tools set out in this Regulation and in Directive 2013/36/EU are less suitable or effective than the draft national measures to deal with the macroprudential or systemic risk identified;
(c) the draft national measures do not entail disproportionate adverse effects on the whole or parts of the financial system in other Member States or in the Union as a whole, thus forming or creating an obstacle to the functioning of the internal market; and
(d) the issue concerns only one Member State.
#### The assessment of the Council shall take into account the opinion of the ESRB and EBA and shall be based on the evidence presented in accordance with paragraph 2 by the authority designated in accordance with paragraph 1.
##### In the absence of a Council implementing act to reject the draft national measures within one month of receipt of the proposal by the Commission, the Member State concerned may adopt the measures and apply them for a period of up to two years or until the macroprudential or systemic risk ceases to exist if that occurs sooner.
The assessment of the Council shall take into account the opinion of the ESRB and EBA and shall be based on the evidence presented in accordance with paragraph 2 by the authority designated in accordance with paragraph 1.
In the absence of a Council implementing act to reject the draft national measures within one month of receipt of the proposal by the Commission, the Member State concerned may adopt the measures and apply them for a period of up to two years or until the macroprudential or systemic risk ceases to exist if that occurs sooner.
Article 459
Prudential requirements
The Commission shall be empowered to adopt delegated acts in accordance with Article 462, to impose, for a period of one year, stricter prudential requirements for exposures where this is necessary to address changes in the intensity of microprudential and macroprudential risks which arise from market developments in the Union or outside the Union affecting all Member States, and where the instruments of this Regulation and Directive 2013/36/EU are not sufficient to address these risks, in particular upon the recommendation or opinion of the ESRB or EBA, concerning:
#### Prudential requirements
##### The Commission shall be empowered to adopt delegated acts in accordance with Article 462, to impose, for a period of one year, stricter prudential requirements for exposures where this is necessary to address changes in the intensity of microprudential and macroprudential risks which arise from market developments in the Union or outside the Union affecting all Member States, and where the instruments of this Regulation and Directive 2013/36/EU are not sufficient to address these risks, in particular upon the recommendation or opinion of the ESRB or EBA, concerning:
(a) the level of own funds laid down in Article 92;
(b) the requirements for large exposures laid down in Article 392 and Articles 395 to 403;
#### (c) the public disclosure requirements laid down in Articles 431 to 455.
##### The Commission, assisted by the ESRB shall, at least on an annual basis, submit to the European Parliament and the Council, a report on market developments potentially requiring the use of this Article.
(c) the public disclosure requirements laid down in Articles 431 to 455.
The Commission, assisted by the ESRB shall, at least on an annual basis, submit to the European Parliament and the Council, a report on market developments potentially requiring the use of this Article.
Article 460
@@ -12317,19 +13887,19 @@
(a) 60 % of the liquidity coverage requirement in 2015;
(b) 70 % as from 1 January 2016;
(c) 80 % as from 1 January 2017;
#### (b) 70 % as from 1 January 2016;
##### (c) 80 % as from 1 January 2017;
(d) 100 % as from 1 January 2018.
For this purpose the Commission shall take into account the reports referred to in Article 509(1), (2) and (3) and international standards developed by international fora as well as Union specificities.
#### The Commission shall adopt the delegated act referred to in paragraph 1 by 30 June 2014. It shall enter into force by 31 December 2014, but shall not apply before 1 January 2015.
##### The Commission shall adopt the delegated act referred to in the first subparagraph by 28 June 2024.
Article 461
The Commission shall adopt the delegated act referred to in paragraph 1 by 30 June 2014. It shall enter into force by 31 December 2014, but shall not apply before 1 January 2015.
#### The Commission shall adopt the delegated act referred to in the first subparagraph by 28 June 2024.
##### Article 461
Review of the phasing-in of the liquidity coverage requirement
@@ -12339,23 +13909,23 @@
##### A delegated act adopted in accordance with this Article shall not apply before 1 January 2018 and shall enter into force by 30 June 2017.
Article 461a
Alternative standardised approach for market risk
#### For the purposes of the reporting requirements set out in Article 430b(1), the Commission is empowered to adopt delegated acts in accordance with Article 462, to amend this Regulation by making technical adjustments to Articles 325e, 325g to 325j, 325p, 325q, 325ae, 325ak, 325am, 325ap to 325at, 325av, 325ax, and specify the risk weight of bucket 11 of Table 4 in Article 325ah and the risk weights of covered bonds issued by credit institutions in third countries in accordance with Article 325ah, and the correlation of covered bonds issued by credit institutions in third countries in accordance with Article 325aj of the alternative standardised approach set out in Chapter 1a of Title IV of Part Three, taking into account developments in international regulatory standards.
##### The Commission shall adopt the delegated act referred to in paragraph 1 by 31 December 2019.
#### Article 462
##### Exercise of the delegation
Article 463
#### Objections to regulatory technical standards
##### Where the Commission adopts a regulatory technical standard pursuant to this Regulation which is the same as the draft regulatory technical standard submitted by EBA, the period during which the European Parliament and the Council may object to that regulatory technical standard shall be one month from the date of notification. At the initiative of the European Parliament or the Council that period shall be extended by one month. By way of derogation from the second subparagraph of Article 13(1) of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010, the period during which the European Parliament or the Council may object to that regulatory technical standard may, where appropriate, be further extended by one month.
#### Article 461a
##### Alternative standardised approach for market risk
For the purposes of the reporting requirements set out in Article 430b(1), the Commission is empowered to adopt delegated acts in accordance with Article 462, to amend this Regulation by making technical adjustments to Articles 325e, 325g to 325j, 325p, 325q, 325ae, 325ak, 325am, 325ap to 325at, 325av, 325ax, and specify the risk weight of bucket 11 of Table 4 in Article 325ah and the risk weights of covered bonds issued by credit institutions in third countries in accordance with Article 325ah, and the correlation of covered bonds issued by credit institutions in third countries in accordance with Article 325aj of the alternative standardised approach set out in Chapter 1a of Title IV of Part Three, taking into account developments in international regulatory standards.
#### The Commission shall adopt the delegated act referred to in paragraph 1 by 31 December 2019.
##### Article 462
## Exercise of the delegation
### Article 463
## Objections to regulatory technical standards
### Where the Commission adopts a regulatory technical standard pursuant to this Regulation which is the same as the draft regulatory technical standard submitted by EBA, the period during which the European Parliament and the Council may object to that regulatory technical standard shall be one month from the date of notification. At the initiative of the European Parliament or the Council that period shall be extended by one month. By way of derogation from the second subparagraph of Article 13(1) of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010, the period during which the European Parliament or the Council may object to that regulatory technical standard may, where appropriate, be further extended by one month.
## Article 464
@@ -12365,37 +13935,37 @@
### TRANSITIONAL PROVISIONS, REPORTS, REVIEWS AND AMENDMENTS
## TITLE I
### TRANSITIONAL PROVISIONS
## CHAPTER 1
### Own funds requirements, unrealised gains and losses measured at fair value and deductions
#### Section 1
##### Own funds requirements
Article 465
#### TITLE I
##### TRANSITIONAL PROVISIONS
CHAPTER 1
Own funds requirements, unrealised gains and losses measured at fair value and deductions
Section 1
#### Own funds requirements
##### Article 465
Own funds requirements
By way of derogation from points (a) and (b) of Article 92(1) the following own funds requirements shall apply during the period from 1 January 2014 to 31 December 2014:
#### (a) a Common Equity Tier 1 capital ratio of a level that falls within a range of 4 % to 4,5 %;
##### (b) a Tier 1 capital ratio of a level that falls within a range of 5,5 % to 6 %.
Article 466
## First time application of International Financial Reporting Standards
### By way of derogation from Article 24(2), competent authorities shall grant institutions which are required to effect the valuation of assets and off-balance sheet items and the determination of own funds in accordance with the international accounting standards as applicable under Regulation (EC) No 1606/2002 for the first time a lead time of 24 months for the implementation of the necessary internal processes and technical requirements.
#### Section 2
##### Unrealised gains and losses measured at fair value
## By way of derogation from points (a) and (b) of Article 92(1) the following own funds requirements shall apply during the period from 1 January 2014 to 31 December 2014:
### (a) a Common Equity Tier 1 capital ratio of a level that falls within a range of 4 % to 4,5 %;
#### (b) a Tier 1 capital ratio of a level that falls within a range of 5,5 % to 6 %.
##### Article 466
First time application of International Financial Reporting Standards
By way of derogation from Article 24(2), competent authorities shall grant institutions which are required to effect the valuation of assets and off-balance sheet items and the determination of own funds in accordance with the international accounting standards as applicable under Regulation (EC) No 1606/2002 for the first time a lead time of 24 months for the implementation of the necessary internal processes and technical requirements.
Section 2
Unrealised gains and losses measured at fair value
Article 468
@@ -12409,25 +13979,25 @@
(a) 1 during the period from 1 January 2020 to 31 December 2020;
(b) 0,7 during the period from 1 January 2021 to 31 December 2021;
(c) 0,4 during the period from 1 January 2022 to 31 December 2022.
Where an institution removes an amount of unrealised losses from its Common Equity Tier 1 items in accordance with paragraph 1 of this Article, it shall recalculate all requirements laid down in this Regulation and in Directive 2013/36/EU that are calculated using any of the following items:
(a) the amount of deferred tax assets that is deducted from Common Equity Tier 1 items in accordance with point (c) of Article 36(1) or risk weighted in accordance with Article 48(4);
## (b) the amount of specific credit risk adjustments.
### When recalculating the relevant requirement, the institution shall not take into account the effects that the expected credit loss provisions relating to exposures to central governments, to regional governments or to local authorities referred to in Article 115(2) of this Regulation and to public sector entities referred to in Article 116(4) of this Regulation, excluding those financial assets that are credit-impaired as defined in Appendix A to the Annex relating to IFRS 9, have on those items.
## Section 3
### Deductions
#### Sub-Section 1
##### Deductions from Common Equity Tier 1 items
## (b) 0,7 during the period from 1 January 2021 to 31 December 2021;
### (c) 0,4 during the period from 1 January 2022 to 31 December 2022.
## Where an institution removes an amount of unrealised losses from its Common Equity Tier 1 items in accordance with paragraph 1 of this Article, it shall recalculate all requirements laid down in this Regulation and in Directive 2013/36/EU that are calculated using any of the following items:
### (a) the amount of deferred tax assets that is deducted from Common Equity Tier 1 items in accordance with point (c) of Article 36(1) or risk weighted in accordance with Article 48(4);
#### (b) the amount of specific credit risk adjustments.
##### When recalculating the relevant requirement, the institution shall not take into account the effects that the expected credit loss provisions relating to exposures to central governments, to regional governments or to local authorities referred to in Article 115(2) of this Regulation and to public sector entities referred to in Article 116(4) of this Regulation, excluding those financial assets that are credit-impaired as defined in Appendix A to the Annex relating to IFRS 9, have on those items.
Section 3
Deductions
Sub-Section 1
Deductions from Common Equity Tier 1 items
Article 469
@@ -12443,9 +14013,9 @@
(d) institutions shall apply the requirements laid down in Article 472(5) or (11), as applicable, to the total residual amount of items required to be deducted pursuant to points (c) and (i) of Article 36(1) after applying Article 470.
Institutions shall determine the portion of the total residual amount referred to in point (d) of paragraph 1, that is subject to Article 472(5), by dividing the amount specified in point (a) of this paragraph by the amount specified in point (b) of this paragraph:
(a) the amount of deferred tax assets that are dependent on future profitability and arise from temporary differences referred to in point (a) of Article 470(2);
#### Institutions shall determine the portion of the total residual amount referred to in point (d) of paragraph 1, that is subject to Article 472(5), by dividing the amount specified in point (a) of this paragraph by the amount specified in point (b) of this paragraph:
##### (a) the amount of deferred tax assets that are dependent on future profitability and arise from temporary differences referred to in point (a) of Article 470(2);
(b) the sum of the amounts referred to in points (a) and (b) of Article 470(2).
@@ -12459,33 +14029,33 @@
Derogation from deductions from Common Equity Tier 1 items for non-performing exposures
#### By way of derogation from point (m) Article 36(1), institutions shall not deduct from Common Equity Tier 1 items the applicable amount of insufficient coverage for non-performing exposures where the exposure was originated prior to 26 April 2019.
##### Where the terms and conditions of an exposure which was originated prior to 26 April 2019 are modified by the institution in a way that increases the institution's exposure to the obligor, the exposure shall be considered as having been originated on the date when the modification applies and shall cease to be subject to the derogation provided for in the first subparagraph.
Article 470
By way of derogation from point (m) Article 36(1), institutions shall not deduct from Common Equity Tier 1 items the applicable amount of insufficient coverage for non-performing exposures where the exposure was originated prior to 26 April 2019.
#### Where the terms and conditions of an exposure which was originated prior to 26 April 2019 are modified by the institution in a way that increases the institution's exposure to the obligor, the exposure shall be considered as having been originated on the date when the modification applies and shall cease to be subject to the derogation provided for in the first subparagraph.
##### Article 470
Exemption from deduction from Common Equity Tier 1 items
By way of derogation from Article 48(1), during the period from 1 January 2014 to 31 December 2017, institutions shall not deduct the items listed in points (a) and (b) of this paragraph which in aggregate are equal to or less than 15 % of relevant Common Equity Tier 1 items of the institution:
#### (a) deferred tax assets that are dependent on future profitability and arise from temporary differences and in aggregate are equal to or less than 10 % of relevant Common Equity Tier 1 items;
##### (b) where an institution has a significant investment in a financial sector entity, the direct, indirect and synthetic holdings by the institution of the Common Equity Tier 1 instruments of that entity that in aggregate are equal to or less than 10 % of relevant Common Equity Tier 1 items.
(a) deferred tax assets that are dependent on future profitability and arise from temporary differences and in aggregate are equal to or less than 10 % of relevant Common Equity Tier 1 items;
(b) where an institution has a significant investment in a financial sector entity, the direct, indirect and synthetic holdings by the institution of the Common Equity Tier 1 instruments of that entity that in aggregate are equal to or less than 10 % of relevant Common Equity Tier 1 items.
Article 471
Exemption from Deduction of Equity Holdings in Insurance Companies from Common Equity Tier 1 Items
By way of derogation from Article 49(1), during the period from 31 December 2018 to 31 December 2024, institutions may choose not to deduct equity holdings in insurance undertakings, reinsurance undertakings and insurance holding companies where the following conditions are met:
#### Exemption from Deduction of Equity Holdings in Insurance Companies from Common Equity Tier 1 Items
##### By way of derogation from Article 49(1), during the period from 31 December 2018 to 31 December 2024, institutions may choose not to deduct equity holdings in insurance undertakings, reinsurance undertakings and insurance holding companies where the following conditions are met:
(a) the conditions set out in points (a), and (e) of Article 49(1);
(b) the competent authorities are satisfied with the level of risk control and financial analysis procedures specifically adopted by the institution in order to supervise the investment in the undertaking or holding company;
#### (c) the equity holdings of the institution in the insurance undertaking, reinsurance undertaking or insurance holding company do not exceed 15 % of the Common Equity Tier 1 instruments issued by that insurance entity as at 31 December 2012 and during the period from 1 January 2013 to 31 December 2024;
##### (d) the amount of the equity holding which is not deducted does not exceed the amount held in the Common Equity Tier 1 instruments in the insurance undertaking, reinsurance undertaking or insurance holding company as at 31 December 2012.
(c) the equity holdings of the institution in the insurance undertaking, reinsurance undertaking or insurance holding company do not exceed 15 % of the Common Equity Tier 1 instruments issued by that insurance entity as at 31 December 2012 and during the period from 1 January 2013 to 31 December 2024;
(d) the amount of the equity holding which is not deducted does not exceed the amount held in the Common Equity Tier 1 instruments in the insurance undertaking, reinsurance undertaking or insurance holding company as at 31 December 2012.
Article 472
@@ -12509,17 +14079,17 @@
(b) where an institution has a significant investment in that financial sector entity, the amount of its holdings of Common Equity Tier 1 instruments of that entity is treated as falling under point (i) of Article 36(1).
Institutions shall apply the following to the residual amounts of items referred to in point (h) of Article 36(1):
#### Institutions shall apply the following to the residual amounts of items referred to in point (h) of Article 36(1):
##### (a) the amounts required to be deducted that relate to direct holdings are deducted half from Tier 1 items and half from Tier 2 items;
(b) the amounts that relate to indirect and synthetic holdings are not deducted and are subject to a risk weights in accordance with Chapter 2 or 3 of Title II of Part Three and to the requirements laid down in Title IV of Part Three, as applicable.
Institutions shall apply the following to the residual amounts of the items referred to in point (i) of Article 36(1):
(a) the amounts required to be deducted that relate to direct holdings are deducted half from Tier 1 items and half from Tier 2 items;
(b) the amounts that relate to indirect and synthetic holdings are not deducted and are subject to a risk weights in accordance with Chapter 2 or 3 of Title II of Part Three and to the requirements laid down in Title IV of Part Three, as applicable.
Institutions shall apply the following to the residual amounts of the items referred to in point (i) of Article 36(1):
#### (a) the amounts required to be deducted that relate to direct holdings are deducted half from Tier 1 items and half from Tier 2 items;
##### (b) the amounts that relate to indirect and synthetic holdings are not deducted and are subject to risk weights in accordance with Chapter 2 or 3 of Title II of Part Three and to the requirements laid down in Title IV of Part Three, as applicable.
(b) the amounts that relate to indirect and synthetic holdings are not deducted and are subject to risk weights in accordance with Chapter 2 or 3 of Title II of Part Three and to the requirements laid down in Title IV of Part Three, as applicable.
Article 473
@@ -12527,21 +14097,21 @@
The applicable amount shall be calculated by deducting from the sum derived in accordance with point (a) the sum derived in accordance with point (b):
(a) institutions shall determine the values of the assets of their defined benefit pension funds or plans, as applicable, in accordance with Regulation (EC) No 1126/2008 (<sup>24</sup>) as amended by Regulation (EU) No 1205/2011 (<sup>25</sup>). Institutions shall then deduct from the values of these assets the values of the obligations under the same funds or plans determined according to the same accounting rules;
(a) institutions shall determine the values of the assets of their defined benefit pension funds or plans, as applicable, in accordance with Regulation (EC) No 1126/2008 (<sup>27</sup>) as amended by Regulation (EU) No 1205/2011 (<sup>28</sup>). Institutions shall then deduct from the values of these assets the values of the obligations under the same funds or plans determined according to the same accounting rules;
(b) institutions shall determine the values of the assets of their defined pension funds or plans, as applicable, in accordance with the rules set out in Regulation (EC) No 1126/2008. Institutions shall then deduct from the values of those assets, the values of the obligations under the same funds or plans determined in accordance with the same accounting rules.
The following factors apply:
(a) 1 in the period from 1 January 2014 to 31 December 2014;
#### The following factors apply:
##### (a) 1 in the period from 1 January 2014 to 31 December 2014;
(b) 0,8 in the period from 1 January 2015 to 31 December 2015;
(c) 0,6 in the period from 1 January 2016 to 31 December 2016;
#### (d) 0,4 in the period from 1 January 2017 to 31 December 2017;
##### (e) 0,2 in the period from 1 January 2018 to 31 December 2018.
(d) 0,4 in the period from 1 January 2017 to 31 December 2017;
(e) 0,2 in the period from 1 January 2018 to 31 December 2018.
Article 473a
@@ -12627,34 +14197,34 @@
(a) the amount of deferred tax assets that is deducted from Common Equity Tier 1 capital in accordance with point (c) of Article 36(1) or risk weighted in accordance with Article 48(4);
(b) the exposure value as determined in accordance with Article 111(1) whereby the specific credit risk adjustments by which the exposure value shall be reduced shall be multiplied by the following scaling factor (sf):
## (b) the exposure value as determined in accordance with Article 111(1) whereby the specific credit risk adjustments by which the exposure value shall be reduced shall be multiplied by the following scaling factor (sf):
where:
ABSA = the amount calculated in accordance with point (a) of the second subparagraph of paragraph 1;
RASA = the total amount of specific credit risk adjustments;
(c) the amount of Tier 2 items calculated in accordance with point (d) of Article 62.
Institutions may choose only once whether to use the calculation set out in point (b) of paragraph 7 or the calculation set out in the first subparagraph of this paragraph. Institutions shall disclose their decision.
An institution that has decided to apply the transitional arrangements set out in this Article may decide not to apply paragraph 4 in which case it shall inform the competent authority of its decision by 1 February 2018. In such a case, the institution shall set A4,SA, A4,IRB, , , t2 and t3 referred to in paragraph 1 as equal to zero. Where an institution has received the prior permission of the competent authority, it may reverse its decision during the transitional period. Institutions shall publicly disclose any decision taken in accordance with this subparagraph.
## An institution that has decided to apply the transitional arrangements set out in this Article may decide not to apply paragraph 2 in which case it shall inform the competent authority of its decision without delay. In such a case, the institution shall set A2,SA, A2,IRB and t1 referred to in paragraph 1 as equal to zero. An institution may reverse its decision during the transitional period provided it has received the prior permission of the competent authority.
### Competent authorities shall notify EBA at least on an annual basis of the application of this Article by institutions under their supervision.
#### Sub-Section 2
##### Deductions from Additional Tier 1 items
Article 474
### (c) the amount of Tier 2 items calculated in accordance with point (d) of Article 62.
#### Institutions may choose only once whether to use the calculation set out in point (b) of paragraph 7 or the calculation set out in the first subparagraph of this paragraph. Institutions shall disclose their decision.
##### An institution that has decided to apply the transitional arrangements set out in this Article may decide not to apply paragraph 4 in which case it shall inform the competent authority of its decision by 1 February 2018. In such a case, the institution shall set A4,SA, A4,IRB, , , t2 and t3 referred to in paragraph 1 as equal to zero. Where an institution has received the prior permission of the competent authority, it may reverse its decision during the transitional period. Institutions shall publicly disclose any decision taken in accordance with this subparagraph.
An institution that has decided to apply the transitional arrangements set out in this Article may decide not to apply paragraph 2 in which case it shall inform the competent authority of its decision without delay. In such a case, the institution shall set A2,SA, A2,IRB and t1 referred to in paragraph 1 as equal to zero. An institution may reverse its decision during the transitional period provided it has received the prior permission of the competent authority.
Competent authorities shall notify EBA at least on an annual basis of the application of this Article by institutions under their supervision.
Sub-Section 2
#### Deductions from Additional Tier 1 items
##### Article 474
Deductions from Additional Tier 1 items
By way of derogation from Article 56, during the period from 1 January 2014 to 31 December 2017, the following shall apply:
#### (a) institutions shall deduct from Additional Tier 1 items the applicable percentage specified in Article 478 of the amounts required to be deducted pursuant to Article 56;
##### (b) institutions shall apply the requirements laid down in Article 475 to the residual amounts of the items required to be deducted pursuant to Article 56.
(a) institutions shall deduct from Additional Tier 1 items the applicable percentage specified in Article 478 of the amounts required to be deducted pursuant to Article 56;
(b) institutions shall apply the requirements laid down in Article 475 to the residual amounts of the items required to be deducted pursuant to Article 56.
Article 475
@@ -12666,31 +14236,31 @@
(b) indirect and synthetic holdings of own Additional Tier 1 instruments, including own Additional Tier 1 instruments that an institution could be obliged to purchase by virtue of an existing or contingent contractual obligation, are not deducted and are risk weighted in accordance with Chapter 2 or 3 of Title II of Part Three and subject to the requirements of Title IV of Part Three, as applicable.
Institutions shall apply the following to the residual amount of the items referred to in point (b) of Article 56:
(a) where an institution does not have a significant investment in a financial sector entity with which it has reciprocal cross holdings, the amount of its direct, indirect and synthetic holdings of those Additional Tier 1 instruments of that entity is treated as falling within point (c) of Article 56;
(b) where the institution has a significant investment in a financial sector entity with which it has reciprocal cross holdings, the amount of its direct, indirect and synthetic holdings of those Additional Tier 1 instruments of that entity is treated as falling within point (d) of Article 56.
Institutions shall apply the following to the residual amount of the items referred to in points (c) and (d) of Article 56:
## (a) the amount relating to direct holdings required to be deducted in accordance with points (c) and (d) of Article 56 are deducted half from Tier 1 items and half from Tier 2 items;
### (b) the amount relating to indirect and synthetic holdings required to be deducted in accordance with points (c) and (d) of Article 56 shall not be deducted and shall be subject to a risk weight in accordance with Chapter 2 or 3 of Title II of Part Three and to the requirements of Title IV of Part Three, as applicable.
#### Sub-Section 3
##### Deductions from Tier 2 items
Article 476
## Institutions shall apply the following to the residual amount of the items referred to in point (b) of Article 56:
### (a) where an institution does not have a significant investment in a financial sector entity with which it has reciprocal cross holdings, the amount of its direct, indirect and synthetic holdings of those Additional Tier 1 instruments of that entity is treated as falling within point (c) of Article 56;
#### (b) where the institution has a significant investment in a financial sector entity with which it has reciprocal cross holdings, the amount of its direct, indirect and synthetic holdings of those Additional Tier 1 instruments of that entity is treated as falling within point (d) of Article 56.
##### Institutions shall apply the following to the residual amount of the items referred to in points (c) and (d) of Article 56:
(a) the amount relating to direct holdings required to be deducted in accordance with points (c) and (d) of Article 56 are deducted half from Tier 1 items and half from Tier 2 items;
(b) the amount relating to indirect and synthetic holdings required to be deducted in accordance with points (c) and (d) of Article 56 shall not be deducted and shall be subject to a risk weight in accordance with Chapter 2 or 3 of Title II of Part Three and to the requirements of Title IV of Part Three, as applicable.
Sub-Section 3
#### Deductions from Tier 2 items
##### Article 476
Deductions from Tier 2 items
By way of derogation from Article 66, during the period from 1 January 2014 to 31 December 2017, the following shall apply:
#### (a) institutions shall deduct from Tier 2 items the applicable percentage specified in Article 478 of the amounts required to be deducted pursuant to Article 66;
##### (b) institutions shall apply the requirements laid down in Article 477 to the residual amounts required to be deducted pursuant to Article 66.
(a) institutions shall deduct from Tier 2 items the applicable percentage specified in Article 478 of the amounts required to be deducted pursuant to Article 66;
(b) institutions shall apply the requirements laid down in Article 477 to the residual amounts required to be deducted pursuant to Article 66.
Article 477
@@ -12702,21 +14272,21 @@
(b) indirect and synthetic holdings of own Tier 2 instruments, including own Tier 2 instruments that an institution could be obliged to purchase by virtue of an existing or contingent contractual obligation are not deducted and are risk weighted in accordance with Chapter 2 or 3 of Title II of Part Three and subject to the requirements of Title IV of Part Three, as applicable.
Institutions shall apply the following to the residual amount of the items referred to in point (b) of Article 66:
(a) where an institution does not have a significant investment in a financial sector entity with which it has reciprocal cross holdings, the amount of its direct, indirect and synthetic holdings of the Tier 2 instruments of that entity is treated as falling within point (c) of Article 66;
(b) where the institution has a significant investment in a financial sector entity with which it has reciprocal cross holdings, the amount of direct, indirect and synthetic holdings of the Tier 2 instruments of that financial sector entity are treated as falling within point (d) of Article 66.
Institutions shall apply the following to the residual amount of the items referred to in points (c) and (d) of Article 66:
## (a) the amount relating to direct holdings that is required to be deducted in accordance with points (c) and (d) of Article 66 is deducted half from Tier 1 items and half from Tier 2 items;
### (b) the amount relating to indirect and synthetic holdings that is required to be deducted in accordance with points (c) and (d) of Article 66 is not be deducted and is subject to a risk weight under Chapter 2 or 3 of Title II of Part Three and the requirements laid down in Title IV of Part Three, as applicable.
#### Sub-Section 4
##### Applicable percentages for deduction
## Institutions shall apply the following to the residual amount of the items referred to in point (b) of Article 66:
### (a) where an institution does not have a significant investment in a financial sector entity with which it has reciprocal cross holdings, the amount of its direct, indirect and synthetic holdings of the Tier 2 instruments of that entity is treated as falling within point (c) of Article 66;
#### (b) where the institution has a significant investment in a financial sector entity with which it has reciprocal cross holdings, the amount of direct, indirect and synthetic holdings of the Tier 2 instruments of that financial sector entity are treated as falling within point (d) of Article 66.
##### Institutions shall apply the following to the residual amount of the items referred to in points (c) and (d) of Article 66:
(a) the amount relating to direct holdings that is required to be deducted in accordance with points (c) and (d) of Article 66 is deducted half from Tier 1 items and half from Tier 2 items;
(b) the amount relating to indirect and synthetic holdings that is required to be deducted in accordance with points (c) and (d) of Article 66 is not be deducted and is subject to a risk weight under Chapter 2 or 3 of Title II of Part Three and the requirements laid down in Title IV of Part Three, as applicable.
Sub-Section 4
Applicable percentages for deduction
Article 478
@@ -12752,21 +14322,21 @@
(i) 80 % to 100 % for the period from 1 January 2022 to 31 December 2022;
(j) 90 % to 100 % for the period from 1 January 2023 to 31 December 2023.
Competent authorities shall determine and publish an applicable percentage in the ranges specified in paragraphs 1 and 2 for each of the following deductions:
(a) the individual deductions required pursuant to points (a) to (h) of Article 36(1), excluding deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability and arise from temporary differences;
(b) the aggregate amount of deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability and arise from temporary differences and the items referred to in point (i) of Article 36(1) that is required to be deducted pursuant to Article 48;
## (c) each deduction required pursuant to points (b) to (d) of Article 56;
### (d) each deduction required pursuant to points (b) to (d) of Article 66.
#### Section 4
##### minority interest and additional Tier 1 and Tier 2 instruments issued by subsidiaries
## (j) 90 % to 100 % for the period from 1 January 2023 to 31 December 2023.
### Competent authorities shall determine and publish an applicable percentage in the ranges specified in paragraphs 1 and 2 for each of the following deductions:
#### (a) the individual deductions required pursuant to points (a) to (h) of Article 36(1), excluding deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability and arise from temporary differences;
##### (b) the aggregate amount of deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability and arise from temporary differences and the items referred to in point (i) of Article 36(1) that is required to be deducted pursuant to Article 48;
(c) each deduction required pursuant to points (b) to (d) of Article 56;
(d) each deduction required pursuant to points (b) to (d) of Article 66.
Section 4
minority interest and additional Tier 1 and Tier 2 instruments issued by subsidiaries
Article 479
@@ -12780,35 +14350,35 @@
(c) the items do not qualify because the subsidiary is not an institution or an entity that is subject by virtue of applicable national law to the requirements of this Regulation and Directive 2013/36/EU;
(d) the items do not qualify because the subsidiary is not included fully in the consolidation pursuant to Chapter 2 of Title II of Part One.
For the purposes of paragraph 2, the applicable percentages shall fall within the following ranges:
#### (d) the items do not qualify because the subsidiary is not included fully in the consolidation pursuant to Chapter 2 of Title II of Part One.
##### For the purposes of paragraph 2, the applicable percentages shall fall within the following ranges:
(a) 0 % to 80 % for the period from 1 January 2014 to 31 December 2014;
(b) 0 % to 60 % for the period from 1 January 2015 to 31 December 2015;
#### (c) 0 % to 40 % for the period from 1 January 2016 to 31 December 2016;
##### (d) 0 % to 20 % for the period from 1 January 2017 to 31 December 2017.
(c) 0 % to 40 % for the period from 1 January 2016 to 31 December 2016;
(d) 0 % to 20 % for the period from 1 January 2017 to 31 December 2017.
Article 480
Recognition in consolidated own funds of minority interests and qualifying Additional Tier 1 and Tier 2 capital
For the purposes of paragraph 1, the applicable factor shall fall within the following ranges:
(a) 0,2 to 1 in the period from 1 January 2014 to 31 December 2014;
(b) 0,4 to 1 in the period from 1 January 2015 to 31 December 2015;
## (c) 0,6 to 1 in the period from 1 January 2016 to 31 December 2016; and
### (d) 0,8 to 1 in the period from 1 January 2017 to 31 December 2017.
#### Section 5
##### Additional filters and deductions
## Recognition in consolidated own funds of minority interests and qualifying Additional Tier 1 and Tier 2 capital
### For the purposes of paragraph 1, the applicable factor shall fall within the following ranges:
#### (a) 0,2 to 1 in the period from 1 January 2014 to 31 December 2014;
##### (b) 0,4 to 1 in the period from 1 January 2015 to 31 December 2015;
(c) 0,6 to 1 in the period from 1 January 2016 to 31 December 2016; and
(d) 0,8 to 1 in the period from 1 January 2017 to 31 December 2017.
Section 5
Additional filters and deductions
Article 481
@@ -12816,31 +14386,31 @@
For the purposes of paragraph 1, the applicable percentage shall fall within the following ranges:
(a) 0 % to 80 % for the period from 1 January 2014 to 31 December 2014;
(b) 0 % to 60 % for the period from 1 January 2015 to 31 December 2015;
#### (a) 0 % to 80 % for the period from 1 January 2014 to 31 December 2014;
##### (b) 0 % to 60 % for the period from 1 January 2015 to 31 December 2015;
(c) 0 % to 40 % for the period from 1 January 2016 to 31 December 2016;
(d) 0 % to 20 % for the period from 1 January 2017 to 31 December 2017.
#### EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 28 July 2013.
##### Power is delegated to the Commission to adopt the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
Article 482
## Scope of application for derivatives transactions with pension funds
### In respect of those transactions referred to in Article 89 of Regulation (EU) No 648/2012 and entered into with a pension scheme arrangement as defined in Article 2 of that Regulation, institutions shall not calculate own funds requirements for CVA risk as provided for in Article 382(4)(c) of this Regulation.
## CHAPTER 2
### Grandfathering of capital instruments
#### Section 1
##### Instruments constituting State aid
## (d) 0 % to 20 % for the period from 1 January 2017 to 31 December 2017.
### EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 28 July 2013.
## Power is delegated to the Commission to adopt the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
### Article 482
#### Scope of application for derivatives transactions with pension funds
##### In respect of those transactions referred to in Article 89 of Regulation (EU) No 648/2012 and entered into with a pension scheme arrangement as defined in Article 2 of that Regulation, institutions shall not calculate own funds requirements for CVA risk as provided for in Article 382(4)(c) of this Regulation.
CHAPTER 2
Grandfathering of capital instruments
Section 1
Instruments constituting State aid
Article 483
@@ -12856,33 +14426,33 @@
Where the instruments are subscribed by both the Member State and private investors and there is a partial redemption of the instruments subscribed by the Member State, a corresponding share of the privately subscribed part of the instruments shall be grandfathered in accordance with Article 484. When all the instruments subscribed by the Member State have been redeemed, the remaining instruments subscribed by private investors shall be grandfathered in accordance with Article 484.
Instruments that qualified in accordance with the national transposition measures for point (a) of Article 57 of Directive 2006/48/EC shall qualify as Common Equity Tier 1 instruments notwithstanding either of the following:
(a) the conditions laid down in Article 28 of this Regulation are not met;
(b) the instruments were issued by an undertaking referred to in Article 27 of this Regulation and the conditions laid down in Article 28 of this Regulation or, where applicable, Article 29 of this Regulation are not met.
Instruments that qualify as Common Equity Tier 1 pursuant to the first subparagraph shall not qualify as Additional Tier 1 instruments or Tier 2 instruments under paragraph 5 or 7.
## Instruments that qualify as Additional Tier 1 instruments pursuant to the first subparagraph shall not qualify as Common Equity Tier 1 instruments or Tier 2 instruments under paragraph 3 or 7.
### Instruments that qualify as Tier 2 instruments pursuant to the first subparagraph shall not qualify as Common Equity Tier 1 instruments or Additional Tier 1 instruments under paragraph 3 or 5.
## Section 2
### Instruments not constituting State aid
## Instruments that qualified in accordance with the national transposition measures for point (a) of Article 57 of Directive 2006/48/EC shall qualify as Common Equity Tier 1 instruments notwithstanding either of the following:
### (a) the conditions laid down in Article 28 of this Regulation are not met;
## (b) the instruments were issued by an undertaking referred to in Article 27 of this Regulation and the conditions laid down in Article 28 of this Regulation or, where applicable, Article 29 of this Regulation are not met.
### Instruments that qualify as Common Equity Tier 1 pursuant to the first subparagraph shall not qualify as Additional Tier 1 instruments or Tier 2 instruments under paragraph 5 or 7.
#### Instruments that qualify as Additional Tier 1 instruments pursuant to the first subparagraph shall not qualify as Common Equity Tier 1 instruments or Tier 2 instruments under paragraph 3 or 7.
##### Instruments that qualify as Tier 2 instruments pursuant to the first subparagraph shall not qualify as Common Equity Tier 1 instruments or Additional Tier 1 instruments under paragraph 3 or 5.
#### Section 2
##### Instruments not constituting State aid
#### Sub-Section 1
##### Grandfathering eligibility and limits
#### Article 484
##### Eligibility for grandfathering of items that qualified as own funds under national transposition measures for Directive 2006/48/EC
#### Article 485
##### Eligibility for inclusion in the Common Equity Tier 1 of share premium accounts related to items that qualified as own funds under national transposition measures for Directive 2006/48/EC
Article 484
Eligibility for grandfathering of items that qualified as own funds under national transposition measures for Directive 2006/48/EC
Article 485
Eligibility for inclusion in the Common Equity Tier 1 of share premium accounts related to items that qualified as own funds under national transposition measures for Directive 2006/48/EC
Article 486
@@ -12932,41 +14502,41 @@
(b) 40 % to 70 % during the period from 1 January 2015 to 31 December 2015;
(c) 20 % to 60 % during the period from 1 January 2016 to 31 December 2016;
(d) 0 % to 50 % during the period from 1 January 2017 to 31 December 2017;
#### (c) 20 % to 60 % during the period from 1 January 2016 to 31 December 2016;
##### (d) 0 % to 50 % during the period from 1 January 2017 to 31 December 2017;
(e) 0 % to 40 % during the period from 1 January 2018 to 31 December 2018;
(f) 0 % to 30 % during the period from 1 January 2019 to 31 December 2019;
#### (g) 0 % to 20 % during the period from 1 January 2020 to 31 December 2020;
##### (h) 0 % to 10 % during the period from 1 January 2021 to 31 December 2021.
(g) 0 % to 20 % during the period from 1 January 2020 to 31 December 2020;
(h) 0 % to 10 % during the period from 1 January 2021 to 31 December 2021.
Article 487
Items excluded from grandfathering in Common Equity Tier 1 or Additional Tier 1 items in other elements of own funds
From 1 January 2014 to 31 December 2021, institutions may, by way of derogation from Articles 51, 52, 62 and 63, treat the following as items referred to in Article 484(5), to the extent that their inclusion does not exceed the applicable percentage limit referred to in Article 486(4):
#### Items excluded from grandfathering in Common Equity Tier 1 or Additional Tier 1 items in other elements of own funds
##### From 1 January 2014 to 31 December 2021, institutions may, by way of derogation from Articles 51, 52, 62 and 63, treat the following as items referred to in Article 484(5), to the extent that their inclusion does not exceed the applicable percentage limit referred to in Article 486(4):
(a) capital, and the related share premium accounts, referred to in Article 484(3) that are excluded from Common Equity Tier 1 items because they exceed the applicable percentage specified in Article 486(2);
(b) instruments, and the related share premium accounts, referred to in Article 484(4) that exceed the applicable percentage referred to in Article 486(3).
#### EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 28 July 2013.
##### Power is delegated to the Commission to adopt the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
Article 488
## Amortisation of items grandfathered as Tier 2 items
### The items referred to in Article 484(5) that qualify as Tier 2 items referred to in Article 484(5) or Article 486(4) shall be subject to the requirements laid down in Article 64.
#### Sub-Section 2
##### Inclusion of instruments with a call and incentive to redeem in additional Tier 1 and Tier 2 items
## (b) instruments, and the related share premium accounts, referred to in Article 484(4) that exceed the applicable percentage referred to in Article 486(3).
### EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 28 July 2013.
#### Power is delegated to the Commission to adopt the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
##### Article 488
Amortisation of items grandfathered as Tier 2 items
The items referred to in Article 484(5) that qualify as Tier 2 items referred to in Article 484(5) or Article 486(4) shall be subject to the requirements laid down in Article 64.
Sub-Section 2
Inclusion of instruments with a call and incentive to redeem in additional Tier 1 and Tier 2 items
Article 489
@@ -13000,77 +14570,77 @@
(a) the institution was able to exercise a call with an incentive to redeem on or after 1 January 2013;
#### (b) the institution did not exercise the call on the date of the effective maturity of the instruments;
##### (c) the conditions laid down in Article 52 are not met from the date of the effective maturity of the instruments.
The instruments shall qualify as Additional Tier 1 instruments in accordance with Article 484(4) where the following conditions are met:
(a) the institution was able to exercise a call with an incentive to redeem only prior to or on 31 December 2011;
(b) the institution did not exercise the call on the date of the effective maturity of the instruments;
(c) the conditions laid down in Article 52 are not met from the date of the effective maturity of the instruments.
The instruments shall qualify as Additional Tier 1 instruments in accordance with Article 484(4) where the following conditions are met:
(c) the conditions laid down in Article 52 were not met from the date of the effective maturity of the instruments.
Article 490
Tier 2 items with an incentive to redeem
The items shall qualify as Tier 2 instruments provided that:
(a) the institution was able to exercise a call with an incentive to redeem only prior to 1 January 2013;
(b) the institution did not exercise the call;
(c) from 1 January 2013 the conditions laid down in Article 63 are met.
The items shall qualify as Tier 2 items in accordance with Article 484(5) until the date of their effective maturity, and shall qualify thereafter as Tier 2 items without limit, provided that the following conditions are met:
(a) the institution was able to exercise a call with an incentive to redeem only on or after 1 January 2013;
(b) the institution did not exercise the call on the date of the effective maturity of the items;
(c) the conditions laid down in Article 63 are met from the date of the effective maturity of the items.
The items shall not qualify as Tier 2 items from 1 January 2014 where the following conditions are met:
(a) the institution was able to exercise a call with an incentive to redeem only between 31 December 2011 and 1 January 2013;
(b) the institution did not exercise the call on the date of the effective maturity of the items;
(c) the conditions laid down in Article 63 are not met from the date of the effective maturity of the items.
The items shall qualify as Tier 2 items with their recognition reduced in accordance with Article 484(5) until the date of their effective maturity, and shall not qualify as Tier 2 items thereafter, where:
(a) the institution was able to exercise a call with an incentive to redeem on or after 1 January 2013;
#### (b) the institution did not exercise the call on the date of their effective maturity;
##### (c) the conditions set out in Article 63 are not met from the date of effective maturity of the items.
The items shall qualify as Tier 2 items in accordance with Article 484(5) where:
(a) the institution was able to exercise a call with an incentive to redeem only prior to or on 31 December 2011;
#### (b) the institution did not exercise the call on the date of the effective maturity of the instruments;
##### (c) the conditions laid down in Article 52 were not met from the date of the effective maturity of the instruments.
Article 490
Tier 2 items with an incentive to redeem
The items shall qualify as Tier 2 instruments provided that:
(a) the institution was able to exercise a call with an incentive to redeem only prior to 1 January 2013;
(b) the institution did not exercise the call;
(c) from 1 January 2013 the conditions laid down in Article 63 are met.
The items shall qualify as Tier 2 items in accordance with Article 484(5) until the date of their effective maturity, and shall qualify thereafter as Tier 2 items without limit, provided that the following conditions are met:
(a) the institution was able to exercise a call with an incentive to redeem only on or after 1 January 2013;
(b) the institution did not exercise the call on the date of the effective maturity of the items;
(c) the conditions laid down in Article 63 are met from the date of the effective maturity of the items.
The items shall not qualify as Tier 2 items from 1 January 2014 where the following conditions are met:
(a) the institution was able to exercise a call with an incentive to redeem only between 31 December 2011 and 1 January 2013;
(b) the institution did not exercise the call on the date of the effective maturity of the items;
(c) the conditions laid down in Article 63 are not met from the date of the effective maturity of the items.
The items shall qualify as Tier 2 items with their recognition reduced in accordance with Article 484(5) until the date of their effective maturity, and shall not qualify as Tier 2 items thereafter, where:
(a) the institution was able to exercise a call with an incentive to redeem on or after 1 January 2013;
(b) the institution did not exercise the call on the date of their effective maturity;
(c) the conditions set out in Article 63 are not met from the date of effective maturity of the items.
The items shall qualify as Tier 2 items in accordance with Article 484(5) where:
(a) the institution was able to exercise a call with an incentive to redeem only prior to or on 31 December 2011;
#### (b) the institution did not exercise the call on the date of the effective maturity of the items;
##### (c) the conditions laid down in Article 63 are not met from the date of the effective maturity of the items.
Article 491
Effective maturity
For the purposes of Articles 489 and 490, effective maturity shall be determined as follows:
(a) for the items referred to in paragraphs 3 and 5 of those Articles, the date of the first call with an incentive to redeem occurring on or after 1 January 2013;
## (b) for the items referred to in paragraph 4 of those Articles, the date of the first call with an incentive to redeem occurring between 31 December 2011 and 1 January 2013;
### (c) for the items referred to in paragraph 6 of those Articles, the date of the first call with an incentive to redeem prior to 31 December 2011.
#### CHAPTER 3
##### Transitional provisions for disclosure of own funds
## Article 491
### Effective maturity
#### For the purposes of Articles 489 and 490, effective maturity shall be determined as follows:
##### (a) for the items referred to in paragraphs 3 and 5 of those Articles, the date of the first call with an incentive to redeem occurring on or after 1 January 2013;
(b) for the items referred to in paragraph 4 of those Articles, the date of the first call with an incentive to redeem occurring between 31 December 2011 and 1 January 2013;
(c) for the items referred to in paragraph 6 of those Articles, the date of the first call with an incentive to redeem prior to 31 December 2011.
CHAPTER 3
Transitional provisions for disclosure of own funds
Article 492
@@ -13078,21 +14648,21 @@
From 1 January 2014 to 31 December 2017, institutions shall disclose the following additional information about their own funds:
(a) the nature and effect on Common Equity Tier 1 capital, Additional Tier 1 capital, Tier 2 capital and own funds of the individual filters and deductions applied in accordance with Articles 467 to 470, 474, 476 and 479;
(b) the amounts of minority interests and Additional Tier 1 and Tier 2 instruments, and related retained earnings and share premium accounts, issued by subsidiaries that are included in consolidated Common Equity Tier 1 capital, Additional Tier 1 capital, Tier 2 capital and own funds in accordance with 4 of Chapter 1;
(c) the effect on Common Equity Tier 1 capital, Additional Tier 1 capital, Tier 2 capital and own funds of the individual filters and deductions applied in accordance with Article 481;
(d) the nature and amount of items that qualify as Common Equity Tier 1 items, Tier 1 items and Tier 2 items by virtue of applying the derogations specified in Section 2 of Chapter 2.
## EBA shall submit those draft implementing technical standards to the Commission by 28 July 2013.
### Power is conferred on the Commission to adopt the implementing technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Article 15 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
#### CHAPTER 4
##### Large exposures, own funds requirements, leverage and the Basel I Floor
## (a) the nature and effect on Common Equity Tier 1 capital, Additional Tier 1 capital, Tier 2 capital and own funds of the individual filters and deductions applied in accordance with Articles 467 to 470, 474, 476 and 479;
### (b) the amounts of minority interests and Additional Tier 1 and Tier 2 instruments, and related retained earnings and share premium accounts, issued by subsidiaries that are included in consolidated Common Equity Tier 1 capital, Additional Tier 1 capital, Tier 2 capital and own funds in accordance with 4 of Chapter 1;
#### (c) the effect on Common Equity Tier 1 capital, Additional Tier 1 capital, Tier 2 capital and own funds of the individual filters and deductions applied in accordance with Article 481;
##### (d) the nature and amount of items that qualify as Common Equity Tier 1 items, Tier 1 items and Tier 2 items by virtue of applying the derogations specified in Section 2 of Chapter 2.
EBA shall submit those draft implementing technical standards to the Commission by 28 July 2013.
Power is conferred on the Commission to adopt the implementing technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Article 15 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
CHAPTER 4
Large exposures, own funds requirements, leverage and the Basel I Floor
Article 493
@@ -13104,7 +14674,7 @@
(b) asset items constituting claims on regional governments or local authorities of Member States where those claims would be assigned a 20 % risk weight under Part Three, Title II, Chapter 2 and other exposures to or guaranteed by those regional governments or local authorities, claims on which would be assigned a 20 % risk weight under Part Three, Title II, Chapter 2;
(c) exposures, including participations or other kinds of holdings, incurred by an institution to its parent undertaking, to other subsidiaries of that parent undertaking or to its own subsidiaries, in so far as those undertakings are covered by the supervision on a consolidated basis to which the institution itself is subject, in accordance with this Regulation, Directive 2002/87/EC or with equivalent standards in force in a third country. Exposures that do not meet those criteria, whether or not exempted from Article 395(1) of this Regulation, shall be treated as exposures to a third party;
(c) exposures, including participations or other kinds of holdings, incurred by an institution to its parent undertaking, to other subsidiaries of that parent undertaking or to its own subsidiaries and qualifying holdings, in so far as those undertakings are covered by the supervision on a consolidated basis to which the institution itself is subject, in accordance with this Regulation, Directive 2002/87/EC or with equivalent standards in force in a third country; exposures that do not meet those criteria, whether or not exempted from Article 395(1) of this Regulation, shall be treated as exposures to a third party;
(d) asset items constituting claims on and other exposures, including participations or other kinds of holdings, to regional or central credit institutions with which the credit institution belongs to a network in accordance with legal or statutory provisions and which are responsible, under those provisions, for cash-clearing operations within the network;
@@ -13140,27 +14710,27 @@
(c) other exposures to, or guaranteed by, central governments, central banks, or public sector entities of Member States;
(d) asset items constituting claims on regional governments or local authorities of Member States treated as exposures to a central government in accordance with Article 115(2);
(e) other exposures to, or guaranteed by, regional governments or local authorities of Member States treated as exposures to a central government in accordance with Article 115(2).
#### (d) asset items constituting claims on regional governments or local authorities of Member States treated as exposures to a central government in accordance with Article 115(2);
##### (e) other exposures to, or guaranteed by, regional governments or local authorities of Member States treated as exposures to a central government in accordance with Article 115(2).
For the purposes of points (a), (b) and (c) of the first subparagraph, the transitional arrangements set out in paragraph 4 of this Article shall apply only to asset items and other exposures to, or guaranteed by, public sector entities which are treated as exposures to a central government, a regional government or a local authority in accordance with Article 116(4). Where asset items and other exposures to, or guaranteed by, public sector entities are treated as exposures to a regional government or a local authority in accordance with Article 116(4), the transitional arrangements set out in paragraph 4 of this Article shall apply only where exposures to that regional government or local authority are treated as exposures to a central government in accordance with Article 115(2).
The transitional arrangements set out in paragraph 4 of this Article shall apply only where an exposure referred to in paragraph 5 of this Article meets all of the following conditions:
#### (a) the exposure would be assigned a risk weight of 0 % in accordance with the version of Article 495(2) in force on 31 December 2017;
##### (b) the exposure was incurred on or after 12 December 2017.
Article 494
(a) the exposure would be assigned a risk weight of 0 % in accordance with the version of Article 495(2) in force on 31 December 2017;
#### (b) the exposure was incurred on or after 12 December 2017.
##### Article 494
Transitional provisions concerning the requirement for own funds and eligible liabilities
By way of derogation from Article 92a, as from 27 June 2019 until 31 December 2021, institutions identified as resolution entities that are G-SIIs or part of a G-SII shall at all times satisfy the following requirements for own funds and eligible liabilities:
#### (a) a risk-based ratio of 16 %, representing the own funds and eligible liabilities of the institution expressed as a percentage of the total risk exposure amount calculated in accordance with Article 92(3) and (4);
##### (b) a non-risk-based ratio of 6 %, representing the own funds and eligible liabilities of the institution expressed as a percentage of the total exposure measure referred to in Article 429(4).
(a) a risk-based ratio of 16 %, representing the own funds and eligible liabilities of the institution expressed as a percentage of the total risk exposure amount calculated in accordance with Article 92(3) and (4);
(b) a non-risk-based ratio of 6 %, representing the own funds and eligible liabilities of the institution expressed as a percentage of the total exposure measure referred to in Article 429(4).
Article 494a
@@ -13170,172 +14740,182 @@
(a) the conditions set out in Article 52(1), except for the condition requiring that the instruments are directly issued by the institution;
#### (b) the instruments are issued through an entity within the consolidation pursuant to Chapter 2 of Title II of Part One;
##### (c) the proceeds are immediately available to the institution without limitation and in a form that satisfies the conditions set out in this paragraph.
#### By way of derogation from Article 63, capital instruments not issued directly by an institution shall qualify as Tier 2 instruments until 31 December 2021 only where all the following conditions are met:
##### (a) the conditions set out in Article 63(1), except for the condition requiring that the instruments are directly issued by the institution;
(b) the instruments are issued through an entity within the consolidation pursuant to Chapter 2 of Title II of Part One;
(c) the proceeds are immediately available to the institution without limitation and in a form that satisfies the conditions set out in this paragraph.
By way of derogation from Article 63, capital instruments not issued directly by an institution shall qualify as Tier 2 instruments until 31 December 2021 only where all the following conditions are met:
(a) the conditions set out in Article 63(1), except for the condition requiring that the instruments are directly issued by the institution;
#### (b) the instruments are issued through an entity within the consolidation pursuant to Chapter 2 of Title II of Part One;
##### (c) the proceeds are immediately available to the institution without limitation and in a form that satisfies the conditions set out in this paragraph.
#### Article 494b
##### Grandfathering of own funds instruments and eligible liabilities instruments
Article 494b
#### Grandfathering of own funds instruments and eligible liabilities instruments
##### Article 494c
Grandfathering of senior securitisation positions
By way of derogation from Article 270, an originator institution may calculate the risk-weighted exposure amounts of a senior securitisation position in accordance with Article 260, 262 or 264 where both the following conditions are met:
(a) the securitisation was issued before 9 April 2021;
(b) the securitisation met, on 8 April 2021, the conditions laid down in Article 270 as applicable at that date.
Article 495
Treatment of equity exposures under the IRB Approach
The exempted position shall be measured as the number of shares as at 31 December 2007 and any additional share arising directly as a result of owning those holdings, provided that they do not increase the proportional share of ownership in a portfolio company.
If an acquisition increases the proportional share of ownership in a specific holding the part of the holding which constitutes the excess shall not be subject to the exemption. Nor shall the exemption apply to holdings that were originally subject to the exemption, but have been sold and then bought back.
#### The exempted position shall be measured as the number of shares as at 31 December 2007 and any additional share arising directly as a result of owning those holdings, provided that they do not increase the proportional share of ownership in a portfolio company.
##### If an acquisition increases the proportional share of ownership in a specific holding the part of the holding which constitutes the excess shall not be subject to the exemption. Nor shall the exemption apply to holdings that were originally subject to the exemption, but have been sold and then bought back.
Equity exposures subject to this provision shall be subject to the capital requirements calculated in accordance with the Standardised Approach under Part Three, Title II, Chapter 2 and the requirements set out in Title IV of Part Three, as applicable.
Competent authorities shall notify the Commission and EBA of the implementation of this paragraph.
#### EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 30 June 2014.
##### Power is delegated to the Commission to adopt the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
Article 496
EBA shall submit those draft regulatory technical standards to the Commission by 30 June 2014.
#### Power is delegated to the Commission to adopt the regulatory technical standards referred to in the first subparagraph in accordance with Articles 10 to 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010.
##### Article 496
Own funds requirements for covered bonds
Competent authorities may waive in full or in part the 10 % limit for senior units issued by French Fonds Communs de Créances or by securitisation entities which are equivalent to French Fonds Communs de Créances laid down in points (d) and (f) of Article 129(1), provided that both of the following conditions are fulfilled:
#### (a) the securitised residential property or commercial immovable property exposures were originated by a member of the same consolidated group of which the issuer of the covered bonds is a member, or by an entity affiliated to the same central body to which the issuer of the covered bonds is affiliated, where that common group membership or affiliation shall be determined at the time the senior units are made collateral for covered bonds;
##### (b) a member of the same consolidated group of which the issuer of the covered bonds is a member, or an entity affiliated to the same central body to which the issuer of the covered bonds is affiliated, retains the whole first loss tranche supporting those senior units.
(a) the securitised residential property or commercial immovable property exposures were originated by a member of the same consolidated group of which the issuer of the covered bonds is a member, or by an entity affiliated to the same central body to which the issuer of the covered bonds is affiliated, where that common group membership or affiliation shall be determined at the time the senior units are made collateral for covered bonds;
(b) a member of the same consolidated group of which the issuer of the covered bonds is a member, or an entity affiliated to the same central body to which the issuer of the covered bonds is affiliated, retains the whole first loss tranche supporting those senior units.
Article 497
Own funds requirements for exposures to CCPs
Where a third-country CCP applies for recognition in accordance with Article 25 of Regulation (EU) No 648/2012, institutions may consider that CCP as a QCCP from the date on which it submitted its application for recognition to ESMA and until one of the following dates:
#### Own funds requirements for exposures to CCPs
##### Where a third-country CCP applies for recognition in accordance with Article 25 of Regulation (EU) No 648/2012, institutions may consider that CCP as a QCCP from the date on which it submitted its application for recognition to ESMA and until one of the following dates:
(a) where the Commission has already adopted an implementing act referred to in Article 25(6) of Regulation (EU) No 648/2012 in relation to the third country in which the CCP is established and that implementing act has entered into force, two years after the date of submission of the application;
(b) where the Commission has not yet adopted an implementing act referred to in Article 25(6) of Regulation (EU) No 648/2012 in relation to the third country in which the CCP is established or where that implementing act has not yet entered into force, the earlier of the following dates:
#### (b) where the Commission has not yet adopted an implementing act referred to in Article 25(6) of Regulation (EU) No 648/2012 in relation to the third country in which the CCP is established or where that implementing act has not yet entered into force, the earlier of the following dates:
(i) two years after the date of entry into force of the implementing act;
(ii) for CCPs that submitted the application after 27 June 2019, two years after the date of submission of the application;
(iii) for those CCPs that submitted the application before 27 June 2019, 28 June 2021.
#### Until the expiration of the deadline referred to in paragraph 1 of this Article, where a CCP referred to in that paragraph does not have a default fund and does not have in place a binding arrangement with its clearing members that allows it to use all or part of the initial margin received from its clearing members as if they were pre-funded contributions, the institution shall substitute the formula for calculating the own funds requirement in Article 308(2) with the following one:
##### Until the expiration of the deadline referred to in paragraph 1 of this Article, where a CCP referred to in that paragraph does not have a default fund and does not have in place a binding arrangement with its clearing members that allows it to use all or part of the initial margin received from its clearing members as if they were pre-funded contributions, the institution shall substitute the formula for calculating the own funds requirement in Article 308(2) with the following one:
where:
Article 498
Exemption for Commodities dealers
#### Until 26 June 2021, the provisions on own funds requirements as set out in this Regulation shall not apply to investment firms the main business of which consists exclusively of the provision of investment services or activities in relation to the financial instruments set out in points (5), (6), (7), (9), (10) and (11) of Section C of Annex I to Directive 2014/65/EU and to which Directive 2004/39/EC did not apply on 31 December 2006.
##### Article 499
Leverage
By way of derogation from Articles 429 and 430, during the period between 1 January 2014 and 31 December 2021, institutions shall calculate and report the leverage ratio by using both of the following as the capital measure:
(a) Tier 1 capital;
(b) Tier 1 capital, subject to the derogations laid down in Chapters 1 and 2 of this Title.
Article 500
#### Adjustment for massive disposals
##### By way of derogation from point (a) of Article 181(1), an institution may adjust its LGD estimates by partly or fully offsetting the effect of massive disposals of defaulted exposures on realised LGDs up to the difference between the average estimated LGDs for comparable exposures in default that have not been finally liquidated and the average realised LGDs including on the basis of the losses realised due to massive disposals, as soon as all the following conditions are met:
(a) the institution has notified the competent authority of a plan providing the scale, composition and the dates of the disposals of defaulted exposures;
(b) the dates of the disposals of defaulted exposures are after 23 November 2016 but not later than 28 June 2022;
(c) the cumulative amount of defaulted exposures disposed of since the date of the first disposal in accordance with the plan referred to in point (a) has surpassed 20 % of the cumulative amount of all observed defaults as of the date of the first disposal referred to in points (a) and (b).
The adjustment referred to in the first subparagraph may only be carried out until 28 June 2022 and its effects may last for as long as the corresponding exposures are included in the institution's own LGD estimates.
Article 500a
Temporary treatment of public debt issued in the currency of another Member State
By way of derogation from Article 114(2), until 31 December 2024, for exposures to the central governments and central banks of Member States, where those exposures are denominated and funded in the domestic currency of another Member State, the following apply:
(a) until 31 December 2022, the risk weight applied to the exposure values shall be 0 % of the risk weight assigned to those exposures in accordance with Article 114(2);
(b) in 2023, the risk weight applied to the exposure values shall be 20 % of the risk weight assigned to those exposures in accordance with Article 114(2);
#### (c) in 2024, the risk weight applied to the exposure values shall be 50 % of the risk weight assigned to those exposures in accordance with Article 114(2).
##### By way of derogation from Articles 395(1) and 493(4), competent authorities may allow institutions to incur exposures referred to in paragraph 1 of this Article, up to the following limits:
(a) 100 % of the institution’s Tier 1 capital until 31 December 2023;
(b) 75 % of the institution’s Tier 1 capital between 1 January and 31 December 2024;
(c) 50 % of the institution’s Tier 1 capital between 1 January and 31 December 2025.
The limits referred to in points (a), (b) and (c) of the first subparagraph of this paragraph shall apply to exposure values after taking into account the effect of the credit risk mitigation in accordance with Articles 399 to 403.
Article 500b
Temporary exclusion of certain exposures to central banks from the total exposure measure in view of the COVID-19 pandemic
By way of derogation from Article 429(4), until 27 June 2021, an institution may exclude from its total exposure measure the following exposures to the institution’s central bank, subject to the conditions set out in paragraphs 2 and 3 of this Article:
(a) coins and banknotes constituting legal currency in the jurisdiction of the central bank;
(b) assets representing claims on the central bank, including reserves held at the central bank.
#### The amount excluded by the institution shall not exceed the daily average amount of the exposures listed in points (a) and (b) of the first subparagraph over the most recent full reserve maintenance period of the institution’s central bank.
##### An institution may exclude the exposures listed in paragraph 1 where the institution’s competent authority has determined, after consultation with the relevant central bank, and publicly declared that exceptional circumstances exist that warrant the exclusion in order to facilitate the implementation of monetary policies.
The exposures to be excluded under paragraph 1 shall meet both of the following conditions:
#### (a) they are denominated in the same currency as the deposits taken by the institution;
##### (b) their average maturity does not significantly exceed the average maturity of the deposits taken by the institution.
An institution that excludes exposures to its central bank from its total exposure measure in accordance with paragraph 1 shall also disclose the leverage ratio it would have if it did not exclude those exposures.
Article 500c
Exclusion of overshootings from the calculation of the back-testing addend in view of the COVID-19 pandemic
By way of derogation from Article 366(3), competent authorities may, in exceptional circumstances and in individual cases, permit institutions to exclude the overshootings evidenced by the institution’s back-testing on hypothetical or actual changes from the calculation of the addend set out in Article 366(3), provided that those overshootings do not result from deficiencies in the internal model and provided that they occurred between 1 January 2020 and 31 December 2021.
#### Article 500d
##### Temporary calculation of the exposure value of regular-way purchases and sales awaiting settlement in view of the COVID-19 pandemic
Institutions that, in accordance with the applicable accounting framework, apply settlement date accounting to regular-way purchases and sales which are awaiting settlement shall include in the total exposure measure the full nominal value of commitments to pay related to regular-way purchases.
Institutions may offset the full nominal value of commitments to pay related to regular-way purchases by the full nominal value of cash receivables related to regular-way sales awaiting settlement only where both of the following conditions are met:
(a) both the regular-way purchases and sales are settled on a delivery-versus-payment basis;
(b) the financial assets bought and sold that are associated with cash payables and receivables are measured at fair value through profit or loss and included in the institution’s trading book.
Article 501
Adjustment of risk-weighted non-defaulted SME exposures
#### Institutions shall adjust the risk-weighted exposure amounts for non-defaulted exposures to an SME (RWEA), which are calculated in accordance with Chapter 2 or 3 of Title II of Part Three, as applicable, in accordance with the following formula:
##### where:
Article 498
#### Exemption for Commodities dealers
##### Until 26 June 2021, the provisions on own funds requirements as set out in this Regulation shall not apply to investment firms the main business of which consists exclusively of the provision of investment services or activities in relation to the financial instruments set out in points (5), (6), (7), (9), (10) and (11) of Section C of Annex I to Directive 2014/65/EU and to which Directive 2004/39/EC did not apply on 31 December 2006.
Article 499
Leverage
By way of derogation from Articles 429 and 430, during the period between 1 January 2014 and 31 December 2021, institutions shall calculate and report the leverage ratio by using both of the following as the capital measure:
#### (a) Tier 1 capital;
##### (b) Tier 1 capital, subject to the derogations laid down in Chapters 1 and 2 of this Title.
Article 500
Adjustment for massive disposals
By way of derogation from point (a) of Article 181(1), an institution may adjust its LGD estimates by partly or fully offsetting the effect of massive disposals of defaulted exposures on realised LGDs up to the difference between the average estimated LGDs for comparable exposures in default that have not been finally liquidated and the average realised LGDs including on the basis of the losses realised due to massive disposals, as soon as all the following conditions are met:
(a) the institution has notified the competent authority of a plan providing the scale, composition and the dates of the disposals of defaulted exposures;
(b) the dates of the disposals of defaulted exposures are after 23 November 2016 but not later than 28 June 2022;
#### (c) the cumulative amount of defaulted exposures disposed of since the date of the first disposal in accordance with the plan referred to in point (a) has surpassed 20 % of the cumulative amount of all observed defaults as of the date of the first disposal referred to in points (a) and (b).
##### The adjustment referred to in the first subparagraph may only be carried out until 28 June 2022 and its effects may last for as long as the corresponding exposures are included in the institution's own LGD estimates.
Article 500a
Temporary treatment of public debt issued in the currency of another Member State
By way of derogation from Article 114(2), until 31 December 2024, for exposures to the central governments and central banks of Member States, where those exposures are denominated and funded in the domestic currency of another Member State, the following apply:
(a) until 31 December 2022, the risk weight applied to the exposure values shall be 0 % of the risk weight assigned to those exposures in accordance with Article 114(2);
(b) in 2023, the risk weight applied to the exposure values shall be 20 % of the risk weight assigned to those exposures in accordance with Article 114(2);
(c) in 2024, the risk weight applied to the exposure values shall be 50 % of the risk weight assigned to those exposures in accordance with Article 114(2).
By way of derogation from Articles 395(1) and 493(4), competent authorities may allow institutions to incur exposures referred to in paragraph 1 of this Article, up to the following limits:
(a) 100 % of the institution’s Tier 1 capital until 31 December 2023;
(b) 75 % of the institution’s Tier 1 capital between 1 January and 31 December 2024;
#### (c) 50 % of the institution’s Tier 1 capital between 1 January and 31 December 2025.
##### The limits referred to in points (a), (b) and (c) of the first subparagraph of this paragraph shall apply to exposure values after taking into account the effect of the credit risk mitigation in accordance with Articles 399 to 403.
Article 500b
Temporary exclusion of certain exposures to central banks from the total exposure measure in view of the COVID-19 pandemic
By way of derogation from Article 429(4), until 27 June 2021, an institution may exclude from its total exposure measure the following exposures to the institution’s central bank, subject to the conditions set out in paragraphs 2 and 3 of this Article:
(a) coins and banknotes constituting legal currency in the jurisdiction of the central bank;
(b) assets representing claims on the central bank, including reserves held at the central bank.
The amount excluded by the institution shall not exceed the daily average amount of the exposures listed in points (a) and (b) of the first subparagraph over the most recent full reserve maintenance period of the institution’s central bank.
An institution may exclude the exposures listed in paragraph 1 where the institution’s competent authority has determined, after consultation with the relevant central bank, and publicly declared that exceptional circumstances exist that warrant the exclusion in order to facilitate the implementation of monetary policies.
The exposures to be excluded under paragraph 1 shall meet both of the following conditions:
(a) they are denominated in the same currency as the deposits taken by the institution;
#### (b) their average maturity does not significantly exceed the average maturity of the deposits taken by the institution.
##### An institution that excludes exposures to its central bank from its total exposure measure in accordance with paragraph 1 shall also disclose the leverage ratio it would have if it did not exclude those exposures.
Article 500c
#### Exclusion of overshootings from the calculation of the back-testing addend in view of the COVID-19 pandemic
##### By way of derogation from Article 366(3), competent authorities may, in exceptional circumstances and in individual cases, permit institutions to exclude the overshootings evidenced by the institution’s back-testing on hypothetical or actual changes from the calculation of the addend set out in Article 366(3), provided that those overshootings do not result from deficiencies in the internal model and provided that they occurred between 1 January 2020 and 31 December 2021.
Article 500d
Temporary calculation of the exposure value of regular-way purchases and sales awaiting settlement in view of the COVID-19 pandemic
Institutions that, in accordance with the applicable accounting framework, apply settlement date accounting to regular-way purchases and sales which are awaiting settlement shall include in the total exposure measure the full nominal value of commitments to pay related to regular-way purchases.
Institutions may offset the full nominal value of commitments to pay related to regular-way purchases by the full nominal value of cash receivables related to regular-way sales awaiting settlement only where both of the following conditions are met:
#### (a) both the regular-way purchases and sales are settled on a delivery-versus-payment basis;
##### (b) the financial assets bought and sold that are associated with cash payables and receivables are measured at fair value through profit or loss and included in the institution’s trading book.
Article 501
Adjustment of risk-weighted non-defaulted SME exposures
Institutions shall adjust the risk-weighted exposure amounts for non-defaulted exposures to an SME (RWEA), which are calculated in accordance with Chapter 2 or 3 of Title II of Part Three, as applicable, in accordance with the following formula:
where:
For the purposes of this Article:
(a) the exposure to an SME shall be included either in the retail or in the corporates or secured by mortgages on immovable property classes;
#### (b) an SME is defined in accordance with Commission Recommendation 2003/361/EC (<sup>27</sup>); among the criteria listed in Article 2 of the Annex to that Recommendation only the annual turnover shall be taken into account;
##### (c) institutions shall take reasonable steps to correctly determine E* and obtain the information required under point (b).
(b) an SME is defined in accordance with Commission Recommendation 2003/361/EC (<sup>30</sup>); among the criteria listed in Article 2 of the Annex to that Recommendation only the annual turnover shall be taken into account;
(c) institutions shall take reasonable steps to correctly determine E* and obtain the information required under point (b).
Article 501a
@@ -13391,7 +14971,7 @@
For the purposes of point (e) of paragraph 1, the cash flows generated shall not be considered predictable unless a substantial part of the revenues satisfies the following conditions:
(a) one of the following criteria is met:
#### (a) one of the following criteria is met:
(i) the revenues are availability-based;
(ii) the revenues are subject to a rate-of-return regulation;
(iii) the revenues are subject to a take-or-pay contract;
@@ -13400,7 +14980,7 @@
— it is contractually fixed,
— it is sufficiently predictable as a result of low demand risk;
(b) where the revenues of the obligor are not funded by payments from a large number of users, the party which agrees to purchase the goods or services provided by the obligor shall be one of the following:
##### (b) where the revenues of the obligor are not funded by payments from a large number of users, the party which agrees to purchase the goods or services provided by the obligor shall be one of the following:
(i) a central bank, a central government, a regional government or a local authority, provided that they are assigned a risk weight of 0 % in accordance with Articles 114 and 115 or are assigned an ECAI rating with a credit quality step of at least 3;
(ii) a public sector entity, provided that it is assigned a risk weight of 20 % or below in accordance with Article 116 or is assigned an ECAI rating with a credit quality step of at least 3;
(iii) a multilateral development bank referred to in Article 117(2);
@@ -13410,63 +14990,63 @@
For the purposes of paragraph 4, EBA shall report on the following to the Commission:
(a) an analysis of the evolution of the trends and conditions in markets for infrastructure lending and project finance over the period referred to in paragraph 4;
#### (b) an analysis of the effective riskiness of entities referred to in point (b) of paragraph 1 over a full economic cycle;
##### (c) the consistency of own funds requirements laid down in this Regulation with the outcomes of the analysis under points (a) and (b) of this paragraph.
Article 501b
## Derogation from reporting requirements
### By way of derogation from Article 430, during the period between the date of application of the relevant provisions of this Regulation and the date of the first remittance of reports specified in the implementing technical standards referred to in that Article, a competent authority may waive the requirement to report information in the format specified in the templates contained in the implementing act referred to in Article 430(7) where those templates have not been updated to reflect the provisions of this Regulation.
#### TITLE II
##### REPORTS AND REVIEWS
## (a) an analysis of the evolution of the trends and conditions in markets for infrastructure lending and project finance over the period referred to in paragraph 4;
### (b) an analysis of the effective riskiness of entities referred to in point (b) of paragraph 1 over a full economic cycle;
#### (c) the consistency of own funds requirements laid down in this Regulation with the outcomes of the analysis under points (a) and (b) of this paragraph.
##### Article 501b
Derogation from reporting requirements
By way of derogation from Article 430, during the period between the date of application of the relevant provisions of this Regulation and the date of the first remittance of reports specified in the implementing technical standards referred to in that Article, a competent authority may waive the requirement to report information in the format specified in the templates contained in the implementing act referred to in Article 430(7) where those templates have not been updated to reflect the provisions of this Regulation.
TITLE II
REPORTS AND REVIEWS
Article 501c
Prudential treatment of exposures related to environmental and/or social objectives
EBA, after consulting the ESRB, shall assess, on the basis of available data and the findings of the Commission High-Level Expert Group on Sustainable Finance, whether a dedicated prudential treatment of exposures related to assets or activities associated substantially with environmental and/or social objectives would be justified. In particular, EBA shall assess:
(a) methodologies for the assessment of the effective riskiness of exposures related to assets and activities associated substantially with environmental and/or social objectives compared to the riskiness of other exposure;
#### EBA, after consulting the ESRB, shall, on the basis of available data and the findings of the Commission High-Level Expert Group on Sustainable Finance, assess whether a dedicated prudential treatment of exposures related to assets, including securitisations, or activities associated substantially with environmental and/or social objectives would be justified. In particular, EBA shall assess:
##### (a) methodologies for the assessment of the effective riskiness of exposures related to assets and activities associated substantially with environmental and/or social objectives compared to the riskiness of other exposure;
(b) the development of appropriate criteria for the assessment of physical risks and transition risks, including the risks related to the depreciation of assets due to regulatory changes;
(c) the potential effects of a dedicated prudential treatment of exposures related to assets and activities which are associated substantially with environmental and/or social objectives on financial stability and bank lending in the Union.
#### EBA shall submit a report on its findings to the European Parliament, to the Council and to the Commission by 28 June 2025.
##### On the basis of that report, the Commission shall, if appropriate, submit to the European Parliament and to the Council a legislative proposal.
EBA shall submit a report on its findings to the European Parliament, to the Council and to the Commission by 28 June 2025.
On the basis of that report, the Commission shall, if appropriate, submit to the European Parliament and to the Council a legislative proposal.
Article 502
Cyclicality of capital requirements
The Commission, in cooperation with EBA, ESRB and the Member States, and taking into account the opinion of the ECB, shall periodically monitor whether this Regulation taken as a whole, together with Directive 2013/36/EU, has significant effects on the economic cycle and, in the light of that examination, shall consider whether any remedial measures are justified.
#### Cyclicality of capital requirements
##### The Commission, in cooperation with EBA, ESRB and the Member States, and taking into account the opinion of the ECB, shall periodically monitor whether this Regulation taken as a whole, together with Directive 2013/36/EU, has significant effects on the economic cycle and, in the light of that examination, shall consider whether any remedial measures are justified.
By 31 December 2013, EBA shall report to the Commission on whether, and if so how, methodologies of institutions under the IRB Approach should converge with a view to more comparable capital requirements while mitigating pro-cyclicality.
Based on that analysis and taking into account the opinion of the ECB, the Commission shall draw up a biennial report and submit it to the European Parliament and to the Council, together with any appropriate proposals. Contributions from credit taking and credit lending parties shall be adequately acknowledged when the report is drawn up.
#### By 31 December 2014, the Commission shall review, and report on, the application of Article 33(1)(c) and shall submit that report to the European Parliament and the Council, together with a legislative proposal, if appropriate.
##### With respect to the potential deletion of Article 33(1)(c) and its potential application at the Union level, the review shall in particular ensure that sufficient safeguards are in place to ensure financial stability in all Member States.
Article 503
Own funds requirements for exposures in the form of covered bonds
By 31 December 2014, the Commission shall review, and report on, the application of Article 33(1)(c) and shall submit that report to the European Parliament and the Council, together with a legislative proposal, if appropriate.
With respect to the potential deletion of Article 33(1)(c) and its potential application at the Union level, the review shall in particular ensure that sufficient safeguards are in place to ensure financial stability in all Member States.
#### Article 503
##### Own funds requirements for exposures in the form of covered bonds
The report and the proposals referred to in paragraph 1 shall take into account:
(a) the extent to which the current regulatory capital requirements applicable to covered bonds adequately differentiate between variances in the credit quality of covered bonds and the collateral against which they are secured, including the extent of variations across Member States;
#### (b) the transparency of the covered bond market and the extent to which this facilitates comprehensive internal analysis by investors in respect of the credit risk of covered bonds and the collateral against which they are secured and the asset segregation in case of the issuer's insolvency, including the mitigating effects of the underlying strict national legal framework in accordance with Article 129 of this Regulation and Article 52(4) of Directive 2009/65/EC on the overall credit quality of a covered bond and its implications on the level of transparency needed by investors; and
##### (c) the extent to which covered bond issuance by a credit institution impacts on the credit risk to which other creditors of the issuing institution are exposed.
#### (a) the extent to which the current regulatory capital requirements applicable to covered bonds adequately differentiate between variances in the credit quality of covered bonds and the collateral against which they are secured, including the extent of variations across Member States;
##### (b) the transparency of the covered bond market and the extent to which this facilitates comprehensive internal analysis by investors in respect of the credit risk of covered bonds and the collateral against which they are secured and the asset segregation in case of the issuer's insolvency, including the mitigating effects of the underlying strict national legal framework in accordance with Article 129 of this Regulation and Article 52(4) of Directive 2009/65/EC on the overall credit quality of a covered bond and its implications on the level of transparency needed by investors; and
(c) the extent to which covered bond issuance by a credit institution impacts on the credit risk to which other creditors of the issuing institution are exposed.
Article 504
@@ -13476,11 +15056,11 @@
Article 504a
Holdings of eligible liabilities instruments
#### By 28 June 2022, EBA shall report to the Commission on the amounts and distribution of holdings of eligible liabilities instruments among institutions identified as G-SIIs or O-SIIs and on potential impediments to resolution and the risk of contagion in relation to those holdings.
##### Based on the report by EBA the Commission shall, by 28 June 2023, report to the European Parliament and to the Council on the appropriate treatment of such holdings, accompanied by a legislative proposal, where appropriate.
#### Holdings of eligible liabilities instruments
##### By 28 June 2022, EBA shall report to the Commission on the amounts and distribution of holdings of eligible liabilities instruments among institutions identified as G-SIIs or O-SIIs and on potential impediments to resolution and the risk of contagion in relation to those holdings.
Based on the report by EBA the Commission shall, by 28 June 2023, report to the European Parliament and to the Council on the appropriate treatment of such holdings, accompanied by a legislative proposal, where appropriate.
Article 505
@@ -13490,27 +15070,37 @@
Article 506
Credit risk — definition of default
#### EBA shall, by 31 December 2017, report to the Commission on how replacing 90 days by 180 days past due, as provided in point (b) of Article 178(1), impacts risk-weighted exposure amounts and the appropriateness of the continued application of that provision after 31 December 2019.
##### On the basis of that report, the Commission may submit a legislative proposal to amend this Regulation.
Article 507
Large exposures
EBA shall monitor the use of exemptions set out in point (b) of Article 390(6), points (f) to (m) of Article 400(1), point (a) and points (c) to (g), (i), (j) and (k) of Article 400(2) and by 28 June 2021 submit a report to the Commission assessing the quantitative impact that the removal of those exemptions or the setting of a limit on their use would have. That report shall assess, in particular, for each exemption provided for in those Articles:
(a) the number of large exposures exempted in each Member State;
#### (b) the number of institutions that make use of the exemption in each Member State;
##### (c) the aggregate amount of exposures exempted in each Member State.
#### Article 508
##### Level of application
#### Credit risk — definition of default
##### EBA shall, by 31 December 2017, report to the Commission on how replacing 90 days by 180 days past due, as provided in point (b) of Article 178(1), impacts risk-weighted exposure amounts and the appropriateness of the continued application of that provision after 31 December 2019.
#### On the basis of that report, the Commission may submit a legislative proposal to amend this Regulation.
##### Article 506a
CIUs with an underlying portfolio of euro area sovereign bonds
In close cooperation with the ESRB and EBA, the Commission shall publish a report by 31 December 2021 in which it shall assess whether changes to the regulatory framework are needed to promote the market for, and bank purchases of, exposures in the form of units or shares in CIUs with an underlying portfolio consisting exclusively of sovereign bonds of Member States whose currency is the euro, where the relative weight of each Member States’ sovereign bonds in the total portfolio of the CIU is equal to the relative weight of each Member States’ capital contribution to the ECB.
Article 506b
NPE securitisations
#### Article 507
##### Large exposures
#### EBA shall monitor the use of exemptions set out in point (b) of Article 390(6), points (f) to (m) of Article 400(1), point (a) and points (c) to (g), (i), (j) and (k) of Article 400(2) and by 28 June 2021 submit a report to the Commission assessing the quantitative impact that the removal of those exemptions or the setting of a limit on their use would have. That report shall assess, in particular, for each exemption provided for in those Articles:
##### (a) the number of large exposures exempted in each Member State;
(b) the number of institutions that make use of the exemption in each Member State;
(c) the aggregate amount of exposures exempted in each Member State.
Article 508
Level of application
Article 509
@@ -13574,20 +15164,20 @@
(g) maximum bid/ask spread;
(h) remaining time to maturity;
(i) minimum turnover ratio.
#### (h) remaining time to maturity;
##### (i) minimum turnover ratio.
By 31 January 2014, EBA shall also report on the following:
(a) uniform definitions of high and extremely high liquidity and credit quality;
#### (b) the possible unintended consequences of the definition of liquid assets on the conduct of monetary policy operation and the extent to which:
(b) the possible unintended consequences of the definition of liquid assets on the conduct of monetary policy operation and the extent to which:
(i) a list of liquid assets that is disconnected from the list of central bank eligible assets may incentivise institutions to submit eligible assets which are not included in the definition of liquid assets in refinancing operations;
(ii) regulation of liquidity may disincentivise institutions from lending or borrowing on the unsecured money market and whether this may lead to question the targeting of EONIA in monetary policy implementation;
(iii) the introduction of the liquidity coverage requirement may make it more difficult for central banks to ensure price stability by using the existing monetary policy framework and instruments;
##### (c) the operational requirements for the holdings of liquid assets, as referred in points (b) to (f) of Article 417, in line with international regulatory developments.
(c) the operational requirements for the holdings of liquid assets, as referred in points (b) to (f) of Article 417, in line with international regulatory developments.
Article 510
@@ -13623,33 +15213,33 @@
(d) the adequacy of the asymmetric treatment between liabilities with a residual maturity of less than six months provided by financial customers that are subject to a 0 % available stable funding factor in accordance with point (c) of Article 428k(3) and assets resulting from transactions with a residual maturity of less than six months with financial customers that are subject to a 0 %, 5 % or 10 % required stable funding factor in accordance with point (g) of Article 428r(1), point (c) of Article 428s(1) and point (b) of Article 428v;
(e) the impact of the introduction of higher or lower required stable funding factors for securities financing transactions, in particular with a residual maturity of less than six months with financial customers, on the market liquidity of assets received as collateral in those transactions, in particular of sovereign and corporate bonds;
(f) the impact of the proposed changes on the amount of stable funding required for those institutions' transactions, in particular for securities financing transactions with a residual maturity of less than six months with financial customers where sovereign bonds are received as collateral in those transactions.
#### (e) the impact of the introduction of higher or lower required stable funding factors for securities financing transactions, in particular with a residual maturity of less than six months with financial customers, on the market liquidity of assets received as collateral in those transactions, in particular of sovereign and corporate bonds;
##### (f) the impact of the proposed changes on the amount of stable funding required for those institutions' transactions, in particular for securities financing transactions with a residual maturity of less than six months with financial customers where sovereign bonds are received as collateral in those transactions.
EBA shall monitor the amount of stable funding required to cover the funding risk linked to institutions' holdings of securities to hedge derivative contracts. EBA shall report on the appropriateness of the treatment by 28 June 2023. That report shall at least assess:
(a) the possible impact of the treatment on investors' ability to gain exposure to assets and the impact of the treatment on credit supply in the capital markets union;
#### (b) the opportunity to apply adjusted stable funding requirements to securities that are held to hedge derivatives which are funded by initial margin, either wholly or in part;
##### (c) the opportunity to apply adjusted stable funding requirements to securities that are held to hedge derivatives which are not funded by initial margin.
Article 511
(b) the opportunity to apply adjusted stable funding requirements to securities that are held to hedge derivatives which are funded by initial margin, either wholly or in part;
#### (c) the opportunity to apply adjusted stable funding requirements to securities that are held to hedge derivatives which are not funded by initial margin.
##### Article 511
Leverage
The Commission shall by 31 December 2020 submit a report to the European Parliament and to the Council on whether:
#### (a) it is appropriate to introduce a leverage ratio surcharge for O-SIIs; and
##### (b) the definition and calculation of the total exposure measure referred to in Article 429(4), including the treatment of central bank reserves, is appropriate.
#### The Commission shall by 31 December 2020 submit a report to the European Parliament and to the Council on whether:
##### (a) it is appropriate to introduce a leverage ratio surcharge for O-SIIs; and
(b) the definition and calculation of the total exposure measure referred to in Article 429(4), including the treatment of central bank reserves, is appropriate.
Article 512
#### Exposures to transferred credit risk
##### By 31 December 2014, the Commission shall report to the European Parliament and the Council on the application and effectiveness of the provisions of Part Five in the light of international market developments.
Exposures to transferred credit risk
By 31 December 2014, the Commission shall report to the European Parliament and the Council on the application and effectiveness of the provisions of Part Five in the light of international market developments.
Article 513
@@ -13659,53 +15249,53 @@
(a) whether the current macroprudential tools in this Regulation and in Directive 2013/36/EU are effective, efficient and transparent;
(b) whether the coverage and the possible degrees of overlap between different macroprudential tools for targeting similar risks in this Regulation and in Directive 2013/36/EU are adequate and, if appropriate, propose new macroprudential rules;
(c) how internationally agreed standards for systemic institutions interact with the provisions in this Regulation and in Directive 2013/36/EU and, if appropriate, propose new rules taking into account those internationally agreed standards;
(d) whether other types of instruments, such as borrower-based instruments, should be added to the macroprudential tools provided for in this Regulation and in Directive 2013/36/EU to complement capital-based instruments and to allow for the harmonised use of the instruments in the internal market; taking into account whether harmonised definitions of those instruments and the reporting of respective data at Union level are a prerequisite for the introduction of such instruments;
(e) whether the leverage ratio buffer requirement as referred to in Article 92(1a) should be extended to systemically important institutions other than G-SIIs, whether its calibration should be different from the calibration for G-SIIs, and whether its calibration should depend on the level of systemic importance of the institution;
#### (b) whether the coverage and the possible degrees of overlap between different macroprudential tools for targeting similar risks in this Regulation and in Directive 2013/36/EU are adequate and, if appropriate, propose new macroprudential rules;
##### (c) how internationally agreed standards for systemic institutions interact with the provisions in this Regulation and in Directive 2013/36/EU and, if appropriate, propose new rules taking into account those internationally agreed standards;
#### (d) whether other types of instruments, such as borrower-based instruments, should be added to the macroprudential tools provided for in this Regulation and in Directive 2013/36/EU to complement capital-based instruments and to allow for the harmonised use of the instruments in the internal market; taking into account whether harmonised definitions of those instruments and the reporting of respective data at Union level are a prerequisite for the introduction of such instruments;
##### (e) whether the leverage ratio buffer requirement as referred to in Article 92(1a) should be extended to systemically important institutions other than G-SIIs, whether its calibration should be different from the calibration for G-SIIs, and whether its calibration should depend on the level of systemic importance of the institution;
#### (f) whether the current voluntary reciprocity of macroprudnetial measures should be turned into mandatory reciprocity and whether the current ESRB framework for voluntary reciprocity is an appropriate basis for that;
##### (g) how relevant Union and national macroprudential authorities can be mandated with tools to address new emerging systemic risks arising from credit institutions exposures to the non-banking sector, in particular from derivatives and securities financing transactions markets, the asset management sector and the insurance sector.
#### Article 514
##### Method for the calculation of the exposure value of derivative transactions
#### Article 515
##### Monitoring and evaluation
Article 516
#### Long-term financing
##### By 31 December 2015, the Commission shall report on the impact of this Regulation on the encouragement of long-term investments in growth promoting infrastructure.
Article 517
#### Definition of eligible capital
##### By 31 December 2014, the Commission shall review, and report on, the appropriateness of the definition of eligible capital being applied for the purposes of Title III of Part Two and Part Four and shall submit that report to the European Parliament and the Council, and, if appropriate, a legislative proposal.
Article 518
#### Review of capital instruments which may be written down or converted at the point of non-viability
##### By 31 December 2015, the Commission shall review, and report on, whether this Regulation should contain a requirement that Additional Tier 1 or Tier 2 capital instruments are to be written down in the event of a determination that an institution is no longer viable. The Commission shall submit that report to the European Parliament and the Council, together with a legislative proposal, if appropriate.
Article 514
#### Method for the calculation of the exposure value of derivative transactions
##### Article 515
Monitoring and evaluation
#### Article 516
##### Long-term financing
By 31 December 2015, the Commission shall report on the impact of this Regulation on the encouragement of long-term investments in growth promoting infrastructure.
#### Article 517
##### Definition of eligible capital
By 31 December 2014, the Commission shall review, and report on, the appropriateness of the definition of eligible capital being applied for the purposes of Title III of Part Two and Part Four and shall submit that report to the European Parliament and the Council, and, if appropriate, a legislative proposal.
#### Article 518
##### Review of capital instruments which may be written down or converted at the point of non-viability
By 31 December 2015, the Commission shall review, and report on, whether this Regulation should contain a requirement that Additional Tier 1 or Tier 2 capital instruments are to be written down in the event of a determination that an institution is no longer viable. The Commission shall submit that report to the European Parliament and the Council, together with a legislative proposal, if appropriate.
Article 518a
#### Review of cross-default provisions
##### By 28 June 2022, the Commission shall review and assess whether it is appropriate to require that eligible liabilities may be bailed-in without triggering cross-default clauses in other contracts, with a view to reinforcing as much as possible the effectiveness of the bail-in tool and to assessing whether a no-cross-default provision referring to eligible liabilities should be included in the terms or contracts governing other liabilities. Where appropriate, that review and assessment shall be accompanied by a legislative proposal.
Article 518b
Report on overshootings and supervisory powers to limit distributions
Review of cross-default provisions
By 28 June 2022, the Commission shall review and assess whether it is appropriate to require that eligible liabilities may be bailed-in without triggering cross-default clauses in other contracts, with a view to reinforcing as much as possible the effectiveness of the bail-in tool and to assessing whether a no-cross-default provision referring to eligible liabilities should be included in the terms or contracts governing other liabilities. Where appropriate, that review and assessment shall be accompanied by a legislative proposal.
#### Article 518b
##### Report on overshootings and supervisory powers to limit distributions
By 31 December 2021, the Commission shall report to the European Parliament and to the Council on whether exceptional circumstances that trigger serious economic disturbance in the orderly functioning and integrity of financial markets justify:
@@ -13719,9 +15309,9 @@
Deduction of defined benefit pension fund assets from Common Equity Tier 1 items
#### By 30 June 2014, EBA shall prepare a report on whether the revised IAS 19 in conjunction with the deduction of net pension assets as set out in Article 36(1)(e) and changes in the net pension liabilities lead to undue volatility of institutions' own funds.
##### Taking into account the EBA report, the Commission shall by, 31 December 2014 prepare a report for the European Parliament and the Council on the issue referred to in the first paragraph, together with a legislative proposal, if appropriate, to introduce a treatment which adjusts defined net benefit pension fund assets or liabilities for the calculation of own funds.
By 30 June 2014, EBA shall prepare a report on whether the revised IAS 19 in conjunction with the deduction of net pension assets as set out in Article 36(1)(e) and changes in the net pension liabilities lead to undue volatility of institutions' own funds.
Taking into account the EBA report, the Commission shall by, 31 December 2014 prepare a report for the European Parliament and the Council on the issue referred to in the first paragraph, together with a legislative proposal, if appropriate, to introduce a treatment which adjusts defined net benefit pension fund assets or liabilities for the calculation of own funds.
Article 519a
@@ -13729,45 +15319,47 @@
By 1 January 2022, the Commission shall report to the European Parliament and the Council on the application of the provisions in Chapter 5 of Title II of Part Three in the light of developments in securitisation markets, including from a macroprudential and economic perspective. That report shall, if appropriate, be accompanied by a legislative proposal and shall, in particular, assess the following points:
(a) the impact of the hierarchy of methods set out in Article 254 and of the calculation of the risk-weighted exposure amounts of securitisation positions set out in Articles 258 to 266 on issuance and investment activity by institutions in securitisation markets in the Union;
(b) the effects on the financial stability of the Union and Member States, with a particular focus on potential immovable property market speculation and increased interconnection between financial institutions;
(c) what measures would be warranted to reduce and counter any negative effects of securitisation on financial stability while preserving its positive effect on financing, including the possible introduction of a maximum limit on exposure to securitisations; and
#### (d) the effects on the ability of financial institutions to provide a sustainable and stable funding channel to the real economy, with particular attention to SMEs.
#### (a) the impact of the hierarchy of methods set out in Article 254 and of the calculation of the risk-weighted exposure amounts of securitisation positions set out in Articles 258 to 266 on issuance and investment activity by institutions in securitisation markets in the Union;
##### (b) the effects on the financial stability of the Union and Member States, with a particular focus on potential immovable property market speculation and increased interconnection between financial institutions;
## (c) what measures would be warranted to reduce and counter any negative effects of securitisation on financial stability while preserving its positive effect on financing, including the possible introduction of a maximum limit on exposure to securitisations; and
### (d) the effects on the ability of financial institutions to provide a sustainable and stable funding channel to the real economy, with particular attention to SMEs; and
#### (e) how environmental sustainability criteria could be integrated into the securitisation framework, including for exposures to NPE securitisations.
##### The report shall also take into account regulatory developments in international fora, in particular those relating to international standards on securitisation.
## Article 519b
### Own funds requirements for market risk
#### TITLE IIA
##### **IMPLEMENTATION OF RULES**
Article 519c
Compliance tool
The tool referred to in paragraph 1 shall at least enable each institution to:
## (a) rapidly identify the relevant provisions to comply with in relation to the institution's size and business model;
### (b) follow the changes made in legislative acts and in the related implementing provisions, guidelines and templates.
#### TITLE III
##### AMENDMENTS
Article 520
Amendment of Regulation (EU) No 648/2012
Regulation (EU) No 648/2012 is amended as follows:
(1) the following Chapter is added in Title IV:
Article 519b
Own funds requirements for market risk
TITLE IIA
## **IMPLEMENTATION OF RULES**
### Article 519c
#### Compliance tool
##### The tool referred to in paragraph 1 shall at least enable each institution to:
(a) rapidly identify the relevant provisions to comply with in relation to the institution's size and business model;
(b) follow the changes made in legislative acts and in the related implementing provisions, guidelines and templates.
TITLE III
AMENDMENTS
## Article 520
### Amendment of Regulation (EU) No 648/2012
#### Regulation (EU) No 648/2012 is amended as follows:
##### (1) the following Chapter is added in Title IV:
‘CHAPTER 4
Calculations and reporting for the purposes of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013
Article 50a
@@ -13775,7 +15367,7 @@
1. For the purposes of Article 308 of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 June 2013 on prudential requirements for credit institutions and investment firms (<sup>*1</sup>), a CCP shall calculate KCCP as specified in paragraph 2 of this Article for all contracts and transactions it clears for all its clearing members falling within the coverage of the given default fund.
2. A CCP shall calculate the hypothetical capital (KCCP) as follows:
## where:
where:
EBRMi
=
exposure value before risk mitigation that is equal to the exposure value of the CCP to clearing member i arising from all the contracts and transactions with that clearing member, calculated without taking into account the collateral posted by that clearing member;
@@ -13818,7 +15410,7 @@
(i) stop calculating KCCP;
(ii) notify those of its clearing members which are institutions and their competent authorities that it has stopped calculating KCCP;
### (l) where a CCP has more than one default fund, it shall carry out the calculation laid down in Article 50a(2) for each default fund separately.
(l) where a CCP has more than one default fund, it shall carry out the calculation laid down in Article 50a(2) for each default fund separately.
Article 50c
Reporting of information
1. For the purposes of Article 308 of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, a CCP shall report the following information to those of its clearing members which are institutions and to their competent authorities:
@@ -13840,7 +15432,7 @@
For the purposes of Article 50c, the following shall apply:
(a) where the rules of a CCP provide that it use part or all of its financial resources in parallel to the pre-funded contributions of its clearing members in a manner that makes those resources equivalent to pre-funded contributions of a clearing member in terms of how they absorb the losses incurred by the CCP in the case of the default or insolvency of one or more of its clearing members, the CCP shall add the corresponding amount of those resources to DFCM;
#### (c) a CCP shall calculate the concentration factor (β) in accordance with the following formula:
(c) a CCP shall calculate the concentration factor (β) in accordance with the following formula:
where:
PCEred,i
=
@@ -13852,7 +15444,7 @@
=
the reduced figure for potential future credit exposure for all contracts and transaction of a CCP with the clearing member that has the second largest PCEred value.
##### (2) in Article 11(15), point (b) is deleted;
(2) in Article 11(15), point (b) is deleted;
(3) in Article 89, the following paragraph is inserted:
‘5a.
@@ -13861,7 +15453,7 @@
Until the deadlines defined in the first two subparagraphs of this paragraph, and subject to the fourth subparagraph of this paragraph, where a CCP neither has a default fund nor has in place a binding arrangement with its clearing members that allows it to use all or part of the initial margin received from its clearing members as if they were pre-funded contributions, the information it is to report in accordance with Article 50c(1) shall include the total amount of initial margin it has received from its clearing members.
The deadlines referred to in the first and second subparagraphs of this paragraph may be extended by six months in accordance with a Commission implementing act adopted pursuant to Article 497(3) of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013.’ .
PART ELEVEN
## PART ELEVEN
FINAL PROVISIONS
@@ -13869,7 +15461,7 @@
Entry into force and date of application
## This Regulation shall apply from 1 January 2014, with the exception of:
This Regulation shall apply from 1 January 2014, with the exception of:
(a) Article 8(3), Article 21 and Article 451(1), which shall apply from 1 January 2015;
@@ -13891,7 +15483,7 @@
(c) acceptances;
(d) endorsements on bills not bearing the name of another institution;
(d) endorsements on bills not bearing the name of another institution or investment firm;
(e) transactions with recourse (e.g. factoring, invoice discount facilities);
@@ -13909,7 +15501,7 @@
2.Medium risk:
(a) trade finance off-balance sheet items, namely documentary credits issued or confirmed (see also ‘Medium/low risk’);
## (a) trade finance off-balance sheet items, namely documentary credits issued or confirmed (see also ‘Medium/low risk’);
(b) other off-balance sheet items:
(i) shipping guarantees, customs and tax bonds;
@@ -13924,7 +15516,7 @@
(ii) warranties (including tender and performance bonds and associated advance payment and retention guarantees) and guarantees not having the character of credit substitutes;
(iii) irrevocable standby letters of credit not having the character of credit substitutes;
## (b) other off-balance sheet items:
(b) other off-balance sheet items:
(i) undrawn credit facilities which comprise agreements to lend, purchase securities, provide guarantees or acceptance facilities with an original maturity of up to and including one year which may not be cancelled unconditionally at any time without notice or that do not effectively provide for automatic cancellation due to deterioration in a borrower's creditworthiness;
(ii) other items also carrying medium/low risk and as communicated to EBA.
@@ -13950,9 +15542,9 @@
(d) interest-rate futures;
(e) interest-rate options purchased;
(f) other contracts of similar nature.
(e) interest-rate options;
## (f) other contracts of similar nature.
2.Foreign-exchange contracts and contracts concerning gold:
@@ -13960,15 +15552,15 @@
(b) forward foreign-exchange contracts;
## (c) currency futures;
(d) currency options purchased;
(c) currency futures;
(d) currency options;
(e) other contracts of a similar nature;
(f) contracts of a nature similar to (a) to (e) concerning gold.
3.Contracts of a nature similar to those in points 1(a) to (e) and 2(a) to (d) of this Annex concerning other reference items or indices. This includes as a minimum all instruments specified in points 4 to 7, 9 and 10 of Section C of Annex I to Directive 2004/39/EC not otherwise included in point 1 or 2 of this Annex.
3.Contracts of a nature similar to those in points 1(a) to (e) and 2(a) to (d) of this Annex concerning other reference items or indices. This includes as a minimum all instruments specified in points (4) to (7), (9), (10) and (11) of Section C of Annex I to Directive 2014/65/EU not otherwise included in point 1 or 2 of this Annex.
ANNEX III
@@ -13982,7 +15574,7 @@
(a) they are assigned a 0 % risk-weight under Chapter 2, Title II of Part Three;
(b) they are not an obligation of an institution or any of its affiliated entities.
(b) they are not an obligation of an institution or investment firm or any of its affiliated entities.
4.Transferable securities other than those referred to in point 3 representing claims on or claims guaranteed by sovereigns or central banks issued in domestic currencies by the sovereign or central bank in the currency and country in which the liquidity risk is being taken or issued in foreign currencies, to the extent that holding of such debt matches the liquidity needs of the bank's operations in that third country.
@@ -13990,27 +15582,27 @@
(a) they are assigned a 20 % risk-weight under Chapter 2, Title II of Part Three;
(b) they are not an obligation of an institution or any of its affiliated entities.
(b) they are not an obligation of an institution or investment firm or any of its affiliated entities.
6.Transferable securities other than those referred to in points 3, 4 and 5 that qualify for a 20 % or better risk weight under Chapter 2, Title II of Part Three or are internally rated as having an equivalent credit quality, and fulfil any of the following conditions:
(a) they do not represent a claim on an SSPE, an institution or any of its affiliated entities;
(a) they do not represent a claim on an SSPE, an institution or investment firm or any of its affiliated entities;
(b) they are bonds eligible for the treatment set out in Article 129(4) or (5);
(c) they are bonds as referred to in Article 52(4) of Directive 2009/65/EC other than those referred to in point (b) of this point.
7.Transferable securities other than those referred to in points 3 to 6 that qualify for a 50 % or better risk weight under Chapter 2, Title II of Part Three or are internally rated as having an equivalent credit quality, and do not represent a claim on an SSPE, an institution or any of its affiliated entities.
8.Transferable securities other than those referred to in points 3 to 7 that are collateralised by assets that qualify for a 35 % or better risk weight under Chapter 2, Title II of Part Three or are internally rated as having an equivalent credit quality, and are fully and completely secured by mortgages on residential property in accordance with Article 125.
7.Transferable securities other than those referred to in points 3 to 6 that qualify for a 50 % or better risk weight under Chapter 2 of Title II of Part Three or are internally rated as having an equivalent credit quality, and do not represent a claim on an SSPE, an institution or investment firm or any of its affiliated entities.
## 8.Transferable securities other than those referred to in points 3 to 7 that are collateralised by assets that qualify for a 35 % or better risk weight under Chapter 2, Title II of Part Three or are internally rated as having an equivalent credit quality, and are fully and completely secured by mortgages on residential property in accordance with Article 125.
9.Standby credit facilities granted by central banks within the scope of monetary policy to the extent that these facilities are not collateralised by liquid assets and excluding emergency liquidity assistance.
10.Legal or statutory minimum deposits with the central credit institution and other statutory or contractually available liquid funding from the central credit institution or institutions that are members of the network referred to in Article 113(7), or eligible for the waiver provided in Article 10, to the extent that this funding is not collateralised by liquid assets, if the credit institution belongs to a network in accordance with legal or statutory provisions.
11.Exchange traded, centrally cleared common equity shares, that are a constituent of a major stock index, denominated in the domestic currency of the Member State and not issued by an institution or any of its affiliates.
## 12.Gold listed on a recognised exchange, held on an allocated basis.
11.Exchange traded, centrally cleared common equity shares that are a constituent of a major stock index, denominated in the domestic currency of the Member State and not issued by an institution or investment firm or any of its affiliates.
12.Gold listed on a recognised exchange, held on an allocated basis.
All items with the exception of those referred to in points 1, 2 and 9 must satisfy all of the following conditions:
@@ -15353,52 +16945,58 @@
(<sup>3</sup>) Council Regulation (EU) No 1024/2013 of 15 October 2013 conferring specific tasks on the European Central Bank concerning policies relating to the prudential supervision of credit institutions (OJ L 287, 29.10.2013, p. 63).
(<sup>4</sup>) OJ L 335, 17.12.2009, p. 1.
(<sup>5</sup>) Directive 2009/65/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 13 July 2009 on the coordination of laws, regulations and administrative provisions relating to undertakings for collective investment in transferable securities (UCITS) (OJ L 302, 17.11.2009, p. 32).
(<sup>6</sup>) Directive 2011/61/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 8 June 2011 on Alternative Investment Fund Managers and amending Directives 2003/41/EC and 2009/65/EC and Regulations (EC) No 1060/2009 and (EU) No 1095/2010 (OJ L 174, 1.7.2011, p. 1).
(<sup>7</sup>) Regulation (EU) 2017/2402 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 12 December 2017 laying down a general framework for securitisation and creating a specific framework for simple, transparent and standardised securitisation, and amending Directives 2009/65/EC, 2009/138/EC, 2011/61/EU and Regulations (EC) No 1060/2009 and (EU) No 648/2012 (OJ L 347, 28.12.2017, p. 35).
(<sup>8</sup>) Directive (EU) 2015/2366 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 25 November 2015 on payment services in the internal market, amending Directives 2002/65/EC, 2009/110/EC and 2013/36/EU and Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010, and repealing Directive 2007/64/EC (OJ L 337, 23.12.2015, p. 35).
(<sup>9</sup>) OJ L 222, 14.8.1978, p. 11.
(<sup>10</sup>) Directive 2014/65/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 15 May 2014 on markets in financial instruments and amending Directive 2002/92/EC and Directive 2011/61/EU (OJ L 173, 12.6.2014, p. 349).
(<sup>11</sup>) OJ L 302, 17.11.2009, p. 1.
(<sup>12</sup>) Directive 2013/34/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 June 2013 on the annual financial statements, consolidated financial statements and related reports of certain types of undertakings, amending Directive 2006/43/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council and repealing Council Directives 78/660/EEC and 83/349/EEC (OJ L 182, 29.6.2013, p. 19).
(<sup>13</sup>) Directive 2004/109/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 15 December 2004 on the harmonisation of transparency requirements in relation to information about issuers whose securities are admitted to trading on a regulated market and amending Directive 2001/34/EC (OJ L 390, 31.12.2004, p. 38).
(<sup>14</sup>) OJ L 331, 15.12.2010, p. 48.
(<sup>15</sup>) OJ L 331, 15.12.2010, p. 84.
(<sup>16</sup>) Directive 2014/49/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 16 April 2014 on deposit guarantee schemes (OJ L 173, 12.6.2014, p. 149).
(<sup>17</sup>) Directive 98/26/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 19 May 1998 on settlement finality in payment and securities settlement systems (OJ L 166, 11.6.1998, p. 45).
(<sup>18</sup>) OJ L 141, 11.6.1993, p. 1.
(<sup>19</sup>) OJ L 250, 2.10.2003, p. 10.
(<sup>20</sup>) OJ L 135, 31.5.1994, p. 5.
(<sup>21</sup>) Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) No 680/2014 of 16 April 2014 laying down implementing technical standards with regard to supervisory reporting of institutions according to Regulation (EU) No 575/2013 of the European Parliament and of the Council (OJ L 191, 28.6.2014, p. 1).
(<sup>22</sup>) OJ C 119, 25.4.2013, p. 1.
(<sup>23</sup>) OJ L 3, 7.1.2004, p. 36.
(<sup>24</sup>) Commission Regulation (EC) No 1126/2008 of 3 November 2008 adopting certain international accounting standards in accordance with Regulation (EC) No 1606/2002 of the European Parliament and of the Council (OJ L 320, 29.11.2008, p. 1).
(<sup>25</sup>) Commission Regulation (EU) No 1205/2011 of 22 November 2011 amending Regulation (EC) No 1126/2008 adopting certain international accounting standards in accordance with Regulation (EC) No 1606/2002 of the European Parliament and of the Council as regards International Financial Reporting Standard (IFRS) 7 (OJ L 305, 23.11.2011, p. 16).
(<sup>26</sup>) Directive 2004/39/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 21 April 2004 on markets in financial instruments amending Council Directives 85/611/EEC and 93/6/EEC and Directive 2000/12/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council and repealing Council Directive 93/22/EEC (OJ L 145, 30.4.2004, p. 1).
(<sup>27</sup>) Commission Recommendation 2003/361/EC of 6 May 2003 concerning the definition of micro, small and medium-sized enterprises (OJ L 124, 20.5.2003, p. 36).;
(<sup>4</sup>) Regulation (EU) 2019/2033 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 November 2019 on the prudential requirements of investment firms and amending Regulations (EU) No 1093/2010, (EU) No 575/2013, (EU) No 600/2014 and (EU) No 806/2014 (OJ L 314, 5.12.2019, p. 1).
(<sup>5</sup>) Directive (EU) 2019/2034 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 November 2019 on the prudential supervision of investment firms and amending Directives 2002/87/EC, 2009/65/EC, 2011/61/EU, 2013/36/EU, 2014/59/EU and 2014/65/EU (OJ L 314, 5.12.2019, p. 64).
(<sup>6</sup>) Directive 2014/65/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 15 May 2014 on markets in financial instruments and amending Directive 2002/92/EC and Directive 2011/61/EU (OJ L 173, 12.6.2014, p. 349).
(<sup>7</sup>) OJ L 335, 17.12.2009, p. 1.
(<sup>8</sup>) Directive 2009/65/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 13 July 2009 on the coordination of laws, regulations and administrative provisions relating to undertakings for collective investment in transferable securities (UCITS) (OJ L 302, 17.11.2009, p. 32).
(<sup>9</sup>) Directive 2011/61/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 8 June 2011 on Alternative Investment Fund Managers and amending Directives 2003/41/EC and 2009/65/EC and Regulations (EC) No 1060/2009 and (EU) No 1095/2010 (OJ L 174, 1.7.2011, p. 1).
(<sup>10</sup>) Regulation (EU) 2017/2402 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 12 December 2017 laying down a general framework for securitisation and creating a specific framework for simple, transparent and standardised securitisation, and amending Directives 2009/65/EC, 2009/138/EC, 2011/61/EU and Regulations (EC) No 1060/2009 and (EU) No 648/2012 (OJ L 347, 28.12.2017, p. 35).
(<sup>11</sup>) Directive (EU) 2015/2366 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 25 November 2015 on payment services in the internal market, amending Directives 2002/65/EC, 2009/110/EC and 2013/36/EU and Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010, and repealing Directive 2007/64/EC (OJ L 337, 23.12.2015, p. 35).
(<sup>12</sup>) OJ L 222, 14.8.1978, p. 11.
(<sup>13</sup>) OJ L 302, 17.11.2009, p. 1.
(<sup>14</sup>) Directive 2013/34/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 June 2013 on the annual financial statements, consolidated financial statements and related reports of certain types of undertakings, amending Directive 2006/43/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council and repealing Council Directives 78/660/EEC and 83/349/EEC (OJ L 182, 29.6.2013, p. 19).
(<sup>15</sup>) Directive 2004/109/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 15 December 2004 on the harmonisation of transparency requirements in relation to information about issuers whose securities are admitted to trading on a regulated market and amending Directive 2001/34/EC (OJ L 390, 31.12.2004, p. 38).
(<sup>16</sup>) Regulation (EU) No 909/2014 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 23 July 2014 on improving securities settlement in the European Union and on central securities depositories and amending Directives 98/26/EC and 2014/65/EU and Regulation (EU) No 236/2012 (OJ L 257, 28.8.2014, p. 1).
(<sup>17</sup>) OJ L 331, 15.12.2010, p. 48.
(<sup>18</sup>) OJ L 331, 15.12.2010, p. 84.
(<sup>19</sup>) Directive 2014/49/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 16 April 2014 on deposit guarantee schemes (OJ L 173, 12.6.2014, p. 149).
(<sup>20</sup>) Directive 98/26/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 19 May 1998 on settlement finality in payment and securities settlement systems (OJ L 166, 11.6.1998, p. 45).
(<sup>21</sup>) OJ L 250, 2.10.2003, p. 10.
(<sup>22</sup>) OJ L 135, 31.5.1994, p. 5.
(<sup>23</sup>) Directive 2008/48/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 23 April 2008 on credit agreements for consumers and repealing Council Directive 87/102/EEC (OJ L 133, 22.5.2008, p. 66).
(<sup>24</sup>) Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) No 680/2014 of 16 April 2014 laying down implementing technical standards with regard to supervisory reporting of institutions according to Regulation (EU) No 575/2013 of the European Parliament and of the Council (OJ L 191, 28.6.2014, p. 1).
(<sup>25</sup>) Regulation (EU) 2016/679 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 April 2016 on the protection of natural persons with regard to the processing of personal data and on the free movement of such data, and repealing Directive 95/46/EC (General Data Protection Regulation) (OJ L 119, 4.5.2016, p. 1).
(<sup>26</sup>) OJ L 3, 7.1.2004, p. 36.
(<sup>27</sup>) Commission Regulation (EC) No 1126/2008 of 3 November 2008 adopting certain international accounting standards in accordance with Regulation (EC) No 1606/2002 of the European Parliament and of the Council (OJ L 320, 29.11.2008, p. 1).
(<sup>28</sup>) Commission Regulation (EU) No 1205/2011 of 22 November 2011 amending Regulation (EC) No 1126/2008 adopting certain international accounting standards in accordance with Regulation (EC) No 1606/2002 of the European Parliament and of the Council as regards International Financial Reporting Standard (IFRS) 7 (OJ L 305, 23.11.2011, p. 16).
(<sup>29</sup>) Directive 2004/39/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 21 April 2004 on markets in financial instruments amending Council Directives 85/611/EEC and 93/6/EEC and Directive 2000/12/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council and repealing Council Directive 93/22/EEC (OJ L 145, 30.4.2004, p. 1).
(<sup>30</sup>) Commission Recommendation 2003/361/EC of 6 May 2003 concerning the definition of micro, small and medium-sized enterprises (OJ L 124, 20.5.2003, p. 36).;
(<sup>*1</sup>) OJ L 176, 27.6.2013, p. 1.’;
2020-12-28
prudential requirements for credit institutions and investment firms an
2020-06-27
prudential requirements for credit institutions and investment firms an
2019-12-25
prudential requirements for credit institutions and investment firms an
2019-06-27
prudential requirements for credit institutions and investment firms an
2019-04-26
prudential requirements for credit institutions and investment firms an
2019-01-01
prudential requirements for credit institutions and investment firms an
2018-01-01
prudential requirements for credit institutions and investment firms an
2016-07-19
prudential requirements for credit institutions and investment firms an
2015-01-18
prudential requirements for credit institutions and investment firms an
2013-06-28
prudential requirements for credit institutions and investment firms
original version Text at this date